a ; _ Bee ie) S308 P ser a HARVARD: UNIVERSITY. LIBRARY OF THE MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY. W499. Mithun N) me Ne aes AAS: \ X Le itt 0) GML Ae a POLn ee u + by Pn bee. i a ya . | j TRANSACTIONS GybL OF THE VOL. XIV. “4894-1895. EDITED BY THE RECORDING SECRETARY. PUBLISHED FOR THE ACADEMY. . NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, ss ie : ’ | | ; | | | t } } } | | | / | NOV 25 1895 TABLE OF CONTENTS. VoLuME XIV. Papers read before the Academy and published in this volume. _A list of those read and not published, or read only by title, ap- pears below. PROF. BOHUSLAV BRAUNER. PAGE. Gne PlMOpPLUM BALES. poston cacwc cess. ae sh akae Sade cokes cbaeeeeedotvscees Rae sc 1 PROF. N. L. BRITTON AND T. H. KEARNY, JR. An Enumeration of the Plants collected by Dr. Timothy E. Wilcox, U. S. A., and others in Southeastern Arizona, 1892-1894................... 21 GARY N. CALKINS. Observations on the Yolk-Nucleus in the Eggs of Lumbricus............... 222 HERMAN S. DAVIS. The Methods Employed in Deducing Definitive Declinations and Proper Motions of fifty-six Stars, used in the investigation of the Variation Cbs Pathe. At COlaHi Dia GOMCIC., sc ccakancadevravaatecacasoderes+.+sueueaiee 68 HARRISON G. DYAR. Additional Notes on the Classification of Lepidopterous Larvee.............. 49 Notes on Certain Variations in the Biological Characters of Two Species OL BACEERID os ae: acters aes ssa csav cust nade ocees css Sssepeesceseancotessticsoscecnss ote 94 ARTHUR HOLLICK. Dislocations in Certain Portions of the Atlantic Coastal Plain Strata and GE pe Eel O Mes Oa USESsseracae cto scedwariewer sca taievs se tase cued oceeeperaetaeleesae sss 8 PROF. GEO. S. HUNTINGTON. The Significance of Muscular Variations, illustrated by reversions of the Aiki DIAC aia HeKOL OTOUPs .cccatca tizccss tetera actos croercseceedesees swe deaun snes 231 PROF. J. F. KEMP. The Geological Section exhibited by the new Tunnel under the East MU GRR CUE SHEE RUNGE Macintechoeatciss teccstog See ie Ve: 3K 117-42 24°60 B4:bT ABS — Pb... :206°9 43°35 43.41 43°36 43°35 — — SE ccd 5220 31°84 — 31.23 — 381.65 — | egies 2 I 0:21 — — — — 0.22 477°32 100-00 The analysis shows that the substance contains no oxygen. The crystallographic examination of the salt was, in so far of theoretical interest,as Marignac has described a perfectly anal- ogous compound of quadrivalent tin, namely 3K F.HF.SnF,, for it shows that both salts are isomorphous. The crystals were examined by Prof. Ch. Vrba of our University, but unfortun- ately their faces are uneven and corroded, so that no absolutely exact crystallographic and optical examination could be made. Assuming the monoclinic symmetry as has been assumed by Marignac for the fluostannate, the elements are approximately : 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 3 a:b: c = 0°6223: 1: 04818 and 8 = 86° 41’. The forms observed are: m (110) oP; b (010) » Po; p (111) — P; = (111) P; the same forms have been observed by Marignac and in addition to them c (001) oP was found by him. The angles calculated from the above axial relations for the normals of the planes are given below together with the inclinations observed and Marignac’s values of the analogous fluostannate are a pended for comparison : Marignac for Calculated. “Found. 3 KF. HF. Sn F,. m (110): m/ (110) Gos G3O1397 64° 8/ b (010) pa F589) 57 54 paciiel) ——— a Abie p (Il): p? (111) eee 40 37 40 49 B ae 69 41 69 45 pant he: Tap GLA soa (L EL} 42 45 41 15 43 12 55 (010) 68 37 69 31 aaa The salt is stable in dry air but turns brown in moist air, being decomposed by water in the following manner: 3KF. HF. PbF, 4+nH,O—PbO.H,O+3KF. HF+HF-+(n- 3)H,0. The reaction is reversible, for the hydrated dioxide separated first is dissolved by hydrofluoric acid and acid potassium fluor- ide, and consequently complete decomposition takes place only in presence of a large quantity of water. The above reaction was used only for the analysis of the salt. It was also proved that on decomposition with water, 5 mols. HF are set free, for 100 pts. of the salt yielded in this way 20°77 pts. HF. instead of the calculated quantity of 20°95 pts. ‘HE. The weight of the salt remains absolutely constant even when heated at 100-100° for many hours. At 200° hydrogen fluor- ide begins to escape, the loss amounting to 1:72 p.c. At 250° the loss was 5°43 p. ¢., showing that 1:24 p. e. of the total of 7.96 p. c. of the available quantity of ‘‘active”’ fluoride has been given off. In order to study the behaviour of the salt at a eaten tem- perature some of the salt was placed in a small platizum tube closed at one end and dried for several hours at 230-250.° The closed end of the tube was heated then with a Bunsen flame. Long before the tube became red hot a gas began to be evolved having the characteristic odour of fluorine and liberating iodine in crystals from potassium iodide paper held at the exit of the gas. Fumes of hydrofluoric acid issued from the nose after 4 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oor Le inhaling and exhaling the gas. Some small crystals of silicon were placed in the open end of the tube, and when the closed end of the tube was heated the silicon burnt with vivid incandes- cence and even with explosive violence (Moissan’s test for fluor- ine). The residue is white or slightly yellow but care must be taken to exclude moisture, for when water vapour comes into contact with the heated salt, hardly any fiuorine is given off, and a brown deliquescent residue is left. This experiment has been repeated several times, and it con- firms the accuracy of the results obtained by me 13 years ago, viz.: that fluorine may be obtained on heating some higher fluorides. Although Moissan has since then obtained free fluorine by a physical method, we have here the first trust- worthy chemical process of obtaining this gas. If potassium fluoplumbate loses its hydrogen fluoride at about 230° without losing more than traces of fluorine, one gram of the salt should yield on heating 47 c¢. c. of fluorine which could be freed from any hydrogen fluoride present by passing it over potassium fluoride, according to Moissan. Qualitative experiments have shown that a whole series of fluoplumbates exist, the metals forming them being the same as those in Marignac’s series of fluostannates, but unfortun- ately the work is connected with great experimental difficulties, for some of the salts are decomposed by moisture as soon as. they are taken out of the mother liquor. FLUOPLUMBIC ACID AND LEAD TETRAFLUORIDE. Fluoplumbic acid is obtained either on dissolving some forms of hydrated lead dioxide in hydrofluoric acid or on dissolving lead tetra-acetate in strong hydrofluoric acid, acetic acid being liberated in this case, for on adding soluble fluorides to this solution it gives the corresponding fluoplumbates. This solu- tion, however, cannot be evaporated to dryness, even at the ordinary temperature, a crust of the brown lead dioxide being deposited. In order to prepare anhydrous lead tetrafluoride potassium fluoplumbate was reduced to a fine powder in a platinum basin, using a small platinum crucible as a pestle; a dry agate mortar cannot be used, for in contact with silica the salt gives silicon tetrafloride, water being formed which at once decomposes the salt. The powdered salt (0.874 grm.) was then thrown on the surface of cold, concentrated sulphuric acid (5 ce.). Hydrogen fluoride at once escapes and a pale yellow solution is obtained, having the same characteristic color as that of lead tetrachlo- 1894) NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 5 ride, which was isolated by Friedrich in this laboratory. Dense fumes soon begin to come off, having an extremely pungent smell which resembles that of free fluorine. They seem to contain some gaseous lead tetrafluoride. After the salt has completely dissolved in the acid: 3K F.HF.PbF,+3H,SO,— 4HF+3KHSO,+PbF,, the clear yellow liquid begins to get turbid, and after half an hour or so it is converted into a thick lemon-yellow jelly. From this emulsion, which probably con- tains the collodial modification of lead tetrafluoride, the latter cannot be separated at the ordinary temperature. On heating the mass to 100°, some hydrofluoric acid escapes, and a heavy, lemon-yellow powder is deposited on the bottom of the crucible, this probably being another modification of lead tetrafluoride. The sulphuric acid could be easily poured off from the yellow precipitate, and it was found that the acid contains no lead in solution. _ The yellow powder could be washed with sulphuric acid by decantation, and no apparent change took place on heating the mixture to 100°. But as soon as it was heated to 115°, compléte decomposition took place and white lead sulphate was left at the bottom of crucible: PbF,+H,SO,—PbSO,+2HF+ F,(?). ‘ have not yet been able to isolate lead tetrafluoride, in spite of numerous attempts, as no liquid could be found which would displace the sulphuric acid without at the same time decompos- ing the tetrafluoride. Dry plates of plaster of Paris absorb the greater part of the acid, but not all, and after some time decom- position takes place and the brown dioxide is formed: PbF,+ 2H,O—PbO,+4HF. Hydrofluoric acid dissolves it partly and the solution contains fluoplumbic acid, for it liberates iodine from potassium iodide, ete. On comparing the properties of the incompletely studied lead tetrafluoride with those of lead tetrachloride, which I often had an opportunity of observing, as it was discovered by Friedrich in this laboratory, it will be seen that both substances are set free from their double salts by strong sulphuric acid, without being decomposed by it. The tetrachloride is a liquid, whilst the tetrafluoride seems to exist in several forms. I hope to be able to throw some light on the tetrafluoride of lead by a com- parative study of the anhydrous tetrafluoride of tin. LEAD DISULPHATE. Potassium fluoplumbate was dissolved in a very large excess of cold sulphuric acid so that even after several days no separa- 6 TRANSACTIONS OF THE foer i, tion of tetrafluoride took place. The clear, yellow liquid gave off dense fumes, smelling of fluorine, in large quantity. The solution was heated for several days in a covered crucible on the water bath, then allowed to stand in a dessicator and heated again, and this alternative process was repeated during several weeks. The solution was found to give off a smell of hydro- fluoric acid and an orange-yellow crystalline substance was separated slowly, but only after standing for about two months the solution became colourless and free from any dissolved tetrafluoride. After this time the solid orange-coloured sub- stance was washed with sulphuric acid by decantation. The acid was then poured off as completely as possible and the sub- stance was decomposed with water, when it yielded lead dioxide and a solution containing sulphuric acid but only a small quan- tity of hydrofluoric acid. The substance can be therefore only lead disulphate Pb (SO,),, analogous to Sn (SO,), and the formation requiring a very long time, must have taken place according to the following equation : PbF,+nH,8SO,—Pb(SO,),+4 HF+(n-2)H,S80,. The more the quadrivalent lead is studied, the greater becomes its analogy with quadrivalent tin and of course the existence of the substances described in the present paper gives additional confirmation to the position which lead occupies in Mendelejeff’s periodic system. Thirty years ago hardly anyone could have predicted that lead would form compounds analo- gous not only with those of tin, but also with those of silicon, titanium, ziconium, cerium and thorium. May, 1894. Prof. Hubbard exhibited some gnawed beaver sticks from the pond described by him last year (Trans., Vol. XIII., 115,177) and commented upon them. va Reports of summer work were then presented by the follow- ing members: Osborn, Britton, Martin, Hallock, van Ingen, Kemp, Cox, Pupin and Rees, after which the Academy adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 7 STATED MEETING. October 8th, 1894. The Section of Astronomy and Physics organized immediately with President Rees in the chair, and thirteen members and guests present. At the suggestion of President Rees, Prof. Mayer of Stevens Institute made a few remarks upon his summer experiences, especially in England at the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. He spoke quite fully of the discovery by Lord Rayleigh of a new substance in the air; its “preparation by two methods, and its properties. Remarks upon the subject were made by President Rees and Capt. Casey. The first paper of the evening was by President Rees, ‘“ Re- marks on the Observations for Variations of Latitude made at Columbia College and at the Royal Observatory at Naples.” President Rees detailed the preliminaries and negotiations which led to the inception of this work, and the general plans of the observations, as well as the details of manipulating the in- struments; giving also the method and principle of the calcula- tions and corrections. In all about 2400 pairs of stars were observed at each Observ- atory, during the 14 months covered by the original plan. The observations are, by mutual agreement, to be continued four nights in each two weeks, during the next two or three years. The calculations are not yet completed, but point to an ex- treme variation of about 0’’.35 as a first approximation, with a probable error of one evening’s work of 0’’.07. The paper was discussed by Capt. Casey, Prof. Mayer and others. The second paper was also by President Rees on, ‘‘ The Meas- uring Apparatus for Astronomical Photographs, made by Rep- sold & Sons of Hamburg, and presented to the Columbia Col- 8 TRANSACTIONS OF THE loon: 15; lege Observatory by Rutherford Stuyvesant, Esq.” The appar- atus was exhibited and explained, and those interested made a close examination of it beauties and conveniences. On motion the meeting adjourned. Wm. HaAtuock, Secretary of Section. STATED MEETING. October 15th, 1894. The Section of Geology and Mineralogy immediately organ- ized. Prof. R. P. Whitfield, Chairman of the Section, presiding. Fourteen persons present. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The first paper of the evening was DISLOCATIONS IN CERTAIN PORTIONS OF THE ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN STRATA AND THEIR PROBABLE CAUSES. (Fries. 1-5.) By Artuur HOottick. The paper was illustrated by charts and diagrams. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. In the preparation of this paper it was assumed that the fol- lowing general propositions might be taken for granted : 1. That mountain chains consist principally of sedimentary rocks, originally laid down as deposits along continental borders or inland seas and subsequently crumpled and up- heaved by horizontal pressure. 2. That there is a general parallelism and successive forma- tion of ranges in any one region; the successive formation pro- . ceeding coastward. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 9 3. That the crumpling takes place along the line of greatest stress or weakness, 7. e., along the major axis of the area of deposition. The question which this paper is designed to present and discuss is what indications are there of crumpling, upheaval, or any other phenomena identical with or simulating mountain making processes in the Atlantic coastal plain region and whether they may be better accounted for on the theory of mountain making as previously outlined, or upon some other hypothesis. From the character of the material which enters into the composition of the strata forming the coastal plain and from their succession and the organic remains contained in them, we know that there was a transition from fresh or brackish water to marine conditions, and that the area of deposition was probably a shallow syncline or trough, with its major axis prac- tically parallel with the present coast line, that is in a north and south, or somewhat northeast and southwest direction. With the great vertical fluctuations in level which are recog- nized as having taken place since the eocene we need not con- cern ourselves, as they practically affected all parts of the region alike. It is merely in regard to local disturbances, anal- ogous to mountain making processes, that this paper has to do. PRINCIPAL LINES OF DISTURBANCE, AND THEORIES WHICH HAVE BEEN ADVANCED IN REGARD TO THEM. Indications of faulting or folding have been mentioned by several observers in the Southern States, notably by W. H. Dall in Florida * and in all the observations the facts point to a system of folding or dislocation in a general north and south direction, as our previous experience would naturally cause us to expect. Further north, extending from Nantucket and Martha’s Vine- yard, through Block Island, Gardiner’s Island, Long Island, Staten Island and northern New Jersey we find another line or area of disturbance, having a general east and west direction. The facts, however, in connection with this area are so different from those with which we are familiar-elsewhere in America, that but for the circumstance of one isolated portion having been utilized by a prominent authority as an example of moun- tain making forces, it would not have occurred to me to discuss it in such connection. Prof. N.S. Shaler, in his ‘‘ Report on the ee ““Notes.on the Geology of Florida,’’ Am. Journ. Sci. XXXIY. (1887) 161-170. - Bull. No. &, U.S. G. g., “Correlation Papers—Neocene.”’ 10 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 15, Geology of Martha’s Vineyard,’* argues for the hypothesis of mountain making forces in order to account for the distortions of the Cretaceous and Tertiary Strata on that island and has further reiterated his views in papers read before the Goole Society of America.+ During the time that Prof. Shaler was engaged in making his investigations on Martha’s Vineyard, I had been studying the phenomena of folding and upheaval represented in the coastal plain strata, in connection with the terminal moraine on Staten Island and Long Island, and the conclusion to which I was irresistibly driven was that these phenomena were to be ac- counted for on the theory of ice action alone, as first suggested by Dr. F. J. H. Merrill.{ From Prof. Shaler’s report I was also led to infer that a like explanation could be applied to the conditions found to exist on Martha's Vineyard, and the opinion expressed by Mr. Warren Upham in this connection § further strengthened the idea. These sto were publence by me in several papers rel and after a subsequent visit to Martha’s eyiiosad I became convinced of their correctness as applied to that locality also, and published my conclusions to that effect.{]- Further investigations made since then, on Long Island, Staten Island, Gardiner’s Island and in northern New Jersey, hive brought to light several new facts which seem to strengthen those previously made, and we are now in a Beas to state, as beyond question, that the line * Seventh Ann. Rept. U. S. G. S. (1885-86) 297-363. 71. ‘‘ Tertiary and pe TES ARE of Eastern Massachusetts,”’ Bull. Geol. Soe. Am. 1. (1890) 443-452. 2. “Pleistocene Distortions of the Atlantic Coast,” J. ¢. v. (1894) 199-202. t1, ‘‘On the Geology of Long Island,’”’ Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. iii. (1886) 341-364. Vide pp, 358, 359, ‘ “We find the stratified gravels, sands and clays upheaved by the lateral pressure of the ice sheet and thrown intoa series of marked folds at right angles to the line of glacial advance.’ 2, ‘On some dynamic effects of the ice sheet,”’ Proc. Am. Assn. Adv. Sci. xxxy. (1886) 298, 299, in describing the morainal ridges of Long Island, Block Island, Martha’s Vine- yard, ete., he says: ‘‘ They differ from moraines elsewhere in the fact that there is but little glacial drift on them and their elevation is almost everywhere dependent on the existence of anticlinal folds in the stratified beds which coincide with the morainal ridges. That these folds have been produced by the lateral thrust of the ice sheet we can- not doubt, since their general trend is at right angles to the direction of glacial motion * * * * * and they do not occur south of the southern range of morainal hills.” ‘‘Marine Shells and Fragments of Shells in the Till near Boston,’’ Am. Journ. Sci. EXXV li. (1889) 359, 372 Vide p. 370: “To such glacial thrust and uplifting I would attribute likewise the tilted condition of the beds forming the base of Sankoty Head and the elevation of the included layers of shells. More than this, I believe that the same cause will account for the elevation and folding of the w onderful section of steeply inclined Miocene strata which underlie the terminal moraine in Gay Head.” \ 1. “The Paleontology of the Cretaceous Formation on Staten Island,” Trans. N. Y., Acad. Sci. xi. (1892) 96-103. : 2. * Plant Distribution as a Factor in the Interpretation of Geological Phenomena, with Special Reference to Long Island and Vicinity,” Z. ¢., xii. (1893) 189-202. 4 ‘‘Observations on the Geology and Botany of Martha’s Vineyard,” /. ¢. xiii. (1893) 8-22. 1894. } NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 11 of disturbance is coincident with the line of the terminal moraine from Nantucket to northern New Jersey; that the phenomena of folding and crumpling in the strata of the coastal plain are only to be found where the moraine has advanced over some portion of the plain; and that these phenomena cease abruptly where the moraine bends away from or finally leaves the plain. It may perhaps appear unfair to assume that Prof. Shaler, having restricted his studies to Martha’s Vineyard,* would extend the theory which he has so ably advocated for that locality, so as to include Long Island and westward. On the other hand the opinions of the observers previously quoted are equally worthy of consideration, and it is certainly within the bounds of fairness that one who has not been restricted to a single locality, but has studied the region as a whole, should be allowed to say that the phenomena are identical from one ex- tremity of the region to the other, and that any theory advanced to account for them in one section must also account for them in every other.section. One series of cause and effect has been instrumental throughout,—either mountain making forces, ice action, or some other agency,—and inasmuch as the two men- tioned are the only ones which have been advocated we may confine ourselves to a discussion of these, and the relative claims which they have upon our confidence, considering them both on @ priori grounds and by actual weight of evidence. DISCUSSION OF FACTS IN CONNECTION WITH THE LINE OF THE TERMINAL MORAINE. Beginning with Martha’s Vineyard we may consider the facts there as types, on a more extended scale, of those elsewhere on the line of the moraine. The island consists essentially of a series of hills on the north, composed of a core of cretaceous and post-cretaceous strata, tilted and folded, flanked on the north and capped on the top by bowlder till, which gradually merges into water assorted material on the southern flanks and extends over the plains beyond. Most of the sections given in Prof. Shaler’s papers show this structure-admirably and render any further illustration of the locality unnecessary. I have, * Mem. Since the above was written, at the Brooklyn meeting of the Geological Society of America, Prof. Shaler was enabled to hear the argument and to briefly dis- cuss it. He stated that he had visited both Staten Island and northern New Jersey, and while admitting the possibility of ice action as the cause of crumpling and other disturbances in the plastic strata in these localities, could not admit its application to Martha’s Vineyard on account of his conviction that the topography of these hills had been determined in pre-glacial times. 12 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 15, however, introduced (see Fig. 1) an ideal section to serve as the general type of the morainal structure under discussion, with which these and sections from other localities may be compared. The Gay Head escarpment is unique, however, as it presents the most extensive section of the moraine from base to summit which we have anywhere exposed in the region. Fic. 1. IDEAL SECTION THROUGH THE TERMINAL MORAINE, Proceeding westward we find a similar structure to exist on Long Island, although the exposures are far more limited. Nevertheless, at Cold Spring (see Fig. 2), Northport and Glen lane in Eat MDL fase aba el Fig. 2, DistoRTED CLAYS AND SAND, Coup Sprine, Lone IsLanp. Cove, examples may be seen in miniature, and we have only to imagine Long Island separated into parts, by convenient north and south erosion channels, in order to reproduce indefinitely, Martha’s Vineyard, with Gay Head. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 15 On Staten Island the facts are even of greater interest and significance. The moraine crosses a portion of the coastal plain near the Narrows, thence bends northward and rests upon the archean axis and again enters upon the plain a few miles further west. I had long been familiar with the fact that beneath this latter portion of the moraine there exists a contorted series of gravels, sands and clays, comparable with those of Long Island, but it was not until about two years ago, when a deep cutting was made for the Staten Island Rapid Transit Railroad, through the moraine near the Narrows, that we were able to demonstrate the existence of a similar structure there.* At the extreme southwestern end of the Island and in the adjacent portion of New Jersey the evidences of distortion are not so manifest. Instead of violently crumpled folds there is a more undulatory structure to the core upon which the bowl- der till rests, as if it had suffered erosion or had been merely squeezed upward in places, the strata often retaining their nor- mal dip and strike, and portions of them are to be seen included in the till, as described by A. Helland} in regard to the brown coal strata at Teutschenthal, near Halle, Saxony, “ being some- times caught up and included en masse in the till.’’ In the vicinity of Kreischerville, Staten Island, this phenomenon is specially prominent, particularly where a mass of pure white . cretaceous clay is imbedded in the red bowlder till (see Fig. 3) I am inclined to attribute the lack of violent crumpling in this area to the fact that the ice advanced over this portion of the coastal plain from a comparatively level region, and therefore merely eroded it to a limited extent and slid over it, without plowing down to the depths which it did in those regions where it flowed over an escarpment of hard crystalline rock onto the inccherent strata of the plain, as in the case of Long Island Sound and eastward. It is also to be considered that but a very limited area of the coastal plain was reached by the ice in New Jersey and on Staten Island, so that the force of its advance and the weight of its mass must have been far less there than to the north of Long Island and Martha’s Vineyard, and the material for erosion much more limited. In other words, the greatest indications of disturbance are to be seen where the ice advanced over the greatest extent of coastal plain area. *“ Notes on the Geology of the New Railroad Cut at Arrochar.’’ Proc. Nat. Sci. Ass'n. S. I., June 10th, 1893. +‘‘Ueber die glacialen Bildungen ‘der Nord-Europiiischen Ebene,’”’ Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Geol. Gesellsch. x xxi. (1879) 63-106. 14 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 15, In this connection we also have a highly significant series of facts on Staten Island to which attention has not been previ- ously called. In that portion of the coastal plain area near the Narrows, upon which the moraine rests, the underlying strata are folded and tilted exactly as they are on Long Island and Martha’s Vineyard. Up to this point the evidences of disturbance have been continuous. As soon, however, as the line of the moraine leaves the plain and bends around over the archeean area all indications of disturbance cease absolutely, and the topography of the plain is as level and uniform as at any locality in New Jersey or on Long Island to the south of furthest ice advance- ment. Further than this, the signs of disturbance do not reap- pear until the line of the moraine is again met with on the plain. | Hy ney ui) ibid i ee oa pe ore Aili i | Fic. 3. CRETACEOUS CLAY INCLUDED IN BOWLDER TILL, KREISCHER- VILLE, STATEN ISLAND. Between these two points they are absolutely absent, and yet a glance at the region will convince any observer that had the ice advanced over this portion of the plain the phenomena of crumpled strata would have been continuous from one extremity of Staten Island to the other. This one little break seems to have been specially preserved as an object lesson in this con- nection. If there are any evidences of crumpling or folding in an east and west direction in connection with the moraine west of the coastal plain in New Jersey, or in the plain south of the mo- raine, I have yet to see them. Dr. N. L. Britton has mentioned to 1894. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 15 me the existence of a small but well marked fold, involving a displacement of two or three feet, in clay strata on the road between Sayerville and New Brunswick, but I failed to find it, after a trip to the locality with that special object in view. It may also perhaps be pertinent to remark in this connection that a* phenomenon which simulates the folding of plastic strata may often be seen where gneissic rock has decayed in place, but the two phenomena would not be confounded by anyone who had seen and studied both. As to the dip and strike of the disturbed strata, in the few localities where observations have been possible, I am forced to admit that they are too erratic to be of much stratagraphic value. They vary in the most eccentric manner, but there is a prevailing strike coinciding with the trend of the moraine, and Fic. 4. OVERTHRUST FOLD UNDER TERMINAL MORAINE, CLIFTON, STATEN ISLAND. the strata are either bent into overthrust folds or tilted, with the dip towards the north. North and south anticlines are common. A particularly fine example of the overthrust fold was exposed at Clifton, Staten Island, some years ago, in an excavation made on the edge of the moraine for building 2 gravel (see Fig. 4). On Long Island the hills on the north shore are much broken up by the numerous inlets and harbors which extend to a greater or less distance inland. On the east and west sides of these harbors there are several limited exposures, and these present sometimes the faces, sometimes the edges of the strata to view, and the dip is as often east or west as north or south. 16 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 15, In some instances this eccentricity may doubtless be accounted for by local land slips, but in other cases I am inclined to think that an east dip on the west side of a harbor or a west dip on the east side may be explained on the theory advocated by F. J. H. Merril,* that these inlets are due to tongues of ice which were either in advance of or plowed deeper than the main mass. In such a case there would bea side thrust or squeeze along each of these inlets, which would produce the dips noted, in opposition to the generally prevailing north and south dips. On the north shore of Gardiner’s Island may also be seen exam- ples of east and west dips in the clay strata. (See Fig. 5.) Fic. 5. DistortTED CLAys, NorTH SIDE OF GARDINER’S ISLAND. Suchan explanation would be not only in harmony with the theory of ice action in general, but also a special argument in favor of the formation of these harbors by the same agency. I do not know whether the competency of ice to produce the effects noted will be questioned, but the distorting effects of even small superficial loads on clay strata, such as trees and bowlders, has been recognized, and the pronounced effects of comparatively weak thrusts upon yeilding strata are too well known to need extensive comment. It may perhaps be not out of place, however, to recall the prominent example of the land- slide which occurred at Brantford, Ontario, April 15, 1884, by which the Erie clay was raised into truncated, anticlinal folds by the forward movement of the displaced mass at the limit of its furthest line of advancement. A brief account of the * “On the Geology of Long Island,”’ . c., 359. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 17 phenomenon was written by J. W. Spencer,* and it is a most graphic illustration of the points in question. In this connection I also wish to call attention to the recently published experiments by Bailey Willis} in the crumpling of plastic strata by a force advancing from one direction. If we compare his original models to sections of the former coastal plain and the force exerted by his piston to the force exerted by the advancing ice front, we have a parallel series of examples, and some of the pictures of the models after compression would serve as excellent charts of sections through the morainal region of the coastal plain to-day, particularly plates xev. and xevi. of the work mentioned. Iam also pleased to say that after having come to the above conclusion I wrote to Mr. Willis and received from him a reply, from which I quote as follows: ‘ Deformation in stratified layers under pressure occurs in different manner under three distinct conditions. * * * Now in your case the plastic quality of the clay affords a condition similar to that of excessive load upon more solid material. This was true also of models xcv. and xevi, to which you refer. I presume there is no question but what the ice sheet was competent to produce the deformation.” Under the circumstances I am inclined to accept these con- clusions as final until proven otherwise by evidence to the con- trary,and to consider the phenomena of folding and dislocations as the visible effects of glaciation, from which we may calculate the extent of the cause. In other words, to utilize them as data from which to calculate the magnitude and extent of glacial action in quaternary time in this vicinity—a task, how- ever, which I cheerfully leave to the glacialists. COMPARISON OF THE THEORIES OF MOUNTAIN-MAKING FORCES AND ICE ACTION. Considering the facts adduced, we have, in favor of the theory of ice action, the general structure of the morainal region of the coastal plain; the uniform coincidence of distorted coastal plain strata with the line of the moraine; the absence of any distortions where the moraine does not reach the plain ; the much more pronounced distortions at localities where the moraine indicates an extensive advance of the ice over the plain *« 4 Jandslide at Brantford, Ontario, illustrating the Effects of Thrusts upon yield- ing Strata,’’ Am. Nat. xxi. (1887) 267-269, illustrated. +‘*The Mechanics of Appalachian Structure,’ Thirteenth Ann. Rept. U.S. G.S. (1891-92) 217-281, pl. Ixxy.-xcvi. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. Scr., Vol. XIV., Sig. 2, Dec. 4, 1894. 18 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 15, or its descent upon the plain over a hard rock escarpment; and the prevailing directions of dip and strike. Finally, I have not yet encountered a fact which could not be brought into har- mony with the theory. In regard to mountain-making forces as the probable agency in producing the phenomena, I fail to see that any of the argu- ments brought forward in support of this theory are not also applicable to the other, except perhaps the element of geologic age, in regard to which there is a difference of opinion on the part of observers. Prof. Shaler considers that the topography of the Martha’s Vineyard hills was determined in pre-glacial times, and therefore could not have been due to glacial action. I can only say that I failed to see the evidence of this on Mar- tha’s Vineyard and that it is certainly not the case at any other locality. Again, if we are to regard the line of the moraine as a line along which mountain-making forces have been in action and to consider that the distortions of strata are the principal evidences of such action, we must assume that, on Staten Island, the force which had acted thus far consistently from Nantucket and Martha’s Vineyard ceased suddenly to be manifested where the ice front curved away from the coastal plain, and did not again make itself apparent except at and beyond the point where the ice once more entered upon the plain. On this theory we should also have to dismiss, as unworthy of serious thought, the weight of arugment implied by the coincidence of the distorted strata and the moraine, or to consider it merely as somewhat curious that the moraine should find a line of disturbance all ready and waiting to mark its exact limit of southern advancement over the coastal plain. We should have to regard all this as a coincidence only, and we should have to face the improbable circumstance that a line of mountain-making forces had been developed practically at right angles to the direction in which previous observations have taught us to expect that it would be developed. Further than this, as directly opposed to the facts, is the rapidity with which the distortions must have been accomplished in order to be be consistent with such a theory. Thus we find beds of unmis- takable ‘“ Yellow Gravel,” the equivalent of the Lafayette forma- tion, included as part of the distorted strata, showing that the dis- turbance took place subsequent to the period when these gravels were laid down, and all authorities are practically agreed now that this formation is at least as recent as Pliocene. Considering this fact alone it would leave but a very brief period of time in which to develop the “ pre-glacial topography,” by which term 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 19 Professor Shaler designates the hills of contorted clays, sands and gravels upon which the moraine rests. It would imply a very great stress, suddenly and violently discharged, almost in the nature of an eruption in fact, and not a gradual mountain- making process, and so far as my experience goes, the facts do not warrant us in assuming that any such conditions have pre-. vailed. Finally any such development of force would result in the disturbance of strata far below the surface as well as above, and this we do not find to be the case. At Cold Spring, the super- ficial strata are beautifully crumpled, but where the lower strata are exposed these are seen to be undisturbed. This is the only locality in which I have been able to note this interesting and significant fact, but there is no doubt that if excavations below the limit of ice action were made at other localities, similar conditions would be found to exist. . In consideration of these circumstances it would seem as if any other reasonable theory than that of mountain-making forces, to account for the phenomena observed, ought to be wel- comed, and the theory of ice action, in connection with the con- tinental glacier of the Ice Age, has seemed to the writer to be an adequate and rational one. The facts are in harmony with it; it enables us to consider the entire area of disturbance as a comprehensive whole, with one series of cause and effect through- out, and not as a number of isolated districts in which similar phenomena are to be accounted for on different hypotheses. It is also a theory which nothing in our previous observation or experience would cause us to doubt, and is one which has been extensively applied to what are apparently identical phenomena. in Europe, especially on the islands of Moén* and Rugen,} in Denmark. I have elsewheref called attention to the fact that observers who visited Martha’s Vineyard in 1786 promptly ascribed a voleanic origin to Gay Head,§ and it is of interest to note, as * Jas. Geekie, ‘‘ Prehistoric Europe. Vide p. 200: ‘‘ Here and there irregular-shaped masses of bowlder-clay are actually surrounded on all sides by chalk, and:so striking indeed is the behaviour of the bowl- der-clay that Forchhammer may well be pardoned for having speculated upon its eruptive origin. Puggard was of opinion that all this confusion was due to movements of the earth’s crust, to convulsions and ‘“‘ faults’’ caused by the action of the subterra- nean forces, and in this view he was followed by Lyell:- But Johnstrup has since rein- vestigated the evidence and come to quite a different conclusion. He shows * * * that the disturbances can only be attributed to the enormous pressure and disrupting force of the Scandinavian mer de glace.” + Rudolph Credner, ‘‘ Riigen. Eine Inselstudie,”’ Forsch. z. Deutsch. Land. u. Volks- kunde, vii. No. 5 (1893). t‘‘ Observations on the Geology and Botany of Martha’s Vineyard,” J. ¢., 9-12. ZSamuel West and William Baylies, Mem. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci. ii., part i., 147-150 (1793), and 150-155 (1797.) 20 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 2 previously quoted, that the earlier observers in Europe were unable to consider any other than orogenic forces in order to account for similar distortions there. They were either in ignorance of or else had not been educated up to a full apprecia- tion of the Ice Age and the magnitude of its phenomena. The practical unanimity of opinion both here and abroad in assum- ing ice action as the agency which was instrumental in produc- ing these effects seems now, however, to be assured. In the discussion that followed, Mr. H. Ries referred to the heavy crumpling of the upper portion of the clays on Fisher’s Island, which is due to the ice of the glacial period. The dis- turbed portions are in places mixed with the boulder till, which caps the section with a thickness of 15-20 ft. Mention was also made of local crumplings in single layers from overlying weights and landslides. Dr. Julien spoke of a horizontal bed of pre-glacial oyster shells beneath Nantucket. Professor Whitfield cited local crumplings in the clays at Albany, N. Y., due to the weight of a tree growing above them, or to a bowlder resting on them, these being marked when the clay rested on yielding sands. The last paper of the evening was by Mr. Gilbert van Ingen, A Sketch of the Cambrian Strata near St. John, N. B. The paper was illustrated by maps, photographs and numer- ‘ous specimens of fossils. After a brief discussion the Academy adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. StaTED MEETING. October 22d, 1894. Professor H. F. Ossorn in the Chair; an attendance of thirty. The following papers were read by title for publication in the Annals. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 21 The South American Cat-fishes belonging to Cornell Univer- sity, by Edward M. Kindle. The South American Characinide, collected by Albert B. Ulrey. The Biological Section organized. The first paper of the evening was the following: AN ENUMERATION OF THE PLANTS COLLECTED Ba opie. Ci MOTHY. Bo WILCOX, U.S As AND OTHERS IN SOUTHEASTERN ARIZONA DURING THE YEARS 1892-1894. By N. L. Brirron anp T. H. Kearney, JR. The plants enumerated in this list were collected in the neigh- borhood of Fort Huachuca, by Dr. T. E. Wilcox, and about Fort Apache, by Mrs. Capt. R. W. Hoyt. A few were collected near San Carlos and in Tanner’s Canon, by Dr. R. G. Ebert, U. S. A. Where no locality and collector is mentioned, it is un- derstood that the plant was obtained by Dr. Wilcox, near Fort Huachuca. The greater part of the collection of 1892-93 was made by Dr. Wilcox, and was sent by him to the Herbarium of Columbia College. Further collections were made by Dr. Wil- | cox in 1894 and were deposited in the United States National Herbarium. These have been submitted to us for determination by Mr. F. V. Coville and have been included in the present enu- meration. The Graminez of the entire collection have been determined by Prof. F. Lamson-Scribner, whose valuable notes and descrip- tions add much to the interest of the list. Part of the collec- tions of 1892 were named by Mr. Henry Kraemer, of Columbia College. To Dr. B. L. Robinson, we are indebted for the privi- lege of comparing some of the more difficult species with the types preserved in the Herbarium of Harvard University. Despite the fact that the flora of this part of Arizona Territory has been much-explored, the present collection is of considerable interest. It contains many rare and little-known plants, a num- ber of species new to the United States and a few that are new to science. It is to be hoped that the collectors will have an opportunity to continue their valuable contributions to our knowledge of the plant-life of this region. 22 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oor. 22, The present contribution is made in the hope that a more ex- tended study of the flora of the Territory may be undertaken in the future. The vegetation of New Mexico and Arizona is of. peculiar interest, both in itself and from the standpoint of geo- graphical botany. A work which shall bring together syste- matically what is known of it is a desideratum in the literature of botany. CHARACE. Chara contraria A. Br. FILICES. Adiantum Capillus- Veneris L. Sp. Pl. 1096 (1753). Oheilanthes Fendleri Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 103, ¢. 207 (1846-64). Cheilanthes lanuginosa Nutt. ; Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 99 (1846-64). Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. Schrader’s Neues Journ. Bot. 1: Part 2, 27 (1806). Notholena ferruginea (Desy.) Hook. Sp. Fil. 5: 108 (1864). Notholena sinuata (Sw.) Kaulf. Enum. Fil. 185 (1824). Pellwa atropurpurea (L.) Link, Fil. Hort. Berol. 59 (1841). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Pellea Wrightiana Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 142 (1846-64). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Pieris aquilina lanuginosa (Bory) Hook. Fl. Bor. Am, 2: 263 (1840). EQUISETACE A. Equisetum levigatum A, Br. ; Engelm. Am. Journ. Sci. 46 : 87 (1844). CONIFER. Abies concolor (Engelm.) Lindl. Journ, Hort. Soc. 5: 210 (1850). Dr. Wilcox, Mt. Graham. Cupressus Arizonica Greene, Bull. Torr. Club, 9: 64 (1882). Juniperus occidentalis Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 2: 166 (1840). Juniperus pachyphiea Torr. Pac. R. R. Rep. 4: 142 (1856). Juniperus Virginiana L. Sp. Pl. 1039 (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Pinus Arizonica Engelm. ; Rothr. Wheeler Rep. 6: 260 (1878). ‘‘On the peak known as Nigger Head, at 7,000 feet and higher.”’ Pinus cembroides Zuce. Pl. Nov. Fase. 1: 892 (1837-40). Pinus Chihuahuana Engelm. ; Wisliz. Mem. Tour N. Mex. 103 (1848). Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. Pinus edulis Engelm.; Wisliz. Mem. Tour N. Mex. 88 (1848). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Ebert, San Carlos. Pinus latifolia Sarg. Gard. & For. 2: 496 (1889). Pinus ponderosa scopulorum 8. Wats. Bot. Cal. 2: 126 (1880). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Pinus refleca Engelm. ; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 7: 4 (1882). Pseudotsuga tavifolia (Lamb.) Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad, Sci. 8: 74 (1889). , This may be the var. suberosa Lemmon (Erythea, 1: 48) described as being a small tree with whitish, thick, corky bark, so soft that it ean be readily cut witha pocket-knife. Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca ; Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos; Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. 1894. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 25 GNETACE A, Ephedra trifurca Torr. Emory’s Rep. 153 (1848). GRAMINEZ * Agropyron sp. = 1439 Pringle Mexican Coll. (1887) distributed as A. divergens Nees. Also =2829 Lemmonin Nat. Herb from Huachuca Mts. (1882). Triticum caninum Thurb. in 8. Wats. Bot, Cal. 2: 324. Agropyrum divergens Vasey, Ill. N. Am. Grasses 2: 96. Specimens of A. scabrum from Australia agree very well with this plant. Agrostis verticillata Vill. Prosp. 16 (1779). Andropogon cirratus Hack. Fl. 68: 119 (1885) var. - Andropogon contortus L. Sp. Pl. 1045 (1753). Andropogon hirtiflorus Kunth, Rev. Gram. 2: 569, ¢. 198 (1835). Andropogon melanocarpus (Muhl.) Ell. Sk. 1: 146 (1817-18). Andropogon saccharoides barbinodis (Lag.) Hack. ; D.C. Mon. Phan. 6: 494 (1889). Andropogon saccharoides laguroides (DC.) Hack.; Mart. Fl. Bras. 2: Pt. 3, 298 (1878-83). Andropogon semiberbis Kunth, Enum. 1: 489 (1833) ; with Muhlenbergia distichophylla. Andropogon tener Kunth, Rev. Gram, 2 : 565, t. 197 (1835). Aristida Americana L. Amoen. Acad. 5: 395 (1759). (A. dispersa Trin. : & Rupr. Mém. Acad. Pétersb. (VI.) 7: 129 (1849). Aristida bromoides H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 122 (1815). Aristida fasciculata Torr. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 1: 154 (1824). ARISTIDA FASCICULATA FENDLERIANA (Steud.) Scribn. (A. Fendler- tana Steud.) (A. purpurea Fendleriana Vasey, Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herb. 3: 46 (1892). Aristida Havardii Vasey, Bull. Torr. Club, 13 :.27 (1886). Aristida Humboldtiana Trin. & Rupr. Mém. Acad. Pétersb. (VI.) 4: 118 (1849). ARISTIDA LEMMONI Scribn. n; sp. Slender, densely czespitose, 3-5 dm. high ; culms simple, smooth ; sheaths smooth, barbate on the sides at the throat with white flocculent hairs ; ligule very short, mi- nutely ciliate ; leaf-blades involute-filiform or flat near the base and scarcely 1 mm, wide, those of the culm 10-20 cm. long. Panicles 20-25 cm. long, the branches slender, almost capillary, in pairs, as. cending or finally spreading, paked below ; the lower branches 7-12 ~ em. long. Flowering glumes 10-12 mm. long, slender, twisted above, scarcely longer than the long-attenuate-pointed, smooth and nearly equal empty glumes. Callus nearly 1 mm. long, short-bar- bate. Awns 10-12 mm. long, nearly equal, becoming divergent. = 388 Lemmon, Arizona, 1882, in Nat. Herb. Aristida longifolia Trin. Mém. Acad. Pétersb. (VI.) 1: 84 (18381). Aristida Reverchonit Vasey, Bull. Torr. Club, 13 : 52 (1886). Aristila scabra Kunth, Rev. Gram. 1: 62 (1830). Perhaps A. tenuis Kunth, Rev. Gram. 1: 62 (1835). Aristida Schiedeana Trin. & Rupr. Mém. Acad. Pétersb. (VI ) 7: 120 (1849). Bouteloua aristidoides (H.B.K.) Thurb.; 8. Wats. Bot. Calif. 2: 291 (1880). * Determined by Prof. F. Lamson-Scribner. 24 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 22, Bouteloua bromoides (H.B.K.) Lag. Gen. et Sp. Nov. 5 (1816). The spikelets in the specimens received in 1894 are exactly those of Dinebra repens H.B.K. Dinebra repens and Dinebra bromoides were united under B. bromoides by 8. Watsonin Proc. Am. Acad. 18:177. Bouteloua curtipendula (Michx.) Torr. Emory Rep. 154 (1848). _ Bouteloua eriopoda Torr. Pacif. R. R. Rep. 4: 155 (1856). Bouteloua Havardii Vasev ; 8S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 179 (1883). From description of Dinebra chondrosioides H.B.K., this Bouteloua Havardii appears to be essentially that species. Bouteloua hirsuta Lag. Varied. Cienc. 2: Pt. 4, 141 (1805). Bouteloua oligostachya (Nutt.) Torr. ; A. Gray Man. Ed. 2, 553 (1856). Bouteloua Rothrockit Vasey, Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herb. 1: 268 (1893). Bromus maximus Desf. Fl. Atl. 1: 95 (1798-1800). Bromus Kalmii A. Gray, Man. 600 (1848). Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Cain. Bromus ciliatus L. Sp. Pl. 76 (1753). Bromus sterilis L. Sp. Pl. 77 (1758). Bromus unioloides (Willd.) H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 151 (1815). Chloris elegans H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 166 (1815). Cottea pappophoroides Kunth, Rev. Gram. 1: 84, 281, t. 52 (1880). Eatonia obtusata (Michx.) A. Gray, Man. Ed. 2, 558 (1856). Elionurus barbiculmis Hack. ; D.C. Mon. Phan. 6: 339 (1889). Very near H#. cancidus. Epicampes rigens Benth. Journ, Linn. Soc. 19 : 88 (1882). Eragrostis Caroliniana (Spreng.) Scribn. Mem. Torr. Club 5: 49 (1894). Eragrostis diffusa Buckl. Proc, Acad. Phila. (1862) 97 (1863). Perhaps distinct from # pilosa. , Eragrostis limbata Fourn. ; Hemsl. Bot. Centr. Am. 3 : 573 (1882-86). May include #. Neo-Mevicana Vasey. Some forms have been referred to E. Purshii. E. Palmer collected the same form at Climo, Mex- ico. Spikelets larger than in #. Purshii. The spikelets are about the size of those of H. minor, but the glumes are all more acute. Eragrostis lugens Nees; Mart. Fl. Bras. 2: Pt. 1, 505 (1829). Eragrostis major Host. Gram, Austr. 4, 14, ¢. 24 (1809). Eragrostis tenuis Texensis Vasey, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 1: 59 (June, 1890). Leaves in type [of H. tenuis] much narrower and panicle a foot to 18 inches long. Spikelets 6-8-flowered. Glumes all acute, the floral strongly 3-nerved and submucronate-pointed. Eriochloa punctata W. Hamilt. Prodr. Fl. Ind. Occ. 5 (1825). Festuca octoflora Walt. Fl. Car, 81 (1788). Hackelochloa granularis (.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 776 (1891). Hilaria cenchroides H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 117 (1815). Hilaria mutica (Buckl.) Benth. Journ. Linn. Soc. 19 : 62 (1882). Hordeum murinum L. Sp. Pl. 85 (1753). Keleria cristata (L.) Pers. Syn. 1: 97 (1805). Leptochloa dubia (H.B.K.) Nees; Mart. Fl. Bras. 2: Pt. 1, 433 (1829). Apparently a reduced form. Lycurus phleoides H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 142 (1815). Muhlenbergia afinis Trin. Agrost. 2: 55 (1841). Muhlenbergia Arizonica Scribn. Bull. Torr. Club 15: 8 (1888). Muhlenbergia distichophylla (Presl.) Kunth, Enum. 1: 202 (1833). Muhlenbergia gracilis Trin. Unifl. 193 (1824). Muhlenbergia Lemmoni Scribn.; Coult. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 1: 56 (1890). (J Huachucana Vasey, Contr, U. 8. Nat. Herb. 3: 69 (1892). 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 25 MUHLENBERGIA PRINGLE! Scribn. (HM. sylvatica Pringlet Scribn. Bull. Torr. Club, 9: 89 (1882). (Jf Neo-Mexicana Vasey ; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 11: 337 (1886). Muhlenbergia Texana Thurb. ; Coult. Bot. Rocky Mt. Reg. 410 (1885), Muhlenbergia virescens Trin. Unifl. 193 (1824). Nazia racemosa (L.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 780 (1891). Oryzopsis fimbriata (H.B.K.) Hemsl. Bot. Centr. Am. 3: 538 (1882-86). Panicum avenaceum H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 99 (1815). Panicum capiliare L. Sp. Pl. 58 (1753). Panicum capillare L. var. Panicum Carthaginense Sw. F1. Ind. Occ, 1: 148 (1797). Spikelets 1.5 lines long. Second and third glumes abruptly acute- pointed. Glume of the hermaphrodite flower apiculate. Third glume with a staminate flower in itsaxil. (Det. ex descr. in Grisebach FI. Brit. W. Ind. 546 (1864).) Panicum Carthaginense Sw. var. Spikelets glabrous. Panicum Crus- Galli L. Sp. Pl. 56 (1753). Panicum Hallii Vasey, Bull. Torr, Club, 11: 61 (1884). Closely related to P. capillare and has been regarded as a variety of that species. Spikelets 1.5 lines long, acuminate-pointed ;_ pedi- cels rather short and for the most part appressed to the more or less spreading panicle-branches. Panicum lachnanthum Torr. Pac. R. R. Rep. 7: Pt. 3, 21 (1856). Panicum obtusum H.B.K. Noy. Gen. et Sp. 1: 98 (1815). Panicum sanguinale L. Sp. Pl. 57 (1753). Pappophorum Wrightii S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 18: 178 (1883). Poa Fendleriana Vasey, Grasses Pacif. Slope, 2: 74 (1893). Polypogon Monspeliensis (L.) Desf. Fl. Atl. 1: 67 (1798-1800). Setaria* caudata (Lam.) R. & §. Syst. 2: 495 (1817). Setaria pauciseta Vasey, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 3: No. 1, 39 (1892). 2069 C. Wright, Texas ; and 676 Rothr. (1874). Setaria setosa Beauy. Agrost. 51, 178 (1812). Sieglingia avenacea grandiflora (Vasey) Dewey ; Coult. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 2: 538 (1894). Triodia grandiflora Vasey, Ill. N. Am. Grasses as)P6;) 2, £, 36. (1891). Steglingia mutica (Torr.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen, Pl. 789 (1891). Sieglingia pulchella (H.B.K.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 789 (1891). Sporobolus confusus (Fourn.) Vasey, Bull. Torr. Club 15: 293 (1888). (Sporobolus ramulosus Am. auct. not Kunth, teste Vasey.) The grass published by Vasey as S. racemosus may be the true Sporobolus ramulosus Kunth. Sporobolus tricholepis (Torr.) Vasey, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 3 : 62 (1892). Sporobolus Wrightii Scribn. Bull, Torr. Club 9: 103 (1882). Trachypogon polymorphus Montufari (H.B.K.) Hack. ; DC. Mon, Phan. 6: 325 (1889). CYPERACE. Carex} marcida Boott ; Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 2: 212 (1840). Carex Thurberi Dewey ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 232 (1859). C. hystricina angustior Bailey ; Rose, Contr. U. 8S. Nat. Herb. 1: No. 4, 126 (1891). * As the species of Setaria Beauv. are not congeneric with Chameraphis KR. Br., the name Setaria has been retainrd for them here, though it is a homonym of Setaria Achar. + Determined by Prof. L. H. Bailey. " 26 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 22, Carex ultra, Bailey Proc. Am. Acad 22: 83 (1887). Cyperus esculentus L. Sp. Pl. 45 (1753). | Cyperus Fendlertanus Boeck. Linuza, 35: 520 (1867-68). Cyperus ferax Rich, Act. Soc. Hist. Nat. Par. 1: 106 (1792). Cyperus Meyenianus Kunth, Enum. 2: 88 (1837.) New to the U.S. Cyperus Schweinitziidebilis Britton, Bull, Torr. Club, 13 : 208 (1886). Cyperus seslerioides H.B.K. Nov. Gen. 1: 209 (1815). COMMELINACE®. Commelina dianthifolia Delile ; Red. Lil. 7: ¢. 390 (1802-16). Tradescantia tuberosa Greene ; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 6: 185 (1881). Closely resembles 7. linearis Benth. and may be identical with it. JUNCACE2:.* Juncus Balticus Willd. Ges. Naturf. Fr. Berl. Mag. 3 : 298 (1809). Juncus bufonius L. Sp Pl 328 (1753). Juncus tenuis Willd. Sp. Pl. 2: 214 (1799). Juncus xiphioides montanus Engelm. Trans. St. Louis Acad, Sci. 2: 481 (1868). LILIACEA. Allium cernuum Roth; Roem. Archiv. 1: Pt. 3, 40 (1798). Allium scaposum Benth. Pl Hartweg. 26 (1840). Androstephium ceruleum (Scheele) Greene, Pitt. 2: 57 (1890). Anthericum Torreyi Baker, Journ, Linn. Soc. 15: 317 (1877) ? Leaves only 10-29 em. long. Pedicel articulated just below the middle. Brodiea capitata Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 339 (1857). Calochortus Gunnisoni S. Wats. Bot. King’s Rep. 348 (1871). Dasylirion Wheeleri S. Wats.; Rothr. Wheeler Rep. 6: 272 (1878). Milla biflora Cav. Icon, 2: 76, t. 196 (1793). Nolina Lindheimeriana (Scheele) 8. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 14: 247 (1879). Polygonatum biflorum (Walt.) Ell. Sk. 1: 393 (1817-18). Vagnera racemosa (L.) Morong, Mem. Torr. Club, 5: 114 (1894). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache ; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Yucca angustifolia Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 227 (1814). Zygadenus elegans Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 241 (1814), AMARYLLIDACE, Agave Palmeri Engelm. Trans, St. Louis Acad. Sci. 3 : 319 (1878) Agave Parryi Engelm. Trans. St. Louis Acad, Sci. 3 : 311 (1878). ? Zephyranthes longifolia Hemsl. Diag. Pl. Nov. 55 (1879). IRIDACEA. Sisyrinchium Arizonicum Rothr.; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 2: 125 (1877). ORCHIDACE &, Epipactis gigantea Dougl. ; Hook. Fl. Bor, Am. 2; 202, ¢. 202 (1840). Habenaria sp. ‘Strongly resembles H. leucostachys (Lindl ) 8. Wats., but the petals and sepals and lip much smaller.’’—Morong. Determined by Mr. F. VY. Coville. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 27 JUGLANDACE. Juglans Californica 8S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 10: 349 (1875). SALICACE&, Salix nigra Wrightit Anders. Mon. Sal. 22 (1867). BETULACES. Alnus oblongifolia Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 204 (1859). ‘* Tree 40 ft. high and 18 in, in diameter.’’—Dr. Ebert, Ft. Grant. FAGACE. Quercus chrysolepis Liebm. Dank. Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl. (1854) 173 (1854). ; Quercus Emeryi Torr. Emory Rep. 152, t. 9 (1848). Quercus Gambellit Nutt. Journ. Acad. Phila. (II.) 1: 179 (1847-50). Quercus hypoleuca Engelm. Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci. 3: 384 (1878). Quercus oblongifolia Torr. Sitgr. Rep. 173, t. 19 (1853). Quercus undulata Torr. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 2: 248, t. 4 (1828). A very pubescent form, with leaves almost as much reticulated beneath as Q. reticulata. Quercus undulata grisea (Liebm.) Engelm. Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci. 3: 393 (1878). ULMACE. Celtis Mississippiensis Bosc. Enecye. Agr. 7 : 577 (1822). Celtis reticulata Torr. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 2: 247 (1828). Dr. Ebert, Ft. Grant; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. MorAcEz&. Humulus Lupulus L. Sp. Pl. 1028 (1753). URTICACES. Urtica holosericea Nutt. Journ. Acad. Phila. (II.) 1: 183 (1847-50). LORANTHACE A, Phoradendron flavescens pubescens Engelm. ; A. Gray Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist. 6 : 212 (1857). Phoradendron juniperinum Engelm.; A. Gray Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 58 (1849). Razoumofskya cryptopoda (Engelm.) Coville, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 4: 192 (1893). On Pinus ponderosa scopulorum. SANTALACE ®. Comandra pallida A.D.C.; DC. Prodr. 14 : 636 (1857). Comandra umbellata (u.) Nutt. Gen, 1: 157 (1818). POLYGONACEA, Eriogonum Abertianum Torr. Emory Rep. 151 (1848). EHriogonum hieracifolium Benth. ; DC. Prodr. 14: 6 (1857)? Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. : Eriogonum Jamesii Benth. DC. Prodr. 14: 7 (1857). 28 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 22, Hriogonum polycladon Benth ; DC. Prodr. 14: 16 (1857). Eriogonum trichopes Torr. Emory Rep. 151 (1848). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos.—What is apparently a stouter and fewer- flowered form of #. trichopes, with larger and less spreading pe- duncles, was collected by Dr. Ebert at San Carlos. Eriogonum Wrightit Torr. in Benth. ; DC. Prodr, 14: 15 (1887). Polygonum Convoloulus L. Sp. Pl. 364 (1753), Polygonum Persicaria L. Sp. Pl. 361 (1753). CHENOPODIACE, Chenopodium cornutum (Torr.) B. & H.; 8. Wats. Bot. Calif. 2: 482 (1880). AMARANTHACE&, Cladothriz lanuginosa Nutt. Moq. in DC. Prodr.13: Pt. 2, 360 (1849). Frelichia Floridana (Nutt.) Mog. ; DC. Prodr. 13: Pt. 2, 420 (1849). Gomphrena caspitosa Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 181 (1859). Guilleminea illecebroides H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 6: 42, ¢. 5/8 (1823). NYCTAGINACEZ. Allionia linearifolia (S. Wats.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 533 (1891). Allionia nyctaginea Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 100 (1803). Berhaavia erecta L. Sp. Pl. 3 (1753). Berhaavia purpurascens A. Gray, Am. Journ. Sci. (II.) 15: 321 (1853). Berhaavia spicata Choisy ; DC. Prodr. 13: Pt. 2, 456 (1849). Mirabilis coccinea (Torr.) B. & H. Gen. Pl. 3: Pt. 1, 3 (1880). Mirabilis multiflora (Torr.) A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 169 (1859), Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. MIRABILIS WRIGHTIANA A. Gray ined. No description of this species appears to have been published. It differs from IW longiflora L. to which Wright’s plant (No. 1702) was first referred, in its much more slender and less glandular calyx-tube, thinner and less glandular leaves ; and from MM. Jalapa L., with which it nearly accords in foli- age, in its much longer calyx-tube, this being from 3 to 5 inches long, Wedelia incarnata (L.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 534 (1891). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache ; Dr. Wilcox, Ft, Huachuca. AIZOACEAE. Mollugo verticillata L. Sp. Pl. 89 (1753). Trianthema monogyna L. Mant, 69 (1767). PORTULACACEA. Portulaca lanceolata Engelm. ; A. Gray Bost. Journ. Nat, Hist. 6: 154 (1857). Portulaca suffrutescens Engelm. ; Coult. Bot, Gaz, 6 : 236 (1881). Talinum lineare H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 6: 77 (1823). Talinum patens Willd. Sp. Pl. 2: 8638 (1800). CARYOPHYLLACEAR. Arenaria savosa A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 18 (1853). ‘ Cerastium brachypodum (Engelm.) Rob. Mem. Torr. Club, 5: 150 (1894). Cerastium Texanum Britton, Bull. Torr. Club, 15: 97 (1888). 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 29 Drymaria sperguloides A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad, (II.) 4: 11 (1849). Silene antirrhina L. Sp. Pl. 419 (1753). Silene laciniata Greggit (A. Gray) 8S. Wats. Bibl. Ind. 1: 108 (1878). RANUNCULACE. Anemone cylindrica A. Gray, Ann. Lye. N. Y. 3: 221 (1836). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Anemone sphenophylla Poepp. Fragm. Syn. 27 (1833). Aquilegia chrysanha A. Gray, Proc. Am, Acad 8: 621 (1873). Clematis Bigelovit Torr. Pac. R. R. Rep. 4: Pt. 4, 61 (1857). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca, Clematis dioica L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 765 (1762). 2? Specimens of the stami- nate plant, referred to this species with hesitation. It is apparently otherwise unknown from the United States. Clematis Drummondii Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 9 (1839). Clematis ligusticifolia Nutt. ; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1:9 (1888). Cyrtorhyncha Cymbalaria (Pursh) Britton Mem. Torr. Club, 5: 161 (1894. ) Delphinium Carolinianum Walt FI. Car. 155 (1788). Delphinium scaposum Greene; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 6: 156 (1881). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Delphinium scopulorum A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 9 (1853). Myosurus cupulatus 8. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 362 (1882). Ranunculus Arizonicus Lemmon; A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 21: 370 (1886). Ranunculus macranthus Scheele, Linnea, 21: 585 (1848). Thalictrum Fendlert Engelm. A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4:5 (1849). BERBERIDACE., Berberis Aquifolium Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 219 (1814). B. repens Lindl. Bot. Reg. ¢t. 1176 (1828). It was to the low-stemmed plant of the Plains and Rockies, not to the tall shrub of the Pacific Slope, that Pursh applied this name. The name to be taken for the latter is BERBERIS NuTKANA (DC.) Kearney. = Mahonia Aquifolium Nut- kana DC, Prodr. 1: 108 (1824). Berberis Fremontii Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 30 (1859). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Ebert, San Carlos. BERBERIS WiLcoxtt Kearney n. sp. Whole plant smooth and glabrous; stem woody, prostrate (?), branched ; bark reddish-brown ; leaves pinnate, 12-16 cm. long from the base of the petiole to the apex of the terminal leaflet ; leaflets 5-7, the lateral ones sessile, the ter- minal on a stalk 10-25 mm. long, articulated by the base of the mid- rib to the rhachis, which is itself articulated at the points where the leaflets are attached, 2.5-5.5 cm. long, 2-5 cm. wide, oblong-ovate to ovate-lanceolate, acuminate and spine-tipped or truncate at apex, rounded or wedge-shaped and (the lateral) unequal at base, irregu- larly and coarsely dentate with spreading, rigid, spiny teeth (7-11 in number), upper surface green and shining, with a deep crimson spot at base of midrib, lower surface pale but hardly glaucous ; veins pinnate, much reticulated, prominent on both surfaces; flowers in short, dense clustered racemes, arising from scaly axillary or terminal buds, each articulated to a slender pedicel which is dilated at summit, articulated to the rachis and subtended at base by a per- sistent, ovate, obtuse or acutish membranaceous bract; calyx and corolla bright yellow; fruit about 1 cm. long, dark blue, glaucous. 30 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct 22, Nearest to B. pinnata Lag., from which, however, it is abundantly distinct. The lowest pair of leaflets is much farther from the base of the petiole than in B. pinnata ; the teeth are fewer, larger and more spreading ; the under leaf-surface is quite glaucous, while in pinnata it is at most merely paler than the upper; and the veins are much more prominent. Collected by Mr. Lemmon, Tanner’s Canon, Huachuca Mts. ; Dr. Wileox, Ft. Huachuca. PAPAVERACEZ. Argemone platyceras Link & Otto, Ic. 2: 43 (1831). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Capnoides montanum (Engelm.) Britton, Mem. Torr. Club, 5 : 166 (1894). CRUCIFERZ. Draba aurea stylosa A. Gray, Am. Journ. Sci. (II.) 33: 248 (1862) ? Specimen with but one even approximately mature silique, which is strongly once twisted; but the fine stellular pubescence distin- paeree it from D. streptocarpa. Apparently the same as Fendler’s QO. 4v. Draba cuneifolia Nutt. ; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 108 (1838). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Erysimum asperum DC. Syst. Veg. 2: 505 (1821). Lepidium montanum Nutt. ; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 116 (1838-40). Lesquerella Fendleri (A. Gray) 8. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad, 23: 254 (1888). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Roripa Nasturtium (L.) Rusby, Mem. Torr. Club, 3: Pt. 3, 5 (1893). Sisymbrium pinnatum (Walt.) Greene, Pitt. 1: 200 (1889). Thelypodium linearifolium (A. Gray) 8. Wats. Bot. King’s Rep. 25 (1871). Thelypodium longifolium (Benth.) 8. Wats. King’s Rep. 5: 25 (1871). Thelypodium micranthum (A. Gray) 8. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 321. (1882). Thiaspt alpestre L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 903 (1763). Form with somewhat larger flowers than the type. Itis 7. Fendlert A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 14 (1853). > CAPPARIDACE, Cleome lutea Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 70, ¢. 25 (1830). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. CRASSULACE. Sedum Wrightti A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1:76 (1852). Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Canon; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca, SAXIFRAGACE A. Fendlera rupicola Engelm. & Gray; A. Gray. Pl. Wright. 1: 77, t. 5 (1852). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Heuchera sanguinea Engelm. Wisliz. Mem. Tour, N. Mex. 107 (1848). Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. Philadelphus microphyllus A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4 : 54 (1849) ? The same as Fendler’s No. 266, except that the upper leaf-surface is appressed-pubescent and the calyx-lobes are silky-villous without. Ribes aureum Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 164 (1814). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache ; . Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuea. Ribes cereum Doug]. Trans. Hort. Soc. 7: 512 (1830) ; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 31 PLATANACE. Platanus Wrightti S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 10: 349 (1875). ROSACE, Agrimonia striata Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 278 (1803). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Cercocarpus breviflorus A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2 ; 54 (1853) ? CERCOCARPUS PAUCIDENTATUS (S. Wats.) Britton. C. parvifolius paucidentatus 8. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 353 (1882). Straggling shrub, branching from the base, sometimes fifteen feet high ; bark dark gray, somewhat glaucous and often reddish when young ; leaves clustered at the ends of short branches, which are sealy to the base with the scars of fallen leaves and are villous- pubescent when young ; petiole short; blade thick, 15 to 20 mm. long and from 3 to 4 as wide, obovate, narrowly spatulate or elliptic, narrowed from about the middle to the acute or wedge- shaped base, usually somewhat narrowed towards the obtuse and mucronate or truncate apex, entire or with a few inconspicuous teeth towards the apex; margin inrolled, upper surface green, impressed above the veins, soft-pubescent, lower surface covered with a dense whitish tomentum ; principal veins prominent on the under surface, forming a very small angle with the midrib, usually deflected upward as they approach the margin, villous with spread- ing silky hairs, lesser veins obscure; flowers much as in C. parvi- folius ; calyx-tube 5 to 8 mm..long in fruit; tail of achene 3 to 5 em. long. This plant is certainly a distinct species. In C. parvifolius the bark is usually of a lighter gray; the leaves thinner, less rigid, broadly obovate wedge-shaped, conspicuously serrate from about the middle upward, rounded or truneate at the broad apex, the upper surface less pubescent and less furroughed by the impression of the veins; the veins beneath less villous, much less prominent, forming a mucl greater angle with the midrib and not deflected upward as they approach the margin; the fruiting calyx-tube is about twice as long and proportionally wider, and the tail to the acheneistwiceaslongormore. ‘‘ The heartis as hard as ebony—is ' worked by a file, as it seems too hard for the plane. I have seen none more than fifteen feet high and six inches in diameter, usually less. Grows in clumps like thealder.’’—Wilcox. -Appears to flower twice in the same season, in March—May, and again in August. Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Dr, Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. The common species in New Mexico and Arizona. Cowania Mexicana D. Don, Trans. Linn. Soc. 14: 575 (1825). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache ; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Fallugia paradoxa (Don) Torr. Emory’s Rep. 140 (1848). Geum ciliatum Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 352 (1814). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. LUETKEA C4SFPITOSA ELATIOR (8. Wats.) Britton. Spirea cespitosa elatior 8S. Wats. Bot. King’s Rep. 81 (1871). Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Cajon. : Potentilla glandulosa Lindl. Bot. Reg. 19: ¢ 1583 (1833)? Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Potentilla Thurbert A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad, (II.) 5: 318 (1855). Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft, Apache. . 32 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 22, Prunus salicifolia H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 6: 241 (1823). Rosa Fendlert Crépin, Prim. Mon. Ros. Fase. 4, 452 (1876). Rusvus DELICIOsSUS NEO-MExIcANUS (A. Gray) Kearney. R. Neo-Mexicanus A. Gray, Pl. Wright, 2: 55 (1853). Leaves larger than in R. deliciosus Torr., more deeply 3-lobed, some- times obscurely 5-lobed ; pubescence of leaves, petioles and stems more villous; calyx and peduncles somewhat more glandular, Typical &. deliciosus is a more northern plant. Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuea ; Dr. Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. Spirea dumosa Nutt. ; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 416 (1840). LEGUMINOS&., Acacia constricta Benth. ; A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 66 (1852). A peculiar form (the same as 327b of the Mexican Boundary collection) with much reduced leaves on very short petioles, smaller heads on shorter peduncles and smaller spines, was also collected by Dr. Wilcox. Acacia filicoides (Cav.) Trel.; Branner & Cov., Rep. Geol. Surv. Ark. (for 1888) 4: 178 (1891). Acacia Greggit A. Gray Pl. Wright. 1: 65 (1852). Acacia sp. Near A. filicoides, but larger in every way, the rachis of the leaf bearing prickles. Acuan Jamesti (T. & G.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 158 (1891). Amorpha fruticosa L. Sp. Pl. 713 (1753). ANNESLEA ERIOPHYLLA (Benth.) Britton. Calliandra ertophylla Benth. ; Hook., Lond. Journ. Bot. 3: 105 (1844). ANNESLEA RETICULATA (A. Gray) Britton. Calliandra reticulata A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 58 (1853). Astragalus Artizonicus A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 398 (1868). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache ; Dr. Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Astragalus Brandegei Porter; Porter & Coult. Fl. Col. 24 (1874). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Astragalus mollissimus Torr. Aun. Lye. N. Y. 2: 178 (1828). Astragalus scaposus A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 366 (1878). BRITTONAMRA SERICEA (A. Gray) Kearney. Cracca Hdwardsti sericea A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 201 (1882). Cracca sericea A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 19 : 74 (1883-84). Cassia bauhinioides A. Gray, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist. 6: 180 (1850). Cassia calycioides DC. ; Colladon, Hist. Cass. 125 (1816). Cassia leptocarpa Benth., Linnea 22: 528 (1849). Cassia Lindheimeriana Scheele, Linnzea 21: 457 (1848). Cologania longifolia A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 35 (1853). Cracca leucantha (H.B.K.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 175 (1891). Cracca purpurea L. Sp. Pl. 752 (1753). Tephrosia tenella A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 36 (1853). Crotalaria lupulina H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 6: 402 (1823). C. pumila Orteg. Hort. Matr. 23 (1800) ? Crotalaria rotundifolia (Walt.) Poir. in Lam. Encyel. Suppl. 2: 402 1811) ? Réot eal ; leaves less rounded ; raceme short-peduncled. ERYTHRINA FLABELLIFORMIS Kearney. E. coralloides A, Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 5: 301 (1855), not DC. ‘‘Shrub or small tree, from five to ten feet high ;’’ stems white with a minute velvety canescence when young; armed with stout, 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 33 slightly curved prickles about 6 mm. long, solitary below the axils of the leaves ; leaves trifoliolate ; petioles 6 to 8 em. long, canescent when young and usually bearing 1 to 5 small recurved prickles ; leaflets firm and thickish, 4cm. to 6 cm. long, 4 to 7 cm. wide, usually broader than long, flabelliform or deltoid-ovate, rounded at apex, truncate or cuneate at base, the terminal ona petiolule 35 to 45 mm. long, the lateral on petiolules 5 to 8 mm. long, upper surface smooth, lower surface minutely pubescent, veins reticulated, conspicuous on both surfaces ; flowers crowded in short terminal racemes, numerous, borne on short, velvety- canescent pedicels ; calyx 8 to 9 cm. long, campanulate, truncate, usually somewhat oblique, white-tomentose ; corolla bright scarlet, the vexillum alone projecting beyond the calyx, about 4 cm. long, linear-oblong, narrowed at both ends, straight or more usually somewhat falecate ; stamens ten, filaments united the greater part of their length ; legume linear, torose, narrowed at both ends, borne on a stipe about 3 em. long, tipped with the persistent style for about the same length, minutely and densely tomentose ; seeds oval, 10 to 15 mm. long, bright scarlet with a large whitish hilum. Referred with hesitation to #. coralloides DC.* by Dr. Gray and by Torrey.+ It differs, however, from the destription in the Pro- dromus and from Mocino’s figure (fora tracing of which we are indebted to the kindness of M. Casimir DeCandolle) in the pres- ence of prickles on the petiole; in the shape and size of the leaflets, those of #. coralloides being ovate, rounded at base and acutish at apex, smaller and the ’petiolule of the terminal one shorter ; in the much larger calyx; in the legume which is de- scribed by DeCandolle as smooth and which the figure represents with a shorter stipe and beak; and in the hilum of the seed, the margin of which is hardly black. Galactia Wrightti A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 44 (1852). G. tephrodes A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 34 (1853). A careful comparison of the types and original descriptions of these two forms has led to the conclusion that they are not specifically distinct. Glycyrrhiza lepidota Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 480 (1814). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Hoffmanseggia Falcaria stricta (Benth.) Fisher, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 1: 144 (1892). KUHNISTERA OCCIDENTALIS A. A. Heller. Petalostemon candidus occidentalis A. Gray, ined. **Perennial, from a stout branching root; stem erect, branching, 1-2 ft. high, smooth ; leaflets usually two pairs, oblong-linear, usu- aliy a half-inch or less in length, very narrow, thickly dotted be- neath ; heads short-peduncled, narrowly cylindrical, usually from two to four times as long as broad; bracts early deciduous, but rachis covered with filament-like bractlets ; calyx tube smooth, the short triangular lanceolate green lobes ciliate ; flowers white ; ovary smooth, strongly keeled on the back. * Prodr. 2: 413 (1825); Moc. & Sessé, Ic. Fl. Mex. ¢. 253, ined. + Bot. Mex. Bound. Sury. 50 (1859). TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. ScI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 2, Jan. 26, 1895. 34 TRANSACTIONS OF THE j [oct. 22, Apparently growing in very dry ground, as all the specimens seen, ranging from Nebraska to Mexico, have the leaflets folded showing only the lower side. This is the 'Petalostemon candidus var. occidentalis Gray, on Pringle’s labels} but never described nor published.’’ Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Lathyrus decaphyllus Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 471 (1814). Lathyrus graminifolius (S. Wats. ) White, Bull. Torr. Club, 21: 454 (1894). Lotus humistratus (Benth. ) Greene, Pitt. 2: 139 (1890). Lotus mollis Greene, Pitt. 2: 143 (1890). | Lotus puberulus (Benth. ) Greene, Pitt. 2: 142 (1890). Lotus Wrightii (A. Gray) Greene, Pitt. 2: 143 (1890). Lupinus argenteus Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 468 (1814). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Lupinus concinnus Agardh, Syn. Lup. 6 (1835). Lupinus Sitgreavesii S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 8: 527 (1873). Medicago denticulata Willd. Sp. Pl. 3: 1414 (1803). Meibomia batocaulis (A. Gray) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 197 (1891). Meibomia Neo-Mexicana (A. Gray) Kuntze, Rey. Gen. Pl. 198 (1891). Mimosa acanthocarpa (Willd. ) Benth. Hook. Journ. Bot. 4: 409 (1842). ? Mimosa biuncifera Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 12 (1839).? Mimosa dysocarpa Benth.; A. Gray, Pl. SL ee AG2 (1852). Mimosa Grahami A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 52 (1853). Mimosa Lindheimeri A. Gray, Bost. Journ. “Nat. Hist. 6: 181 (1850). PAROSELA ALBIFLORA (A. Gray) A. M. Vail. Dalea albiflora A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 38 (1853). Parosela aurea (Nutt. ) Britton, Mem. Torr. Club, 5: 196 (1894). PAROSELA ean (@orr:*) a M. Vail. Dalea formosa Torr. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 2: 177 (1828). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. PAROSELA POGONATHERA (A. Gray) A. M. Vail. Dalea pogonathera A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 31 (1849). PAROSELA RUBESCENS (S. Wats.) A. M. Vail. Dalea rubescens 8. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 369 (1881-82). PAROSELA WISLIZENI (A. Gray) A. M. Vail. Dalea Wislizeni A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 32 (1849). PHACA THURBERI (A. Gray) Kearney. Astragalus Thurberi A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (IT.) 5: 312 (1855). Phaseolus atropurpureus Moc.; DC. Prodr. 2: 395 (1825). Phaseolus retusus Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 11 (1839). Phaseolus rotundifolius A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 34 (1853). Phaseolus Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright. ‘L: 43 (1852). Prosopis juliflora (Sw. ) DC. Prodr. 2: 447 (1825). Rhynchosia Texana Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 687 (1840). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Robinia Neo-Mexicana A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 5: 314 (1855). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Sophora sericea Nutt. Gen. 1: 280 (1818). Thermopsis montana Nutt.; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 388 (1840). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Trifolium involucratum Willd. Sp. Pl. 3: 1372 (1803). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. What appears to be an abnormal form of this species with broader leaflets and involucre cleft almost to the base into linear segments, was col- lected by Dr. Wilcox near Ft. Huachuca. Vicia linearis (Nutt. ) Greene, Fl. Francis. 3 (1891). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 30 Vicia pulchella H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 6: 499. t. 583 (1823). Zornia diphylla reticulata Benth.; Mart. Fl. Bras. 15: Pt. 1, 80. t. 21, 22 (1870). GERANIACE. Geranium cespitosum James; Torr. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 2: 173 (1828). : OXALIDACE. Oxalis decaphylla H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 5: 238 (1821). Oxalis divergens Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 9 (1839). Oxalis Wrightti A. ‘Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 27 (1852). LINACE. Linum aristatum Engelm. Wisliz. Mem. Tour. N. Mex. 101 (1848). Linum Lewisii Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 210 (1814). Linum Neo-Mexicanum Greene; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 6: 183 (1881). MALPIGHIACE®. Aspicarpa longipes A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 37 (1852). Janusia gracilis A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 37 (1852). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. ZYGOPHYLLACE®. Larrea Mexicana Moric. Pl. Nouv. Am. 71 (1833-46). - Tribulus grandiflorus ( Torr.) S. Wats. Bibl. Ind. 1: 149 (1878). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. Tribulus maximus L. Sp. Pl. 386 (1753). Mas. Hoyt, San Carlos; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. RUTACEZ. Ptelea angustifolia Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 9 (1839). POLYGALACE. Krameria parvifolia Benth. Bot. Sulph. 6. ¢. 7 (1844). Leaves larger than in the ordinary form. Polygala alba Nutt. Gen. 2: 87 (1818). Polygala hemipterocarpa A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 31 (1853). Polygala puberula A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 40 (1852). EUPHORBIACE®. Acalypha Lindheimeri Muell. Arg. Linnza, 34: 47 (1865-66). Croton corymbulosus Engelm.; Rothr. Bot. Wheeler Rep. 242 (1878). Croton Texensis (K1.) Muell. Arg. in DC. Prodr. 15: Pt. 2, 692 (1862). Mrs. Hoyt, Et. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, San Carlos. Euphorbia albomarginata Torr. & Gray, Pacif. R. R. Rep. 2: 174 (1856). Euphorbia bilobata Engelm.; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 190 (1859). Euphorbia campestris Cham. & Schlecht. Linnzea, 5: 84 (1830). Euphorbia cuphosperma Boiss. in DC. Prodr. 15: Pt. 2, 73 (1862). Euphorbia exstipulata Engelm.; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 189 (1859). Euphorbia hypericifolia L. Sp. Pl. 454 (1753). Euphorbia schizoloba Engelm. Proc. Am. Acad. 5: 173 (1862). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Euphorbia serpyllifolia Pers. Syn. 2: 14 (1807). Jatropha macrorhiza Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 8 (1839). Tragia stylaris Muell. Arg. in DC. Prodr. 15: Pt. 2, 930 (1862). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. 36 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oon: 22; MALVACEA. Abutilon parvulum A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 21 (1852). Ebert, San Carlos; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Anoda hastata Cay. Diss. 1: 38, t. 11, f. 2 (1785). Hibiscus denudatus Benth. Bot. Sulph. 7. ¢. 3 (1844). Sida diffusa HBK. Noy. Gen. et Sp. 5: 257 (1821). Sida physocalyx A. Gray, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist. 6: 163 (1857). Sida spinosa angustifolia (Lam. ) Griseb. Fl. Brit. W. Ind. 74 (1859). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Spheralcea angustifolia (Cav. ) Spach, Hist. Veg. 3: 353 (1834). GUTTIFER®. Hypericum formosum HBK. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 5: 196 (1821). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. ; TAMARICACES. Fouquiera splendens Engeln,; Wisliz. Mem. Tour. N. Mex. 98 (1848). BIXACES. Amoreuxia Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 26 (1853). VIOLACER. Calceolaria verticillata (Ort.) Kuntze, Rey. Gen. Pl. 41 (1891). Viola obliqua Hill, Hort. Kew. 316 (1769). ANACARDIACE. Rhus glabra li. Sp. Pl. 265 (1753). Rhus radicans L. Sp. Pl. 266 (1753). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. Rhus trilobata Nutt.; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 219 (1838-40). Ebert, San Carlos; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Rhus virens Lindh.; A. Gray, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist. 159 (1857). Ebert, Ft. Grant; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. ACERACE#. Acer grandidentatum Nutt.; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1: 247 (1838-40). SAPINDACE. Sapindus marginatus Willd. Enum. 432 (1809). RHAMNACER. Ceanothus Fendleri A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 29 (1849). Ceanothus Greggti A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 28 (1853). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Ceanothus integerrimus Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 329 (1841). Rhamnus Purshianus DC. Prodr. 2: 25 (1825). Zizyphus obtusifolia (Hook.) A. Gray, Ill. Gen. Am. 2: 170, ¢. 163 (1849). VITACE®. Parthenocissus quinquefolia (L.) Planch. in DC. Mon. Phan. 5: Pt. 2, 447 (1887). Vitis Arizonica Engelm.; Parry, Am. Nat. 2: 268 (1875). 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 37 LOASACE®. Mentzelia albicaulis Dougl.; Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 222 (1833). Mentzelia aspera L. Sp. Pl. 516 (1753). Mentzelia Wrightii A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 48 (1849). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. CACTACE.* Cactus radiosus Neo-Mexicanus (Engelm.) Coult. Cereus dasyacanthus Engelm. Cereus Fendlert Engelm. Cereus pectinatus Engelm. Cereus pectinatus armatus Poselg. Cereus polyacanthus Engelm. Cereus stramineus Engelm. Echinocactus Wislizent Lecontet Engelm. Opuntia arborescens Engelm. Opuntia arbuscula Engelm. Opuntia leptocaulis vaginata (Engelm.) Coult. Opuntia mesacantha Raf. Opuntia Whipplet Engelm. Opuntia Whipplet spinosior Engelm, LYTHRACE®. Parsonsta WriGuHTII (A. Gray) Kearney. Cuphea Wrightit A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 56 (1853). Lythrum alatum linearifolium A. Gray, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. 6: 188 (1857). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs, Hoyt, Ft. Apache. _ CENOTHERACE®. Anogra albicaulis (Pursh) Britton, Mem. Torr. Club, 5: 234 (1894). CHAMISSONIA CONTORTA PUBENS (S. Wats.) Kearney (nothera contorta pubens Coy. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 4: 104 (1893). Epilobium adenocaulon perplecans Trel. 2d Ann. Rep. Mo. Bot. Gard. 96 (1891)? Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, Tanner’s Cafion; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Galpinsia Hartwegi ( Benth. ) Britton, Mem. Torr. Club, 5: 236 (1894). Wil- cox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, Tanner’s Cafion. Gaura coccinea Nutt. Gen. 1: 249 (1818). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Huachuca. Gaura parviflora Dougl.; Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 208 (1833). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Gaura suffulta Engelm.; A. Gray, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist. 6: 190 (1850). Gaura villosa Torr. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 2: 200 (1828). Lavauxia triloba ( Nutt.) Spach, Hist. Vege. 4: 367 (1835). Meriolix serrulata ( Nutt.) Walp. Rep. 2: 79 (1843). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Onagra biennis (L.) Scop. Fl. Carn. Ed. 2, 1: 269 (1772). Pachylophus cspitosa ( Nutt.) Raimann in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pfl. 3: Abt. 7, 215 (1893). XYLOPLEURUM ROSEUM ( Ait.) Raimann in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pfl. 3: Abt. 7, 214 (1893). (Enothera rosea Ait. Hort. Kew. 2: 3 (1789). Zauschneria latifolia ( Hook. f.) Greene, Pitt. 1: 25 (1887). * Determined by Mr. Edwin B. Uline. 38 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 22, ARALIACE®. Aralia humilis Cay. Ic. 4: 7, t. 313 (1797). UMBELLIFER&. Cauealis microcarpa Hook & Arn. Bot. Beechey, 348 (1841). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Cymopterus montanus purpurascens A. Gray, Ives’ Rep. 15 (1861). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Eryngium Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 78 (1852). CORNACER. x Cornus stolonifera Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 92 (1803). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Garrya Wrightii Torr. Pacif. R. R. Rep. 4: 136 (1856). ERICACE®. Arbutus Arizonica (A. Gray) Sargent, Gard. & Forest 4: 317 (1891). Arctostaphylos pungens HBK. Noy. Gen. et Sp. 3: 278 (1818). PRIMULACE®. Androsace occidentalis Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 137 (1814). Dodecatheon pauciflorum (Durand) Greene, Pitt. 2: 72 (1890). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. OLEACE. Frazxinus Pennsylvanica Marsh. Arb. Am. 51 (1785). Fraxinus velutinosa Torr. Emory Rep. 149 (1848). Menodora scabra A. Gray, Am. Journ. Sci. (IL.) 14: 44 (1852). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. : GENTIANACE. Erythrea calycosa Buckl. Proc. Acad. Phila. 1862, 7 (1862). Gentiana microcalyx Lemmon; A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 222 (1882). Gentiana serrata Gunner, Fl. Norveg. 10 (1766). Mrs. Major Haskell, Tan- ner’s Canon. APOCYNACE. Apocynum cannabinum L. Sp. Pl. 213 (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. , Macrosiphonia brachysiphon (Torr.) A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 83 (1878). ASCLEPIADACE. Asclepias brachystephana Engeln.; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 163 (1859). Asclepias involucrata Engeln.; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 163 (1859). Aselepias longicornu Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 24 (1840). Asclepias Mexicana Cay. Ie. 1: 42, t. 58 (1791). Asclepias nummularia Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 163 (1859). Asclepias quinquedentata A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 71 (1876). Asclepias speciosa Torr. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 2: 218 (1828). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Asclepias tuberosa L. Sp. Pl. 217 (1753). Asclepiodora decumbens (Nutt.) A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 66 (1877) Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuea. 1894. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 39 CONVOLVULACES. Convolvulus incanus Vahl, Symb. 3: 23 (1794). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wil- cox, Ft. Huachuca. Evolvulus Arizonicus A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 218 (1878). Evolvulus letus A. Gray, Proce. Am. Acad. 17: 228 (1882). Evolvulus sericeus discolor A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. Ed. 2, 2: Pt. 1, 436 (1886). Ipomea coccinea L. Sp. Pl. 160 (1753). Ipomeea costellata Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 49 (1859). Ipomea leptotoma Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 150 (1859). Ipomea longifolia Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 16 (1839). Ipomea Mexicana A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 210 (1878). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuea. Ipomea muricata Cav. Ie. 5: 52, t. 478, f. 2 (1799). Ipomea Thurberi A. Gray. Whole plant sparsely hairy. CUSCUTACE2. Cuscuta Californica longiloba Engelm. Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci. 1: 498 (1860). Cuscuta indecora Choisy, Cuse. 182, ¢.-3, f. 3 (1841). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. POLEMONTACE ®. Gilia aqggregata (Pursh) Spreng. Syst. 1: 626 (1825). Gilia floccosa A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 8: 272 (1870). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos; Wilcox, Huachuca. Gilia floribunda A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 8: 267 (1870). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Gilia gracilis Hook. Bot. Mag. t. 2924 (1829). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Gilia inconspicua sinuata (Dougl.) A. Gray, Proc.’ Am. Acad. 8: 278 (1870). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Gilia longiflora (Torr.) Don, Gard. Dict. 4: 245 (1838). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. : Gilia Thurberi A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 223 (1882). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, Tanner’s Cafion. : Linanthus aureus (Nutt.) Greene, Pitt. 2: 257 (1892). Mrs. Hoyt, Fort Apache, San Carlos. Phlox speciosa Woodhousei A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 8: 256 (1870). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. HYDROPHYLLACE. Phacelia heterophylla Pursh, Fl. Am: Sept. 1: 140 (1814). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. BORAGIN ACE. Amsinckia echinata A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 10: 54 (1875). Amsinckia spectabilis Fisch. & Mey. Ind. Sem. Hort. Petrop. 2: 26 (1836). Heliotropium phyllostachyum Torr. Bot. Mexs Bound, 137 (1859). Lappula Texana (Scheele) Britton, Mem. Torr. Club 5: 273 (1894). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Lithospermum angustifolium Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 130 (1803). Lithospermum Cobrense Greene, Coult. Bot. Gaz. 6: 157 (1881). Onosmodium Thurberi A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 205 (1878). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Oreocarya suffruticosa (Torr. ) Greene, Pitt. 1: 57 (1887). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. 40 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [oct. 22, BERBENACE®. Lippia Wrightii A..Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 126 (1859). Dr. Ebert, Ft. Grant. Verbena bipinnatifida Nutt. Journ. Acad. Phila. 2: 123 (1821). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Verbena bracteosa brevibracteata A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 336 (1878). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Verbena cancescens HBK. Noy. Gen. et. Sp. 2: 274, ¢. 136 (1817). Ebert, San Carlos; Wilcox, Huachuca. : Verbena polystachya HBK. Nov. Gen. et. Sp. 2: 274 (1817). Verbena remota Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 21 (1839). LABIATZ. Clinopodium vulgare L. Sp. Pl. 587 (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Dracocephalum parviflorum Nutt. Gen. 2: 35 (1818). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Hedeoma hyssopifolia A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 11: 96 (1875). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, San Carlos. Hedeoma plicata Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 130 (1859). Mentha Canadensis Li. Sp. Pl. sak (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Monarda citriodora Cery.; Lag. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 2 (1816). Monarda scabra Beck, Am. cet Sci. 10: 260 (1826). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Salvia Lemmoni A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 20: 309 (1885). Salvia subincisa Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 20 (1859). Scutellaria resinosa Torr. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 2: 232 (1828). Stachys coccinea Jacq. Hort. Schoenb. 3: 18, ¢. 284 (1798). Tetraclea Coulteri A. Gray, Am. Journ. Sci. (II. ) 16: 98 (1853). Teucrium occidentale A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 349 (1878). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Trichostema Arizonicum A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 8: 371 (1872). SOLANACE. Chamesaracha Coronopus (Dunal) A: Gray, Bot. Calif. 1: 540 (1876). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Datura meteloides DC. Prodr. 13: Pt. 1, 544 (1852). Lycium pallidum Miers, U1. 8. Am. Pl. "9: 108, t. 67 (1849-57). Margaranthus solanceus 'Schlecht. Hort. Hal. Fase. 1, 1 (1841). Physalis Fendleri A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 10: 66 (187 3D). Unusually tall, leaves unusually large. Solanum eleagnifolium Cav. Ie. 3: 22, t. 243 (1794). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Solanum Jamesii Torr. Ann. Lye. N. Y. 2: 227 (1827). Solanum nigrum Douglasii (Dunal) A. Gray, Bot. Calif. 1 : 538 (1876). Solanum Fendleri A. Gray, Am. Fourn. Sci. (II. ) 22 : 285 (1856-7). S. tuberosum var. boreale A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 227 (1878). SCROPHULARIACE. C astilleia integra A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 119 (1859). Ebert, Tan- ner’s Canon ; W ileox, Ft. Huachuca. Gerardia Wrightii A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 118 (1859). Linaria Canadensis (L.) Dumont, Bot. Cult. 2: 96 (1802). 1894. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 41 Maurandia antirrhiniflora (Poir.) Willd. Hort. Berol. ¢. 83 (1816). Ebert, San Carlos. Mimulus guttatus DC. Cat. Monsp. 127 (1813). Mimulus Lewisti Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 427 (1814). Mimulus rubellus A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 116 (1859). Orthocarpus purpurascens Palmeri A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am, 2: Pt. 1, 300 (1878). Pedicularis centranthera A. Gray; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 120 (1859). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Pentstemon barbatus (Cav.) Nutt. Gen. 2: 53 (1818). Wilcox, Ft. Hua- chuca; Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. Pentstemon dasyphyllus A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 112 (1859). Pentstemon spectabilis Thurber; A. Gray, Pacif. R. R. Rep 4: 119 (1856). _ Form with corolla minutely glandular-puberulent. Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. 4 Pentstemon stenophyllus A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 112 (1859). Veronica Americana Schwein.; Benth. in DC. Prodr. 10: 468 (1846). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Veronica peregrina L. Sp. Pl. 14 (1753). OROBANCHACE®. Orobanche Ludoviciana Nutt. Gen. 2:58(1818). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. BIGNONIACE. Chilopsis linearis (Cav.) DC. Prodr. 9 : 227 (1845). ACANTHACE. Anisacanthus Thurbert (Torr.) A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 328 (1878). Calophanes decumbens A. Gray, Syn. Fl]. N. Am. 2: Pt. 1, 325 (1878). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuea. PLANTAGINACES. Plantago Purshii R. & §. Syst. 3: 120 (1818). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca ; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. RUBIACE 4. Bouvardia triphylla Salisb. Parad. Lond. t. 88 (1807). Diodia teres angustata A. Gray, Syn. F). N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 35 (1884). Galium asperrimum A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 60 (1849). *Galium Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright, 1: 80 (1852). : Houstonia Wrightit A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 202 (1882). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. CAPRIFOLIACE. Lonicera albiflora Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am.-2: 6 (1841-48). Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. Lonicera ciliosa (Pursh) Poir. in Zam. Encyel. Suppl. 5: 612 (1817). Sambucus Mexicana Presl; DC. Prodr. 4 : 322 (1830). VALERIANACE 2. Valeriana Arizonica A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad, 19: 81 (1883). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. 42 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocT. 22, CAMPANULACE. Lobelia splendens Willd. Hort. Berol. ¢. 86 (1816). Lobelia fenestralis Cav. Ic. 6: 8, t. 512-(1801). CUCURBITACE. Apodanthera undulata A. Gray, Pl. Wright, 2: 60 (1853). Cucarbita fetidissima HBK. Nov. Gen. 2: 128 (1817) ? COMPOSIT A. Achillea Millefolium L. Sp. Pl. 899 (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Actinella biennis A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 13: 373 (1878). Agoseris heterophylla ( Nutt.) Greene, Pitt. 2: 178 (1891). Ambrosia psilostachya DC. Prodr. 5: 526 (1836). Antennaria dioica (L.) Gaertn. Fruct. et Sem. 2: 410 (1791). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache ; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Aplopappus laricifolius A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 80 (1853). Artemisia Ludoviciana Nutt. Gen. 2: 148 (1818). A small-leaved form, same as Wright’s No. 1276 from New Mexico. Aster ericwfolius tenuis A. Gray, Syo. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 198 (1884). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Aster evilis Ell. Sk. 2: 344 (1824). Aster Lemmoni A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 199 (1884). Aster multiflorus Ait. Hort. Kew. 3: 205 (1789). Aster tanacetifolius HBK. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 4: 95 (1820). Baccharis Bigelorii A. Gray; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 84 (1859). Baccharis glutinosa Pers. Syn. 2: 425 (1807). Baccharis ramulosa (DC.) A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 5: 301 (1855). Bahia absinthifolia dealbata A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 121 (1852). Bahia dissecta (A. Gray) Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 8: 68 (1889). Baileya pleniradiata Harv. & Gray; A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 105 (1849). BAILEYA PLENIRADIATA MULTIRADIATA (Harv. & Gray) Kearney. B. multiradiata Harv. & Gray; A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 106 (1849). ; B. multiradiata var. nudieaulis A. Gray, Syn, Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 318 (1884). Berlandiera lyrata Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 17 (1839). Berlandiera lyrata macrophylla A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 248 (1884). Smaller leaved than the type of the variety, the leaves spatulate- oblong, obtuse and crenulate, some of them lyrate at the base. Bidens Bigelevit A. Gray ; Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. 91 (1859). Bidens tenuisecta A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 86 (1849). Carduus Neo-Mexicanus (A. Gray), Greene, Proc. Acad. Sci. Phila. 1892, 362 (1893). Carduus ochrocentrus (A. Gray), Greene, Proe. Acad. Sci. Phila. 1892, 363 (1893). Carduus Rothrockii (A. Gray), Greene, Proc. Acad. Sci. Phila. 1892, 363 (1893) ? Carminatia tenuiflora DC. in Deless. Ic. Sel. 4: 42, ¢. 98 (1839). Carphochete Bigelovit A. Gray, Pl. Wright, 1: 89 (1852). 1894. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 43 Centaurea Americana Nutt. Journ. Acad. Phila. 2: 117 (1821). Chrysopsis Rutteri (Rothr.) Greene, Erythea 2: 96 (1894). Coleosanthus betonicefolius (A. Gray) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 328 (1891). Coleosanthus floribundus (A. Gray), Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 328 (1891). Coleosanthus simplex (A. Gray), Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 328 (1891). Coleosanthus squamulosus (A. Gray) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 528 (1891). COLEOSANTHUS WRiGuHTII (A. Gray) Britton. Brickellia Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 72 (1853). C. Californicus Wrightii Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 328 (1891). Wilcox, _ Ft. Huachuea; Ebert, Tanner’s Canon. Cosmos parviflorus ( Willd.) H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 4: 241 (1820). Crassina grandiflora (Nutt. ) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 331 (1891). Crassina pumila (A. Gray) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 351 (1891). Erigeron asper Nutt. Gen. 2: 147 (1818). Erigeron Bellidiastrum Nutt. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. (II.) 7: 307 (1841). Erigeron Canadensis L. Sp. Pl. 865 (1753). Erigeron concinnus (H. & A.) Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 2: 174 (1841- 43). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Erigeron flugellaris A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 68 (1849). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Huachuca. Erigeron macranthus Nutt. Trans. Am Phil. Soe. (II.) 7: 310 (1841). Erigeron Neo-Mexicanus A. Gray, Pro». Am. Acad. 19: 2 (1883). Eriocarpum gracile (Nutt.) Greene, Erythea, 2: 109 (1894). Eriocarpum spinulosum (Pursh) Greene, Erythea, 2: 108 (1894). Eupatorium occidentale Arizonicum A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 101 (1884). ; E. ageratifolium var. (?) herbaceum A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 74 (1853). We do not take up the older name of this plant because we suspect it to be specifically distinct from the 2. occidentale of Hooker. Eupatorium purpureum L. Sp. Pl. 838 (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Eupatorium Wrightit A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 87 (1852). Flourensia cernua DC. Prodr. 5: 593 (1836), Leaves pellucid-punctate. -Gaertneria tenuifolia (A. Gray) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. PI. 339 (1891). Gaillardia Arizonica A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 353 (1884). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Gaillardia pinnatifida Torr. Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 2: 214 (1828). Gaillardia pulchella Foug. Mém. Acad. Sci. Par. 1786, 5 (1788). Mrs. Hoyt, San Carlos. Gnaphalium Sprengelii Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 150 (1841). Gutierrezia Sarothre (Pursh) Britton & Rusby, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 7: 10 (1887-88). Gymnolomia multiflora (Nutt.) Benth. & Hook.; Rothr., Wheeler Rep. 160 (1878). Gymnolomia triloba A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 217 (1882). Helenium Thurberi A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 19: 32 (1883). Helianthus petiolaris Nutt. Journ. Acad. Phila. 2: 115 (1821). Heliopsis parvifolia A. Gray, Pl. Wright, 2: 86 (1853). Heterosperma pinnata Cav. Ic. 3: 34, t. 267 (1794). Hieracium carneum Greene ; Coult. Bot. Gaz. 6: 184 (1881). Hieracium Fendleri discolor A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 19: 69 (1883). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Hymenopappus flavescens A, Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 97 (1849). Hymenothrix Wislizent A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad, (II.) 4: 102 (1849). & ad TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 22, Hymenothrix Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 97 (1853). Kuhnia rosmarinifolia Vent. Hort. Cels. t. 92 (1800). Leucampyx Newberryi A. Gray; Port. & Coult. Fl. Col. 77 (1874).* Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Malacothria Fendlert A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 104 (1853). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Malacothrix glabrata (Eaton) A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 422 (1884). Melampodium cinereum DC. Prodr. 5: 518 (1836). Melampodium hispidum H.B.K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. 4: 273, #. 399 (1820). Microseris linearifolia (DC.) A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 9: 211 (1874). Pectis filipes Harv. & Gray; A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 62 (1849), Pectis imberbis A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 70 (1853). Pectis longipes A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 69 (1853). Pectis prostrata Cav. Ic. 4: 12, t. 824 (1797). Perityle coronopifolia A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 82 (1853). Perezia nana A. Gray, Mem. Acad. (II.) 4: 111 (1849). Perezia Wrightii A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 127 (1852). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Ptiloria Thurberi (A. Gray) Greene, Pitt. 2: 133 (1890). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache;. Wilcox, Huachuca. Rudbeckia columnaris Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 575 (1814). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Rudbeckia laciniata L. Sp. Pl. 906 (1753). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wil- cox, Ft. Huachuca. Sanvitalia Aberti A. Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. (II.) 4: 87 (1849). Schkuhria Wrightti A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 95 (1853). 3 Senecio Douglasti DC. Prodr. 6: 429 (1837). Senecio Hartwegi Benth. Pl. Hartweg. 18 (1840). Senecio Neo-Mexicanus A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 19: 55 (1883). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca. Senecio Toluccanus microdontus A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 388 (1884). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache. Solidago Bigelovit A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad: 16: 80 (1880). Solidago Canadensis canescens A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad.. 17: 197 (1882). Wilcox, Ft. Huachuca; Ebert, Tanner’s Cafion. Sonchus asper Vill. Hist. Pl. Dauph. 3: 158 (1789). Stevia serrata Cav. Ic. 4: 33, t. 345 (1797). Stylocline micropodoides A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 84 (1853). Thelesperma gracile (Torr. & Gray) A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 109 (1852). Mrs. Hoyt, Ft. Apache; Wilcox. Ft. Huachuca. Townsendia Rothrockit A. Gray; Rothr., Wheeler Rep. 6: 148 (1878). Mrs. Hoyt. Ft. Apache. Verbesina encelioides (Cav.) A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 288 (1884). Viguiera cordifolia A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 1: 107 (1852). Viguiera helianthoides HBK. Nov. Gen. et. Sp. 4: 226 (1820). Xanthocephalum Benthamianum Hemsl. Bot. Centr. Am. 2: 110 (1881-82). New to the United States. ; Xanthocephaium gymnospermoides B. & H. Gen. Pl. 2: 249 (18738). Xanthocephalum Wrightii A. Gray, Proc. Am, Acad. 8: 6382 (1873). Zeamenia podocephala A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1: Pt. 2, 286 (1884). * See Bull. Torr. Club 21: 82 (1894). 1894. ] “NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 45 Prof. E. B. Wilson in the following paper summarized the results of his summer’s research in the fertilization of echino- derms. In his observations on the egg of the sea urchin, Toxopneustes variegatus, the fertilizing sperm was found to enter the egg at any point, the first plane of cleavage always passing through the point of the sperm’s contact with the egg surface. The embryonic axis does not coincide with the original egg axis, but may form any angle with it. A second result in- dicates with the utmost probability that the observations of Fol must be looked upon as untrustworthy, and that no quadrille of the centrosomes occurs. Dr. Bashford Dean gave an account of the “ Breeding habits of Lepidosteus,’ a report on his visit to Black Lake, N. Y. (May, 1894), in company with Prof. KE. B. Wilson. By artificial fertilization a complete series of developmental stages was se- cured. The results of a study of the earlier development point to closer relationship with elasmobranchs than has hitherto been believed. Prof. H. F. Osborn reported to the Academy on the Oxford meeting of the British Association. The proceedings of the Biological Section were summarized and notes were given on the present character of the researches of the English workers, and on the conservative attitude of their evolutionists in regard to natural selection. Capt. T. L. Casey exhibited a Californian hairless mouse, and referred it to the chairman for determination. The annual election of Sectional officers was then taken up. Prof. N. L. Britton was elected Chairman, and Bashford Dean, Secretary. In resigning the Chairmanship, Professor Osborn briefly ad- dressed the meeting upon the work of the past two years, and the future outlook. He pointed out that the general object in establishing the Section was to bring together workers in all departments of Biology for the presentation and discussion of Ane ‘TRANSACTIONS OF THE [ocr. 22, - such results of their researches as were of general interest and value. The Section is therefore not in any sense a rival of any of the useful existing biological societies of a more special char- acter; on the contrary, it is animated by the belief that all — have certain common ground. The subjects of the papers which have been presented to the Section during the past two years give suflicient evidence of the broad field covered,—namely, of Botany, General Zodlogy, as well as Icthyology, Cytology, Comparative Neurology, Vertebrate Paleontology, Physiology, Human and Comparative Anatomy. The general problems of Evolution and Heredity have also been discussed, especially in- the notable meeting between Professor Poulton of Oxford and Professor E. D. Cope of Philadelphia. The promise for the future is that this field will be enlarged by the addition of Bac- teriology and Miéro-Photography. The policy has been estab- lished of considering several short papers upon different branches of biology each evening, including only points of main interest and guarded by a time limit. The outlook for the future work of the Section is bright. With the rapid increase of biglogical investigation in this city contributions to the Sec- tion promise to be even more interesting and numerous than heretofore. ) The following Sectional Committee was appointed: Chair- man ex-officio, Secretary ex-officio, Prof. F. 8. Lee, Mr. C. F. Cox, Prof. H. F. Osborn. Dr. Bolton then read a short paper on the subject of the per- petuation of the names of distinguished men of science by the municipal government of Paris, in the nomenclature of the streets of that city, a large number of which commemorate the names of authors, investigators and artists in all branches of science, literature and art, not only of France, but of all nations, He emphasized the stimulus that this recognition gave to intel- lectual activity in all branches of learning,and to the good results that would follow the introduction of the same system in New York and other American cities, where, although presidents and Oe eee a ee ee ee eee 189-£.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 47 generals are thus honored, scientists, artists and writers are passed by. Meeting adjourned. BaAsHrorD DEAN, Recording Secretary of Biological Section. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. October 29th, 1894. The Academy met and listened to the first public lecture of the course for 1894-95, by Prof. J. F. Kemp, on the Mesabi Iron Range of Minnesota, illustrated by specimens and lantern views. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary: November 5th, 1894. ReGutarR Business MEETING. The Academy was called to order by President Rees, but as no quorum for the transaction of business was present the busi- ness meeting was adjourned one week. The section of Astronomy and Physics then organized, President Rees continuing in the chair, eight persons present. The minutes of the previous meeting were read and approved. The paper of the evening was then read by Prof. A. M. Mayer, “On the production of beats and beat-tones by two vibrating bodies, whose frequencies of vibration are so great as to surpass the limit of audibility.” 3 Prof. Mayer outlined the discussion as to whether such inter- ference tones were subjective or objective, maintaining that they have an actual physical existence. In the attempt to prove the objective existence of these tones it was desired to produce 48 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [nov. 12, difference-tones from two notes which are both inaudible by reason of their very high pitch. Earlier attempts were with rectangular bars, which, when struck on the corner, vibrate at one rate in one transverse direction and at another in the transverse direction perpendicular to the first. These difference-tones only last a very short time, and for this reason the method was abandoned. On taking up the subject again he was able, with specially constructed whistles, to hear the difference-tone pro- duced by two whistles, the notes of both being too high to be heard when sounded alone. Konig, of Paris, has now made a set of forks, which individually are inaudible, and yet their difference-tones are audible. The paper was discussed by Professors Pupin, Rees and Hallock. The Section then adjourned. Wm. Hatiock Recording Secretary of Section. StTateD MEETING. November 12th, 1894. Thirty-five persons present, President J. K. RExEsin the chair. The following new members were elected: Prof. Dr. BonustAv Brauner, Corresponding Member. Joun JAcoB Astor, Resident Member. J. C. PristerR, Resident Member. A motion was carried granting to the council power to make the needful arrangements for the second annual reception. In support of this measure, Prof. H. F. Osborn spoke, calling attention to the success of the last reception and urging the importance of an annual meeting which should serve the func- tion of the conversazione of the Royal Society. The Biological Section then organized with Prof. Britton in the chair. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 49 The following notes and papers were presented : Prof. N. L. Britton, “‘ Notes on some problems in plant evolu- tion.” The central position of algee was emphasized on pale- ontological grounds; pteridophytes suggesting an advancing phytum of early paleozoic origin ; bryophytes a late one. The origin of angiosperms becomes more obscure in the failure in transitional types of the plants of the Portuguese lower creta- ceous. G. N. Calkins, “A little known phenomenon in the life history of Stentor.” Free swimming embryos of S. ceruleus were noted, which were called by Biitschli (Cf. Brown, Protozoa) Lieberkuhnina. The observations of Claparede and Lachman on Stentor roeselii were thus corroborated. The following paper was then read : ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF LEPIDOPTEROUS LARVA. By Harrison G. Dyar, A. M. In a former communication to this Academy, I attempted to found a classification of lepidopterous larvee on the arrangement and modification of their tubercles; but I excluded from con- sideration the first larval stage. I propose to consider this stage now, and offer also a few supplementary notes. THE LARVAL PROLEGS. Prof. J. B. Smith has called my attention again to the arrange- ment of the crotchets on the abdominal feet of larve as classifi- catory characters of importance. But I do not find that they showas muchas the tubercles. It is characteristic of concealed feeders to. have the crotchets in a circle. and this structure has been retained in the Cossina as here defined. It has not been regained in those Noctuids which live concealed (e. g., Achato- des zex), but the character is not exclusive, since some pyralids have the ring incomplete (e. g., Mecyna reversalis), and the Drepanidz have a complete circle of crotchets.* Thus this *See Packard. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxiy., 484 (1890). The same condition is found in the feet of Falcaria bilineata. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 4, Feb. 15, 1895. 50 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [Nov. 12, character is not an “absolute diagnosis of Macro-Heterocera,” as Dr. Chapman states it to be,f at least not in the form in which it has been presented. Probably a careful study of these structures would tend to elucidate the phylogeny of the lepi- dopterous families, as in the case of any other series of charac- ters; but I am of the opinion that the subject is here more difticult, more obscured by special adaptations, than in the case of the larval tubercles. Suborder JUGATEA. Through the kindness of Dr. T. A. Chapman, I have received the larva of Micropteryx purpurella from England. The ar- Fie. 1. A SEGMENT OF MicROPTERYX PURPURELLA. rangement of its sete is shown in the figure (Fig. 1). These correspond quite well with those of Hepialus, except that the four on the base of the leg are absent; but this species of Mi- Fic. 2. A THORACIC SEGMENT OF CossuUSs cossUS, TYPICAL OF ALL FRENATA, cropteryx has no legs. It has a double dorsal shield on every segment, which may account for the unusually posterior posi- ;+ Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1893, p. 106. 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 51 tion of tuberclei. Micropteryx and Hepialus both further differ from the Frenatz in lacking the peculiar arrangement of tuber- cles on the thoracic segments which is uniform throughout that suborder (Fig. 2). In the absence of full material, I do not like to insist strongly on the the characters of the Jugatz as defined by the arrange- ment of the larval tubercles, though the species which I have examined indicate that the characters are well marked. We have now the Jugatz and Frenatz separated by good characters of venation, by the vestiture of the wings* and the larval tubercles. It is to be hoped that Dr. Chapman may yet find pupal characters which point in the same direction.+ Suborder FRENATA. During the past season I have collected the newly hatched larve of several families of this suborder, to determine the relations of the tubercles in the first stage and especially to see ~what light, if any, was thrown on the classification of the larvee by this embryonic condition. In my former paper I excluded this stage from consideration on account of its generalized con- dition; but it is evident that a consideration of it would throw light on the phylogenitic relationships of the more specialized families. This was especially desirable in the case of the Sphingide. I may say at once that my former conclusions are confirmed except in the case of the Saturnina. In this group, I find that I have misinterpreted the arrangement of the tubercles of the mature larva in two instances, one of which is important. From the newly hatched larva,it appears that the single process or wart below the spiracle is derived from tubercles iv. and v. consolidated, instead of from vy. alone, iv. having disappeared as I supposed. The structure is, therefore, the same as in the Generalized Frenatz, not that of the Specialized Frenate. This conclusion is extremely interesting, as it tends to remove the only serious contradiction between my classification of the larvee and Prof. J. H. Comstock’s one of the moths. It will be remembered that I placed the Lacosomide among the General- ized Frenatz, while Prof. Comstock placed them among the Saturnina. The change which I must make in the position which I have assigned to the Saturnina brings them into the same line of descent with the Lacosomidz and greatly lessens the apparent contradiction, though it does not entirely re- move it. / *V.L. Kellogg, Kansas Univ. Quarterly, III. 45-89 (1894). +See his paper on Pupee, loc. cit., pp. 97-119. 52 TRANSACTIONS OF THE’ [Nov. 12, The generalized condition of tubercles in the first larval stage of the higher families is like the mature condition in the lower ones, except that throughout tubercle vi. is lacking on the ab- dominal segments. It thus appears that this tubercle is a secondary one, which I had not suspected from the study of the mature larva alone. The primitive arrangement of the five primary setz is represented in the accompanying cut (Fig. 3). Fig. 3. SEGMENT OF Wisoniades icelus IN First LARVAL STAGE SHOW- ING THE PRIMITIVE ARRANGEMENT OF SET. Curiously, the most generalized condition is exhibited in the first stage of the Butterflies (Rhopalocera). This is to be accounted for by the fact which was brought out by a compari- son of the first stage of such genera as Danais and Grapta with their later stages, namely, that the armature of the Butterfly larva is not developed mainly from the primary tubercles, but almost entirely independently of them.* Thus their tubercles have remained in the primitive condition, and generally wholly disappear at the first molt. The primitive arrangement of the sete is subject to certain displacements which are of a rank greater than that of the family. I have alluded, in my previous paper on this subject, to the separation into Generalized and Specialized Frenatz. This can not now be retained; but from a consideration of the first larval stage in conjunction with the later stages, I believe that a series of superfamilies + can be satisfactorily defined. This is as far as the classification from the arrangement of the *This is shown beautifully in Dr. W. Miiller’s plates (Pl. xii. Figs. 2 and 4) in his article on the larve of South American Nymphalide (Zoologische Jahrbticher 1886, pp. 417- 678), and he clearly states the fact on page 673: ‘‘Wiirzchen secundiirer Borsten (Dornen der Nymphaline).” This valuable confirmation of my views was not met with till after the present article was completed. 7\Or tribes in the sense in which this term is employed in Claus & Sedgwick’s ‘‘ Ele mentary text book of Zodlogy.”’ 1894. | - NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 53 tubercles can be carried. The characters on which I would base the superfamilies are as follows: Order Lepidoptera, suborder Frenatie. Tubercles iv and v of larva approximate or consolidated (all stages ).* Tubercles i and ii remote, normal...... -........... COSSIN A. Tubercles i and ii approximate or consolidated....... 4 A NTHROCERINA. Tubercle i consolidated with its fellow in dorsal line on abdominal segments 8 or 9 or both. .........- SATURNINA. Tuberctes iv and v remote. Tubercles iv (posterior) higher up than v............ NOCTUINA. Tubercle v (anterior ) higher up than iv ; sete aborted.. SPHINGINA. Tubercles iv and v usually in line ; or iv higher up than vy and then armature not derived from primitive tubercles. ;..... Anca bacee@onaueage Hesodndeccoe RHOPALOCERA. In the first three superfamilies there is a tendency for the tubercles to become arranged in a single transverse line. This process is begun in the Cossina by the consolidation of tubercles iv.and vy. It is completed in the Anthrocerina, as indicated above, by the consolidation of i. and ii. In the Saturnina, the same thing is accomplished in a different way by the disappear- ance of ii. after the first moult. In the Noctuina and Sphingina the tendency has been toward an arrangement of the tubercles in two alternating rows. ‘To effect this, iv. and v. have become separated and moved out of line. In the Noctuina iv. has been moved upward, but in the Sphingina iv. remained in position and v. was moved, forming the alternation on the other side of the spiracle. In the Rhopalocera there is little tendency to an alteration of the primitive position, except in a section of the Nymphalide, though the development of secondary sete is often pushed back partially into the first stage, thus complicating the arrangement. Superfamily Cosstna (Microlepidoptera). Tubercles with single seta, normal, iv. and v. approximate or consolidated, the rest remote. Includes the families Adelidee, Psychide, Cosside, Pyralids (—Pyralidina), Tortricide (= Totricina), Sesiide, Tineidx (—Tineina) Orneodidx and Laco- somidee. Probably all the species recorded under these several families belong here except, perhaps, in the case of some of the Tineide, with which I am not sufliciently familiar. The Psy- chide differ markedly from the other families in the reversed alternation of tubercles i. and ii., as I have previously pointed out. But I find the family can not be given superfamily rank on this character. The Lacosomide belong here by the ar- * Except in some Tineida, as I will show in another artic le. 54 TRANSACTIONS OF THE :. Nov. 12, rangement of the tubercles as well as of the crotchets on the prolegs. They cannot properly be classed with the Saturnina on larval characters, though the difference is not fundamental. The arrangement of crochets may have been preserved by adapta- tion, as the larve are case-bearers. In the Saturnina the un- paired dorsal tubercle is not an invariable character. In one section it is absent on the 9th abdominal segment, and in one genus (Anisota) on the 8th, so that it is not difficult to imagine the Lacosomidz to represent the most generalized condition of the Saturnina, in which the consolidation of tubercle i. has not taken place on either segment. In this superfamily, the first larval stage adds nothing to the characters of the tubercles of the mature larva, except as show- ing the secondary nature of tubercle vi. Superfamily ANTHROCERINA. Tubercles with single seta, or converted into warts or absent ; i. and ii.,as well as iv. and v., approximate or consolidated. Formerly I regarded tubercle i. as absent, but, on further exam- ination, I am able to correct this statement. Includes the fam- ilies Pterophoride, Anthroceridze (—Zygenide, of Hampson), Pyromorhidx, Megalopygide and EKucleide. SYNOPSIS OF FAMILIES. Body cylindrical, feet normal, setze single or converted TARIOH OAVERTIES ones nd oie ero oo eyelash re yale ~2+ esse *PTEROPHORIDZE. Body more or less flattened ventrally. Tubercles converted into warts ; iv +-v distinct. Legs normal ; wartsreduced................. eI TE VEE a 5 ? ? D4 Vig i gee | PYROMORPHID®. Two additional pair of prolegs without hooks ;f VAIS METI ey wicretencreccharetay costa aera e MEGALOPYGID®. Tubercles converted into spinous processes or ab- sent ; iv-+-v aborted ; abdominal feet replaced by sticky ventral surface................. -.. BUCLEID2. Superfamily SATURNINA (Bombycina). In a section of this group the primitive first larval stage is wanting, the larve hatching in an advanced degree of speciali- zation. In the more generalized forms, tubercles with single seta, the base usually prolonged into a stiff (often branched) *T have recently discovered that the structure of these larve isnot so uniform as I had supposed, but I will reserve their discussion for another article. + Deseribed by Sepp in 1830: by Dukinfield Jones in 1878 (Proc. Lit. and Phil. Soe. of Liverpool, xxxii, pp. 102-104); by Berg in 1882 (Ann. Soe. Cient. Argentina, XIII, p. 269), and more recently by Packard, Lintner, Comstock and Chapman. 1894.] - NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 55 chitinous rod (see Fig. 4, A), absent in the case of tubercles ii, and but a single rod bears iv and vy. Dorsally on the 8th ab- dominal segment, the two tubercles i are usually consolidated* and sometimes also on 9th segment. Or the tubercles may be enlarged and bear a crown of hairs or become developed into a bunch of spines. In cludes the families Citheroniide, Hemi- leucidz, Saturniide and Bombycide. I cannot endorse the separation of the Hemileucide and Saturniidze on the characters used by Prof. Smith. Ac- cording to his arrangement, in the Saturniide the antennze are doubly bipectinate in the ¢, in the Hemileucidz singly. Now the several genera present a most interesting gradation in this respect, the females being generally behind the males in de- gree of specialization. Clearly it is an arbitrary division to draw the line between these families on characters exhibited by the male sex alone without further evidence that this separation really corresponds to a dichotomous division in the line of de- scent. If the female sex had been chosen instead, the division would have corresponded to those defined below in the synopsis. The families could be thus described : Family Hemileucide. Antennae of 2 moth singly bipectin- ated, of ¢ either singly or doubly so. Larve with primitive first, stage, a dorsal tubercle on 9th abdominal segment and none on the anal plate. Tubercle shafts densely covered with sharp defensive spines. Family Saturniide. Antenne of both sexes doubly bipectin- ated. Larve lacking the primitive first stage; no dorsal tubercle on 9th abdominal segment, but a pair on the anal plate. Tubercle shafts short or smooth with few weak spines or hairs. This is essentially the arrangement in Mr. A. R. Grote’s check list of 1882 and seems superior to any that has followed it. In the European Aglia tau, the larva possesses all the charac- ters of the Saturniidz, but differs in the great inequality in de- velopment of the tubercles. Their final disappearance in the last stage is less distinctive (compare the American Samia ceanothi). In theimago the male antennz are doubly bipectina- ted ; the female antenne are serrate (singly). This combination of characters probably entitles the genus to family rank. Dr. Pack- ard (N. Y. Ent. Soc. 1, 7, 1893) “places it as a subfamily of the Ceratocampidee (— Citheroniidee) ; but this is negatived by the arrangement of the larval tubercles (though favored by their unequal development) and by the structure of the antenne of the moth. * Except in Anisota. I find that | i and ii are both present, i une envenidated. I for merly erroneously supposed i to be absent (Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., viii., 232). 56 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [Nov. 12, Synopsis oF FAMILIES. A single dorsal tubercle on 9th abdominal segment. A pair of tubercles on anal plate,.......-...+-+++20- . .CITHERONIID. No tubercles on anal plate....... Sate ae seisic ee oss sie s LLB MEL MUCID AL, No single tubercle on 9th segment. Tubercles prominent, ...........22.-+.0-+--0--eu~ . SATURNIIDE. Tubercles very unequally developed, later aborted....AGLUD#. Tubercles greatly reduced, ..............-- Sia.506 Mosc BoMBYCID&. Superfamily Nocrutna. Tubercles all free, iv. remote, moved up behind the spiracle, except inthe Thyatiride, where this tendency is counteracted by the development of a secondary tubercle behind iii.; setz single or transformed into warts. Includes the families Notodontide, Thy- atiridxe, Dioptide, Geometridae, Brephidze, Drepanide, Agaris- tide, Noctuidae, Cymbidz (—Nycteoline of Hampson), Litho- siide, Pericopide, Arctiide, Huchromiide (—Syntomide of Hampson, Zygzenide Kirby), Lymantriide, Eupterotide and Lasiocampidee.* In a small section of this group the primitive first larval stage is wanting. As several of the families intergrade, not representing dichotomous divisions in the line of descent, the families of the larvee do not corroborate those of the moths completely. The following synopsis will give some idea of how the characters run, though it is not exhaustive. Further study may develop a better. arrangement. The matter is not simple, as the species are numerous. Tubercles simple, single haired. Feet normal. [ NOCTUID (in part). rn perp ee Ax Te } AGARISTID. Cubercles normal, .......- Sn crodeom 40.5% Noropontip® (in part). : | CYMBIDZ&. A secondary seta adjacent to ii1.; iv. and { THYATIRID®. v. often nearly in line, ..-..... eherers | Diopripz&.+ Feet abnormal. Last pair of feet modified or aborted; anal Dlabe MOrmial Ty . ciejctake shereleee tery aes NOTODONTID®. Last pair of feet absent; anal plate pro- LONGO e-eiahestagtesthecsiere steve cela aeteecea DREPANID®. Abdominal feet absent except on 6th and 7 POM IRCOTNENIUS Peres teotete) tee oumtenartere eee GEOMETRID®. *T have not seen larvee of the Thyride, which probably belong to this superfamily + Mr. T. G. O. Mueller has kindly sent me larvae of Phryganidia Californica from ~ San Francisco. ° ~I 1894. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Abdominal feet partly aborted except on 6th and 9th segments .... ........ BREPHID®. Abdominal feet aborted or partly so on. Semmens >o ald 4) 2a jacc ee.) a sept NocTurIp& (in part). Tubereles with hair more or less increased, but not forming true warts, greatly ob- scured by the development of abun- { NoropoTIpD® (in part. ) dant secondary hairs, .............. 1) LA STOO AMP UEAE Tubercles converted into warts. On the meso- and meta-thoracic segments above the stigmatal warts— ( Nocrurb.® ( Bombycoide ). | LITHOSITID2. ERO UWALUS PLESCO sicetalels sarele F=6ex Treasurer. Examined and found correct by HENRY DUDLEY, ; Chairman Finance Committee. REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN. Volumes received in exchange for the publications of the Academy. or as donations, have been acknowledged in all cases where this was requested, or whenever in special cases it seemed advisable. . All books and pamphlets received were stamped with the stamp of the Academy, and turned over to the Columbia Col- lege Library for binding and shelving. Highty-four letters have been written regarding the publica- tions of the Academy. The following new institutions have been added to our - mail- ing list: 1. Helena Public Library, Helena, Mont., Transactions in ex- change for Bulletins. Field Columbian Museum, Chicago, IIL, Transactions in exchange for future publications (nothing yet issued). 3. Colorado College, Colorado Springs, Colorado, Transac- tions in exchange for “ Studies.” 4. Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, Adelaide, S. Aust., Transactions in exchange for “ Reports.” 5. Victoria Institute, Port of Spain, Trinidad, Transactions in exchange for “* Proceedings.” 6, Central Meteorological Observatory of Vera Cruz, Xalapa, Mexico, Transactions in exchange for “ Bulletins.” 39 requests for back Nos. of the publications of the Academy have been received from institutions upon our mailing list. All these have been supplied, except when some of the pub- lications desired were out of print. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 91 7 individual requests for special numbers of the publications of the Academy have been received. All these have been at- tended to, and a bill sent in each case. Receipts are given in Librarian’s cash account. 2 requests for information in regard to publications have been received and answered. 175 acknowledgments have been returned by mail. 14 packages, including 63 individual enclosures separately, have been sent by express. 6 new Institutions have been added to the mailing list. All correspondence, with memoranda in regard to reply, has been preserved. The space now available for shelving the library in the room occupied by it, in Columbia College, has about reached its limit. The Council have authorized a committee consisting of the Li- brarian and Dr. Britton to confer with the Librarian of the Col- lege in regard to the matter. ARTHUR HOLLICK, Librarian. In behalf of the Audubon Monument Committee, Professor Britton explained that the stone-cutters had not yet provided an acceptable base, and he therefore asked that the committee be continued. On motion this was done. The Secretary presented the following preamble and resolu- tion regarding the preparation of a topographical map of the State. New York ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, 41 East 49th St., New York, N. Y., March 4, 1895. To tie Honorable —. Assembly Chamber, Albany, N. Y: My Dear Sir :—At a recent meeting of the New York Academy of Sciences the following preamble and resolution was passed : “WHEREAS, The New York Academy of Sciences appreciates that a good topographical map, of a suitably large scale, of the 92 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [FEB. 25, State of New York is imperatively needed, and that the neigh- boring States, New Jersey, Connecticut, Rhode Island and Mas- sachusetts are already provided with such maps, which have been made with the codperation of the United States Geological Survey, and which are now on sale throughout those States at very reasonable rates, to the benefit of the people ; and WueEreas, In its judgment, this work in New York should be under the supervision of the State Engineer and Surveyor, as the proper State official, and it is undesirable to create a new and separate official for this specific purpose, and inasmuch as the United States Geological Survey is ready to cooperate with the State Engineer in making these maps; Resolved, That the New York Academy of Sciences urges upon the Hon. Danforth E. Ainsworth, Chairman of the Committee on Ways and Means, and upon the representatives of the city, the importance of bringing the bill, No. 507, recently introduced for this purpose by the Hon. Wm. Cary Sanger to an early pas- sage.” Yours respectfully, J. F. KEmp, Recording Secretary. On motion the Secretary was authorized to draw on the Treas- urer, for the expenses of duplicating and mailing the resolution. It was moved and carried that the President be authorized to appoint a committee to take in hand the raising of money for the publication fund of the Academy. The President subse- quently appointed Messrs. Osborn, Cox and Rees. The Secretary presented a communication from the Finance Committee relating to the management of the invested funds of the Academy, and on motion it was referred to the Council. The Academy then proceeded to ballot for officers for the en- suing year, and the election resulted in the selection of the ap- pended list: President—J. K. Rees. Ist Vice-President—H. F. Osborn. 2d Vice-President—J. J. Stevenson. 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 93 Corresponding Secretary—D. 8. Martin. Recording Secretary—J. F. Kemp. Treasurer—C. F. Cox. Librarian—Arthur Hollick. Councillors—J. A. Allen, Bashford Dean, N. L. Britton, Wil- - liam Hallock, William Stratford, R. S. Woodward. Curators—H. G. Dyar, G. F. Kunz, L. H. Laudy, Heinrich Ries, W. D. Schoonmaker. Finance Committee—Henry Dudley, J. H. Hinton, Cornelius Van Brunt. The Academy then adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. REGULAR STATED MEETING. March 4th, 1895. The Academy met with President Rees in the chair. The reading of the minutes was postponed until the next busi- ness meeting. On motion, the following names nominated for resident membership and recommended by the Council, were elected : Dr. LIVINGSTON FARRAND. Pror. W. GInMAN THOMPSON. Mr. GeorGE ILEs. The Academy then listened to the Fourth Public Lecture of the course of 1894-95, by Prof. Wm. Hallock, on ‘‘ Bolometric Researches in the Infra-red Spectrum of the Sun.” Seventy-five persons were present. The Academy then adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. 94 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [mar. 11, STATED MEETING. Monday, March 11th. In the absence of regular business the Biological Section at once organized; Prof. Britton in the chair; an attendance of fifteen. The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were read and approved. A paper was presented by Mr. A. P. Matthews “On the Me- chanism of the Secretion of Gland Cells,” recording his observa- tions on the cells especially of the pancreas. In the discussion which followed Prof. Curtis, Dr. Lee and Prof. Osborn took part. NOTES ON CERTAIN VARIATIONS IN THE BIO- LOGICAL CHARACTERS OF TWO SPECIES OF BACTERIA. By Harrison G. Dyar, A. M. In no other group of plants or animals are the so-called “ bio- logical” characters relied on so completely for the separation of Species as in the bacteria. It is evident, from an examination of the published descriptions, that the characters in general use are often not sufficient to afford satisfactory distinctions be- tween the species. Other characters will have to be added, and, as only biological ones seem available, I have collected the fol- lowing notes to give some idea as to what extent of variation is to be expected in the growth forms and products in the com- moner media of cultivation. I have selected two microédrganisms commonly occurring in ing in the air of New York City, both of which can be recog- nized by their distinctive colors. MERISMOPEDIA RosEA (BuMM.) Synonomy.—Diplococcus roseus Bumm, Der. Mik. der Gon. Schleimhauterkrank, p. 25, 1885. Micrococcus roseus, Hisenberg, Bak. Diag., p. 408, 1891. Micrococcus tetragenus ruber, Schnei- der, Inaug. diss., Basel, p. 21, 1889.2? Sarcina rosea, Lindner, Die Sarcineorg. der Giihrungsw., Berlin. 1888. Occurrence.—(1) A culture received from Kral’s bacteriological laboratory at Prague, marked “ M. tet. ruber.” (2) A culture in ns 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. - 95 the collection of the Bacteriological Department of Columbia College, marked “ Sarcina rosea. (3) The most common species on some plates exposed in the hallway of the 59th street build- ing, November I6, 1893, (4) In the air of my flat, W. 69th street. (5) A contamination from the air of the laboratory on certain plates. In this species the cells divide in two directions, forming di- plococci and tetrads, and it is consequently referable to the genus Merismopedia. In the state of early division a hemi- spherical appearance of the elements may be noted which is de- scribed by Bumm as a resemblance to the “gonococcus.” Hisenberg does not describe the cells as associated in pairs and fours, but this appearance may not always be well marked. Sarcina rosea is evidently closely allied to this species, but I do not venture to consider it identical, as it is described as a true Sarcina, and is said to liquefy gelatin rapidly. But neither of these characters are of great value when the exact composi- tion of the media is not known. VARIATION IN BrioLoGIcAL CHARACTERS. Liquefaction of gelatin.—Culture 1 produced the first signs of liquefaction in 14 days. Culture 3, after it had been in culti- vation some months, produced distinct liquefaction in 10 days. The same culture, when freshly obtained from the air, produced no liquefaction as long as the tube was retained (40 days). Culture 5 produced no liquefaction at first (30 days), but in a second culture traces of liquefaction were observed in 30 days, and in another later one in 19 days. In culture 5, hollows sink- ing into the surface of the gelatin, indicating liquefaction, were observed in 50 days. In culture 2, no sign of liquefaction was obtained till 30 days, although this culture had been in cultiva- tion in the College collection for some time. Action on Milk.—None of the cultures produced any coagu- lating effect in milk, before orafter boiling. Usually a fine pink growth of the cocci was obtained. : Reduction of Nitrates.—The effect of the growth of this or- ganism in the “nitrate solution” is to produce a moderate amount of reduction to nitrite. The test never yields more than a fairly strong pink color. The following are the variations observed: Culture 1 gave a very faint color in 4 days, faint in 10 days, and quite a strong tint in 28 days. Cultures 2 and 3 pro- duced a faint color quite uniformly at different times from 6 to 28 days. Culture 5 produced a faint trace only at the end of 28 days, and culture 4 produced no reduction of the nitrate. Growth on Potato.—Quite often the cocci will not grow on this 96 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MaR. 11, medium; again a slight growth may be observed. Culture 3, however, grew well, producing a considerable mass of growth of a slimy pale pink in 17 days. Color.—Practically no variation was observed in the charac- teristic pink color of the growth masses of this coccus. There seems to be no tendency toward a permanent white form on re- peated cultivation. Grown at 374° C., growth is poor and with- out color, but the pink tint is regained after the culture has been removed to the room temperature. Bacittus Lactis ERYTHROGENES (Hueppe). Synonymy.*— Bacillus lactis erythrogenes, Hueppe, Fortschr. der Med., Vol. VII., p. 141, 1889. Bacillus versicolor, Prudden, Proc. N. Y. Pathological Soc., 1889, p. 103. Bacillus helvolus, Zimmermann, Die bak. unser Nutz-u. Trinkw., Part I., 52, 1890. Occurrence.—(1) Cultures from the collection of the Depart- ment of Pathology, Coll. P. & S., of Columbia College. (2) In the air in different parts of the college building, 59th st., in the yard on 59th st.,ina barn (Dr. Freeman). (3) In the air of my flat W. 69th st. (4) In the yard, 59th st., Oct., 1894. (5) Same as 4. (6) Same. (7) A culture from Kral, marked “ B. helvo- lus.” : VARIATION IN BioLoGICAL CHARACTERS. Liquefaction of gelatin.—Liquefaction usually begins in from 3 to 6 days; in about half the cultures in 3 days. In culture 3 no liquefaction was obtained till 35 days, whena dry hollow was observed to have been formed; but on preparing a second cul- ture from this tube, liquefaction set in in 15 days, and was well marked in 20 days. The degree of acidity of the medium has an effect on the rapidity of liquefaction, as shown by the following table: (Cul- tures all made from the same tube of culture 3.) The optimum degree of acidity for this species seems to be about .15 cc. of tenth normal sodium hydrate solution acid per ce. to phenol-ptalein (distinctly alkaline to litmus). But in another instance, where two cultures were made from the same tube (culture 1) in two tubes filled with .4 acid gelatin, under the same conditions, one did not liquefy for 10 days, while the other began to liquefy in 4 days. Perhaps this difference may have been due to a difference in the number of bacteria on the innocu- lation needle. * These names may be used to indicate varieties. ~ 97 ‘OpLUL pry TIMOLS OATINOdSOT OY) TOM OOURAPR OATJROA OY] SOYROTPUT ‘UUMANTOS SIA) UT “GYSl OT) OF req OY) Jo douR Srp ONT, + SCIENCES. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF LApy ‘Pu 1895.] “upoTRyd-fouoyd 09 [RAWNOU FT LOpPUds OF Plow [RUTIOU YQUd) JO “Od LT" sorINbor UTVRIOS OY] JO “od YOR Jey] SUROT SIGE + ‘dno [peur *podeys-dny oovyns qared “Duy ‘JOU TAL ” *POUUN YT ‘oops UO “bivy ‘sAUT 6 ‘joubiy ysne¢ ‘dno doa ‘ooRyans uo “Diy “dno dood ” ‘jouuny oy] “sAUCT 8 7 ‘yonbiy ON *podvys-dny ” ‘dno rodooq “shay 9 ” ‘youd1y ON ” *podeys-dny ‘SAU F ?) ”? 7 9 ? 7 ‘yonbry ON | ‘yonbiy ON ‘shud & ” 7 ” ” PPh ” “AUC T " * * ply ‘90 Ga" ae SOROS Bi " * “py *99 OT" AP Sy Uy * OUT[VYTV 99 OT" “xOUTTVATV “90 LT” “NILVTOUD 895, TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. Scl., Vol. XIV., Sig. 7, April 26, 1 98 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 11 Action on Milk.—According to the descriptions, in milk “ the casein is slowly precipitated, and later is peptonized witha neu- tral or alkaline reaction.” This is the usual course; but there is never a distinct coagulum, even on boiling. The ‘milk usually assumes a watery appearance, with a slight amount of white sediment, which is gradually dissolved. Cultures 3,5 and 7 pro- duced no perceptible change in milk; again in3,a slight sediment was observed, but no coagulum on boiling. Culture 6 rendered the milk very watery. In appearance the contents of the tube were two-thirds of a water v fluid, colored pink and one-third of a flaky coagulum; but on shaking up and boiling, the coagulum was seen to have no consistence. Reduction of Nitrate.—Nitrates are usually quickly and thor- oughly reduced to nitrite, the test giving a ‘dark red color in 6 days. In culture 3 the dark color was not obtained till the 26th day, the test resulting in a faint color before that date. In cul- ture 6 no reduction was observable till the 14th day, and at the end of 28 days the test gave only a faint color. In cultures 4 and 7 there was practically no reduction of the nitrate, the test only giving a trace of color at the end of 25 days. Color.—The normal appearance is a light yellow color of the mass of growth, accompanied by a fine pink tint throughout the medium. Where the species occurred abundantly in the air, a considerable difference was observable in the shade of yellow of the different colonies growing on a single plate, and this was also observable in the various cultures obtained. The color varies from nearly white to rather dark yellow. I have a cul- ture which has become entirely white from repeated cultivation, though retaining the pink tint apparently undiminished. There is also variation in the opacity of the growth. In culture 5. the yellow color was bright, but the pink tint scarcely perceptible. In 3, after cultivation for some months, the pink became very faint, though distinct at first. In culture 7, no pink tint was discernible when received, but after cultivation for some months it became quite well marked. In 6, the growth was white with a yellow tint only, but a fine pink color in the medium. ‘T have considered all cultures to belong to Bacillus lactis erythrogenes that exhibited both the yellow and pink tints in some degree, and which liquefied gelatin, at least finally; but I possess cultures in which there is no pink tint discernible, some of which liquefy gelatin, and others not. Are these all’ good species or only slightly further varieties of Bacillus lactis erythrogenes? The forms may be tabulated thus, in regard to the most salient features : 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 99 Mark. Gelatin. Milk. Nitrate. Color. BH Not liquefied. Not coagulated. Not reduced. Yellow. BR ie S Ps s Test gives a faint color. BO Liquefiedini4d. ‘ . Very faint color. * CN *s Z5 rs - Reduced. CK Liquefiedin2id. ‘“ ‘ Trace. White. In the absence of Profs. Allen and Huntington no further papers were presented. Prof. Osborn spoke of the communication of the Royal Society regarding the collection of references of recent publica- tions, and, after discussing the especial need for this projected work, moved: That the Chairman of the Biological Section of the Academy be empowered to appoint a committee of three to report on the steps that might be taken to aid in the work of the Royal Society. The motion was carried. Prof. Britton subge- quently appointed as members of this committee, Prof. H. F. Osborn, Prof. Wm. Stratford and Prof. J. J. Stevenson. Another motion was carried inviting Prof. E. B. Wilson to present his studies on the “ Fertilization Phenomena of Toxo- pneustes ’ at the next meeting of the Section. The paper of Prof. Huntington was, at his written request, deferred until the next meeting. BASHFORD DEAN, Rec. Sec. of Biol. See. STATED MEETING. March 17th, 1895. The Academy met with Vice President SrevEenson in the chair, twenty-six persons present. The minutes of the previous meeting were read and approved. | | l 100 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR dT Prof. Britton mentioned the recent death of Mr. J. H. Red- field, of Philadelphia, one of the oldest members of the Acad- emy, and suggested that a committee be appointed to prepare a suitable memorial. On motion, this was carried and the chair appointed Messrs. Britton, Julien and Martin. Dr. Julien brought before the Academy a circular in refer- ence to the Relief Expedition for Lieutenant Peary, and sug- -oested that the Academy contribute to the fund. On motion, the matter was referred to the Council. The Section of Geology and Mineralogy then organized and elected the foliowing sectional officers for the ensuing year: Chairman, Prov. J. J. STEVENSON. Secretary, Pror. J. F. Kemp. The first paper was by Prof. J. J. Stevenson, “ The Origin of the Pennsylvania Anthracite.” Discussion followed by Messrs. Britton, Julien and Kemp. The second paper by Dr. Wortmann was postponed one- month. The Secretary read by title the following papers, which were referred to the Publication Committee: G. F. Matthew, ‘‘ The Protolenus Fauna.” W. D. Matthew, ‘“ Effusive and Dike Rocks near St. John, NOB H. Ries, ‘‘ Pyroxenes of New York State.” N. Banks, “ Spiders of Colorado.” The first of these papers appears below, and the last will be- published in the Annals. The Academy then adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. p. p. p- p- ERRATA IN “THE PROTOLENUS FAUNA.” . 102 109. 109. pL. is 115. . 126. 148. Next to last paragraph, 2d line, “has” not “ have.” Ist line should read “ conditions resulted in the.” Second paragraph, last line should read “of this group, the. Foraminifera.”’ Tth line, after “b” insert “ Assise 2.” After ‘“ GLOBIGERINA GRANDIS n. sp. Pl. L., fig. 6,” insert - “This species is closely related to the preceding, but is larger, the final chamber being especially large. It was composed of four chambers, of which the first three are arranged lineally or nearly so.” First paragraph, last line, delide “ inner.” add “on the under side.” 11th line delide ** Band.” Under Brachiopoda, atter Obolella nitida, Ford, in- sert (7). Also in description of Pl. II., fig. 8, insert (?) after Obolella nitida, Ford. After “ value,” 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 101 THE PROTOLENUS FAUNA By G. F. Marruew, CorrEsPONDING MEMBER. TABLE OF CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. The Atlantic Basin the 4 a section. Classification of the Cambrian. Development of our knowledge of the Cambrian Faunas. The base of the Cambrian. THE CAMBRIAN FAUNAS IN NEW BRUNSWICK. Review of former work on the Cambrian of Southern N. B. Section at Hanford Brook—comparison with Newfoundland. DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES. Forminifera — Spongida — Brachiopoda—Mollusca—Ostracoda—Phyllo- poda—-Trilobita. List of species, localities and horizons. COMPARISONS AND CONCLUSIONS. Distinctive characters of the Fauna. Its probable relations to the Olenellus Fauna. Some of the material collected by an exploring party from Columbia College, New York, conducted by Mr. Gilbert van Ingen, having been placed in my hands for study, this I have examined and give the result in the following pages. The material under examination was all collected from Band b of Division 1 of the St. John Group and was studied in con- nection with other material in my hands, previously collected from the same zone by W. D. Matthew and the author. Investigations of the Cambrian faunas by the present writer have been principally confined to those of the Atlantic Basin, the only part of the world where thorough work has been done on the organic remains of this age. Sporadic representatives of the Cambrian types of animal life have been gathered from South America, Australia, India, China and Siberia, but none of these give that comprehensive view of the succession of liv- ing forms in that distant period which can be gathered from a study of the Atlantic Cambrian faunas. A good deal is known of the faunas of this age that occur in the Cambrian strata in the west of the United States, owing to the admirable work done in that section of the Union by the officers of the United States Geological Survey; but, neverthe- less, the Cambrian rocks of the Atlantic Basin remain the standard for determining the succession of faunas, and for the comparison of their facies. as 102 TRANSACTIONS OF THE. [MAR. 17, Taking these faunas and these deposits as the standard, we regard the arrangement and division of the Cambrian faunas set forth by Messrs. Salter and Hicks many years ago as pre- senting the most natural arrangement of the Life Zones of this System. By this arrangemement the Cambrian is divided into two great sections, the lower holding the “ Great Oleni” (Para- doxides, Olenellus, ete.), the upper the depauperated forms, Olenus (proper), Peltura, etc. Under this arrangement of the Cambrian System we have the following faunas of trilobites (descending order). In Scandinavia. In Wales. Ceratopyge Fauna, Upper Tremadoc, Upper Cambrian. < Peltura Fauna, ,Lower Tremadoc, Olenus Fauna. Lingula Flags. Te Crain: ( Paradoxides Fauna, Menevian and Solva, ( Olenellus Fauna. Caerfai Group. Each of these faunas is well characterized and the three mid- dle ones have several sub-zones. This arrangement in sub-zones has not been shown to exist in the Olenellus Zone, but as there is such a variety of forms grouped under Olenellus in its com- prehensive sense, it it quite probable that such sub-zones exist. One advantage of the localization of the study of the Cam- brian in Southern New Brunswick is that it has enabled us to point out the existence of several sub-zones in the fauna which there came in before Paradoxides, but which apparently is not the Olenellus Fauna, since this genus does not occur, and the species associated with Olenellus are also mostly wanting. A knowledge of the grand zones of life in the Cambrian of the Atlantic coast of America have been developed by slow degrees. The Paradoxides zone was first made known, many years ago, on the discovery of P. Harlaniin Massachusetts; this was followed soon after by the discovery of the same genus in Newfound- land, and after some years in New Brunswick. Next in order was the Olenellus Zone, though for many years its true position was misunderstood, and it was deter- mined for America only when Mr. Walcott found it in subordi- nate position to the Paradoxides Zone at Manuel Brook, in New- foundland.* *The writer had previously determined this to be a Pre-Paradoxides Zone (and gave the name of ‘“‘ Horizon of Agraulos strenuus’’) from specimens sent him by Mr. J. P. Howley, the present director of the Geological Survey in that island. Atthat time the zone Was not known to contain any representative of the genus Olenellus. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., Vol. iv., sec. iv., p. 148. 2) ¢ 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 105 The Peltura Fauna was recognized by J. W. Salter as exist- ing in the Island of Cape Breton, in Nova Scotia, from certain fossils taken to the Great Exhibition in London (18517) by the late Dr. D. Honeyman. It was not recognized in New Brunswick until 1891. One more of these trilobite faunas of the European Cambrian rocks has just been found on this side of the Atlantic, viz., the Olenus Fauna. This occurs at Random Island, in Newfound- land, where Mr. Howley made some explorations last summer. He sent me some fossils from that island for examination, and among them were two examplesjof an Olenus. There remains now, therefore, only one fauna of the European Cambrian rocks that has not been recognized on this side of the Atlantic, the Ceratopyge Fauna, or that found in the Upper Tremadoe slates of Wales. Whether we consider the thickness of the sediments in the several parts of the Atlantic Basin (omitting such adventitious additions as lava flows and volcanic ashes, or the coarse con- glomerates of an immediate coast line), or whether we regard the kind and succession of the faunas which the Cambrian rocks contain, we are justified in giving more weight to the Upper Cambrian than is implied in the division into three sections of Upper, Middle and Lower. Furthermore, it is time that a base be found for the Cambrian. Already has one faunal zone been added which was not in the life zones originally known as Cambrian, viz., the Olenellus Zone; and if this process continues, each new country will add its Cambrian fauna from among the oldest Paleozoic sediments, until Cambrian will include “ all below.” On this side of the Atlantic, at least, we have what is a defi- nite base to the Cambrian (if it will be accepted as such) in a sandstone bed at or near the horizon of Olenellus. Near shore- lines this sandstone may become a conglomerate as at Manual Brook, elsewhere only a limestone may show, as at Brigus and Topsail Head, but generally in Newfoundland,as well as in New Brunswick, a pure sandstone holds the lowest position in re- lation to the Cambrian Faunas. No fauna of trilobites has yet been found below this sandstone. Here then should the line be drawn between Cambrian and pre-Cambrian. Above this limit there have thus far been found on the At- lantic coast of America the following trilobite faunas : (Peltura Fauna. Upper Cambrian - PI (Olenus Fauna. ( Paradoxides Fauna. Lower Cambrian - ( Olenellus Fauna. 104 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maR. 17, Above this limit also is another fauna, whose relation to Olenellus is not quite clear, but is a very close one. This is the Protolenus Fauna. A number of the species of this fauna have already been de- scribed by the author in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada and the Bulletin of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick,* but the present paper will considerably en- large the number of species. A valuable feature in the work of Mr. W. D. Matthew in 1892, 93 and 794 and of Mr. G. Van Ingen in 1894 is that they care- fully noted the special horizons from which the fossils collected by them came. This has enabled the author to distinguish several sub-zones, each characterized by its own assemblage of fossils, and permitted him also to show, with more exactness than had previously been possible, the relation of each species to the particular kind of sediment in which it is found. One can thus present, in a clearer light than heretofore, the life of the Cambrian Time prior to the advent of Paradoxides, and show that there was a fauna of trilobites of this age independent of that which accompanied Olenellus, one which was more pelagic in its facies and also consisted of forms that in some respects were more primitive. THE CAMBRIAN TERRANE IN NEw BRUNSWICK. To make clearer the relation of the groups of fossils which the writer proposes to describe in this paper to the fauna of the Cambrian system as a whole in Eastern Canada, a brief out- line will be given of the discoveries which have been made in the Cambrian terrane in New Brunswick. It was in 1865 that Prof. C. F. Hartt, by comparing the col- lections made by the Geological Survey of New Brunswick with Barrande’s figures and descriptions ofthe Primordeal Fauna, was enabled to announce the presence of that fauna in Southern New Brunswick. Nothing further was done with these faunas until the author resumed their study in 1881. Hartt’s discovery was of the Lower Paradoxides Fauna, and it was not until 1885, twenty years later, that the Upper Paradoxides Faunat was found. About 1890 an Arenig Fauna, “ Quebec Group,” was found, and a year later that of Dictyonema flabelliformis. These discoveries showed that the St. John group contained not only the full series of Cambrian deposits, but a part of the Ordovician system as well. *Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., Vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 135; Vol. xi., sec, iv., p. 85. Nat. Hist. Soc. N. Brunswick, Bull. 10, p. 34. +I use the term ‘“‘upper”’ here relatively, because on this continent no higher has been found ; it is the middle Paradoxides Sub-Fauna of Europe. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 105 The details of these investigations and results are contained in a series of articles in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada and in other periodicals; and as far as the series of Life Zones are concerned may be summarized as follows (in de- scending order): ( Band d Fauna of Tetragraptus quadribranchiatus. Division 3. ‘* Dietyonema flabelliformis. Bretonian. eg ‘* « Peltura scarabeoides. v “ * Parabolina spinulosa. =e RE Re “ Lingulella radula place of the Division 2. 6 Ci (ee Starri FS 3 Starri Olenus Fauna. Johannian. Ae “ ‘x a3 ce “e “< “ Paradoxides Abenacus cf. Tessini. eal Be Eteminicus cf. rugulosus. oe a eel 2 lamellatus ef. oelandicus. “6b ‘ “* PRoOTOLENUS. (found in b 2 and b 3.) ‘“* a No fauna known. St. John Group. ware Qrera0oaos Division 1. Acadian. — —-'-——, —{ - Beneath the St. John group is an older set of strata (Etche- minian), which formerly the author was disposed to think might contain the Olenellus Fauna, a fauna which, according to Wal- cott, is spread through a great thickness of beds in certain parts of the Cambrian deposits in the western part of North America. This, however, does not appear to have been the case on the eastern borders of that continent, either in Massachus- setts or Newfoundland, but like Paradoxides and Protolenus it occupies a comparatively thin zone. We suppose therefore that the mass of sediments directly below the St. John group is actu- ally Pre-Cambrian. In Newfoundland this underlying series or terrane present, precisely the same appearance as in New Brunswick, except that in some districts it is more calcareous. In both coun- tries it is composed of a great thickness of red and green or greenish gray slates or shales, very uniform in appearance and having but a meagre fauna, mostly animals of a low type of structure, as Protozoans, Brachiopods, Echinoderms ? and Mol- luses ; worm burrows and trails being plentiful in the coarser beds. In } Yew Brunswick there is a definite base of conglomer- ates to this series, but in Newfoundland the base has not been shown. Olenellus having been found in Newfoundland above this series, the series is there clearly Pre-Cambrian. The Olenellus Zone, though diligently sought for, has not yet been recognized in New Brunswick. About ten years ago two trilobites in an imperfect condition, even as regards the head- shields, were found in the Pre- Paradoxides beds, and several smaller crustaceans, as well as brachiopods and other fossils, but 106 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17, these did not give satisfactory proof of the fauna to which they belonged, and in 1892 Mr. W. D. Matthew, at the author’s sug- gestion, began a more careful and detailed examination of the strata of the St. John group underlying the Paradoxides beds. This investigation was not without reward. for it resulted in the discovery of several new species of trilobites and of other crus- taceans, brachiopods, etc., which showed that the fauna was a new one, different from any that had been described. The chief merit of the explorer’s work was that he carefully distinguished the fossils that came from the different assises of the Sub-Paradoxides beds and was thus enabled to show that three distinct subfaunas were present in these underlying beds of Band b. The stratigraphical features of these assises had already been indicated by the writer, there. being five of them, and the. two subfaunas found by W. D. Matthew were in Assises 2 and 3, the fauna of Assise 1 having been already partly made known by the present author. Numbered from below upward, there are the following sub- faunas in these several assises: 1. Subzone of Hipponicharion eos (Ostracod). 2. bs ‘“ Protolenus elegans. 3. .* “ Protolenus paradoxoides. 4. i ‘“ Beyrichona tinea (Ostracod). 5. z Crustacean fauna unknown. None of the trilobites pass from one of these subzones to the other, and few of the other crustaceans. The species collected by the author and by W. D. Matthew from Band b, between the years 1881 and 1893, were the more common or more easily recognized species; whereas a number of those collected last summer were either rare species that had not been previously obtained, or parts of species already in hand, of which the material obtained in earlier years was imper- fect. and the species had therefore been left undescribed. From this point of view it will be seen that the collections made last year for Columbia College are a clear gain to science, as the author has thus been enabled to describe several crustaceans and other forms, which without the additional information thus obtained could not have been presented. e Section AT HANrorpD Brook. Among the various exposures of the Cambrian rocks in south- ern New Brunswick there is none which shows more clearly the succession in the lower part of the System than the section on 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 107 Hanford Brook. This stream runs at right angles to the strike of the beds for a considerable distance, and exposes the whole Paleozoic base, from the oldest conglomerates of the Etchemin- ian series to the Upper Paradoxides beds. It thus includes the Protolenus Zone. and shows clearly the relation of this zone both to the overlying Paradoxides beds, and the underlying barren sandstone which is at the base of the St. John group; and thus also its relation to the still older, unconformable, Etche- minian series. The Paleozoic rocks, of which the above series is the lowest member in this region of the world, rest upon a great series of voleanic rocks—lava flows, ashes and breccias which are spread over a wide extent of country in this part of New Brunswick. When the Etcheminian deposits began, areas of these volcanic rocks, and of older clastics, were above the sea and furnished the necessary materials for the conglomerates which form the base of the Etcheminian. These conglomerates are composed partly of the debris of the volcanic rocks, but largelv of rolled quartz pebbles which have been derived from the quartz veins of the earlier clastics—Huronian and Laurentian, of which ex- posures now exist to the north and northeast of Hanford Brook. Happily, the exposures along this stream are complete, so that the St. John group (lower part) can be traced down to its base in the barren sandstone, a, and the older Etcheminian to its base in the conglomerates mentioned above. The relative position of the Protolenus Fauna is readily apprehended by an examination of this section. (See page 108.) Explorations made by Mr. J. P. Howley, Director of the Geo- logical Survey of Newfoundland during the past summer, have revealed the presence there of a series of Paleeozoic deposits similar to that on Hanford Brook, but of greater thickness. The Etcheminian Series is found there as a thick deposit of red slates occurring along the shore of Random Sound, and over- lain by a sandstone band which, with the accompanying shales, are equivalent to the section on Manuel Brook containing Ole- nellus and Paradoxides. Here also is found, what has not here- tofore been discovered in eastern North America, except at St. John, viz.: a clear succession of beds from the Lower to the Up- per Cambrian. In the latter were found the Oleni referred to on & previous page. These Olenus beds in their micaceous surfaces present a con- dition parallel to that of the strata of Division 2 of the St. John Group; and there is great reason to suppose that a simi- larity of physical conditions prevailed over an extensive region along the Atlantic coast of North America in Etcheminian and oe 7 AN SUPP WCAG “Yoorg proluvgr Fe sy? oA < burkpx200 pur burkjarapun 244% BMAF snuazozorg 243. ike fo woizejpet 24, moys oe U01499S puPe ued PUNO Ar <) a0 AH ics] o a UtiwVrwayr +g” 6 Cf) = O1ZdAG 6) S e st RS lor) n a ONL ASL Wee Psa Fini Sik, x aX, KN . iy ABU, S 2 ae » “0a My My me é (s¥204 o'urd}o/ ) ha dno. yoorq poy 108 1895. |] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 109 Cambrian times. This similarity of conditions thé resulted in \ deposition, first of the great series of red and green sediments of Pre-Cambrian age, then of the slates or shales (based upona sandstone member), which contain Olenellus and Paradoxides in one country and Protolenus and Paradoxides in the other, and then of the flags and shales that hold the Olenus Fauna. These similar series of deposits are now found remote from each other, and in small isolated basins ; but we are not therefore to assume that there may not originally have been a much closer connection between them, by means of areas of sediment either not now recognizable, or not now existing. The great dynami- cal movements that have occurred in this region since Cambrian time, the metamorphism of large tracts in the intervening space, and the enormous denudation that has supervened, all will have helped to remove the proof of such possible direct communica- tion between the Cambrian rocks of Acadia and Newfoundland. Descriptions of the Species. FORAMINIFERA } The first notice of remains of this group of the Protozoa in these Cambrian rocks is that in connection with W. D. Mat- thew’s article on Phosphate Nodules from the Cambrian of Southern New Brunswick.* In this article are several plates of the objects seen in microscopic sections of these nodules, and among them are several forms which we can now clearly see, are of this group,of the Foraminifera. Small shells of this order have not only been found in the phosphate nodules, but occur scattered over the surface of the shales, in which they are well preserved, owing to the firm cal- careous nature of their tests at the time of their entombment. All observed belong to the Perforata. Possibly other groups of Foraminifera are present, but such as have arenaceous coat- ings are not easily detected owing to the siliceous particles in the slate, its hardness, and the partial metamorphic change which it has undergone by the infiltration of chemical solutions. Most of the forms observed belong to the Globigerinide. ORBULINA cf. UNIVERSA, Lam. PI1.-I., fig. 1. See “ Phosphate Nodules” Pl. 1., Figs. 13 (& 15?). The commonest species of the Globigerinidz occurring in these shales is one which cannot be distinguished either by size *Trans. New York Acad Sci. Vol. xii., 1893, p. 108, pl. 1, 2 and 3. 110 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17, or external features from the prevalent type of this genus in the modern ocean. Some show traces of an oral opening. Sculpture. A strong lens develops a pitted surface on these fossils. Size. Diameter about + mm. Horizon and locality. The olive green shales of Div. 1., Band b,at Hanford Brook, both in the shaly matrix and in phosphatic nodules. Apt to occur on certain layers, but not generally dif- fused through the shale. ORBULINA (?) oVALIs, n. sp. Pl. L., fig. 2. See ‘“‘ Phosphate Nodules ” Pl. 1. Fig. 20. Pl. 2. Fig. 7. A small species of the size of O. ef. universa but of different form. The tuberculation is very fine and there is a trace of an orifice at one end. Size. Length about #mm. Width about $ mm. Horizon and locality. As the preceding. Scarce. ORBULINA INTERMEDIA, n. sp. PI. I., fig. 3. This species differs from O. cf. universa in its larger size, and also in frequently having ridges or rugosities on its surface. These ridges often begin near a small depression on the surface of the shell, supposed to be the mouth. Sculpture as in O. cf. universa. Size. Diameter 1 to 1} mm. Horizon and locality. As the preceding two, but not of such common occurrence as the first. ORBULINA (?) INGENS, n. sp. Pl. L., fig. 4. Differs only in size from the two preceding, and is not so common. Sculpture. It appears to have large pores scattered over the surface as well as the numerous, small, closely set pores. Some examples have ridges and inequalities on the surface as in the preceding species. Size. Diameter 13 mm. Horizon and locality. As the preceding. The size of the the species leads one to suspect that it may be a globigerine form in which the primary cells are entirely enveloped by the final cell, as in some forms described under Globigerina. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 1it GLOBIGERINA CAMBRICA, 0. sp. Pl. I., figs. 5 @ to ec. See “Phosphate Nodules” Pl. 1, figs. 8 and 17; Pl. 3, fig. 8? Multilocular, variable in the position of the first chambers. Sometimes two of these are visible within the final chamber, and one without, in other cases all three (or four?) are external to the final chamber. Sculpture. The surface is marked with numerous minute pits, only visible with a strong lens. Size. Diameter including the final chamber 1 to 13 mm. Horizon and locality. As the preceding. This species differs from the more modern (Pliocene) Globi- gerina conglomerata, Schwager, in the fact that the chambers do not connect with each other, and there is not the same grada- tion of size in the chambers. No more than four chambers have been observed in this species, dnd when they are all external they are frequently found detached from the final cell, leaving a cup- shaped depression on its surface. The final chamber is always much larger than the others. GLOBIGERINA GRANDIS, n. Sp. Pl. fig, 6. Sculpture. As in the preceding species. Size. Diameter 2 mm. Horizon and locality. As the preceding. GLOBIGERINA DIDYMA, Nl. Sp. Pl. I., figs. 7 a and b. I See ‘‘ Phosphate Nodules, (Pi iets: L-and.42. Pl 2. fio: 9. Multilocular, probably consisting of four chambers, of which the two final ones are of nearly equal size. There is an arched mouth at the edge of the final chamber, on the opposite side from that whereon the small primary chambers are situated. Sculpture. As the preceding. Size. Diameter, short 14 mm.; long 1#mm. Horizon and locality. As the preceding. GLOBIGERINA TURRITA, n. sp. Pl. L, figs. 8 a and b. “Phosphate Nodules ” p. 114, Pl. 3, figs. 5 and 7 Multilocular, cells linear in arrangement; or iearhy so, regu- larly increasing in size. Size. Length 14 mm.; width nearly 1 mm. Horizon and locality. Shales of Assize 2 in. Band b. Scarce. This form was obtained by W. D. Matthew in sectioning phosphate nodules. 112 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MaR. 17, SPONGIDA. The reference of a number of objects to this group has been made for the purpose of calling attention to remains which con- tain sponge spicules, but which are often in such imperfect preservation that they cannot satisfactorily be referred to known genera. Even Protospongia as defined by Salter is not of generic value; for Mr. C. D. Walcott studies on the Utica slate forms (first described at Cyathophycus), and Sir. Wm. Daw- son’s observations on the Ordovician sponges of Metis in the Province of Quebec have resulted in the establishment of sev- eral genera of which a number are contained in Salter’s Proto- spongia. Allied to Protospongia is Dichoplectella (Pl. I., figs. 4), an object found on glossy spots of the surfaces of shales, similar .to those which are marked with the cross-bars of Protospongia, and differing from it in that the spicules are seer, or appear to- fork. Cyathospongia sometimes presents a somewhat similar arrangement of spicules. Astrocladia is a modern genus to which were provisionally referred certain sponge-like forms containing monactinellid spicules, but which have not been studied in detail. The objects defined as Monadites are minute sack-like organ- isms, with or without a pedicle, found in connection with sponge remains, some of which are supposed to be sponge gemmules, but others may be simple organisms of low type, whose con- nection with sponges has been accidental. “These minute objects. have been found mostly in the Etcheminian series, underlying the St.John group. Forms similar to some of these have been found in the phosphate nodules of Band b. Division 1 of the St. John group, and have been brought to light in sectioning these: nodules. MOoNADITES. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 147, pl. vii., figs 1 a-b, 2 a-b, and fig. 3. Size. The examples found in the phosphate nodules have a. diameter of } to + of a mm. Horizon and locality. Nodules of Assise 2, of Band b, con-- tained these remains. Prorosponaia, Salter. Pl. II., fig. 5. Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. iii., sec. iv., p. 30, pl. v., figs 2 and 3. Spicules of the sponges of this type have been found at sey- 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 113 eral horizons of the Cambrian and Ordovician rocks of this region, viz.: Div. 1, Bands ¢ and d, Div. 3, Band d. In one re- cently found in Band 3d, of Div. 1, the larger set of spicules is intermediate in size between those that occur in Bands ¢ and d; it also has a secondary set of spicules (of the flesh?) of small size. Horizon and locality. Shales of Assise 2, Band b, at Han- ford Brook. Scarce. ASTROCLADIA (?) ELONGATA. PI. IL., fig. 1. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 149, pl. vii., fig. 6. _ ASTROCLADIA (?) ELEGANS. PI. II., fig. 2. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 149, pl. vii., fig. T. ASTROCLADIA (?) viRGULOIDES. PI. II., fig. 3. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. ii., sec. iv., p. 149, pl. vii., fig. 8 @ to ¢. BRACHIOPODA. LINGULELLA, Salter. LINGULELLA Martinensis. PI. II, figs. 6 a to d. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 155, pl. viii., fig. 4. Original description. “ Orbicular ovate, broadly rounded in front, somewhat ventricose. No other sculpture has been ob- served than that of concentric and radiating strie. Size. Length of the ventral valve about 10 mm.; width about 8 mm. Horizon and locality. Dark grey sandstone of Band b., Assise 1, in Div. 1., St. John Group at Hanford Brook. “This species in its deep, round valves approaches an Obolus in aspect. It is larger than any other Lingulella found with it. Later collections enable the author to extend and improve this description. There are examples showing the surface of the shell, and others which give a clue to the internal features of the valves. : : Sculpture. The shell has marked concentric ridges of growth, especially on the anterior part, and over and between these are fine concentric ridglets ; these have a beaded surface, the beads being sometimes replaced by little lamellze. Interior of the ventral valve. The deltidial area in this valve TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. ScI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 8, April 30, 1895. 114 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MaR. 17, is markedly concave, so that the pedicel groove,as we look into the interior of the valve, is seen to start from the bottom without any shoulder such as is seen in other species. The scars of the central‘and lateral muscles are distinct, and extend beyond the middle of the valve. The inner surface of the edge of this valve has on each side of the area a narrow triangular groove, which appears to be a sliding articulation for the dorsal valve; further forward, on the inner edge of the valve, is another but narrower linear groove apparently for a similar use. Interior of the dorsal valve. This exhibits a broad median ridge extending more than half the length of the valve; the ridge is divided longitudinally in the posterior half by a shallow furrow. Imprints of the cardinal and lateral muscles are visi- ble at the back of the valve; the edges of the valve are some- what flattened on the inside. Varieties. Beside the type figured in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada, there is an obtuse form in which the ventral valve has a rounded posterior end, and the sides are more fully rounded (see P1.II., fig. 6); in this the pedicle groove is one-fifth of the whole length of the valve. There is also an acute form in which the sides are nearly straight for two-thirds of the length of the valve, and the deltidial area is acuminate ; in this the pedicle groove is two-sevenths of the length of the valve. Horizon and locality. This species has been found to have a wider range than it was at first known to have. Besides the original location in Assise 1, where the type and the two varie- ties occur, the acute variety has been found in Assise 3. In its hinge area, and to some extent in the arrangement of the muscle scars, this species resembles Leptobolus grandis of the h orizon 3 e (Division 3, Band e), of the St. John group; it also compares with some species of Obolus, as O (Botsfordia) pulchra. A general resemblance exists between L. Martinensis and LZ. Ella of the ‘‘ Middle” Cambrian of Nevada, but our spe- cies is larger, less orbicular, more rugose on the surface of the valve, and with different sculpturing of the interior of the valve. LINGULELLA cf. GRANVILLENSIS, Walcott. Pl. II., figs. 7 a and b. Fauna of “ Upper Taconic,’’ Am. Jour. Sci., vol. xxxiv., Sept. 1887. Ovate, ventral valve rather flat, acuminate at the apex, sides curved gradually for two-thirds of the length of the valve, thence more rapidly to the front of the valve. Deltidial area small, pedicle groove one-eighth of the length of the valve. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 115 A dorsal valve, supposed to be of this species, is deep com- pared with the ventral: it shows the interior which has a semi- circular scar at the umbo caused by the cardinal muscle, and a broad, low, two-grooved median ridge, running two-thirds of the length of the valve. There is a partly flattened rim running around the inner edge of the valve,on TH - Sculpture. The surface of the aoe veal ¥e is ornamented with very fine concentric and radiating ridges. Size. Length of the ventral valve 8 mm.; width 54 mm.; the dorsal valve is 7 mm. long. Horizon and locality. Found in Assises 1 and 2; and the dorsal valve ascribed to this species is from Assise 3. This species appears to be near Walcott’s LZ. granvillensis, which it resembles in the sculpture and in its regular oval form. L. Dawsoni, of the Paradoxides beds has a similar form, but the striation is coarser in valves of the same size. OBOLUS Eichwald. BoTsFoRDIA, subgen. Trans. Roy. Soc..Can. vol. ix., sec. iv., p. 63. BorsroRDIA PULCHRA, PI. iii Can. Ree. Sci. Jan. 1889, p. 303. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 151, pl. viii., fig. 1, atom, 2,atol; vol. ix., p. 62. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., sec. iv., p. 90, pl. xvi, fig. 7, @ to ¢. This fine species was found in the northern basin of Cambrian rocks in southern New Brunswick, and cannot be so exactly placed as those of Hanford Brook; in the northern basin we ean only thus far distinguish Assise 5 from those below, and B. pulchra occurs low down in the Assises 2 to 4. Locality. Caton’s Island, King’s county, N. B. The original description of this species was as follows: “General outline nearly orbicular; the valves gently, but rather flatly and evenly arched downward from the centre all around, except that the dorsal is flatter at the back than else- where, and the ventral valve runs out into a short, acuminate unbo. Dorsal valve somewhat wider than long; more strongly arched toward the front than elsewhere; Spmieer hat elevated at each end of the hinge line. 116 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maAR. 17, Ventral value about as wide as long; the front evenly rounded; back produced into a short pointed beak, angle of incidence of the two sides 110° to 120°. Sculpture of the posterior half of the valves, consisting of minute tubercles, sloping forward and arranged in rows, which arch forward across the mesian line from each lateral margin, giving the surface a cancellated appearance, like that of Lingula (?) favosa and Kutorgina pannula. Sculpture of the anterior ° part on the front and sides in the adult shell consisting of con- centric lines of growth, with faint, interrupted, radiating strie. One of the most interesting species among the early brachio- pods of the St. John group is the one named above. On account of its antiquity and because of its peculiar form in the embryonic stages, the writer now gives considerable space to the description of its characters. It is the oldest species of brachiopod belong- ing to the St. John group of which good material has been ob- tained, and the following extended account is based on this material. The ventral valve is evenly and moderately arched, except. that the sides are depressed toward the beak; the beak itself is prominent only toward the tip, and runs out horizontally from the middle of the valve. Interior of the Dorsal Valve (Figs. 1% to m).—The most noticeable feature of the interior of this valve is the three ridges which radiate from the hinge line toward the anterior end of the valve. The mesian ridge begins with a small tubercle near the umbo, is longer than the two lateral ridges, and divides into two outward arching forks; including these, it extends about two- fifths of the length of the valve from the hinge line ; its posterior part divides the pits of the hinge line where the posterior ad- ductor muscles were attached. The two lateral ridges extend forward from the two ends of the hinge line; and at the end of each, where it joins the hinge line, are situated the pits due to the attachment of the two branches of the cardinal muscle; out- side of these two ridges are a pair of elongated semilunar scars, where the posterior adjustor muscles were attached. There is a small lanceolate ridge flatter than those described, and broader, in front of the space between the forks of the mesian ridge; this divides the anterior adductor muscles.” Additional Note. In the centre of the valve are seven small scars grouped around a short mesian ridge (fig. 1 &); the scar in front of the ridge is oval, and may or may not have been pro- duced by a muscle; on each side of this scar extending diagon- ally backward and outward is a row of three scars of which the two first are round or nearly so, and evidently produced by 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. UF muscles, while the third or posterior scar is minute and on some valves cannot be discerned, these two bands of scars, one on each side of the mesian line, form sets of muscle imprints corresponding to the two arched central scars of O. Apollonis. The interior of this valve is traversed by a number of ridges radiating from near the umbo to the anterior part of the valve. “Interior of the Ventral Valve (Figs. 2 h to l). There is muca resemblance in general aspect between the interior of the dorsal and ventral valves. The latter differs in the more elon- gated callus of the visceral cavity. the narrower scar of the posterior adjustor muscle, the absence of the strong lateral ridge beside this muscle, and the want of a division along the mesian line. This valve also exhibits indications of the attach- ment of the pedicel, and of the central adjustor muscles. The ventral valve also possesses a smaller, pointed depression in the front of the visceral cavity, which probably marks the attach- ment of the anterior adductor muscle. From this point, a some- what depressed band extends to the front of the shell. There are indications that the pedicel passed through a foramen in the hinge, coming on the hinge area below the beak, but this point is not clearly determinable.” Additional Note. The ventral valve has a pair of scars in front of the hinge area due to the posterior adductors, and two pairs of lateral muscles (adjustors) extending forward at the sides one-half of the length of the valve. The central scars form a pair subtriangular in form and placed in front of the middle of the valve; the outer ends are directed backward, each scar is double and the whole corresponds to the ventral scar of Obolus Apollonis, only that it is wider. There are two strong ridges dividing the sliding muscles from the inner cavity of the shell, and the border of the splanchoceele is indicated by a cury- ing line. “ Sculpture. The younger part of the shell is covered with minute tubercles, sloping forward, and arranged in curved rows which arch forward to the mesian line from each lateral margin of the valve, thus giving the surface a cancellated appearance; this cancellated or rasp-like surface does not cover the valve continuously, but is interrupted by arching bands of ridges con- centric to the umbo. The anterior part and the outer lateral parts of the valves have the concentric ridges only, with a few, faint, broken, radiating lines, visible at intervals. The cancel- lated lines do not always cover so large a space on the dorsal as on the ventral valve, but the former valve shows more distinctly the radiating lines outside the visceral cavity. Growth and Development. The growth and development of 118 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17, ‘this species as recorded in its shelly covering are very instruc- tive. Beginning with a shell which is comparatively tumid in form and nearly semicircular in outline, it finally becomes or- bicular in outline, and with valves flattened to the form of saucers. By the varied sculpture, the outlines of the valves and the surface markings, several phases in the life of this brachiopod may be distinguished. (1.) The first is that marked by the embryonic shell. This shell, now preserved in the umbo of the adult, shows in the markings on its surface faint indications of additions to its size, but these are hardly discernible. A remarkable feature about the embryonic shell is the form, which is entirely different from that of the adult, for it (in the dorsal valve especially ) is nearly semi- circular in outline, and is quite tumid when compared with the adult shell; it looks more like an Orthis or a Linnarssonia (see figs. la to c) than an Obolus or a Lingulella, the two genera which the adult most nearly resembles. The embryo ventral valve also differs quite as much from the adult as does the dor- sal, for in its high umbo and straight hinge line it recalls spe- cies of the genera Acrotreta and Kutorgina (see figs 2a to c). In the embryonic shell of the dorsal valve, which is narrowly . semi-circular, the straight outline of the hinge was scarcely broken by the slight, rounded projection of the umbo. As viewed from above, this valve presents a hollow more or less ob- vious in the front of the visceral cavity. This hollow is some- times a deeper depression, and corresponds to the outside of a tubercle or ridge within the shell, which continued throughout the life of the occupant to be a marked prominence of the interior of the valve on the mesian ridge of the shell near the hinge. The longest diameter of this hollow is about equal to one-half of the length of the embryonic shell, and in some examples it contains four little pits, which appear to mark the points of attachment of muscles (fig. ld). The two lateral pits appear to answer to the anterior adductors, and the anterior pit to the anterior re- tractor. The anterior adjustors in this stage of growth seem to have been at the front margin of the shell, and outside of the large depression above referred to, fora series of pits can be traced on the adult shell from the margin of the embryonic shell well out toward the outer edge of the ‘valve (fig. 1f). The pos- terior adjustors are probably. indicated by a depression on each side of the umbo. The space occupied at this time by the visceral cavity was large in prqportion to the size of the shell, and extended quite out to the margin; and no indication of the existence of a mar- 1895. } NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 119 “oinal area for the protection ofa mantle and setz can be seen. The outer posterior angles of the embryonic shell were turned upward, giving it somewhat of a saddle-shaped relief (fig. 1d). In some examples the shell is crossed by a raised band due to the strengthening of the hinge line during the subsequent growth of the shell (fig. ‘la). Already, at this very early period, we find clearly, though very minutely displayed, the rasp-like surface, which is so marked a feature of this species during the next period of its growth. (2.) In the second phase of growth there is a decided change in the form cf the shell. There was also an extension of the hinge line and a transfer outward of the muscles along that line to accommodate the growth of the animal; but although the hinge line is actually much longer than in the embr yonic shell, owing to the more rapid enlargement of the sides and front, it appears to be shorter. This we may regard as the larval or ‘neepionic stage of the shell, as by its form and features it ex- hibits indications of the possession of organs for the capture of food (fig. 1 /). In this stage of its growth the overlapping outer layers of the shell are ridged up around the posterior angles at the ends of the hinge line of the embryonic shell, showing that now the agency of the mantle was exercised in adding the margins. In this stage of growth the shell was still quite thin, and the several stages of growth are clearly marked by the impression of the gradually enlarg? ng previsceral depression, now less dis- tinctly ‘indented than in the embryonic shell; we can trace the growth of the shell by the anterior and posterior points of the previsceral depression, as well as by the two series of scars, diverging from the posterior margin that mark the periodical change i in the position of the anterior adjustor muscles (figs. 1 tg and q). Owing to the thinness of the shell at this early period of growth, the frequent enlargements of the shell are shown by the defined margin of each shell layer; of these about six can be distinguished on the inner half of this zone. The surface of the shell in this part bears the rasp-like ornamentation charac- teristic of the species on all except the last one or two layers, where the growth is indicated only by ridges concentric to the umbo, and “here there is no radulated surface. The rasp-like ornament on these shells is not unlike that on Acrothele; but in Acrothele the markings are more distinct near the margin than toward the umbo, while the reverse is the case with this shell. This larval or nepionic part of the shell is sometimes divided 120 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maR. 17, “by one or two concentric lines into two parts, of which the outer is distinguished by an enlarged pattern of the radular ornamentation ; ~and the margin of this zone has a more rounded outer margin than the inner zone, owing to the more rapid ex- tension of the margin at the sides and front. In this outer half of the larval zone there is a more decided thickening of the shell, for the lines of growth are not so delicately marked as in the inner half, nor is the impression of the features of the in- terior of the shell so clearly apparent, except as regards the outlines of the visceral cavity. These features, however, may be inferred from the rounded ridges on the surface, and from the lines of scars left by the anterior adjustor muscles, which give evidence of about six stages of growth in this outer zone of the larval shell. Outside of this zone the radular ornamentation is exchanged, on a narrow band of the shell, for concentric ridges, indicating an arrest of growth preparatory to the next phase in the life history of the individuals of this species. The close of the larval or neepionic period is marked by the fixation of the hinge line, which no longer lengthens, and con- sequently the position of the posterior adductor and the proxi- mate end of the cardinal muscle do not materially change after this. (3) The advent of the next phase in the history of this shell, which may be called the adolescent or nealogic phase, is indi- cated by a return to the radular ornamentation, which now is of a still coarser pattern than previously, and is ‘not always well preserved ; in fact dorsal valves are not uncommon, and ventral valves are occasionally found, which show no radular ornament at this period, but have concentric lines only. This peculiarity, however, may be due to imperfect preservation. This part of the valve, like the nepionic, is not unfrequently found to be divided into two zones by a few concentric lines ; in the outer of these zones the radular ornament is usually very irregular. At this period one does not find the lines of growth so dis- tinctly marked as in the earlier period, nor the scars of the anterior adjustor and adductor muscles; but the outline of the visceral cavity, owing to the thickening of the callus formed there, stand out with great distinctness (fig. 2e). The adult or ephebolie shell presents, in both valves, a nearly round contour, and on it also is rather prominently indicated the outline of the visceral cavity, which becomes proportion- ately narrower in the adolescent and adult stages, than at an earlier period. The marks of the muscles in the previsceral 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 1 area of the shell also continue to be faintly visible on the outer portion of the shell. This species, then, is marked by four stages of growth and development, of which the most prominent features are the following :— (1.) Hmbryonic.—Formation of the embryonic shell. (2.) Larval or nepionic.—Lengthening of the hinge line and acquisition of mantle-margins. (3.) Adolescent or nealogic.—Fixation of the hinge line, otherwise as the last, except that the radular ornament becomes irregular. (4.) Adult or ephebolic.—Absence of radular ornamentation on the valve, and great expansion of the mantle margin.” OBOLUS PRISTINUS, n. sp. Pl. iv., figs. lato le. -Shell substance calcareous (7). Valves orbicular, slightly straightened along the anterior border, and having a flattened, flange like posterior border. The ventral valve is most elevated in the central third, and becomes flattened on the anterior slope; it is somewhat de- pressed medially along the raised central third of the value. The umbo is depressed and inconspicuous. The dorsal valve is flatter than the ventral, is more depressed around the sides and has a mesian ridge within, extending about two-thirds of the length of the shell from the umbo. The umbo is quite low. A cast of the interior of the ventral valve, probably of this species has pits on each side of the umbo for the cardinal mus- cles, on each side of these externally is another pair of larger muscle scars; the prints of the adductor muscles appear toward the centre of the valve. A cast of the interior of a dorsal valve, probably of this spe- cies, has two plates extending outward along the slope of the valve on each side of the umbo; this plate is connected with a sigmoid ridge that rises upward on each side of the slope of the cast, the whole forming a crescent similar to that in Obolella and Trimerella; the pr ints of the lateral muscles are located by these ridges. The prints of the adductor muscles. on. each side of the me- sian ridge in this valve are very far back. Sculptur e. This consists of concentric stris, which are crossed by very close, fine, broken, radiating striz ; these cannot be seen without a very strong lens. Size. Length 13 mm.; width 14 mm.; height of the two valves 6 or 7 mm. 122 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maR. 17, Horizon and locality. Sandy layers of Assise 2 in Band 3, at Hanford Brook. Scarce. A description of the Protolenus Fauna would be incomplete without an account of one remarkable species, which is so con- stituted that it to some extent bridges the gulf between the two great orders of Brachiopods, the Articulata and Inarticulata ; or rather it should be said that this form, which must be classed in the latter order, had a mechanical contrivence for hinging the valve similar to that possessed by the Articulata;* an order of which only rare individuals have been found in the Protolenus Fauna, and which is but poorly represented in the Fauna of Olenellus, but which became so vastly expanded in later ages. TREMATOBOLUS.+ TREMATOBOLUS INSIGNIS, Matt., Pl. iv., figs. 2 a—d. Trematobolus insignis, Matt., Can. Rec. Sci., Jan., 1893, p. 276, figs. 1 a—d. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., sec. iv., p. 88., pl. xvi., figs. 4 a tod. Shell a meniscus, inequivalve, articulate. Valves thin, closely applied. Shell substance caleareocorneous ? Dorsal valve oblately circular, concave. At the hinge is a long, narrow socket, at right angles to the plane of the valve, fitted to receive the anterior edge of the ventral valve. The socket is interrupted in the middle by a cardinal process; this process extends into the interior of the valve, and is flanked on each side by a small, deep pit. At the back of the shell, on each side of the cardinal process, is a dental plate, and in front of it two transverse, lobed, triangular depressions, supposed to be due to the posterior adductor (cardinal) muscles. On each side of the shell, adjoining these depressions, are the scars of the adjustor muscles. There is a broad, shallow groove along the median line of the valve which would mark the part of the shell’s interior traversed by the adductor muscles during the growth of the shell; this depression is divided lengthwise by a low ridge, and forks at the middle of the valve into two arched branches, which include between them a shorter depression. There are several faint, raised vascular lines (about four on each side of the median line of the valve); of these lines the *Mr. Chas. Schuchert writes to me to say that he includes this form in Beacher’s order Neotremata. +Can. Rec. Sci., Jan., 1893, p. 276. hie 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. er outer are more arched than the inner, and all radiate toward the margin of the valve.* The ventral valve is moderately convex and oblately orbicular, with a short, blunt umbo; and has two low gradually diverging ridges, marking off a narrow triangular median area. There is a low, striated hinge area, the front edge of which is slightly toothed to fit the small pits on each side of the cardinal process of the dorsal valve. The interior of the ventral valve has a prominent ridge extending from beneath the area, half way to the front of the valve; this ridge arises from the indentation of the back of the valve by the pedicle groove; the surface of the ridge is seamed transversely by arched ridgelets, which mark the changing position of the foramen of the pedicle as the shell grew; the ridge does not quite reach the umbo, but is separated from it by a small, low boss, having a central depression, or umbilicus. In the ventral valve the position of the posterior adductors is marked by a pair of triangular scars, beginning un- der the outer part of the hinge; each scar shows the points of attachment of three muscular bands. The scars of the adjustor muscles, and of the lateral (anterior adductor ?) muscles run parallel to the each other along the sides of the valve, from near the hinge line; and they extend further forward than do the scars of the adjustors of the dorsal valve. Sculpture. As we have only the interior of this shell, the surface markings of the outside are scarcely discernible; towards the front of the valve, however, they become visible under the lens, and are seen to consist of fine concentric ridges; and very fine broken, radiating striz, visible only in a few places. Size. Length of the dorsal valve 8 mm., width 10mm. The ventral valve is 1 mm. longer than the dorsal. Horizon and locality. Found by W. D. Matthew in the upper part of the second Assise of Band 6 in Division 1 (1) ?’’) at Hanford Brook, St. Martin’s. This remarkable brachiopod is a synthetic form, showing afti- nities in several directions; it is thus connected chiefly with the Obolidez, but differs from them all in the articulate connection of the valves. The arrangement of the muscles is similar to that in Obolus and Obolella, but as regards the ventral valve is modified in the direction of Siphonotreta.. The position of the pedicle corresponds almost exactly with that of Schizambon (?) jissus var. Canadensis, Hall, of the Utica Slate,> but in our species the interior of the beak exhibits a peculiarity which *The boss at the centre of this valve appears to be the clay plug of the foramen of the ventral valve, cemented to the dorsal valve. + Genera Paleozoic Brachiopoda, Hall & Clark, pl. iv., fig. 33. 124 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maR. 17, may indicate a habit in the young shell (or in an ancestral form of the species) different from that of the adult; this peculiarity is the existence of a small boss or callus in the umbo, which, having a central umbilicus, appears to be homologous with the boss and foramen in the umbo of such shells as Acrotreta and Linnars- sonia.* Evidently the pedicle did not go out at this point in the adult shell, but the umbilicus may indicate that it did at an early stage of growth. According to Kutorga,+ Siphonotreta had a mammiform swelling around the tube in the umbo. The nature of the hinge connection too is very remarkable, and implies a mechanism similar to that of the articulate bra- chiopods. Compare, for instance, the dorsal valve of Orthis (Orthostrophia) strophomenoides, Hall,{ or O. (Dalmanella) testudinaria Dal.,§ with its central ridge and cardinal process, with that of Trematobolus; in the Orthis the sockets of the dorsal valve afford a rest, similar to that furnished by the elon- gated pit of the corresponding valve of the former genus; in the Orthis, however, the socket is in the inner face of the valve and met the tooth only of the opposite valve, whereas in our genus . the whole base of the dorsal is applied to the ventral. The genus Barroisella of the Genessee shale shows a mechan- isn at the hinge similar to that of Trematobolus in the bosses on each side of the pedicle groove of the ventral valve,|| but no such cardinal process is figured on the dorsal valve, as that which exists in the latter genus. In the form of the median muscular imprint of the dorsal valve, Trematobolus will be seen to resemble the corresponding sculp- ture of the dorsal valve of Obolus, as figured by Kutorga.§ In both genera this depression breaks up at the centre of the valve into three scars, of which the two outer ones arch around the middle one. Another genus which shows some interesting points of re- semblence to Trematobolus is Neobolus of Waagen: from the Salt Range in India.** This is more especially the case with the dorsal valve, which in the latter genus possesses a callosity on the median line at the hinge, similar to the cardinal process in our genus. The depressions on each side of this callosity to) correspond to the sears of the posterior adductor in Trematobo- * Op. cit. pl. iii., figs. 35, 38 and 39. + Op. cit. pl. iy., figs. 22 and 23. tOp. cit. pl. v., fig. 26. Z Op. cit. pl. vB., fig. 39. ; | Op. cit. pl. ii., figs. 14and 15. The hinge of the dorsal valve, fig. 16 (copied from Meek and Worthen), evidently does not fit the cardinal line of the ventral yalve. qOp. Cit. p. 80, fig. 34. **Op. Cit. p. 84, figs, 39 and 40. 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 125 lus. Further, there is a ridge corresponding to the median ridge of the latter species, and also vascular lines similar in po- sition and direction. It is to be noted also that the position and general form of the posterior adductor aud lateral adjustor scar, of the ventral valve in both genera, are the same. There is, however, a marked difference in the position of the pedicle aperture in those two genera.. Additional examples of this species were found and show the surface ornamentation, consisting of numerous concentric ridg- lets, some more prominent than others; the radiating lines are faint and obscure, often not discernible. Horizon and locality. From the same horizon as those first found, viz., the middle of Assise 2. OBOLELLA, Billings. OBOLELLA NITIDA, Ford.? PI. ii., figs. 8 a and 5. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d Ser., vol. v., p. 213. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Bull., 30, p. 118, p. xi., fig. 2. Among the species of Obolella this little one appears only to be known from the figure and description by 8. W. Ford. We have found a few examples of a shell which does not appear to differ from this species. It would appear that Ford only had the dorsal valve, recognizable by the strong groove on the me- dian line in the posterior half of the shell. The dorsal in the Canadian examples is ovate-orbicular with a blunt umbo. There are impressions of the scars of the crescent that show through the shell, and traces also of the central group of muscle-scars. Sculpture. This, as far as the surface is preserved, shows an ornamentation due to waving irregular ridges, rather than the regular cancellation described by Mr. Ford. Size. Length of ventral valve 35 mm.; width, 3 mm. Length and width of the dorsal valve, each 3 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstone of Div. 1, Band}. Assise 3 at Hanford Brook. Rather scarce. LINNARSSONIA, Walcott. LINNARSSONIA TRANSVERSA, Hartt. Pl. v., figs. 1 @ to ec and 2a toe Obolella transversa Hartt, Acad. Geol., 2. Ed., p. 644. Obolella transversa Walcott. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Bull. 10., p. 16., pl. i., fig. 5 and 5a. ) : 126 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17, Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., sec. iv., p. 35., pl. v., fig. Lla to é. This species is not uncommon in the upper part of Band 6. especially in Assise 5, whence it ranges upward through the Paradoxides beds. ACROTRETA, Kutorga. ACROTRETA GEMMA, Bill. ? Paleozoic Fossils, vol. i., pr. 216., fig. 201 a to f. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 30, p. 98, pl. viii, figs. 1, la and 10. A small brachiopod of the size of this species is found sparingly in the lower part of Band. b., but owing to the coarse- ness of the matrix and the delicacy of the shell, the latter is greatly distorted and cannot be positively identified with this species. Horizon and locality. Dark sandstones of Assise 1, at Han- ford Brook. The conical ventral valve and high deltidial area shows that this shell is an Acrotreta. ACROTRETA GEMMULA. PI. v., figs. 5 a to d. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., sec. iv., p. 87, pl. xvi., figs. 2a to d. This pretty little shell, the smallest of its kind, originally de- scribed from the sandstones of Assise 3, has been found in As- sise 2, thus extending the range downward. It has the pecu- liarity of a foramen opening behind the apex. LINGULELLA (?) Cc&LATA, Hall. Orbicula celata Hall, Pal. N. Y., vol. i., p. 290, pl. Ixxix., fig. 9a to c. Lingulella celata Walcott, U. S. Geol. Sury. Bull. 30, p. 95, pl. vil., figs la to d. Two examples of the ventral valve of this little shell have been found in the sandstones of Assise 1. They show the low radiating ribs and the peculiar cancellated surface of this spe- cies. One, also, has an apical depression, or minute pit in the position where the foraminal opening would be in an Acrotreta or Linnarssonia. This species differs from LZ. (?) inflata, with which it occurs, in having the beak elevated, so that when seen from the side the valve is straight along the median line; whereas in Z. (2) in- Jlata it is strongly arched. 1895. ] NEW YORK: ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 127 LINGULELLA ? INFLATA. PI. v., figs. a and b. Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. iii., sec. iv., p. 33, pl. v., figs. 7 and Ta. Beside the type described in the above Transactions, there is a variety of an oval form occurring with it, which presents some peculiarities of structure not observable in the first examples found. var. OVALIS, n. var. Pl. v., figs. 4a to ce. Only the ventral valve is known. This is very tumid, rounded down at the sides, arched from beak to front,so that the highest part of the valve is about one-third from the beak; in outline the valve is ovate, with rather straight diverging sides for one- quarter of its lensth, thence rounded forward at the sides, and rather abruptly rounded to the front. There is a callus within the valve at the beak; this surrounds the pedicle furrow or tube, or at least encloses it at the sides and front. The foramen appears to open under the beak. There is a partial (as in Obolella gemma) or complete deltidial area, but in none of the specimens obtained is this area completely exposed. Sculpture. This consists of rather strong concentric ridges, and somewhat widely set radiating ridges. Size. Length 4 mm.; width 3 mm. Horizon and locality. The dark gray sandstone of Assise 1, at Hanford Brook. The rarity of dorsal valves of this variety and of the type of L.(?) inflata would perhaps indicate that they were thinner and more perishable than the ventral valves. These little shells approach Linnarssonia more nearly in form than Lingulella, and the variety especially is so tumid that it might be taken at first glance to be an Ostracod. » This species and L, (2) celata Hall are seemingly of the same genus and should be separated from Lingulella. They havea deltidial area elevated at an angle from the plane of the ‘lower side of the valve,in which respect they resemble Linnarssonia and Acro- treta. It also seems probable that they possess a foramen and not a pedicle groove; this is strongly indicated in var. ovalis and Messrs. Hall and Clarke figure L. (2) celata as possessing a small pit at the apex. JL. (2) cvlata is more nearly related to Acrothele and Acrotreta than to Lingulella and with L. (2) in- Jlata belong to that group of small foraminiferous brachiopods so common in the Lower Cambrian. 128 TRANSACTIONS OF: THE [MAR. 17, ACROTHELE, Linnarsson. AcCROTHELE MarTtTHEewI!, Hartt. PI. v., figs. 6a and b, Ta and J, 8a and 6. Lingula Matthewi Hart. Acad. Geol., 2d Ed., p. 644, fig. 221. Acrothele Matthewi U. 8. Geol. Surv. Bull., 10, p. 15, fig. 4, 4a. Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. ili., sec. iv., p. 39, pl. v., figs. 15, 15a, 16, 160, Viale: This is a species of wide range, and is somewhat common in the early Cambrian beds. I cannot find characters suflicient to distinguish the earlier forms from the type, which was found in Band c, except as varieties. Two such have been described in the Transactions above cited, but there is a third which should be referred to. var. COSTATA, n. var. Pl. v., fig. 9. Distinguished by six or more broad ribs, radiating toward the anterior margin. These ribs are not continuous, but are broken at certain lines of growth; they have not been observed near the umbo, but on the middle and anterior third of the shell they are well marked. This variety is more common in the shaly assises, whereas the thick, smooth shells are common in the sandstones. Sculpture of fine wavy or broken ridges, as in the other vari- eties. é Horizon and locality. Found in Assises 2 and 5 of Band 3}, at Hanford Brook; in Assise 5, of Band 6 at Caton’s Island, ‘King’s county; and in Band d,at Porter’s Brook, St. John county. The shells in Assise 5 have more numerous ribs than the others. OrTHID sp. Pl. v., fig. 10. Remains of Articulate Brachiopods are rare in the part of the Cambrian in New Brunswick that underlies the Paradox- ides beds. Only one example has been found, and that quite a small one; it is an Orthid, but is too imperfect for comparison with known species. It is a dorsal valve from which the shell has been mostly exfoliated, leaving a mould of the interior. Horizon and locality. Dark sandstones of Assise 1, Han- ford Brook. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 129 MOLLUSCA. HYOLITHELLUS, Billings. HYOLITHELLUS MICANS, Bill. ? Hyolithus micans Bill. Can. Nat.,2d Ser., vol. vi., p. 215, figs. 3a, b, p. 213. Hyolithellus micans Walcott, U. S. Surv. Bull. 30, p. 142, pl. xiv., fig. 2a to e. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., sec. iv., p. 94. A slender hy olithoid shell not easily distinguishable from Billings’ species occurs sparingly in the hard shales of Assise 2, at Hanford Brook. COLEOIDES, Walcott. CoOLEOIDES TYPICALIS, Wale? Ws. Nat. Mus. Proc., vol: 12, p: 37. Fauna of Olenellus Zone, p. 624, pl. Ixxix., Figs. 6, 6a. A fragment of a long, longitudinally striated fossil, which re- sembles Walcott’s species above named, is found in one exam- ple in the beds of Assise 2 at Hanford Brook. ORTHOTHECA, Novak. Zz : OrtTHOTHECA cf. EmMmonst. PI. vi., fig. 1. Hyolithes Emmonsi Ford. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d Ser., vol. ii., p- 244, figs. 3a to ec. Hyolithes conmunis var. Emmonsi Wale. U. 8S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 30, p. 137, pl. 14, fig. 4a to b. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., sec. iv., p. 95, pl. 16, fig. 10. HYOLITHES, Eichwald. HYo.ituHeEs cf. PRINCEPS, Bill.? Can. Nat. New Ser., vol. vi., p. 216, figs. 4a and 6 of p. 213. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 30, D. 135, pl. xlii., figs 5a and b. Among the fossils collected are specimens of a large Hyo- lithes, which by form and size resembles the above species, but the specimens are too imperfect to make the identification sure. Locality and horizon. Siliceous shales at the bottom of As- sise 3, Hanford Brook. TRaNsacTions N. Y. ACAD. S€r., Vol. XIV., Sig. 9, May 18, 1895. 130 TRANSACTIONS OF TIE . [MAR. 17, HYOLITHES AMERICANUS, Bill. A Theca? triangularis, Hall, Pal. N.Y., vol.i., p. 313, pl. lxxxvii., l,a tod. Hyolithes Americanus, Bill. Can. Nat., 2d Ser., vol. v., p. 215, figs. 2, a and 3, p. 213. A fragment shows the prominent ventral ridge characteristic of this species. Horizon and locality. Upper part of Assise 3 at Hanford Brook. Scarce. . Hyonirues cf. oprusa, Bill.? Salterella obtusa, Bill. Geol. Vermont, vol. ii., p. 955. Hyolithes Billingst, Wale. U. 8S. Geol. Sury. Bull. 30, p. 134, pl. xiii., figs. 1, a to d. A small species of the form of this one occurs in fragments. Horizon and locality. Upper part of Assise 3 at Hanford Brook. HyoLyrHeEs DECIPIENS. PI. vi., figs. 2 a to d. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 96, sec. iv., pl. xvi., figs. 11, a to d. Horizon and locality. Additional examples of this species were found in Assise 2 at Hanford Brook. HYOLITHES GRACILIOR, n. sp. Pl. vi., figs. 8 a and b. Tube long and slender; angle of incidence of the two edges 8°. The dorsal side is marked by lines of growth parallel to the outline of the lip, which is moderately arched. The ventral surface does not show any growth lines and is moderately con- vex, The proximal part of the tube is curved. Size. Width 3 to 44 mm.; length estimated 25 to 35 mm. Horizon and locality. From shales at the top of Assise 3. DIPLOTHECA. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., sec. iv., p. 52. DIPLOTHECA HYATTIANA. PI. vi., figs. 5a and b. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., sec. iv., p. 52, pl. vi., fig 4, 4 a. Found in Assise 3 at Hanford Brook. DIPLOTHECA ACADICA, var, CRASSA. PI. vi., fig. 4. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., sec. iv., p. 55. Found at the same horizon as the preceding. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 151 PELAGIELLA, n. gen. In a paper written for the Royal Society of Canada in 1892 the author described a singular spiral shell from Band } as of the genus Cyrtolites Conrad (printed Cyrtolithes), supposing that the whorl was symmetrical: the more abundant material obtained by Messrs. van Ingen and Matthew show that it is never quite svmmetrical, and that in this and other respects the reference to Cyrtolites will not hold; the author therefore pro- poses the above name, with the following description: Shell a discoid spiral of few whorls, flattened, lenticular, whorls some- what angulated at the outer edge, slightly flattened on the upper side, somewhat tumid on the lower. Lips of the aperture, both upper and lower, arched forward in the middle. Spire sunken. The peculiar lip appears to indicate that this animal was a free swimmer, and it is supposed to have been a Heteropod. It is gigantic compared with most of the shells of this sub-class, but there are some like the Violet-snail that are larger. Maclurea, Bellerophon &c., which also have been included in the Hetero- pods, are much larger. PELAGIELLA ATLANTOIDES. PI vi., figs. 6 a toc. Cyrtolithes atlantoides. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., sec. iv., p. 94, pl. xvi., figs. 8a and b. There is a good deal of variation in the form of this shell, some being more flattened on the upper side than others. The spire is always sunken below the level of the last whorl, and the species is easily recognized by the peculiar constricted band around the last whorl, next the lip of the shell; the more perfect shells, lately found, show that the “shallow curving furrow near the inner edge of the whorl” is the impression left by the ventral portion of this band on the growing shell. The low ridge traversing the middle of the whorl on its upper side corresponds to the projecting almost angulated portion of the lip. The umbilicus is not well shown in any of the specimens. There is no notch or slit at the projecting part of the last whorl, but the depressed band at the back of the lip is pinched in a little on each side at this point. As there are no depressed sings on the shell, it appears that this constricted band was formed only on the adult shell. The species seems to be that of a free swimmer, and the form of the orifice corresponds to that of a Heteropod or a Nautilus, rather than that of a true Gasteropod. : Size. Somewhat larger examples are known than those first 132 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17 described. Length across the whorls 9 mm.; width of the last whorl 6 mm. Horizon and locality. The range has been extended downward from the upper part of Assise 3, where it was first found, to Assise 2. It is most abundant at the latter horizon, but in- frequent in both. VOLBORTHELLA, Schmidt. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 156. VoOLBORTHELLA TENUIS, Schmidt. Pl. vi., figs. 7 @ and b. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., sec. iv., p. 156, pl. viii., figs. 5, a and b. The fossils from Band 6, in the northern basin of Cambrian rocks are authentic examples of this species ; this would appear from typical examples of the Russian species sent me by Dr. F. Schmidt, with which the King’s county fossils agree. It is not so certain that the tubular shells from the Etcheminian series at Hanford Brook are correctly referred here. Horizon and locality. Olive grey shales (of Assize 5?) in Band b, at Belyea’s Landing, King’s county, N. B. OSTRACODA. HIPPONICHARION.* Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 1885, vol. iii., p. 64. As this genus is one which is readily recognized, it affords a useful landmark in the Lower Cambrian,.and the original de- scription is quoted here: ‘“ Valves wide, semi-elliptical, subequi- lateral ; outer area of the valve, except on the side next the hinge; strongly elevated into prominent marginal ridges ; central area, including the upper side of the valve, greatly depressed, and having an inconspicuous central ridge near the hinge-line ; valves nearly equal. HIPPoNICHARION EOS PI. vii., figs. 1 @ and e. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., yol. uil., p, 64, pl.-vi., igs. Lao and 0b. No examples of this species were found in the material exam- ined from Assises 2 and 3, and its range is probably confined to Assise 1. * In allusion to its resemblance to the print of a horse’s hoof. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 133 HIPPONICHARION CAVATUM PI. vii., figs. 2 @ and b. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 99, pl. xvii., figs. 3 a@ and b. This species also appears to be confined to Assise 1. Hip- ponicharion in all its species looks like the head shield of Microdiscus, but it is never bilaterally symmetrical as the head shield of a trilobite would be. HIPPONICHARION MINUS Pl. vii., figs. 3 @ and b. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 99, pl. xvii., figs. 4 @ and b. Several specimens of this species were found in the upper part of Assise 3, at Hanford Brook. BEY RICHONA.* Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., p. 65 The original description of this genus was as follows: “Valves nearly or quite as wide as long and wider in front (behind) than behind (in front); they have a rudely semi-circular flattened area, extending not more than half way from the hinge- line; the rest of the valve is convex, and most elevated near the middle; the flattened area has several depressions which are not very prominent (7. e., conspicuous). “There is no median ridge, properly so-called, on the valve of this genus, but there are two very small oblique ridges, close to the hinge line of which the anterior (posterior) may be taken to represent the median ridge; the posterior (anterior) ridglet be- comes confluent with the inner termination of the anterior ridge. “The protuberances on the surface of the valves are not so marked in this genus as in Hipponicharion and Beyrichia.” Further discovery shows that this description in one respect is incorrect, and the words in brackets should be used to correct it. The species first descr.bed were so much alike at the two ends that it was difficult to determine which was the anterior; the present view is that the wider end is the posterior end of the vaive, but it is associated with the unusual condition that this is the thin end; the widest space within the valves is at the anterior end, and here also are situated the highest tubercle and the deepest pit. This remark applies to all the species, but with more force to those about to be described than to the ones on which the original diagnosis was based. I incline to the belief that the two species which Mr. Walcott has described and referred to Aristozoe of Barrande are of this genus, and especially his A. rofundata. Both have that high, * Augmentative of Beyrichia. 134 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maR. 17, somewhat oblique form of valve which is so characteristic of Beyrichona, and if one glances over plate 23 of Barrande’s sup- plement it will be apparent how different is Aristozoe in its general aspect from these Lower Cambrian species. H. Wood- ward, T. R. Jones and O. Novak all have referred Aristozoe to the Phyllocarida; but Beyrichona is certainly an Ostracod and the two species from the Olenellus zone agree in size better with the Ostracoda than the Phyllocarida, 4. bisulcata of Barrande, which Mr. Walcott compares with A. rotundata, has protuber- ances where the latter species has a sulcus or hollow. BEYRICHONA PAPILIO Pl. vii., figs. 4 @ to e. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., p. 65, pl. vi., figs. 20,20 a and 6. (Reverse the description as regards the anterior and posterior ends. ) This should have been reported from Assise 4, not Assise 2. BEYRICHONA TINEA PI. vii., figs. 6 @ to e. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., p. 66, pl. vi., figs. 21, 21 4 and b. (Reverse the description of the two ends as in B papilio.) This was found together with the preceding and should also be reported from Assise 4. : BEYRICHONA PLANATA n. sp. PI. vii., fig. 1. Obliquely semi-circular, somewhat longer than high, moder- ately convex, most so in the middle; from the raised centre of the valve an arched ridge curves forward to the ocular tubercle, near the hinge line; in the opposite direction a low inconspicuous ridge extends backward to the posterior upper corner of the valve; behind the ocular tubercle is a broad furrow or pit that extends backward half of the length of the cardinal line, becoming nar- rower in its posterior half; on the anterior side of the valve there is a flattened band that extends to the lower margin, where a narrow obscure furrow appears, and extends thence to the pos- terior corner of the valve. The anterior half of the valve is somewhat tumid, and the posterior is flattened out toward the posterior margin so that the two valves together form there a sharp knife-like edge. Sculpture. The surface is uneven, minutely punctate and shining, like B tinea, from which its differs in its greater pro- portionate length, greater size, shallower cardinal furrows, flat- ter posterior border, and the obscureness of the border fold. Size. Length 5 mm.; height 44 nm. aied 1895. } NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 135 Horizon and locality. Olive green shales of Assise 2 at Han- ford Brook. This is the common species of Assise 2. Varieties. Among the examples from Assise 2 are young shells which by their three-cornered shape resemble B. trian- gula (see below); these may be distinguished from that species by the larger and more depressed lunule near the cardinal area, and by the characteristic sculpture. Other forms by their more elevated posterior half and shorter valves approach B. tinea, but a comparison with the type of that species serves to separate them. ; This species (B. planata), is of interest as the companion of the Foraminifera described on a previous page; where they are most abundant B. planata is the prevailing Ostracod; the asso- ciation may indicate that this type of Ostracoda lived in the open sea and was not so dependent on shore conditions as some others. BEYRICHONA TRIANGULA hn, sp. Pl. vii., fig. 5. Subtriangular, 1 rather flat with an abrupt anterior slope. The valve is bordered by a narrow marginal rim. Posterior margin nearly straight, anterior moderately curved, the lower corner of the valve bluntly rounded. Ocular ridge prominent. Seupture. This species has a fine granulation like B. papilio. Size. Length 3} mm.; height 3 mm. : Horizon and locality. Occasionally in the shales of Assise 2, but more frequent in the sandstones of Assise 3. Scarce. This species differs from the others except B. papilio in its triangular form and the obsolescence of the flattened lunate area at the upper side of the valve; from B. papilio it differs in being less abruptly pointed below, in having a marginal fold, and in the absence of the sharp thread-like posterior cardinal ridge possessed by that sjecies. BEYRICHONA OVATA n. sp. Pl. vii., fig. 8. Transversely ovate, hinge-line short, not much more than half of the length of the valve; valve broadest one-quarter from the top, thence gradually tapering to an obtuse point; the valve is bordered by a narrow but distinct marginal fold; the ocular ridge is rather broad, the muscular depression subcentral, near the hinge-line, but not extending to it. ; Sculpture. Obscure, the surface where it is preserved is min- ute granulate. Size. Length 24 mm.; height 4 mm. Horizon and en Olive grey shales of Assise 2, at Han- ford Brook. Rare. 136 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MaR. 17, BEYRICHONA ROTUNDATA, n. sp. Pl. vii., fig. 9. Broadly semi-circular. Flattened area of the valve extending halfway across from the hinge-line; valve more elevated in front than behind, having a narrow and obscure marginal fold behind, but none visible on the front half. Sculpture. Surface as in B. planata. Size. Length 5 mm.; height 3} mm. Horizon and locality. Shales of Assise 2 at Hanford Brook. Scarce. Compare this species with Walcott’s Aristozoe rotundata from the Lower Cambrian of Washington county, N.Y. The general form is similar, but it differs in the narrower marginal fold and smaller size. APARCHITES, T. Rupert Jones. APARCHITES SECUNDA, n. sp. Pl. vii., figs. 11 @ and b. Oval, tumid, hinge-line more than half of the length of the valve; near the anterior end is a slight swelling where the eye- spot might be; there is a faint thread-like ridge along the car- dinal line, where the margin of the valve is straight; the ventral border is rolled in on each side and no marginal fold is visible. Sculpture. *The surface is minutely rugose. Size. Length 4 mm.; width 24 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones of the upper part of Assise 3, at Hanford Brook. PRIMITIA, T. Rupert Jones. PRIMITIA AURORA PI. viii., figs. 1 a@ to e. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 98, pl. xvii., fig. 5 a to c. This species was found in the dark gray sandstones of Assise 1, some years ago. PRIMITIA OCULATA, n. sp. PI. viii., figs. 2 a and b. Obliquely oval, tumid, straight on the hinge-line, which is about two-thirds of the length of the valve; there is a promi- nent ocular tubercle near the anterior end, and behind the tuber- cle a shallow groove. Two depressions are noticeable on the posterior end of the value. ‘ Sculpture. The test is distinctly pitted. Size. Length 3 mm.; height 2 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones of the upper part of Assise 3. Rare. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 157 PrRIMITIA (7) FUSIFORMIS, n. sp. Pl. viii., figs. 3 @ and b. Valve spindle-shaped, bluntly pointed in front, obtusely round- ed behind, tumid. It has a shallow furrow on the anterior third, . extending from the back halfway across; behind the furrow at the median line of the valve is a low tubercle. Sculpture. The surface of the test is finely granulated; at the posterior end of the valve the pits are arranged lengthwise of the valve,and give that end a striated appearance. Size. Length 7 mm.; height 3 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstone of the upper part of Assise 3, at Hanford Brook. Rare. SCHMIDTELLA, Ulich. ScHMIDTELLA CAMRRICA, Nn. sp. Pl. vii., figs.-10 @ and bd. Valves ovately circular, somewhat wider than long, quite tumid, with the greatest convexity towards the hinge-line. There is a very narrow fold at the anterior (7) and on the ventral margin. MHinge-line about half of the length of the valve. Sculpture. Surface of the valves minutely pitted. Size. Length and breadth each 25 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstone of the upper part of Assise 3, at Hanford Brook. Scarce. LEPERDITIA, Rouault. The following species are referred provisionally to Leperditia ; unfortunately the material is defective, and in no instance have both valves been preserved in contact so that one could see whether they overlap and are unequal; it is on account of the size and general form of these crustaceans that they are thought to be referable to the genus above named, or one closely allied. LEPERDITIA (7) VENTRICOSA PI. viii., figs. 5 a to d. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. vii., p. 159, pl. vii., figs. 12 @ to d. Found in the dark gray sandstones of Assise 1, at Hanford Brook. LEPERDITIA (?) Sreapr PI. viii,, figs. 7 a to ¢. Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. vii., p. 160, pl. vii., figs. 13 @ to e. Found with the preceding. Prof. T. R. Jones in a letter to the writer suggests that these two species may be of the genus Tsochilina. 138 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17, LEPERDITIA (7) MINOR, n. sp., Pl., viii., figs. 4 a and b. Test broadly oval, with a straight hinge-line; moderately convex; the two ends of the valve make obtuse angles with the hinge-line. There is a shallow furrow extending from near the anterior end of the valve toward its middle; at the end of the furrow is a small tuberculous elevation. Sculpture. This consists of deep, rather distinct pits as in L. Steadi, which this species resembles in form, but it is much smaller. Size. Length 24 mm.; height of the valve nearly as great. Horizon and locality. Sandstones at the top of Assise 3. Scarce. LEPERDITIA (?) PRIMAVA, 0. Sp., Pl., vili., figs. 6 a and b. Only the right valve is known; this is oval and has a straight hinge-line two-thirds of the length of the test. The valve is somewhat pointed at the hinge in front, and rounded from the, hinge behind. A scar in the centre of the valve where the test is broken away may indicate the place of the adductor muscle. Sculpture. A portion of the carapace preserved shows a very fine punctation. Size. Length 54 mm.; width 4 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones of Assise 3 (lower part), Hanford Brook. Rare, PHYLLOPODA? LEPIDETLA:+ Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. iii., p. 61. LEPIDITTA SIGILLATA, Pl. viii., fig. 8. Trans. Roy. Soc. Cans., vol. xi., p. 98, pl. xvii., fig. 1. This species was found in the Sandstones of Assise 3. TRILOBITA. PROTAGRAULOS n. gen. A small trilobite related to Agraulos and Holocephalina by its general form, occurs sparingly in sandstone layers of Band bd. Glabella depressed to the level of the cheeks, scarcely traceable except at the posterior end. Cheeks slightly arched down at the front and sides. Eyelobes long. Anterior extensions of the facial sutures approximated. * — Little scale. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 139 This form differs from Agraulos in the narrow front to the middle piece of the cephalic shield and in the long eyelobes, as well as the oblique direction of the facial suture, taken as a whole. From Holocephalina it differs in the larger free cheeks, the narrow space between the sutures in front,and by the length and position of the eyelobe. From both genera it differs by its long glabella, which, though but faintly indicated on the surface of the shield, can be traced. PROTAGRAULOS PRISCUS, n. sp., Pl. ix., fig. 1. Only the middle part of the head shield is known; this is rather flat,and is moderately arched down at the sides and front. Front margin with a faint, narrow rim; the front area on the axial line is half of the width of the glabella at its widest part; the middle piece of the head is narrow between the sutures in front. Glabella one-fifth longer than wide, obscurely marked off from the cheeks, except in the posterior half; dorsal furrow scarcely visible except near the back of the shield. Occipital ring more than twice as long as wide, separated from the glabella by a faint furrow. Fixed cheeks long, narrow, moderately arched; eye-- lobes scarcely raised above the surface of the cheeks, nearly as long as the glabella. Sculpture. The surface appears to be minutely punctate, and has small scattered tubercles. Size. Length of the middle piece of the head 10 mm.; width in front 6 mm.; at the eyelobes 12 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones of the middle part of As- sise 3 at Hanford Brook. A few heads of the trilobite have been found; the form is such that imperfect examples might easily be mistaken for the py- gidium of a larger trilobite, but the depression in front of the eyelobes, though shallow, indicates a head shield. This de- pression is continuous with the dorsal furrow, turns outward and downward to the corner in front of the eyelobe, and by throwing the front area of the shield in connection with the glabella gives to the axial ridge of the shield a pseudo-club- shaped glabella like that which is found in the embryonic tests of Conocoryphe, Liostracus and Ptychoparia. ELLIPSOCEPHALUS, Zenker. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 103. ELLIPSOCEPHALUS GALEATUS PI. ix., figs. 4 @ to g. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 103., pl. xvii., figs 7 @ to e. 1-40 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [mMarR. 17, The figure of a thoracic segment given with this species, does not correctly represent the actual segment. The ring when articulated with adjoining ones shows no furrow; and the pleural groove is shallower than represented in the figures. The num- ber of segments in the thorax, given as eleven, may not be ex- actly that number. This species is from the sandstones of Assise 3. ELLIPSOCEPHALUS GRANDIS PI. ix., figs. 3 @ to c. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 105, pl. xvii., figs 6 a to ec. This is the largest species of its genus known from the Lower Cambrian ; it has a short genal spine, and is from the upper part of Assise 2. ELLIPSOCEPHALUS sp. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. v., p. 129, pl. ii., figs 8 @ to c. This, the oldest known species of Ellipsocephalus, is from the dark gray sandstones of Assise 1. AVALONIA Walcott. Under the name of Avalonia, Mr. Walcott has described a small trilobite which is evidently related to Ellipsocephalus, but which has differences that make it desirable to separate it from that genus. The chief differences are the greater proportionate size of the glabella, the plaited anterior margin, the weak pos- terior margin and the furrow around the fixed cheek. A species with these characters occurs with the Protolenus Fauna. AVALONIA ACADICA 0. Sp. Pl. ix., fig. 5. Head shield semi-circular, rounded down at the sides, and also at the front and back. Dorsal suture directly forward to the anterior margin and backward, behind the eyelobe, to the pos- terior margin. Anterior margin of the middle piece of the head shield broad, plaited in front. Glabella cylindro-conical, slightly narrower in front than at the back; three very faintly marked furrows are visible. The occipital furrow is distinct and the ring broad and crowned by a low tubercle. The fixed cheeks are rather tumid, and at the anterior corner of the glabella, crossed by a shallow groove that extends outward to the dorsal suture; there is a very faint ocular fillet on the raised part of the fixed cheek. The posterior margin and fold are narrow, and the latter is genicu- lated at the middle. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 141 The movable cheek is narrow, arched inward at the end, and apparently without spine. Sculpture. The surface of the test is smooth and shining, but under a lens appears to be minutely punctured. At the back of the fixed cheeks are faintly marked, radiating and anastomosing raised lines. Size. Length of the head shield 6 mm.; width 8 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones of Assise 3 at Hanford Brook. Rare. This species appears to belong to Walcott’s genus Avalonia by its form, size and surface ornamentation. There is a groove around the front of the fixed cheek, such as Walcott has de- scribed for Avalonia manuelensis ; but in our species the front of this groove does not take the place of the ocular fillet, which is further back on the cheek. The heavy occipital ring is a con- spicuous difference from the Newfoundland species. MICMACCA n. gen. Under this head the author proposes to describe a group of trilobites with large, rather prominent, cylindrical glabella, which extends almost to the front of the shield; and with continuous eyelobes, and a short, direct posterior extension of the dorsal suture. In the narrow front area of the head shield and the large glabella, they are like Zacanthoides of Walcott, but they have not the long outward posterior extension of the dorsal suture ; hence the pleurze must have been essentially different. In the long eyelobes and the short posterior extension of the suture they resemble Ellipsocephalus, but they lack the com- paratively wide front area of the middle piece of the head shield of that genus, and its smooth glabella, expanded in front; they are all trilobites of larger size than any true Ellipsocephalus. The genus is named for a tribe of Acadian aborigenes. MicmaccA MATTHEVI n. sp. Pl. x., figs. 1 @ and b. Middle piece of the head subquadrate. Front margin with a narrow flat fold; front area greatly narrowed in front of the glabella. Glabella large, cylindrical, slightly enlarged at the front, having three pairs of furrows, scarcely perceptible. Oc- cipital ring broad, rounded forward at the back, divided from the glabella by a distinct furrow; it bears a small tubercle on the axial line. The fixed cheeks are tumid, depressed before and behind; at the inner posterior corner it extends behind the occipital furrow, and thence is arched forward to the eyelobe ; 142 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MaR. 17, the eyelobes are opposite the posterior two-thirds of the glabella, narrow and moderately arched. Dorsal suture, except at the eyelobe, nearly parallel to the side of the elabella. Sculpture. This consists of tubercles which on some parts of the shield are arranged in sub-parallel rows (e. g., the back of the glabella and the front of the fixed cheeks). Size. Length of the head shield 21 mm.; width between the dorsal sutures, at the front 21 mm.; at the eyelobes 26 mm. Horizon and locality. In the purple-streaked Sp ast of Assise 3, Hanford Brook. Scarce. This species is named for the discoverer, W. D. Machen? Micmacca VAN-INGENI n. sp. Pl. xi., figs. 1 a and D. This species differs from the preceding in the following re- spects ; the glabella is more prominent and narrower and has deeper furrows, and the occipital furrow is also more distinct. The occipital ring bears a strong spine, projecting upward and backward; the width of the spine and ring together is equal to that of the fixed cheek. Detached pleura which have a prominent spine on the poste- rior ridge of the ring, probably belong to this species. Sculpture. This consists of distinct granulations covering the whole surface of the test. Size. Length from the front of the glabella to the tip of the occipital spine 20 mm.; width between the eyelobes 22 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones of Assise 3, at Hanford Brook. Scarce. Named for the collector, Mr. Gilbert van Ingen. This species is allied to Zacanthoides spinosus Wale., of the Eureka district in Nevada,* by the form and size of the glabella, and the large occipital spine; it however has wider fixed cheeks, and no trace of the long posterior extension of the dorsal suture, necessary to a Zacanthoides. Z. sptnosus is stated to have a wide range, even up into the Potsdam horizon (Upper Cam- brian) ; the lower horizon is not much above the Olenellus Zone; possibly there are two species, of which only the later one has the extended posterior suture; the earlier one only is shown to have the heavy occipital spine. MIcMACCA RECURVA 0. Sp., Pl. x., figs. 3 a to c. Form of the head shield semi-circular. Anterior margin with a narrow, upturned rim. Glabella quadrate, rounded in front, slightly wider opposite the eyelobes than elsewhere, faintly im- * U.S. Geol. Sury. Bul., 30, p. 184, pl. xxv. figs. 6 and 6 a. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 143 pressed with two, somewhat oblique furrows; there is a small obscure tubercle on the edge of the glabella opposite the ocular fillet; the glabella is flatly arched sidewise, bent down behind, and is bounded by a distinct dorsal furrow. The fixed cheek is rather flat, arched down at the side in front,and also arched downward at the back; it bears a thick ocular fillet, which ter- minates in a distinct swelling at the dorsal furrow; it has a well defined though narrow groove, which descends to the posterior marginal furrow inside of the eyelobe ; the eyelobe is continuous to the posterior marginal furrow. The occipital ring is depressed below the glabella, and is narrow. The posterior fold and fur- row also are weak and narrow. The dorsal suture runs forward ' to the frontal limb, parallel to the axis of the shield, and back- ward behind the eyelobe direct to the posterior margin. A movable cheek svhich accompanies the centre piece of the head of the species, is narrow, moderately arched, and rounded at the genal angle. Sculpture. The surface is minutely tuberculate. Size. -Length of the head-shield 18 mm.; width at the front, between the sutures 16 mm., at the eyelobes 23 mm. Horizon and locality. Sandstones at the top of Assise 3. Scarce. This species is distinguished from the others by its upturned anterior marginal fold, and by the sharp furrow along the inside of the eyelobe. In this and in the tubercle at the side of the glabella it resembles genus Avalonia, Walcott. The glabella is broader and flatter than that of the two preceding species. This species appears to have many points in common with Zacanthoides levis found in company with Olenellus Gilberti at Highland Range, Nevada*; the form of the glabella, the up- turned front margin of the shield, and the sweep of the ocular fillet and eyelobe are similar; but our species appears to have a direct posterior extension of the suture, which would exclude it from Zacanthoides. Mr. Walcott compares Z. levis with Billings’ Bathyurellus abruptus only known by asmall head from northern Newfoundland +; this species, however, is referred by Mr. Billings to the Quebec Group (Ordovician), and so must be of much later date than the other two species above named. Micmacca (?) PLANA n. sp. Pl. xi., figs. 2 a and 3 b. Middle piece of the head-shield subquadrate, depressed, ex- cept the glabella, which is only moderately elevated. Front *U.S. Geol. Surv., Bull. 30, p. 187. + Paleeoz. Foss., vol. i., p. 263. 144 TRANSACTIONS OF THE. [MAR. 17, margin moderately arched, having a narrow indistinct fold. Glabella large. cy lindro- conical, flattened on the sides, descend- ing oradually at the front, and bordered by a distinct, but faintly impressed dorsal furrow. The glabella has two pairs of furrows, which are set well forward, the posterior pair oblique and arched backward, the anterior pair faint, at first transverse, then arching backward. Occipital ring broad, marked off from the glabella “by a faint, continuous furrow ; the ring is arched forward at the side, bears a slight, comma- ‘shaped elevation on each side, and carries as short, “acute spine at the back. The fixed cheek is subtriangular; within the eyelobe it is about half as wide as the olabella; the ocular fillet is well marked and is directed backwar d; cheek nearly flat, concave near the eyelobe, which is long and moderately arched. Sculpture. This consists of fine, closely set granulations, just visible to the unassisted eye. Size. Length of the head- shield 17 mm.; width between the dorsal sutures, at the front 20 mm.; at the eyelobes about 24 mm. Horizon and locality. Purplish gray sandstone of Assise 3, at Hanford Brook. Scarce. Collected by W. D. Matthew, 1892. This species ditfers so much from the two preceding that it is placed in this genus only provisionally, Among the described species of the Cambrian, Zacanthoides typicalis, Walcott, comes nearest this. As the posterior dorsal suture of our species is not known, a satisfactory comparison can- not be made; it certainly has not the peculiar sculpture found on the cheeks of that species, and the ridge on the side of the oc- cipital ring in our species, is not the round tubercle represented on Z. typicalis ; but the sculpture of radiating lines is invisible on the outer surface of the test in species which have it well marked on the inner surface. Possibly there is a genetic gon- nection. It seems desirable to quote here for the benefit of those who may not have access to earlier publications on the St. John Group faunas the description of the genus of trilobites which is most characteristic of the fauna of Band b. PROTOLENUS Matthew. Nat. Hist. Soc. of N. B. Bull., 10, p. 34. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., pt. 1v., p. 100. Head shield semi-circular, moderately vaulted, outer part of the cheek movable, prolonged at the genal angle into a spine. Middle piece of the head more or less quadrate. Anterior margin wide, having a narrow distinct foldat the rim. Glabella 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 145 conical or cylindro-conical, prominent, marked by furrows on the sides, and distinct from the occipital ring. Fixed cheeks of variable width, bordered by a long, continuous or nearly con- tinuous eyelobe. Extension of the dorsal suture both in front of and behind the eye, more or less clirect to the margin. Movable cheek regularly curved, area wider than the distinct fold, spine usually long. Thorax of many joints, pleure grooved for part of their length, more or less geniculate, curved backward in the distal part, ex- tended into points or spines. Pygidium in the Canadian species unknown (small?) in the Sardinian species like that of Olenus or Paradoxides. PROTOLENUS PARADOXOIDES PI. x., figs. 3 a and bd. Nat. Hist. Soc. N. Bruns’k, Bull. 10, p. 36, fig. 2. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 101, pl. xvii., fig. 10 a@ and b. The thorax in this species is narrow, owing to the shortness of the pleurz ; the ring is prominent and has a strong furrow, and the pleura is flat and carries a diagonal groove, which terminates at the root of the spine; the spine is short and bent abruptly backward. Part of a hypostome has been preserved; it is dome-like in form, and the interior has numerous arched thread-like furrows. PROTOLENUS BI-TUBERCULATUS n. sp. PI. x., figs. 4 a to c. Only the middle piece of the head shield is known. The front margin is broken. leaving only the area, which is narrow. Gla- bella cylindro-conical, moderately raised, enclosed by a distinct dorsal furrow, which is but faintly impressed at the front; the glabella has three pairs of oblique furrows, the two posterior sharply impressed, and connected over the axis by a shallow de- pression ; the posterior lobe of the glabella bears a pair of small oval tubercles near the front, and about midway of each half. The occipital ring is only partly preserved, and is separated from the glabella by a sharp furrow, directly transverse. The fixed cheek is flat and somewhat concave along the middle; it has a small, low, longitudinal ridge near the posterior inner corner, and a tubercle-like ocular fillet; the eyelobe is mostly broken away, but the form of the cheek indicates that it was continuous. The thorax is narrow. A portion of one, supposed to be of this species, found in the lower layer of Assise 3, shows a strong grooved ring, having a pair of tubercles in the groove; the pleure are partly preserved. Horizon and locality. The head-shield is from the upper part of Assise 3 at Hanford Brook. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. Sc¥., Vol. XIV., Sig. 10, May 18, 1895. 146 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [mMar. 17, BERGERONIA n. subgen. A better knowledge of the species Protolenus elegans makes it necessary to separate it from Protolenus paradoxoides by something more than a specific designation. The segment of the thorax of P. elegans, figured in the author’s paper, read before the Royal Society of Canada in 1893, was found in slaty rock, and had been flattened by pressure; for this reason it did not show the strong geniculation, which the pleurz in their na- tural form possess. A comparison of the pleural parts of the two species named above, show radical differences, and al- though the glabellas are similar, it seems desirable to mark the difference in other respects by a subgeneric name. P. elegans in the strongly grooved and geniculate pleurz, resembles Ptycho- paria (and Solenopleura but for the apical spines), while P. para- doxoides has the flat pleura, with diagonal furrow, characteristic of the Olenide. To the species elegans, which would thus become the type of a subgenus, should be added one which has been doubtfully ranged under Agraulos and Ellipsocephalus, but which now by its thorax, and the general contour of the head-shield, is seen to be congeneric with P. elegans; this is Hllipsocephalus (?) articeph- alus. In dividing off a new genus or sub-genus, it is customary to retain the species first described as the type of the old genus ; but in this case it would not be advisable to do so, because the second represents best the conception of the genus. P. elegans was described first, because the material for the elucidation of this species was most complete. To some naturalists Ber- geronia will seem only a subgenus of Protolenus; whether it be considered a genus or subgenus will depend upon the compara- tive importance assigned to the thorax, as contrasted with the glabella. Barrande, Salter and other writers on the trilobites, have considered the course of the dorsal suture, and the form of the pleura, its groove and facet, of great importance in determin- ing genera; the determination of the standing of Bergeronia will depend upon whether we assign the greater value to the pleural features, or to the form and relation of the glabella. It was probably because of the resemblance borne by the thorax of S? Howleyi of the Lower Cambrian of Newfoundland to that of a Solenopleura that Mr. Walcott ranged that species provisionally under this genus; but the author’s studies of the em- bryonic forms of Solenopleura and other Ptychoparida show that this species can hardly be included in that genus. For in Sole- nopleura the eyelobe, even in the youngest forms in which it can 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 147 be seen, is short ; the process of development of the eyelobe in this family is not a shortening of that protuberance, but a gradual withdrawal of it from the margin of the head toward the gla- bella ; a Solenopleura then could never have had the eyelobe of the form of that of S? Howleyi.* Andas regards B. elegans, it is not related to the Ptychoparida, notwithstanding a certain resemblance in the pleura. The course of its dorsal suture is similar to that of the early forms of Paradoxides, and the movable cheek is of the type of the cheek of that genus, but its glabella and pleurz separate it both from that genus and from Olenellus. It stands apart as one of the ancestral types of this ancient fauna. BERGERONIA ELEGANS W. D. Matthew MSS., PI. xi., figs. 3 a toe. Protolenus elegans, Nat. Hist. Soc. N. Bruns’k Bull. 10., p. 25, ae I: Eee diplenus elegans, Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 100, pl. Xvii., figs. 9a to d. Examples of this species taken from the shales, are larger than those found in the phosphate nodules; among those col- lected from the shales last summer was one having a head-shield 40 mm. long; this is double the length given in the original description of the species; the width at the anterior margin be- tween the sutures is about the same (40 mm.), and at the pos- terior end 52 mm.; the specimen is a good deal flattened in the shale. Examples of the thorax show that this species possessed at least eight segments ; the thorax has been found partly rolled, and also extended at length. BERGERONIA ARTICEPHALA PI. x., figs. 5 a and D. Agraulos (?) articephalus, Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. iii., p. 65, pl. vii., figs. 14 a and b. Ellipsocephalus articephalus, Trans Roy. Soc. Can., vol. xi., p. 104, pl. xvii, figs. 8a and b. Numbers of the head shields of this species have been found, but all from the same horizon, viz.: sandstones of Assise 3. A pygidium occurs in association with the heads of B. arti- cephala but not attached; the rachis has three grooves, and the same number of grooves appear on the sidelobes. The rarity of pygidia in Band } is remarkable, this being the only one found among hundreds of heads. *In the figure given in “ Fauna of the Olenellus Zone,” this species is represented as having a short eyelobe, but this appears to be an error of the engraver, as the description indicates a long eyelobe. 148 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [maR. 17, LIST OF THE SPECIES OF BAND b, SHOWING THE HORIZONS AT WHICH THEY ARE FOUND. ( ‘rep’? represented. ) Hanford Brook (Southern Basin). — Northern Basin. ul 2 3 4 5 24) 5 FORAMINIFERA. Orbulina cf. universa.......... Orbuliina)(?) ovalliss.siseere Orbulina intermedia........... Orbulina (?) ingens ........... Globigerina cambrica ......... Globigerina grandis ........... Globigerina didyma .......... Globigerina turrita ........... SPONGIDA. WROTE Cooks casboonecdG400 PTOSOSPOMS Ae ere cctetelereieiaterelseielere Astrocladia (?) elongata ....... Astrocladia (?) elegans ........ Astrocladia (?) virguloides..... BRACHIOPODA. Lingulella Martinensis......... Lingulella cf. granvillensis, Wale Obolus ( Botsfordia) pulchra.... Obolus pristimus Sess cee so Trematobolus insignis ......... Obolella nitida\’/Ford .......... Linnarssonia transvera, Hartt... Acrotreta gemma, Bill.......... Acrotreta gemmula............ Lingulella (?) celata, Hall...... Lingulella (?) inflata.......... var. ovalis ...-.. Acrothele Matthewi, Hartt..... VAT PULTE erajetsy-healeyeie Vrs ENGk Sho ogoudds ORME Sihosaon dogs apocagcoct MOLLUSCA. Orthotheca cf. Emmonsi, Ford. . Hyolithes cf. princeps, Bill..... Hyolithes americanus, Bill..... Hyolithes cf. obtusa, Bill....... Hyolithes decipiens ........... Hyolithes gracilior ............ Diplotheca hyattiana .......... Diplotheca acadica var. crassa... HH M MWK WH ia) ww HW KKK WK RK \Olen- ellus. Zone. rep. rep.. oid 1895.] | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 149 LIsT OF THE SPECIES OF BAND b.—Continued. Hanford Brook ‘|| Northern | (Southern Basin). Basin. || Assise:)- 1 | 22. fF 3] 4 |. Bb. | 2-4) 5 ia’) I =) =| n N S 5 ace Pelagiella atlantoides.......... Beppe | | Volborthella tenuis, Schmidt... x | OsTRACODA. | | Hipponicharion Eos........... x Hipponicharion cavatum ...... x Hipponicharion minus......... | os Beyrichona papilio............ x Beyrichona tinea .........<.... x i} Beyrichona planata............ | Beyrichona triangularis ....... Beyrichona ovata........... ena Beyrichona rotundata.......... -- || rep.?: Aparchites secunda........ ..- SANS. \| RIMALG ALOE stec) sce - sicele x Primitia oculata ...........55% Primitia (?) fusiformis......... Schmidtella cambrica .......... Leperditia ventricosa ..........|/ x | Leperditia Steadi ...... eee x t Leperditia (?) minor.......... x Leperditia primzva........... xs PHYLLOPODA. Lepiditta sigillata ............ x ‘TRILOBITA. Protagraulos priscus........... Ellipsocephalus galeatus ..... i Ellipsocephalus grandis........ x Ellipsocephalus sp......-...-.. x Micmacca Matthevi............ Micmacca van Ingeni.......... IMGMACEa TECULVA. <<. 6c eee cee Micmacca (?) plana............ Avalonia acadica .:............ Protolenus paradoxoides ....... Protolenus bituberculatus...... Bergeronia elegans ............ x 4 || rep. Bergeronia articephala......... WWW aia | rep.? | rep. HH WM WM KAM A a 150 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [mMaR. 17, COMPARISONS AND CONCLUSIONS. In conclusion a few of the salient features which separate this fauna from all others, may be briefly given. All the trilobites have continuous eyelobes.* This is decidedly a primitive character, and its value in this respect can be shown from the genus Paradoxides, which began with small species having such eyelobes, and culminated in the large forms in which the eyelobe at maturity, was considerably shortened. This shortening up of the eyelobe was carried still further in the Oleni, dwarfed forms of similar type in the Upper Cambrian ; in these the eyelobe comes almost opposite the front of the gla- bella. : The important family of the Ptychoparida is absent. This family did not have continuous eyelobes, for in the young when this protecting fold first shows itself, it is short, and at the lateral margin of the head-shield. No trilobite with such an eyelobe has been found in this fauna. The Ptychoparida had about a dozen species in the Olenellus Fauna and became quite common in that with Paradoxides, continuing to abound through- out the Cambrian Age. The genus Conocoryphe is absent. This is specially a type of the Lower Paradoxides beds, and under the name of Cono- coryphe trilineata (Atops trilineatus) is claimed as a character- istic fossil of the Olenellus Zone.+ The genus Microdiscus is absent. This trilobite is specially characteristic of the Olenellus Zone, and continued to live with Paradoxides. In New Brunswick it occurs in the Paradoxides Zone, but not with Protolenus. In Europe it is only known to have lived with Paradoxides. The genus Olenellus is absent. Though carefully looked for, * That is, eyelobes that extend from near the front of the glabella to the posterior marginal furrow. + This however, is probably an error, for the genus Conocoryphe is characteristic of the Paradoxides Fauna, and eminently of the Lower Paradoxides beds. It is found in this relation in Scandinavia, where, including Ctenocephalus, which has a similar range, no less than six species occur, all in the Lower Paradoxides beds; and four in Wales. In Bohemia also the genus occurs in the same connection, as also.in the north of Spain and south of France. In New Brunswick it is equally characteristic of the same horizon, as may be seen by reference to the author’s list showing the range of Cambrian species in this country (Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. xi., pt. iv., p. 118); and al- though the species Conocoryphe trilineata has not been found here, the author has met with it in a collection of fossils from the Paradoxides beds of Manual Brook, New- foundland, sent to him by Mr. J. P. Howley. It is altogether probable that the Para- doxides Fauna is present in the slates of Washington county,N.Y., where Alops trilin- eatus occurs, but has not been recognized. The author several years ago drew atten- tion to the place of this genus in the chronological succession of the Cambrian genera in Trans.Roy.Soc.Can., vol. iv., pt. iv., p. 149. Olenellus asaphoides and Conocoryphe (Atops) trilineatus, which Emmons proclaimed as the characteristic fossils of his Taconic System, are types, the one of the Olenellus Zone and the other of the Para- doxides Zone, and sustain Emmons’ contention that his Taconic rocks were below the Potsdam sandstone. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 151 no example of this genus has been found among the trilobites of Band 6. Hence, though the Protolenus Fauna holds the place where we might naturally look for Olenellus, this genus is absent, and as so many of the genera associated with it are also absent, we cannot regard this fauna as the Fauna of Olenellus. Of the genera of trilobites that are present Micmacca has close relationship with Zacanthoides; it differs in the course of the posterior extension of the dorsal suture. The relation will seem closer if we suppose a movement of the eyelobe during the growth of the individual in Zacanthoides, similar to that which occurred with the Ptychoparida, in which there was a contrac- tion of the eyelobe toward the glabella during growth and at the same time a projection. of the posterior extension of the dorsal suture outward, toward the genal angle. If this relation should be established, Micmacca may be looked upon as an an- cestral form of Zacanthoides. It is worthy of note that in two of the genera of trilobites that occur in the Protolenus Fauna, the earlier species are larger than the later, as though these genera had reached their culminating point, and were on the decline; these types are Bergeronia and Ellipsocephalus ; and as regards the latter, the continued dimi- nution in size is notable in the sole species of this type in the Paradoxides Zone, viz.: EH. Hoffi.* Among the Ostracoda of this fauna, a diminution in size is found in the successive species of Hipponicharion, and of one section of Beyrichona (e. g.,planata and tinea). The former ge- nus is among the first crustacean remains of these Cambrian beds. In this fauna we find ourselves among a very primitive as- semblage of Brachiopods, for among them are forms which it is difficult to assign to any known genus. Many are small, some are minute, and the larger forms all belong to the Obolide and Siphonotretidz. One of the latter is remarkable as being of the inarticulate order, yet having a distinct articulation at the hinge- line. The Gasteropoda are all of aberrant types. This class is chiefly represented by various forms of Hyolithidz, the most ancient of all known types of Gasteropods, having come down to this fauna from Pre-Cambrian times.t A very remarkable form of this fauna is Pelagiella, which is probably an oceanic Heteropod of large size. The mouth of the shell is such as no crawling mollusc would have possessed. Finally may be mentioned the Foraminifera, of whicb several genera are present, the most common being Orbulina and Globi- * EB. Germari of Bohemia is too aberrant to be included with the earlier types. + It is represented by Orthotheca in the Etcheminian series, 1200 feet below. 152 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAR. 17, gerina. At the present day these genera have left their remains most freely in deposits which lie under a depth of oceanic waters of 1000 to 2000 fathoms. Their remains are most abundant in Assise 2, though they occur also in Assise 3. This fauna is distinguished from that of Olenellus by two marked features. It is more primitive and also more pelagic. The way in which the trilobites are bound together by the single feature of a continuous eyelobe shows a unity of origin and a closer relationship than is found in the trilobites of any other fauna, and yet among these trilobites there are forms which in other respects are parallel to the types which developed in the later faunas. Thus in Protolenus we have the flat pleurz, with diagonal furrow of Paradoxides, but in sub-gen. Bergeronia the deeply grooved, geniculated pleurz of Ptychoparia, and at the same time the prominent glabella and deep dorsal furrows of Solenopleura. Micmacca, as has already been said, predicates Zacanthoides of a later fauna. Finally, Protagraulos, in its almost obliterated glabella and flat cephaiic shield recalls Agraulos and Holocephalina of the Paradoxides fauna. It is a more pelagic fauna than that of Olenellus, for we notice the absence of many forms of the Olenellus Fauna that were differentiated for shore-conditions. Trilobites with fixed outer cheeks like Olenellus and Microdiscus are absent ; calca- reous corals and sponges are rare, and no Lamellibranch is known. On the other hand, Foraminifera are quite common in some layers, and the Gasteropods are mostly such as were adapted for comparatively deep water. If then this fauna-is not that of Olenellus, but one that is more primitive and more pelagic, should we look for Olenellus above or. below Protolenus? It is to be noted that there re- main several Assises near the base of the St. John group which have not yielded a fauna of trilobites, so that there are still possibilities of the recovery of this genus from these Cambrian rocks. In the first assise of Band 6. only an imperfect Ellip- socephalus has been found, but some of the Brachiopods of this assise are identical with those of the Olenellus Zone. However, the crustaceans so far recovered from this assise show no special resemblance to those of the Olenellus Zone. A consideration in this connection is that the two faunas may have been cotemporary, but. incapable of existing in the same area, owing to their being adapted to different conditions of depth and temperature. If, for instance, the Protolenus Fauna was fitted for deeper and more tranquil waters than that of Olenellus, we would expect that at a locality where the two faunas occurred in succession in a series of deposits, the Olenel- 1895. ] . NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 153 lus Fauna would be found beneath that of Protolenus, for the reason that where consecutive deposits are laid down in a given basin or on a given area of the sea-bottom, the littoral fauna will appear first, 7. e., at the bottom of the deposit, while those of the deeper water will come in higher up. ‘This is a natural con- sequence of the continuous and steady sinking of the earth’s crust over a given area. If there should be oscillations in the movement, 7. e., alternate sinking and elevation, there will be lacune in the faunas, as in the Lower Cambrian of Russia, or the Upper Cambrian of Bohemia and northern Newfoundland. But the movement of depression in New Brunswick throughout Cambrian Time was fairly continuous, and subject to only mod- erate variation, and especially in the Pre-paradoxides beds, so that the fauna of Olenellus may yet be found in close relation to that of Protolenus. : Assises 4 and 5, as already remarked, show no trilobite fauna, and this seems the more probable place for the Olenellus Fauna, seeing that while this fauna has several genera of trilobites in common with the Paradoxides Fauna, it has but two that are found in the Protolenus Fauna. Finally, it should be remarked that the above conjectures as to the characteristics of the Protolenus Fauna and its relations to others, are based on our present knowledge of its constitution and peculiarities. Possibly further knowledge may make it necessary to modify these remarks in some particulars, but the fauna is now so well shown by the numerous species pertaining to ‘it, that these modifications cannot essentially change its aspect, or obliterate its peculiar and essential characters. STATED MEETING. March 25th, 1895: The Academy met and listened to the fifth public lecture of the course for 1894-95, by Prof. M. I. pee on ‘ Tendencies of Recent Electrical eeeaeok? 100 persons were present. Before adjournment the following persons were nominated for resident membership and referred to the Council: 154 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 1, Robert Center, Thomas C. Meyer, Samuel W. Bridgham, Lloyd Phenix, George B. Post, Peter Marié, Charles F. Lembke, S. Nicholson Kane, Charles A. Macy, 2d. J. F. Kemp, * Recording Secretary. _SvratTep MEETING. April Ist, 1895. The Academy organized with Pres. Rees in the chair. Thirteen members were present. The following names having been approved by the Council were elected as resident members of the Academy : Thos. C. Meyer, Lloyd Phenix, Robert Center, Chas. F. Lembke, Samuel W. Bridgham, 8. Nicholson Kane, Peter Marié, Geo. B. Post and Chas. A. Macy, 2d. The following were nominated as resident members by William Hallock and seconded by C. C. Trowbridge : Herschell C. Parker and Herbert T. Wade, Department of Physics, Columbia College. The Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized with Chairman J. K. Rees in the chair. Prof. Rees read by title a paper by Herman 8. Davis, Fellow in Astronomy, Columbia College, on the “ Declination of sixty- two stars near 7 Cassiopeiae.” William Hallock read by title a paper by R. A. Millikan, late Fellow in Physics, Columbia Col- lege, on “ The Polarization of Light by Emission.” Officers of the Section for the ensuing year were elected as follows: R. S. Woodward, Chairman; William Hallock, Sec- retary. Pres. Rees then gave a very comprehensive resumé of the progress of astronomy during 1894. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 155 On motion, the thanks of the Academy were tendered to Prof. Barnard, of Lick Observatory, and Prof. Keeler, of Alleghany, for their kindness in sending photographs for exhibition at the reception and at this meeting. Pres. Rees then showed Barnard’s photographs of the Milky Way and of several comets, especially Brooks’. They were dis- cussed by Pres. Rees, Mr. C. A. Post and others. Adjourned. Wm. HALwock, Secretary of Section. A STUDY OF THE POLARIZATION OF THE LIGHT EMITTED BY INCANDESCENT SOLID AND LIQUID SURFACES. By R. A. MILLIKAN. I: INTRODUCTORY. In spite of the prodigious activity of physicists during the first three quarters of this century in attacking the problems of reflection, refraction, and polarization in all their different phases, both from the side of experiment and that of mathematical theory, the problem of polarization of light by emission seems to have received comparatively little attention. Although the fact that incandescent solids and liquids emit, at oblique angles of emergence, partially polarized light, was discovered more than seventy years ago, it does not appear even to-day to be very generally known. Few, even of the more complete text-books on Physics, make any mention of the fact. Verdet, in his “ Optique,” published in 1870, devotes a short paragraph to “ Polarization by ,.Emission,” in which he says that ‘‘ there exists upon the subject but a small number of experiments due mainly to Arago.” Thesummary of these experiments which he subjoins, reveals none whatever which are quantitative. Since the time of Verdet, no one,:so far as I am able to discover, has made any careful or elaborate study of the phenomenon with a view to ascertaining its generality, verifying or disproving Arago’s as- sumption as to its cause, or classifying different substances with reference to their power of producing the phenomenon in greater or less degree. Since even a hasty examination reveals the fact that different 156 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPR. 1, substances emit light of widely different percentages of polar- ization, it appears that a study of the relations of different bodies in this respect ought either to add something to our knowledge of the optical properties of the substances considered, . or else, if this particular property is deducable from the already known properties,as Arago assumed it to be, its relation to these properties ought to be definitely proved. This investiga- tion has therefore been undertaken for the purpose, first, of making a somewhat wide range of qualitative experiments upon the nature and generality of the phenomenon; and, secondly, of subjecting Arago’s explanation of the cause to the test of com- parison with carefully determined experimental quantities. 1G ‘HistortcaL REvIew. The simple facts of polarization of light by emission can best be observed, and in fact were first noticed, upon platinum. If a sheet of that metal be heated to incandescence in the flame of a Bunsen burner, and the emitted light examined by means of a Nicol prism, or any other instrument adapted to the detection of partially polarized light, it will “be observed that when the experimenter is viewing the surface normally the emitted light exhibits no trace whatever of polarization, but as the instrument is inclined so as to receive rays emerging obliquely from the sur- face, the light begins to show evidences of polarization in a plane perpendicular to the plane defined by the normal and the emerging ray, If this plane be called the plane of emission, and the angle included between these two directions the angle of emission, the complete phenomenon may be roughly described by saying that the polarization increases as the angle of emis- sion increases, and becomes, in the case of platinum, exceedingly strong as the emission angle approaches ninety degrees. The announcement of this fact, and the consequent overthrow of the common belief that light coming immediately from self luminous bodies is always natural, was first made in 1824 by Arago. Ina report made in that year to the Royal Academy of Sciences (see Annales de Chemie et de Physique (1) 27, p. 89.) he announced that he had some time before made a series of experiments upon the light which emanates from incandescent bodies. “ He found that if the bodies are solid or liquid this light is partially polarized by refraction when the rays observed form with the emitting surface an angle of a small number of degrees. As for the light of an ignited gas it presented under no inclination traces of sensible polarization.” From these ex- 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 157 periments he drew the conclusion “that a considerable portion of the light which enables us to see incandescent bodies is pro- duced in the interior and at depths which are not yet completely determined.” ‘‘ Even when the surface of a solid or liquid was not well polished,” Arago still found that he ‘ was able to detect evident traces of polarization.”” The substances upon which he experimented and from the observation of which he drew his conclusion were only four in number, viz.—solids, wrought iron and platinum; liquids, molten iron and glass (See Astronomie Populaire IT., p. 103.). He made no quantitative measurements, . nor even used an instrument which was capable of indicating roughly amounts of polarization. His polariscope consisted of a single quartz crystal cut perpendicularly to the optical axis and a crystal of Iceland spar. The latter produced a double image of an opening in a diaphragm placed just beyond the erystal of quartz. The two images were of course colored when the light was polarized and uncolored when it was natural. Arago applied the results of his experiment to the determina- tion of the character of the sun’s surface. Being unable to detect any trace of polarization in the light emitted by the outer edge of the sun’s disk, he drew the well-known conclusion that the surface of the sun can be neither liquid nor solid, but must be gaseous. After the discovery of the polarization of heat, and the con- struction of an instrument by Melloni for its detection and measurement, Provostaye and Desain examined the heat rays emitted by luminous platinum and found that they, like the light rays, were polarized in the plane perpendicular to the plane of emergence. Their experiments were few in number and con- fined entirely to platinum. In 1866 Magnus extended this method of experiment to obscure heat rays, making quantitative measurements upon the heat emitted at the temperature of 100° C,and at an angle of 35°. His experiments embraced the fol- lowing list of substances: Parattine, glycerine, white wax, melted calophony, rubol, black glass, transparent glass, quick- silver, aluminium, copper and tin. For these substances he found a polarization at 35° ranging from 5% to 27%. He drew the conslusion that obscure heat, like light, must undergo re- fraction in emerging from the surface of the radiating body.. Verdet, in the paragraph upon polarization by emission pre- viously referred to, while stating that little has been done in the investigation of the subject, gives the same explanation of the phenomenon as that first offered by Arago. He says that “it is due to the fact that it is not alone the surface molecules which radiate light; those of the interior layers also radiate, at least. 158 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 1, to a certain depth; and the rays emitted by the interior mole- cules undergo refraction at the surface.” Since the time of Verdet, I believe no one has made any experiments upon the subject except Violle, who has a brief note in the Compte Rendu of 1887, Vol. 105, p. 111, in which he states that, while making some other experiments upon molten silver, he took oc- casion to measure the percentages of polarization in the light emitted by that substance at various incidences. He plotted the curve of these percentages and found that it was very well represented by the empyrical formula pe = (1 — cos i) (1 + " cos 75° + 4), where pe represents the ratio of polarized light to the whole light in the emitted beam and i the angle of incidence. Assuming, then, the phenomenon to be due to refraction, he argues that the equality of the amounts of polarization in the reflected and refracted beams would require that e pe =r pr, where e is the proportion of the whole light emitted, r the pro- portion reflected, pe the proportion of polarized light in the emitted beam, and p; the proportion of polarized light in the re- flected beam. Then, since the whole light is either emitted or reflected, e + r = 1,and the formula r = per immediately fol- lows. Taking the experimental values which have been deter- mined for p; by reflection at ordinary temperatures, he finds that his own results for pe, when substituted in this formula, give a uniformly high reflecting power for molten silver; a result which agrees with the known properties of ordinary polished silver. This forms the nearest approach to a verification of Arago’s assumption which has yet been given. Such is the extent of the work which has thus far been done upon polarization by emission. III. Discussion oF ARAGO’S EXPLANATION. The explanation of Arago and Verdet is as yet the only one which has been offered to account for the phenomenon. This ex- planation does not rest upon careful experimental proof, and, furthermore, there seems to be considerable reason for doubting its correctness. According to that explanation the light which comes to the eye from the surface particles is natural light ; but mixed with this unpolarized light is a quantity of light which has worked its way up from uncertain depths, has under- gone reflection and refraction at the surface, and is consequently polarized upon emergence. Aside from the intrinsic difficulty of this conception, the first experiments which were made in this 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. ~ 159 research upon platinum seemed to be inconsistent with such an explanation; for, when a well polished platinum strip was heated to incandescence by means of an electric current and the glowing surface examined by means of a double Wollaston prism, the polarization was found to be so nearly complete for angles in the neighborhood of grazing emergence that one of the images almost disappeared. But, since platinum is known to be altogether opaque, except in the case of exceedingly thin lamine, it would seem as though the surface molecules must play a con- siderable part in the luminosity of the glowing metal; so that, even if the assumption were made that the laws of reflection and refraction would require complete extinction of the ray polarized parallel to the plane of emergence, there still ought to be a con- siderable amount of light emitted in this plane from the surface molecules; at least, a sufficient quantity to prevent so nearly complete extinction as experiment showed to exist for angles of 88 or 89 degrees. The only apparent method of reconciling the facts with Ara- go’s explanation was to assume that the opacity of the platinum was greatly diminished by an increase in its temperature. And yet, such experiments as were made to determine whether or not this was the case, gave only negative results. The thinnest sheet of platinum which was capable of being heated to incandescence without melting, was placed in the focus of a powerful beam of light from an are lantern, the beam having been first polarized by transmission through a Nicol. The plane of the glowing platinum being perpendicular to the beam, the light emerging normally on the other side of the platinum was examined by means of a delicate polariscope. No trace of polarization was detected. Neither could the outlines of the focus be distin- guished on the side of the platinum away from the lantern. The sheet of platinum employed was evidently just as opaque -as at a lower temperature. This difficulty of accounting for the extreme polarization no- ticed at large angles of emergence appeared to be considerably diminished if another cause for the phenomenon were assumed than that given by Arago. According to the conclusions of Fresnel, Cauchy, Stokes, Mascart and most of the advocates of the elastic solid theory of light, the direction of vibration of the ether particles in plane polarized light is perpendicular to the plane of polariza- tion. It would follow that the light emitted at large angles by platinum vibrates mainly in the direction of the normal to the surface. It is not unnatural to suppose that at the bound- ary between very dense and very rare media, like platinum and 160 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APrR. 1, air, there may be less resistance to vibration in a direction away from the surface than in a direction parallel to the surface, and therefore that the light emitted is composed mainly of vibra- tions in a direction normal to the surface. If this were the case the light emitted normally would be unpolarized, while that emitted at oblique angles would be polarized in the plane per- pendicular to the plane of emission. Furthermore, the polariza- tion would. increase with the angle and might be very great at large angles, in case the difference in density between the two media were very great—conclusions all of which are in accord- ance with the facts. In view, then, of the inability to account, by Arago’s assumption, for the extreme polarization at large angles of emergence, and in view of the plausibility of the other explanation, the following qualitative experiments were made in order to determine with more certainty the nature of the phe- nomenon. IV. QUALITATIVE EXPERIMENTS. The object of this part of the research was: (1) To make certain that the property of polarization is due to the incandescent body itself,and is not caused by the refraction of the light as it passes through the layers of air of varying density which rest upon the luminous surface; and, (2) To make observations upon as wide a range of substances as could be made to emit light without combustion, in order to ascertain whether any substance could be found which does not possess the characteristic, and also in order to determine in a general way the relations of different bodies with reference to this property. For these purposes two instruments were employed; the first, a polariscope similar to that of Arago, save that the simple: quartz crystal was replaced by a bi-quartz plate, and the crystal of calc-spar by a double Wollaston prism. This is the same in- strument which was afterwards used by Arago in his polarime- ter, and it has an advantage over the first form in that the two colors to be compared are brought into immediate juxtaposition. It is delicate to the extent of detecting a polarization of about 3% (as was shown by succeeding experiments), when white light is under examination. When the light to be tested is mono- chromatic, as was the case in some of the following experiments, the second form of polariscope was found to be preferable. In this instrument the bi-quartz is replaced by a cube of glass which has been subjected to strain in cooling. A Nicol 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 161 also takes the place of the Wollaston prism of the first polari- scope. The glass, being in a state of strain, is doubly refract- ing and exhibits with polarized light the familiar dark or light cross which is characteristic of doubly refracting crystals, when cut perpendicularly to the optic axis and viewed by convergent light. With this instrument a polarization of two or three per cent. could be easily detected, and it had the further advantage of indicating immediately the azimuth of the plane of polarization. Also, by careful observation of the distinctness of different parts of the figure, it was possible, after a small amount of practice, to estimate with considerable correctness the degree of polariza- tion. ‘1. In all experiments which have been previously performed upon this subject, the white-hot body has been in immediate contact with the air. The emitted light was therefore obliged to pass through layers of air of varying density before it reached the eye of the observer. That the light might not thus suffer a large number of refractions between the incandescent body and the eye, and so be endowed with the property in question, seemed entirely possible. It was therefore necessary to make some experiment in order to determine whether or not this was the entire or partial cause of the phenomenon. For this pur- pose the contrivance shown in the diagram was employed. A strip of platinum foil A about four cm. in length and five mm. in width was attached to the platinum and copper wires B and C. The former was sealed into the glass tube G, and the latter was passed through the cork F which closed the other end of the tube. The instrument was first sealed with wax and then connected with the air pump by means of the small tube D,and with a strong electric current by means of the wires B and C. Care was taken to place the platinum strip as near the axis of the tube as possible, in order that light emitted by it might pass normally through the sides of the tube. Otherwise polarization TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. ScI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 11, May 28, 1895. 162 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. l, would have been caused by the passage of the beam through the glass itself. The tube being exhausted until the gauge showed a pressure of only four millimeters, the current was turned on and the glowing strip examined by means of the bi- quartz polariscope. The emitted light was still found to be polarized for oblique angles of emergence, and did not appear to have undergone any change in intensity. In order, however, to ascertain whether or not the effect of the air was altogether negligible, more delicate experiments were necessary. These will be hereafter described. It may also be added at this point that experiments were made upon the glowing platinum by means of a Jamin compen- sator, in order to make certain that the light under consideration was simple partially polarized light, and not elliptically polar- ized. From our knowledge of the way in which elliptically po- larized light is produced, viz., by causing retardation or acceler- ation in one of the components of plane polarized light, it would immediately be inferred that the light emitted by the platinum is not elliptically polarized, since there is no reason to suppose that it was at first plane polarized. The correctness of this con- clusion was immediately shown by the use of the compensator. For, the compensator having been set at zero by the use of plane polarized light, when the beam of light from the platinum was made to fall upon the instrument, the dark central line showed no displacement whatever from the zero position. Had the light been elliptically polarized the black central line would have been of necessity somewhat displaced, no matter what angles the com- pensator planes made with the rectangular axes of the ellipse. Furthermore, for elliptically polarized light there is always some position of the analyser which gives an absolutely black line, whereas, if the light is partially polarized, the line can never be - any darker than the field which is illuminated by that quantity of natural light which is contained in the partially polarized beam. Applying these considerations to the light emitted by the platinum it was shown without question that the light is partially and not elliptically polarized. 2. Having thus examined the nature of the light. and proved that the phenomenon is inherent in the body itself, experiments were made upon the following substances with. results as indi- cated. SoLips.—WMetallic. Platinum (polished).—Polarization very strong near grazing emergence, but falling off rapidly as the angle diminishes. Scarcely perceptible at ten degrees. . 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 163 Silver.—Polarization strong, larger for small incidences that in the case of platinum. Gold.—Polarization strong ; similar to platinum, but apparently less for large angles. Copper.—Polarization weak, probably due to roughening of surface through oxidization. Brass.—Polarization weak—( oxidization). Tron.—Polarization weak—(oxidization ). SoLips.—Non-metalic—transparent. Glass.—Polarization weak ; imperceptible exceptat large angles of emer- gence. Mica—Polarization weaker than in glass. Surface roughened by heat. SoLips.—WNon-metallic—opaque. Porcelain—Polarization similar to that produced by glass. Black Glass.—Polarization similar to that produced by transparent glass. LIQuIDs. Mofien Silver 1 Polarization similar to that in solid state. Gold /f ‘¢ Tron.—Polarization strong ; almost as strong as in molten gold. Bronze.—Polarization strong ; almost as strong asin molten gold. Lead.—Polarization weaker than for preceding metals. ( Difficult to get a clear surface). Zine.—Polarization weaker than for preceding metals. cc From these experiments it will be seen, Ist, that the metals show uniformly high percentages of polarization so long as the surface is non-diffusing ; 2nd, that none of the non-metallic sub- stances used produce strong polarization at any angle ; 3rd,that the transparency or opacity of a substance has apparently little effect upon its power of producing polarization in the emitted light ; and, 4th, that any cause which interferes with the perfect smoothness and regularity of the surface destroys in large measure the polarization. We. INSTRUMENT EMPLOYED FOR QUANTITATIVE EXPERIMENTS. In order to accomplish the second and main object of the re- search, it became necessary to devise some means of making ac- curate determinations of the relations of the constants of the partially polarized beam. In case of elliptic polarization the constants are best determined by means of a Babinet compen- sator, but this instrument fails entirely for partially polarized light. The instrument which has been most employed for such work by previous investigators is the Polarimeter of Arago. 164 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPR. 1, This is an instrument simple enough in principle, but difficult in construction. Moreover it does not possess a very high degree of accuracy, owing to the fact that its use depends upon the de- tection, by means of a bi-quartz polariscope, of the exact point at which all polarization disappears from a beam of light. The beam of light to be examined for polarization is made to pass. through a pile of glass plates set in such a manner with refer- ence to the beam as to produce, by refraction, polarization in a. plane at right angles to the plane in which the beam is already partially polarized. The inclination of the plates is altered until the halves of the bi-quartz plate show no traces of color. The instrument having been previously graduated by means of a beam of known polarization, the amount of polarization in the beam in question can be immediately read off upon the graduated circle. The graduation is effected by passing a plane polarized beam through a thick crystal of Iceland spar. Then, by the Law of Malus, the polarization in the transmitted beam is given by the cosine of twice the angle included between the plane of polariza- tion of the incident beam and the principal plane of the crystal. Both because of the difficulty of construction of this instru- ment, and because my own experiments with the bi-quartz polari- scope made me distrustful of the accuracy with which the point of no polarization could be determined, another form of instrument was devised for these experiments which is greatly superior to the Arago polarimeter in simplicity, and is probably more than equal to it in accuracy. The instrument had been constructed and used for several months before the discovery was made that the credit of the first conception and use of this method of measuring the constants of partially polarized light is due to. Cornu. In view of the exceeding naturalness and simplicity, as well as the accuracy of the method, it is surprising that it was not earlier discovered and has not been more generally employed. Cornu’s description of his instrument was published in ’82 in the “ Ass’n Francaise pour L’Avancement des Sciences, Compete Rendu;” but so far as I can discover, no reference was made to it at the time in any of the scientific journals, nor has it taken its place among other polarimeters in any of the text books on optics. The instrument as constructed and used for the purposes of these experiments was as follows. 51.0 40.0 51.1 39.9 50.2 39.2 49.5 SR a is 50.4 Bia Since the light from a gas flame is unpolarized, the value of w should have been 45°. The difference is not large, but is slightly greater than the maximum error ascribed to the instrument by Cornu. The above is about an average set of readings. The extreme difference is 1.8°, a difference perhaps slightly greater than that usually found. A second slight error may sometimes arise in the use of this instrument from the fact that the two images produced by the double prism do not correspond to exactly the same points on the luminous surface. Hence, in order that the results may be correct, it is necessary that the adjoining portions of the incan- descent surface be exactly alike. In none of the experiments here recorded were the portions of the luminous surface produe- ing the two images more than 3 mm. apart. Care was always: taken to direct the instrument toward a portion of the surface which appeared to be entirely uniform. This error may, I think, be safely disregarded in all of the following cases except one, which will be mentioned later. A third remark which should be made upon the accuracy of the instrument is that observations for large amounts of polariza- tion are less subject to error than those made upon small amounts. For, since the intensities of the two images compared are pro- 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 169 portional to sin? w and cos? w, the change in intensity of one of them will be very rapid when w is in the neighborhood either of zero or of ninety degrees. When, however, w is near 45°, the change in intensity corresponding to a small change of angle is comparatively small. Hence, when the polarization is large, and w consequently either large or small, the position of equality can be determined with considerably greater accuracy than when the polarization is weak and w in the vincinity of 45°. The results obtained for large angles may therefore be con- sidered more trustworthy than “the results for small angles. VIII. MEASUREMENT OF THE AIR EFFECT. In the qualitative experiments previously described it was ascertained that the amount of polarization was at least not greatly affected by the contact of the air with the heated sur- face. Before proceeding to careful quanitative measurements it was necessary to determine whether or not its effect upon the phenomenon is altogether negligible. This could be easily done by means of the polarimeter. The sealed glass tube containing the platinum strip was again connected with the air- -pump, and the air exhausted until the pressure was about 4 mm. The current was turned on, the polarimeter arranged so as to receive the light emitted from the glowing surface at an angle of about 80°, and the Nicol turned until the images were brought into equality. The stop cock was then suddenly turned and the air admitted. No change what- ever could be perceived in the equality of the images. The ex- periment was repeated a number of times and in a variety of ways, but always with the same result. The conclusion was, that, if the air has any effect whatever upon the proportion of polarization in the beam, that effect is so slight as to be ALTO- GETHER NEGLIGIBLE; a result exceedingly fortunate for the pur- poses of this investigation, since, had it been necessary to work upon substances in a vacuum, the following experiments would have been much more difficult, if not altogether impossible. rx EXPERIMENTS UPON URANIUM GLASS. The chief difficulties which beset the investigation of Polari- zation by emission are, Ist, the difficulty of obtaining a per- fectly definite and regular incandescent surface with which to work; and 2nd, the difficulty of ascertaining with certainty the 170 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 1, optical constants of any bodies at the temperature of incan- descence. The similarity between a body emitting light by incandescence and a body emitting light by fluorescence was first suggested to me by Professor Rood. According to Tait the phenomenen of fluorescence is confined mainly to the surface layers. What- ever the cause, then, of polarization by emission, the light coming from a fluorescent surface ought to be polarized in the same way as the light coming from glowing platinum. Experiment showed this conclusion to be entirely correct. The polarization seen in the uranium glass was similar in every respect to that observed in incandescent porcelain, being scarcely discernible at any angle less than 50°, but becoming quite marked between 85° and 90°, and evidently reaching a maximum at grazing emergence. : That this polarization was not due to diffusing particles on the surface was certain for three reasons. Ist. The surface was NoT a diffusing surface except to an exceedingly small extent. 2d. The light which exhibited the phenomenon of polariza- tion was the characteristic yellowish-green light which uranium emits, and not the blue light which fell upon the surface. 3d. The reflecting particles on the surface would have pro- duced a polarization in the diffusing plane, 7. e., in the plane de- fined by the direction of the beam which entered the instrument and the direction of the incident beam, which was in this case normal to the surface. As a matter of fact the polarization was in a plane perpendicular to this plane. Here, then, was an instance of polarization by emission in which the surface was perfectly definite and at the same time the optical constants of the substance could be easily and ac- curately determined. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 171 Accordingly a careful series of observations was made with the polarimeter. The experiments were all conducted in a well darkened room, and care was taken not to allow any light to enter the instrument except that emitted by the uranium glass. In order to make the determination of the angles of emission convenient, the light from the lantern was thrown Vertically down upon the surface of the uranium glass by means of total reflection in a right angled prism. The cube of glass was care- fully levelled so that the emitting surface was always horizontal. The arrangement of apparatus is shown in the figure. Ten readings were taken for every angle of emergence. The results are given in full. Bea 85° 80° Left.» Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. 40.5 29.8 42.3 30.7 43.0 32.0 39.5 29.9 43.0 BiEo 43.3 S225 39.8 28.5 42.5 30.5 43.8 32.3 40.0 29.0 41.7 30.9 44.0 32.6 39.0 28.9 40.9 31.0 43.3 BIS 39.76 29.22 42.1 30.86 43.48 32.34 ——— — — Oe 2 w = 68.98° 2 w = 72:86° 2 w = 75.82° p= .358 p = .293 i— 240 15°. 70° 65° 50° Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. 44.5 34.5 45.5 35.0 47.0 37 49.1 38.2 45.0 35.0 46.4 36.4 47.2 36.3 48:9°5 38.9 44.3 35.0 46.5 36.5 47.5 37.9 49.0 38.9 44.5 33.5 47.0 35.0 48.0 317i 50.0 39.3 44.5 34.4 46.3 36.2 47.4 36 49.3 39.0 44.56 34.5 46.34 35.8 47.62 36.8 49.296 38.52 ——s>—— —— ——_ — 2 w —79.06° PY nea=lewal 2 w = 84.4° 2 w = 87.782 — Ok j= et p= .098 p = .039 The chief difticulty encountered in making these determina- tions was the lack of perfect’ uniformity in the emitting sur- face. The uranium glass, being rendered self luminous by the beam from the lantern, could not have entire uniformity over its surface unless the illuminating beam was uniform in intensity, which was not the case. The images corresponded -to points on the sur- face not more than 2 mm. apart, and yet it was found that the equality of the images could be sometimes disturbed by directing the instrument toward anew portion of the field. As great care as possible was taken to direct the polarimeter toward such por. 172 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [apR. 1, tions of the field as appeared to have a uniform illumination, and it is not thought that the error due to this cause could have been great. Phosphorescent bodies were also examined for polarization, but the light emitted by such bodies is so weak that no definite re- sults were obtained. B & APPLICATION OF FRESNEL’S FORMUL FOR VITREOUS REFLECTION. The main object of this research being to determine whether or not polarization by emission could be experimentally proven to bea phenomenon of refraction, Fresnel’s laws for reflection and refraction, which have been shown by many experiments to accurately represent the facts, were now applied to the determination of the amounts of polarization which should be produced by single refraction of light passing through the boundary surface between uranium glass and air. In order to apply these laws it is necessary to assume that all of the light emitted by the uranium glass, whether coming from the surface molecules or from the interior layers, has undergone the process of refraction—an assumption not contained in Arago’s explanation of the cause of the phenomenon. Taking the intensity of the incident ray as unity, Fresnel’s formule give for the intensities of the reflected and refracted rays, when the incident beam is plane polarized in the plane of incidence, sin? (a — 3) reflected ray =r, = ane(eoR) 5 Sry: 4 cos? a sin? 3 sin? (a + /3) refracted ray =7,' = a being the angle of incidence and £ the angle of refraction. For a ray plane polarized in a plane perpendicular to the plane of incidence tan2 (a — 8) reflected ray = 7, = fant ea Bh rey Shite: 4 cos? a sin? 3 ~~ gin? (a + /3). cos? (a—/) refracted ray =7,/ Since ordinary light may be considered as composed of two equal plane polarized beams, polarized in planes at right angles 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 173 to each other, the amount of polarization in a beam of natural light which has undergone single refraction is 1 Bry — 371’, 13! — 71’ __ cos? (a—P) : fe ed US ee at Ca ie naa aa ; 1+cos? (a + 8) fae 1. cos? (a +B) 7 The only unknown quantity in this formula is the angle /. In order to determine 3 for any given angle it was only neces- sary to determine the index of refraction of the uranium glass. The glass being of considerable thickness the microscope method was the one best adapted to this determination. d being the thickness of the glass,and a the change in focus due to the introduction of the glass between the ob- ject o and the objective, the index wu is given by the formula (see Kohlrausch Praktische Physik, p. 151). d 326 mm iu sin a u = d—a— 326mm—110mm — Lol= sin 3 The substitution of the various values of 3, thus found, in the formula for p gave the following values : a B Pp oh SEE 1 aa eee ae S34 Se ot 351 3 el ne ie A Garett (7a UA 315 BUS wen is saree EAA A Se ee. tees Sf 251 lee eet ha: ahs Bae AGRE ee oe ws an 206 i uhee ga CERT: gl |) Aner cee eee 153 SON agg oe Pea Ege Sh Feb een Oa eh coe Sn 125 HU Ware ieee eels hee hs ek ae 058 The correspondence between the results given by experiment and those given by this calculation from Fresnel’s formulz was unexpected. The experiments were completed more than a month before any calculations were made, so that I had no idea at the time of making the experiments what would be the na- ture of the results given by calculation. The differences between the two sets of values are hardly greater than the possible errors of observation. The differences at 65° and 50° are quite large, but might have been due to the lack of perfect uniformity in the luminous surfaces. On the whole, the agreement between the two sets of results indicates 174 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 1, strongly that in the case of uranium glass, at least, the phenome- non is one of simple refraction at the surface; but that the WHOLE of the emitted light undergoes the refraction process. dG EXPERIMENTS UPON PLATINUM. It is evident that no such comparisons as those just made for uranium glass could be made for the case of incandescent metals, unless, in the first place, the surface experimented upon could be assumed to be a perfectly definite, non-diffusing surface. The chief source of difficulty in the work upon platiuum was to ful- fill this condition. It was found, after considerable work had been done upon platinum, that continual heating roughened the surface to a slight degree, and changed the amount of polarization. The re- sults of several sets of laborious observations upon platinum were discarded altogether, because they were found to be erron- eous from this cause. However, the change is so gradual that a well polished platinum surface may be heated to incandescence for several minutes without showing any perceptible change in character. The rapidity of the change could be delicately ob- served by viewing the surface at a large angle of incidence by means of the polarimeter. For a period of two or three minutes no change was perceptible in the equality of the images, but for much longer periods of heating the slow blistering of the surface began to be manifest in the disturbance of the equality of the images. Hence, in order to avoid this error, the surface of the platinum was carefully polished with rouge after every set of readings for a given angle. A second slight source of error in the observations upon plat- inum was the lack of exact horizontality in the surface examined. The attempt was made to avoid this error by rotating the in- strument through 90° according to the suggestion of Cornu. This brought the extraordinary image either above or below the ordinary ; hence, when the angle of emergence was very large, the two images corresponded to points on the surface at a consider- able distance from each other, as shown in the figure re This introduced the likeli- hood of a much greater error than that due to a slight error in horizontality. The incandescent platinum was therefore rend- ered as nearly horizontal as possible by comparison with care- fully levelled reference planes placed in the immediate vicinity. The adjustment could thus be easily made to within one degree. 1895. } NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 175 In all of the following experiments, sheets of rolled platinum -06 mm. in thickness were heated to a white heat by means of a Bunsen burner, care being taken to prevent light from any other sources from vitiating the results. The observations are here given in full. 80° 70° 60° Left Right Left Right Left Right. 23.1 12.0 30.2 207 36.9 24.5 21.4 eS S22 21.0 36.8 26.1 22.5 TES ae Hil 21.2 35.0 25.0 22.3 10.9 31.0 20.5 37.0 25.4 23.2 11.4 aPhal Ales: 39.6 O55 . 30.0 25.4 22.5 11.49 31.52 20.94 36.05 25) Be oe —[—— wee 2a 2 w = 52.4 2in—— Olea ip — -829 ‘p —-.610 p= .481 50° 40° 30° Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. 40.0 29.7 45.6 35.0 47.6 38.0 39.1 29.0 45.5 33.3 47.5 36.3 41.2 29.3 44.4 34.2 47.2 36.2 ° 39.4 28.5 43.8 34.6 47.8 Sued 41.0 29.6 44.4 34.5 48.0 36.0 40.14 29.2 44,74 34.3 47.62 36.72 See — ae 2 w = 69.34° 2w = 79° 2 w = 84.34 — ond elon eos XT APPLICATION OF CaAucHy’s FoRMUL2 FOR METALLIC REFLEC- TION TO THE CASE OF PLATINUM. Fresnels formulz for reflection: rest upon the hypothesis that the time required in the process of reflection is infinitesimal in comparison with a wave period, and hence that the phase of vi- bration of the reflected ray is either the same as that of the in- cident ray,or else differs from it by the quantity +. It follows from this assumption that the reflected ray is plane polarized, if the incident ray is plane polarized. When the reflection takes place at the boundary surface be- tween air and a metal, experiment shows this assumption to be incorrect, and hence Fresnel’s formulz become inapplicable. If the phenomenon here considered be due to reflection, the 176 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPR. 1,. laws for reflection which apply to the boundary surface between platinum and air are, of course, the laws to apply to the deter- mination of the amounts of polarization which ought to be caused by a single refraction at this boundary. The application of Fresnel’s laws of vitreous reflection requires, as has be seen, the determination of but one constant, the index of refraction, or the ratio of the velocities of propagation of light in the two media. Cauchy extended these laws so as to cover the case of metallic reflection by introducing another constant which he calls the co-efficient of extinction. The constant cor- responding to the index of refraction is, as in the case of trans- parent bodies, the tangent of the angle of maximum polariza- tion. The co-efficient of extinction is a constant depending upon the opacity of the body, and is found from the ratio between the amplitudes, after reflection, of two equal beams polarized re- spectively perpendicular and parallel to the plane of incidence, and reflected at the angle of maximum polarization. This ratio is evidently the tangent of the azimuth of re-established plane polarization, when the incident beam is polarized ina plane mak- ing an angle of 45° with the plane of incidence, plane polariza- tion being re-established after reflection by means of a quarter- wave plate or a Babinet compensator. This angle may be determined by experiment. Thus the two constants of metallic reflection are, 1, the angle of maximum polarization, and 2, the azimuth of re-established plane polari- zation at this angle. According to the theory of Cauchy, these two constants being known, the intensity of a beam reflected at any angle may be calculated. The complete explanation of Cauchy’ s theory and the deduc- tion of Cauchy’s formule were given by Hisenlohrin 1858. (see. Pogg. Ann. 104, p. 368). The final forms of the formule given by piceutoun are = tam (fA) KP tana gd in which K®? is the intensity of the reflected beam when the in- cident beam is polarized in the plane of incidence, A’? the intensity when the incident beam is polarized in the plane per- pendicular to the plane of incidence, and f and g are variables. given by the equations 0 cot f=cos (e + u) sin (2 arctan — a ) ] ie cos a cot g=cos (e — wu) sin (2 arctan — 6 -) 1895.) NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 177 in which wv and ¢ are variables determined by the relations sin @ cot (2 u+e)=cot e cos (2 arctan —% ) Sin 2e (3) 2—= ——______ < sin (2 u+2 e) in which a is the angle of incidence, and ¢« and # are given by the final formule sin 2e — tan”? Asin (4 H— 2e) sin 47 (4) ea Ai a 2 sin AY aa in which A is the angle of maximum polarization called the ‘principle angle of incidence,” and # is the azimuth of re-estab- lished plane polarization when the incident beam is polarized in azimuth 45°. # is called the “prime azimuth.” The forms here given for « and sare due to Jochman (see Pogg. Ann. CXXXVI., p. 8561). These formule, first published by Cauchy in 1839, were shown by Jamin, by an elaborate series of measure- ments, to very closely represent the facts of reflection from me- tallic surfaces. The prime angles of incidence and the prime azimuths for all the common metals and for the different Fraun- hofer lines were determined by Quincke in ’74 (see Phil Mag. MEVIT., p 221). Now, in order to apply these formule to calculations similar to those which have already been made with Fresnel’s formulz upon uranium glass, it was necessary to assume, as before, that the whole of the light emitted had undergone refraction, and it was also necessary to know the two optical constants for platinum at the temperature of incandescence. These constants could not be determined. However, in a number of experiments made by W. R. Grove (see Phil. Mag. (4) 17, p. 177) upon the reflection of light from incandescent plati- num, he was unable to detect any change in the reflecting properties of the platinum due to the fact of incandescence. Plane polarized light being reflected from the cold surface, the plane of polarization of the refiected beam was not affected by heating the platinum to the incandescent temperature. These experiments were not performed with delicate apparatus,’ yet they give reason to assume that the optical constants of plati- num are not greatly altered by temperature. Assuming, then, the values of A and H given by Quincke for the sodium line, the cajculations of the amount of polarization in the emitted beam were made for all the angles of emergence TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. ScI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 12, May 28, 1895. 178 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPr. 1, upon which experiments had been made. These calculations were made as follows : Quincke’s values for the D line are ATTCE, wormule (zie jogs = ae Then for a = 80° formule (3) (2) and (1) give K? = .9348 K? == 4013 Assuming now the incident beam to have had an intensity unity, the emitted beam polarized in the plane of emergence would have an intensity 1 — K” = .0652 And the beam polarized in the plane perpendicular to the plane of emergence an intensity 1 — K”? = .5987 .5987—.0652 Therefore the degree of polarization = p = 3.7 gs5 —-834. The complete results of the calculations for the platinum are as follows : CO pe RE ee ee ARS Oe eel Kee ee Kee eee SOR ph e9Ot8 veer cao & een Oboe ie )sn OO Ri) Seeman Bee DOs oe Se Osi cs ehUSE ee ae OAs cn ee ee OO ke amen Coles GOL Me 82848 tO gee olsOGy. : OLBin~ es - eAge DOS Pent STB 2 Fh BAS SU e YRS stare ety eee oan AQe RS oi 40982 5 SSO98IL Se seo Le 401 See Selo BO 4 eae LID Do 68307 2 eee eGo) sae OOO een eel eeg Considering the number of assumptions which have been made, the correspondence between these quantities and those given by experiment is altogether remarkable, and points with as much certainty as the work upon uranium glass to the con- clusion that the phenomenon is simply one of refraction. XIII. DIFFERENCE IN CoLoR OF IMAGES. In the course of these observations upon platinum, another at first unaccountable phenomenon was noticed. At large angles of emergence the color in the two images was notably different. The feeble image, 7. e., the one corresponding to vibration per- pendicular to the plane of emergence seemed for large angles to land 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 179 be deficient in red light, while the other image was abnor- mally red. If we assume the phenomenon to be due to reflection and re- fraction, this appearance is readly explained by a referenee to Quincke’s values for the angles of maximum polarization for the different Fraunhofer lines. This angle for the line C, Quincke gives as 78° 28’, and for the line G his value is 73° 39’. Now if @ is the amplitude of vibration in the reflected ray when the incident beam is polarized in the plane of incidence, and a’ the amplitude when the plane of polarization of the in- cident beam is perpendicular to the plane of incidence the angle 2-_ qg/2 . 2 of maximum polarization will be reached when aa is a maxi- * Wie mite mum, 7. e., when — is a minimum. The experiments of Jamin show that this angle coincides, at least very nearly, with the angle for which a’ isa minimum; a ‘es + al intensé conclusion which one would expect without the aid of experi- ment. Hence the angle 78° 28’ is that angle for which the com- ponent of the reflected vibration parallel to the plane of inci- dence is a minimum for the case of red light, and the component of the emitted vibration in the same plane isa maximum. On the other hand the angle of maximum emission of violet light in this plane occurred at 73° 39’. Accordingly it is evident that red light predominates in the beam emitted at the angle 78° 28’, and violet in the beam emitted at 73° 39’. The approximate ———s ee 180 TRANSACTIONS OF THE | [apr. 1, ratio between the two colors for any angle is shown in the dia- gram. It is evident that light emitted at any angle larger than 75° will be predominantly red At the same time the shape of the curves accounts for the lack of any noticeable predominance of violet in the neighborhood of 73° 39’, The figure shows the curves of intensities of the reflected components of vibration parallel to the plane of incidence as roughly plotted from the values given above. The lines mM Dp, M, D,, etc., represent the intensities of the emitted red vibrations in this plane for various angles; while the lines nN D, N, D,, etc., represent the intensities of the emitted violet vibrations for the same incidences. The lines N M,N, M,, etc., are the measure of predominance of red over violet, or vice versa. The steepness. of the curves at points corresponding to angles greater than the angle of maximum polarization and the lack of steepness at points corresponding to angles less than the angle of maxi- mum polarization are evidently the cause of the marked predom- inance of red at large angles and the lack of noticeable predom- inance of violet at any angles. This characteristic of the curves follows from the fact that the points of maximum polarization correspond to very large angles. XIV. EXPERIMENTS UPON SILVER. Owing to the great kindness of Mr. Herbert G. Torrey, As- sayer of the U. S. Assay Office, I was next able to make @ series of observations upon molten silver. These experiments were the most satisfactory of any which were made in the course of the research. All of the sources of error which had existed in preceding cases were here eliminated. The surface was per- fectly defined, it was accurately horizontal, and there were no variations in intensity from point to point. The results of the experiments are given in full. 30° SDS 40° 45° Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. 46.0 36.0 44.5 33.4 ayaa Soll 42.0 30.5 47.2 36.0 45.0. 733.7 AO Sle) By) 42.0 31.0 46.5 35.0 44.5 34.0 AS 3) ost) Al clk AGrotonlO 4510" = 134.0 ASD oe. 42.5 30.5 46.5 35.5 46.5) 35.p 44.75 33.8 43.72 32.05 41.9 30.8 ———— — So — —— Yi 43249 2 w = 78.55° 2 w = 75.27° 2) od pD— aos p—.189 == 254 p= .2070 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 181 50° De 60° 65° Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. 40.6 28.5 38.0 27.0 3 Ee pc | SPU Pala) 40.0 29.0 Bioo) © wy OES 35:0 24.0 By TRA Las: 40.0 29.8 ade te ded: 34.0 24.1 32.6 21.0 40.5 29.1 37.5 = 26.3 SD.4) - 20-5 32.5 20.5 40.0 28.8 38.0 26.5 Sa Bay Biles: 34.5 24.0 40.2 29.04 37.8 26.8 34.9 24.0 32°45 21-3 — ee _— — = —LL 2 w = 69.24° 2 w = 64.6° 2 w = 58.9° 2p —— on lis p = .304 fi Se pi—aaoled jp = 8 70° “oe 80° Left. Right. Left. Right. Left. Right. 30.0 20.0 27.0 16.5 24.1 13.5 30.0 19.5 27.0 16.5 OF ela. D 29:6 719:9 27.0 16.5 24.2 14.0 30.0 20.4 PAG oye Allee al 23.9) 13a 30.5). 19.5 7.0 16.4 24.0° 13.9 26.5 15.5 30.0 19.9 26.8 16.25 pF a laa _——— — —=— 2 w = 49.9° 2 w = 43.05 ee p= .644 p—.731 (p= cred All of the previous observations had been subject to errors of unknown magnitude, aside from the errors of observation; and the results, while agreeing very closely with the calculated values for some angles, differed from them by considerable amounts at others. For example, the agreement for platinum at 80° was very close, while at 70° the difference was as large as .045. Similarly for uranium glass, the difference at 50° and 65° was quite large. Hence I did not consider the results given by the experiments upon uranium glass and platinum altogether trustworthy as accurate quantitative measurements. The experiments upon silver, however, were free from all pos- sible error so far as I was able to discover, except the obdserva- tional error. Mention has already been made of the fact that Violle had previously made a number of determinations of the same general nature upon silver. His results do not agree very closely with those given above, being uniformly larger. I am altogether unable to account for the uniformity in the ex- cess of his values over those given by these experiments. His results are here inserted for the sake of comparison. 182 TRANSACTIONS OF THE Violle. pel GB seas 5% . .046. . -630 . mee OS OU 826. Poh < SOM Millikan. ~) aod TD . 092 644 te hak Bret) [APR. 1, The application of Cauchy’s formule to silver was made in the same way as in the case of platinum. For polished silver Quincke gives for the D. line, Prime angle of Incidence, 4 Prime Azimuth, Formule (4) give, Formule (3) (2) and (1) then give a=. 80 . UO awraciere nox Gaim tes COT: 55 . Oe es ADT 40 . Bo. 30 . moles seOlad,. Se . .9606 . . .9482 . Opole . 9250 . bowls oe 5g Ce BE cH BiH es . 8847 . saiter SH OT fag . .8695 . Ce ee 5 sellei7t sie OQ ens .7510 . _ 7540 . £1632 . MMO: 5 utiles | 7985 . 8093... _ 8187 . . .8268 . A = 72° 10’, H = 41° 40’, ( e = 82° 34.3’, ( log. 6 = .4480 ool Ks 1-K” U2 Gone: 1963 ~ ee 0304 = 2372 pe 015 Moe 2489 . -720639:2 2460 OOO; soee 2368 . . .0864 . 2260 . Se 9G: peiltciiae me lOGai2 bs .2015 cee WES 1907 Mig lao 1813. 7 LOUD 1732 nee Oe . .716 . 655 . .088 Se Mey . 446 , B76 "309 . 246 190 - . 140 It will be noticed that the agreement between these quantities p and those given by my experiments is closer than for either the platinum or the uranium glass; the largest difference being at 80°, where it amounts to .027. XV. EXPERIMENTS UPON GOLD AND IRON. Through the kindness again of Mr. Torrey and the Superin- tendent of the Sub-Treasury, I was permitted to make observa- tions upon a pot of molten gold; but accuracy of work was im- possible on account of (1) the rapidity with which I was obliged 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 183 to work (2); the lack of quiescence of the liquid surface; (3) the impossibility of excluding other light from the surface, and (4) the rapidity of oxidization of the molten gold. The results were therefore altogether untrustworthy as quantitative meas- urements. Hence no attempt was made to compare them with results given by Cauchy’s formulae. Molten iron was also made the subject of similar observations with equally unsatisfactory results. XVI. Discussion oF RESULTS. All of the comparisons made between eXperimental determi- nations and calculated values are condensed in the following tables. oe = — URANIUM GLASS. PLATINUM. SILVER. eet ape bh oe |2la|4 | ele (8 | = = Fae beds A Sa ees | xi Sees 4/4) a| & | 4]/4&)/_a/8 4 ]/e&)a|8 | 3 | eee | —E | 8734] .858 | .351 7| | 80 | .929 | .834 |—.005| | go | .789 | .762 |+.027 .298 | ..315 |—.022 | 70 | .610 | .655 |—.045 | 7 | .73L | .716 |4.015 | 80 | .245 | .251 |—.006 | | 60 | 481 | .492 |—.011 | 70 | .644| .655 |—.011 | 7 | .191 | .206 |—.015 50 | .349 | .341 |+.008 | 65 | .592 | .588 |+.004 70 | .139 | .153 |—.014 40 | .191 | .216 |—.025 60 | .517 | .519 |—.002! 65 | .098 | .125 |—.027 | 3 099 | .117 |—.018 55 | .429 | .446 |—.017 50 | .039 | .058 |—.019 eo it es | 50 | .354 | .376 |—.022 | aC 45 | .297 | .309 |—.012 | 40 | .254 | .246 |+.008 35 189 -190 |—.001 | 30 | 139 | .140 |—001 In view of the general agreement between the observed and calculated values, and in view of the further fact of the colora- tion of the images at large angles, so beautifully accounted for by the reflection theory, it may be considered that the phenom- enon of polarization of light by emission has thus been quanti- tatively proyen to be a phenomenon of reflection and refraction. -It will be remembered that the apparently insuperable objec- tion to the explanation which Arago offered was that that expla- nation attributed to all of the surface molecules the property of emitting natural light, and gave as the entire cause of the polar- ization, the refraction of light which works its way up from a certain depth beneath the surface. The above calculations were all made upon the assumption 184 TRANSACTIONS OF .THE [APR: 1, that all of the light emitted by the glowing body had under- gone a refraction. Considering the closeness of agreement be- tween the calculated and observed values, it is difficult to escape the conclusion that this assumption is correct, and that no particles whatever of the incandescent solid send out into the air natural light, save in the case in which the angle of emergence is zero. This simply means that all of the particles of the light emitting body, including the so-called surface layers, lie within the denser medium, and beneath the plane at which reflection and refraction take place. This relieves the refraction theory of the causes of the phenomenon of its greatest difficulty : viz., the difficulty of conceiving that, in the case of an exceedingly opague body like platinum, the uppermost molecules send out but a very small proportion of the whole light emitted. If we follow the explanation of Arago and Verdet we are obliged by the results of this research to conclude that the emitted light originates almost entirely in molecules other than those of the uppermost layer. On the contrary it seems much more reason- able to assume that, in the case of such a body as platinum, the light emitted is due mainly to this topmost layer, but that the reflection process takes place entirely above the platinum. Quincke has shown that when light from an external source is reflected at the surface of a metal the reflection does not take place in the geometrical plane between the two media, but rather takes place in the metal itself, the vibration penetrating for a certain depth into the denser medium. The converse is also doubtless true that the vibration originating in the metal - is not reflected instantaneously at the surface of the rarer medium, but is reflected in the layer of air of finite thickness which borders upon the metal. Thus all light originating in the platinum, whether in the surface layer or the sub-surface layers, must undergo the process of reflection and refraction before it can emerge into the air. Lastly, the calculated values were all obtained under the assumption that the optical constants of the metals are the same for high temperatures as for low; that is, that the reflecting properties of an incandescent metallic surface are precisely the same as the reflecting properties of a cold metallic surface. The closeness of agreement between the results given by this assumption and the facts as determined by experiment seems to warrant the conclusion, that the change in the optical properties of metals due to incandescence is exceedingly slight; a conclu- sion to which the somewhat inexact experiments of Grove upon the reflecting properties of incandescent platinum would also lead. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 185 In conclusion, I will add that this investigation was sug- gested to me by Professor rood, and I wish here to express my great indebtedness to him and to Professor Hallock, and also to Professor A. A. Michelson, of Chicago University, for aid fur- nished during its progress. I am also under obligations to Herbert G. Torrey, Esq., Assayer of the U.S. Assay Office, who most kindly placed at my disposal large masses of molten gold and silver. R. A. MILLIKAN. STATED MEETING. April 8th. After a brief notice by Pres. Rees regarding the lecture to be held in connection with the American Museum of Natural His- tory by Mr. Ives, on “ Color Photography,” the Biological Sec- tion organized, with Dr. Britton in the chair and an attendance _ of about one hundred. Prof. E. B. Wilson delivered the lecture of the evening, “ The Fertilization and Early Development of the Ovum.” A brief historical review of the subject was given, followed by a discus- sion of the results of his own researches on Toxopneustes. Can. Geol. Sur. Rep. 1875-6, p. 348. 8. Report on the Pre-Silurian (Huronian) and Cambrian or Primordial Silurian Rocks of Southern New Brunswick, by L. W. Bailey. Can. Geol. Sur. Rep. 1877-8, p. 1-34 DD. 9. Report on the Upper Silurian and Kingston (Huronian) of Southern New Brunswick, by G. F. Matthew. Ib. p. 1-6 E. 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 189 10. Report on the Geology of Southern New Brunswick, embracing the counties of Charlotte, Sunbury, Queens, Kings, St. John and Albert, by L. W. Bailey, G. F. Matthew and R. W. Ells. Can. Geol. Sur. Rep. 1878-9, p. 1-26 D. 11. On the Progress of Geological Investigation in New Brunswick 1870- . 1880, by L. W. Bailey. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci. 1880, p. 415. 12. On the Progress of Geological Investigation in New Brunswick. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 1889, VII., Sec. 4, 3-17. 13. Cambrian Organisms in Acadia, by G. F. Matthew in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can. 1889, Sec. 4, p. 135. 14. Correlation Papers, Archzan and Algonkian, by C. R. Van Hise. U. S. Geol. Sur. Bull. 86. 1892. 15. Matthew, W. D., Intrusive Rocks near St. John, N. B. Trans. N. Y. Ac. Sei. XITT., 185. 1894. 16. Outlets of the St. John River, by G. F. Matthew. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Bruns. Bull. XII., 1895. The present paper is a continuation of a petrographic study of the igneous rocks near St. John, N. B. The intrusive rocks in the immediate neighborhood of the city have already been discussed ;* it remains to describe the surface volcanics and dykes, and to add some notes as to the further extension of the intrusives. Pre-Cambrian volcanic rocks are known to exist at various points along the flanks of the metamorphic belt of eastern North America. Although more or less clearly recognized as such in many of the earlier surveys, their certain determinations could usually be made only by the aid of thin sections, and accord- ingly it is only within the last few years that their exact char- acter has been definitely known. The late Dr. Geo. H. Williams, in an article in the Journal of Geology,; has called attention to their wide distribution and importance, and to their close re- semblance to modern effusives, except where altered by meta- morphism. Dr. Williams gives a very full and complete sum- mary of their occurrence in Newfoundland, Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, the eastern townships of Quebec, in Maine, New Hampshire and eastern Massachusetts, in the South Moun- tain of Pennsylvania and Maryland, and along the Blue Ridge as far south as Georgia. There is, however, a great dearth of petrographic descriptions of these rocks, most of the determina- tion having been made in the field only. Besides the well known * Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. XIITI., 185. + Jour. Geol. IT., 1. 190 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 15, work of Dr. Williams* and Miss Bascom} on the South Moun- tain volcanics, and the studies of Wadsworth,{ Diller§ and Sears || in the Boston Basin, the only descriptions of ancient effu- sive rocks from the eastern coast of which the writer knows are the recent article of Dr. Bayley § on the spherulitic felsites from Vinal Haven, Me., and a few descriptions of porphyries from the eastern townships by Dr. Adams**. There is, no doubt, other work of the kind in preparation, and quite probably other pub- lished descriptions exist, which have escaped this review; still the scantiness of petrographic descriptions of these early vol- canics of the east coast, in comparison with those from other parts of the United States, is rather remarkable. In Southern New Brunswick the so-called Huronian has been believed from the first to be in large part volcanic, and was so described in the reports of the different surveys. The first systematic survey was made by Dr. Abraham Ges- ner for the Provincial Government in 1858-42, its results be- ing published in five reports dated 1839-45, inclusive. Dr. Ges- ner was greatly impressed with the important part which had . been played in Southern New Brunswick by volcanic forces, which, however, he was inclined to over-rate, ascribing to them many of the effects due to erosion. Speaking of the southern part of the province he says: “At the southeastern base of this elevated region ” (the gran- ite area which divides Southern from Central New Brunswick) “the slates and limestones of the transition series, and the sand- stones and conglomerates of the secondary formations, are placed in their usual order of succession, wherever they have not been broken up and buried by extensive eruptions of volcanic matter. All these rocks have been penetrated by large and numerous dikes of trap, basalt and pophyry (sic), and the sur- face of the country with all the islands in the Passamaquoddy Bay exhibit the clearest evidences of having been the theatre of violent earthquakes and intense volcanie action.”+t Although some of the massive rocks which Dr. Gesner be- lieved igneous have been siuce shown to be of sedimentary ori- gin, yet his estimate of the importance of eruptive rocks in this * Amer. Jour. Sci. XLIV., 482. + Jour. Geol., I. t Bull. Mus. Comp. Zéol. Hary., V., 275; Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., X-XI., 288. 2 Bull. Mus. Comp. Zo6l. Hary., VII., 165. | Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Hary., XVI., No. 9; Bull, Essex Inst., XXVI., 118 ete. { Geol. Soc. Amer., Baltimore Meeting, Dec.. 1894. ** Can. Geol. Sur. Report of 1839, p. 12. ++ Report of 1839, p. 12. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 191 part of the Province still holds good. But it is evident from the tone of his writing that he considered the volcanic outbursts as of far later date than that now assigned to them, for he con- nects these disturbances with recorded earthquakes and changes of level in New Brunswick within historic times, and even pic- turés a number of supposed volcanic cones near Great Salmon River, east of Quaco.* In the Dominion Government Survey Reports, Dr. L. W. Bailey and G. F. Matthew recognize the existence of great amounts of volcanic ash, as well as massive lavas, porphyritic and vesicular. But the greater part of the series, consisting of fine-grained rocks denoted as felsite and petrosilex, remained to the last of doubtful origin, with an apparent tendency in Dr. Bailey’s later report (1877-8), written after a most careful and thorough study of the volcanic hills, to consider them as largely sedimentary rocks, though formed under special conditions of deposition ; + while Dr. Ells { considers them as volcanic. In his latest paper bearing on this subject § Dr. Bailey points out the need of microscopic sections of these rocks, both to make sure of their character and perhaps to determine also whether certain members are of pre-Cambrian age or are identical with very similar rocks of later origin. He summarizes the charac- ter and relations of the pre-Cambrian rocks as follows : “Among these Archean rocks at least two great groups of sediments are to be distinguished, which, in a general way, bear many features of resemblance to those which in other parts of Canada are known as the Laurentian and Huronian systems. At the same time it is impossible. . . not to see that . there are equally striking differences,. . . especially seen in the greater proportionate amount of distinctly stratified rocks, such as slates and quartzites, in the comparative absence of coarsely crystalline deposits of crystalline minerals and ore beds, and in the much greater regularity and uniformity of the whole. . . Another desideratum in connection with these two ancient systems is a better understanding of their time re- lations to each other, for though no doubt is entertained by the author as to the fact that the felsitic and schistose rocks refer- red to the Huronian are more recent than the granitoid and gneissic rocks and the great belts of crystalline limestone which have been regarded as Laurentian, a contrary view has * Report of 1840, p. 21. + Can. Geol. Sur. Rep. 1877-8, p. 4, D. D. In a foot-note at this page, Dr. Selwyn compares this series to the ancient voleanic rocks of England and Wales, with which he believes they are identical in origin. tIb., p.3 D. 2 Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 1889, Vol. VII., Sec. 4, p. 3. 192 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [apr. 15, been taken by others; while neither has any satisfactory con- tact of the two formations been observed, nor an instance in which the conglomerates of the one are unquestionably made up of material derived from the other.” * Collections made during the past three summers and studied by the aid of the microscope have amply confirmed the views held as to the volcanic origin of the greater part of the “Huronian.” It will be seen that a considerable variety of igneous rocks is represented, including lavas and ash rocks once precisely like those of modern times and not greatly altered by metamorphism. Many of the fine grained felsites and much of the petrosilex, however, cannot be certainly determined, even with the aid of thin sections; but judging from the almost com- plete absence among them of distinctly recognizable sediments, it is probable that the greater part of the doubtful ones should be considered as altered ashes or tuffs. The pre-Cambrian of Southern New Brunswick falls naturally into two great divisions: a lower one composed of gneisses, lime- stones, quartzites and various schistose rocks, usually highly crystalline, but of distinctly sedimentary character; and an upper one composed chiefly of volcanic products, fading out above into more normal sedimentary beds which are as a rule much less altered than those of the lower series. The lower group has been compared to the Laurentian; the upper has been called Huronian; but both these names are dropped in the later Survey Reports and replaced by numbers for the different groups. In the present paper they may be occasionally used as indicating this two-fold division, but not implying any correla- tion in the present restricted sense of the terms. The Laurentian series includes divisions 1 and 2 of the later reports; the first being granitic gneiss and granite, which is, near St. John at least, intrusive in Division 2, and may be placed provisionally between it and the volcanic series. Division 2 is clearly sedimentary, and shows a varying amount of regional metamorphism, being at times comparatively little altered. The upper series or ‘ Huronian”’ includes at least three sub- groups. These are: 1. Coldbrook (Div. 3). This is composed almost entirely of voleanie rocks—lavas, ashes and tuffs. The most abundant types of rock are felsites and “ petrosilex ” (fine-grained, flinty quartz-felsite), often porphyritic and accompanied by much ag- glomerate and finer grained ash-rocks into which they seem to grade. Dr. Bailey also mentions various sedimentary rocks from * Loc. cit., p. 5. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 193 this group; although the sections examined by the present writer have so far failed to show any distinctly non-voleanic elastics. The Coldbrook is exposed over a considerable area northeast and east of the city, making up the greater part of the pre-Cambrian hills in that direction, where its best exposures lie. To the west it is of less importance. 2. Coastal (Div. 4). Overlying the Coldbrook is another series of rocks, more altered in its typical exposures than the lower group. Its lower part * is made up of volcanic rocks en- tirely similar to those of the Coldbrook, from which the writer has not been able to distinguish it. The upper part, however, is composed chiefly of sedimentaries, with some volcanics inter- bedded. The prevailing schistose structure of most of the rocks of this group in the area examined renders it very difficult to determine their nature without the aid of a thin section in each individual case; hence the proportion of volcanic rock is not very well known. It is often difficult, indeed, even with a thin section, to say whether a rock of this kind is altered felsite, or ash, or voleanic debris recomposed by water and approximating normal sediments. 3. Kingston (Div. 5). This is a more altered series than either of the other two, and occupies a strip of land some five miles wide, bounded on either side by a fault line,t and not less than 70 miles in length. Its rocks embrace recognizable surface vol- canics, porphyritic lavas and felsitic ash rocks, and also altered types, basic and acid schists, some of which were certainly of voleanic origin, and quite probably all. The relations of the Kingston to. the other pre-Cambrian rocks are very uncertain: Dr. Bailey Says: “The same uncertainty rests upon the age of the eesti Kingston group of southern New Brunswick, and which in its western extension becomes in part at least continuous with that to which Prof. Shaler assigns the name of ‘the Campobello Series.’ By that author..... they are regarded as being Lower Cambrian, but as beds of very similar character occur within a very short distance of the known Cambrian of St. John, and yet bear very little resemblance to it, this supposition seems un- tenable. As they are certainly older than the Silurian, and in all probability not Cambrian, they must be regarded as _ pre- Cambrian, the view adoptedin the Survey Reports, or as Cam- bro-Silurian.’’} * As defined by Prof. Bailey in the Report for 1877-8. +G. F. Matthew, Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., N. B. XII., 46. t Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 1889, Sec. 4, p. 8. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. ScI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 13, May 28, 1895. 194 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 15, The thickness of this series is very great; at New River the section is over eleven thousand feet,* supposed to have been de- deposited in a gradually sinking area, bounded by the faults on each side. The immense erosion which this this series has suf- fered probably is the key to its more altered character, the rocks now at the surface having been very deeply buried. 4, Etcheminian.t This is aseries underlying the Cambrian slates in most of their exposures, and unconformable both to them and to the Coldbrook rocks on which it rests. The rocks are wholly sedimentary in their typical exposures, but are be- lieved by G. F. Matthew to have been rapidly deposited by the working over of the softer voleanic beds, and to indicate a time of dying volcanic activity. There is reason to believe that part of the diabase which lies below the Cambrian at St. John is post- Etcheminian (possibly post-Cambrian as well). This series is considered by the last named author to be probably equivalent to the upper part of the Coastal; if so it has considerable directly volcanic material in it. To sum up, the pre-Cambrian near St. John includes the fol- lowing groups: A.— LAURENTIAN. 1. Portland group, including Div. 2, with probably parts of Div. 1 in other localities than St. John. 2. Intrusive granite and quartz-diorite; perhaps later than the position here assigned to it. B.—HUROnIAN. 3. Coldbrook group or Div. 8, of volcanic rocks. 4. Coastal group or Div. 4, of volcanic and sedimentary rocks, in its upper part probably equivalent to the next group. 5. Htcheminian or Basal Series, of sedimentary rocks, under- lying the St. John group. 6. Kingston group or Div. 5, of metamorphosed volcanics. Of very uncertain relations; may be post-Cambrian. Uprer LIMIT oF THE PRE-CAMBRIAN. The Cambrian is here considered to be limited by the uncon- formity at the base of the St. John group. The criterion given by Mr. Walcott for determining the base of the Cambrian, namely the lower limit of the Olenellus fauna, cannot here be applied, as Olenellus has not been found in New Brunswick, though a large pre-Paradoxidean fauna of very primitive type *G. F. Matthew, Can. Geol. Sur. Rep. 1887-8, p. 4E. + Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 1889, Sec. 4, p. 135. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 195 has recently been worked out in Diy. 16 of the St. John group.* Mr. Walcott + includes the Etcheminian, which contains a few fossils, none satisfactory as determining its relations, in the the Cambrian period. In this case it would become a question as to how much value can be assigned to the unconformity be- tween the Etcheminian and the volcanic rocks beneath, and whether the latter might not also be included in the Lower Cam- brian. Between the Laurentian and all the later rocks there ap- pears to be a great break, if one may judge from lithologic characters and the lack of conformity in dip in many places. Satisfactory conglomerates are, as might be expected, lacking at the base of the volcanic series. In some observed cases the rock nearest the contact is a breccia (volcanic); but it is not known whether any of these contacts are not obscured by thrust-planes. That the St. John group is separated from the Laurentian by a great break there is good evidence; a conglo- merate at its base has been observed to contain pebbles of the Laurentian rocks. CLASSIFICATION. It has been thought most convenient in the present paper to discuss the igneous rocks of the Coldbrook, Coastal and Etche- minian together, dividing them according to physical charac- ters, and ‘subsequently to take up the Kingston rocks as meta- morphosed phases of these. It is found that the division into Acid and Basic Effusives, used by Dr. Williams for the igneous rocks of South Mountain, is a very convenient one to employ here, the intermediate types being but poorly represented. The dykes, clearly recognizable as such, are discussed separately, as is also an occurrence of soda granite which has been referred to the Huronian in the Survey Reports. In order to give some clear understanding of the character of the rocks included under these divisions they have been placed in groups which in the sections studied are fairly distinct one from another. It has not been possible to make any well founded generalizations as to the distinctness of these groups in point of time, still less as to their succession. The arrangement is as follows: EFFUSIVE Rocks. A.—Acid Effusives. : l. Quartz Porphyry. Compact, quartzose, full of pheno- crysts. * These Transactious. Vol. xiv., April, 1895. + Correlation Papers-Cambrian, U.S. G.S. Bull., 81. t Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 1889, Sec. 4, p. 139. 196 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ~ [APR Loy Felsite porphyry. Few phenocrysts, many characters of surface flows. This includes nearly all the acid effusives, and laps over on the one hand into quartz-porphyry and on the other into an acid porphyrite. B.—Basic Effusives. 1. Diabase. This is the chief type. 2. Feldspar-porphyrites, including a few basic lavas, strongly porphyritic, purplish in color. Dyke Rocks. Only basic dykes are known. 1. Diorite-porphyrite and Camptonite. 2. Diabase and various porphyrites. 3. Augite-porphyrite. Sopa GRANITE. (JUARTZ—PORPHYRY. Two occurrences in the Quaco Hills, one on the Upper Quaco- Road, the other near Golden Grove, seem to merit special no- tice. The porphyry is even grained, compact and homogeneous, with abundant phenocrysts of quartz and orthoclase, the quartz predominating. No characters of surface flows were observed ; the rock appears not to grade into the felsites and ash-rocks in which it occurs, and may be in both cases an intrusive sill or a heavy dyke of post-Coldbrook age. It is very similar in character to the quartz-porphyry (is claystone- porphyry”), which occurs at the base of the Siluro-Devonian in Western St. John County (Dipper Harbor Road). Under the microscope this rock shows abundant quartz pheno- erysts, somewhat corroded at times, but usually with well marked erystal outlines. They show what seems to be a polysynthetic twinning, very fine and faintly marked, visible in sections ap- proximately basal. This may be the rhombohedral twinning mentioned by Prof. Rosenbusch * as occurring in quartz- porphyry. The orthoclase phenocrysts are rather less abun- dant than quartz; they are usually once twinned, and present no special feature worthy of note. Dark silicates are absent in the sections examined. Iron ores occur in scattered granules. The groundmass is microgranitic and of very even texture, com- posed of quartz and untwinned feldspar. The color of this rock in its freshest occurrence is a bright pinkish-red ; near Golden Grove it is pale green, weathering to: brown, and much altered. * Mikrosk. Phys. der Massigen Gesteine, p. 355. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. — 197 FELSITE-PORPHYRY. Pl. XII., XIII., and Fig. A p. 199. Under this group may be placed the majority of the effusives of the Huronian. Most of the “ felsites ” and “ petrosilex ” of the Canadian Survey Reports are either porphyry or porphyry- ash ; and some of the rocks described as sandstone, etc., prove on the evidence of thin sections to belong here. The central and most abundant type is a quartz-free porphyry with scat- tered phenocrysts of orthoclase and plagioclase in a micro- granitic or microfelsitic groundmass. Quartz phenocrysts occur in a few sections; in others the amount of twinned feldspar in- creases relatively to the untwinned till the rock is, strictly speaking, a porphyrite. Flow structure is seen in most of the sections, and trichites, spherulites, perlitic cracks and other characteristically volcanic structures have been observed. Brec- cias are abundantly found, sometimes very coarse, the fragments being six inches to two feet in diameter. Finer grained rocks, sometimes distinguishable as composed of sharp-edged angular fragments, more often not determinable, are still more common. From the absence of any accompanying rocks of distinctly sedi- mentary character it is perhaps safest to place these as in most cases fine ashes or tufts. This group of rocks bears every indication of being of strictly superficial origin. Their texture is more or less irregular; they are frequently vesicular and flow-brecciated, with few. scattered and often broken phenocrysts, being contrasted in these char- acters with the compact, smooth and uniform appearance and abundance of phenocrysts seen in the last group. Quartz phenocrysts occur quite rarely, are often broken, but seldom notably resorbed. The quartz in the groundmass is more important. In perbaps a third of the sections examined it seems to be an essential constituent, distinguishable from the feldspars by its brighter polarization colors; it is granular and rarely at all intergrown in granophyric forms. In many cases it is certainly a devitrification product,as isshown by the rem- nants of original glassy structures still traceable. Orthoclase phenocrysts are found sparsely scattered in all the sections. They are never very large, mostly 1-4 mm. in length, are rarely resorbed, but not uncommonly broken and the frag- ments displaced. They are usually twinned after the Carlsbad law, in one case after the Baveno. The orthoclase in the ground- mass is mostly granular, but part of the rod-like feldspar in the groundmass of some sections may be monoclinic. Plagioclase is in some sections more abundant than orthoclase, and rarely entirely fails. Its crystals are less regular in outline 198 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 15, than the orthoclase. In the groundmass it sometimes occurs in granular form, being then in some cases, probably in all, of sec- ondary origin (the rock being a consolidated ash). More gener- ally it is seen as little rods lying in a granular mixture of less well individualized feldspathic material. The ferromagnesian silicates are almost entirely wanting. This may be due in part to alteration, but they evidently were never in any considerable quanity. In one instance (Spec. 340 from east. of Coldbrook Station), a quartz bearing porphyry with an unusual abundance of phenocrysts, biotite -has been ob- served, now colorless from alteration, but still retaining its optical characters and form. Magnetite and other iron ores occur commonly, mostly in very small grains. It is frequently titaniferous, as shown by its weathering to leucoxene. The special interest of this group of rocks lies in the charac- teristic structures noticeable in them. These afford conclusive proof that the rocks were ejected on the surface and probably in part under water, and that they were originally very like modern voleanic products—acid lavas, scoriaceous, glassy and brecciated towards the surface, more compact and porphyritic below. Perlitic cracks (Pl. XIII., Fig. 1) appear to be preserved in sev- eral specimens, but in one only were they clearly and certainly determined. This is part of a “felsite”’ outcrop on the Ham- mond River below Upham; this felsite is strongly flow-lined, somewhat brecciated and spherulitic in parts. The perlitic cracks are preserved in some brilliantly polarizing mineral (calcite ?), and are most easily seen with crossed nicols, though they are visible in ordinary light. In thesame flow are the best preserved examples of large spher- ulites that I have seen from New Brunswick (Pl. XII., Fig. 1). These are rather irregular in form, seldom complete, but retain a radial structure. They shot out from various solid bodies in the magma, feldspar phenocrysts, grains of magnetite, etc., paying no regard in their growth to the flow-lines already ex- isting. The rods of quartz and feldspar seem now to be broken down into elongated granules with straight lateral edges (Fig. A); but there is no evidence in the specimen that this was not the original structure of the spherulites. The groundmass in which they occur is microgranitic, and, along with the spherulites themselves, is filled with minute trichites, seen in Fig. A, com- posed of one or more curving black needles shooting out from a grain of magnetite. These needles are now partly broken up into a succession of granules, like a string of beads; in other 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 199 parts they are unchanged. They are evidently earlier than the spherulites, for they show a general direction following that of the flow lines, without regard to the spherulitic structure. Microspherulites, showing the revolving cross under crossed nicols have been observed in a red felsite from Hanford Brook, collected by G. F. Matthew. Nodular felsites,in which the radial structure is not seen, occur in several places. This struc- ture in English rocks is believed by some authorities to be gen- rally secondary, arising from a progressive alteration of the rock proceeding from a central vesicle or some point of weakness, From the traces of radial structure preserved, it seems probable that, in some instances at least, the nodules in New Brunswick felsites are altered spherulites of large size. At Shanklin, near : i ii : min il mg UT f MH Mh Hl i i h i Mt ‘ i fy 2 1 ON ‘ Lf i va Fig. A. Trichites in spherulitic felsite. Spec. 664. _Magni- jied 153 diameters. Quaco, is a bright red nodular felsite forming an outlier in Sub- carboniferous shale. It is lithologically like the volcanic hills near by, and probably of the same age. The nodules in this rock are strongly marked in the weathered specimens, from the abundance of hematite in their outer zones; they often fall out of the matrix on slight weathering, being apparently more silici fied and better able to resist alteration. They have usually a central filling of feldspathic material free from iron; the iron has collected chiefly at their surfaces. In thin sections traces of a radial structure seems to be preserved in the arrangement of the secondary hematite flakes. The whole substance of the rock is much silicified, but both in the transparent centres and 200 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 15, in the deeply stained outside a minute pilitic structure is re- tained, apparently of feldspar rods arranged approximately par- allel to the flow lines. If the apparent remains of radial_struc- ture are not illusory, this would seem to indicate either : 1. That a radial spherulitic structure could form in a rock already in large part crystallized, or 2. That this pilitic structure of the groundmass may be of secondary origin. Of these two, the former supposition seems to the writer the more probable one. The Survey Reports mention in general terms,* and in one case more particularly, gradations of these felsites into the holocrystalline rocks with which they are in places associated. Dr. Ells speaks of these holocry stallines as basal portions of voleanic flows; Dr. Bailey} considers that north of the Germaine Brook as an extreme case of metamorphism. The present writer has not yet been able to obtain a complete series show- ing this gradation, though a partial one was made at Germaine Brook. But in none of the felsites sectioned is there evidence of gradation into crystalline rocks, either by slower cooling or subsequent metamorphism. That such deeper-seated facies of the Huronian igneous rocks exist there can be no doubt, and it would probably be revealed by more extended study. The acid breccias and ash-rocks are very abundant. Coarse felsite breccias occur east of Coldbrook, where they contain larger rounded or pear-shaped masses, probably volcanic bombs; on the road skirting the south flank of Bloomsbury Mountain, here composed of a pale greenish-gray silicified felsite, strongly flow-lined and perhaps a devitrified glass; at Titus’ Mill on the Hammond River, here being partly a devitrified glass breccia ; in a railway cutting near Henry Lake, and elsewhere. The finer breccias or coarse ash-rocks are sometimes schistose, as for instance, a greenish-gray breccia not far east of Coldbrook. With increasing fineness they are more and more altered and less easy to recognize, the fine-grained, flinty felsites and petro- silex showing no characteristic structures which can be consid- ered original. These fine- grained rocks often show aggregations of chloritic material in rounded or irregular spots with fairly well defined outline. Aside from this they are uniformly micro-crystalline in structure, made up of feldspar with a quarter or less admix- ture of quartz, and scattered magnetite grains. Occasional large grains and porphyritic crystals of feldspar are seen in some specimens. * E lls, 187 7-8. + Bailey, 1877-8. Discussed in this paper under soda granite. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 201 DIABASE. Except the felsites this is the most abundant rock of the Cold- brook group, and forms also a considerable part of the rocks re- ferred to the Coastal series in 1887-8. It occurs as surface flows as well as intruded sills and dykes. At Racehorse Point, east of St. John City, it crops out on the shore as a heavy dy ke in the coarse green and red sandy slates that are overturned on the fine grey slates of the St. John group.* This dyke has baked the adjoining slate into a hornstone very like the edges of the igneous rock itself, and the contact of the two is not easy to dis- tinguish. Dr. Gesner in 1840+ mentions it as a dyke, but sup- poses that it has fused the slate near by, and thus effaced the line of contact. The Survey Reports} do not recognize it asa dyke, but consider it, apparently, as an altered sediment or ashi- rock. In thin section, however, it is unmistakably a diabase, and on careful examination the line of contact with the slates was traced on each side. Under the microscope this contact is per- fectly sharp and clear, the igneous rock being dense, almost opaque, with scattered plagioclase phenocrysts. The slate does not show much change; the patallel arrangement of the granules is not noticable, and minute grains of a brightly polarizing min- eral are developed near the edge. The diabase of the central parts of the dyke is tolerably fresh; the augite occasionally shows crystal outlines, but mostly moulds the feldspar. No olivine was observed, but a peculiar oil-green substance, indis- tinctly fibrous or matted, with a high refractive index and bright aggregate polarization, appears occasionally , and is probably an alteration product of olivine, perhaps allied to Becke’s pilite. At some little distance back from the shore, near the peniten- tiary, the diabase crops out again, here being in part a surface flow, finer grained and strongly vesicular, and separated by a sharp line of contact from the coarser, non-vesicular diabase lying northwest of it. The latter contains included masses of white-weathering flinty felsite, which seem to belong just north of it, and are very like the supposed ash-rocks underlying the Etcheminian north of the city. From the foregoing it is clear that a part of the diabase, the dyke on the shore and the heavier dyke or sill back of it, must be later than the slate and felsite through which they cut. Of the relative age of the vesicular diabase there is no good evi- dence ; though it appears to be older than the sill. The slate is * Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 1890, Sec. 4, p. 127. + Geol. Sur. Prov. New Bruns., Rep. 1840, p. 11. t Geol. Sur. Canada, Rep. 1871, p. 137. 202 TRANSACTIONS OF THE™ [apr. 15, considered Etcheminian by G. F. Matthew* ; hence this diabase is post-Etcheminian, possibly Cambrian or later. Provisionally it may be placed as pre-Cambrian. The diabase is again well exposed on the west side of the har- bor of St. John, in a series of hills on the southeast border of the Cambrian valley. It is made up, as far as can be seen, of a number of surface flows, which are accompanied by a little slate, apparently interbedded, and were perhaps partly sbumariae. The characters of surface flows can be seen in some others of the many outcrops that occur in all parts of the Huronian hills, \\ : g ASS KOE = Fic. B. Vesicle in diabase, showing ayate-like banding of feldspar (?) and chlorite. Magnified 70 diameters. Spec. 150. others are more probably intrusive sills. All are normal dia- base, without olivine, and with an almost colorless augite. The vesicles are mostly lined with quartz, and filled with chlorite, sometimes with hornblende. The chlorite is very often spheru- litic and shows the beautiful Berlin-blue polarization color. Secondary growths of a mineral which seems to be plagioclase are known; it is not twinned, but appears to be sometimes opti- cally continuous with the feldspar rods around the vesicle. It * Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, 1790, See. 4, p. 127. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 203 is at times intergrown in alternate concentric layers with the chlorite of the vesicles, as is shown in Fig. B. Basie ash rocks occur abundantly and can sometimes be seen to be made up of diabase fragments. But most of them are too far altered to be certainly identified. PORPHYRITES. Under the group may be placed a considerable number of out- crops of strongly porphyritic basic effusives, mostly of purplish black color and not certainly known to grade into the diabases. They form heavy beds, apparently thick surface flows, very vesicular for the most part and containing phenocrysts of plagioclase which in one case, a porphyrite from south of Golden Grove, are remarkably fresh and glassy. Under the microscope they show a somewhat ophitic fine- grained groundmass composed of feldspar rods, minute grains of augite and magnetite in which are scattered the feldspar phenocrysts, those in the rock from Golden Grove being of the microtine habit, water clear, repeatedly twinned and somewhat corroded. No augite phenocrysts were seen. In a porphyrite from near Henry Lake the vesicles are filled with a zeolite, de- termined as thompsonite on its micro-characters. METAMORPHISM. The alteration as seen in these Coldbrook and Coastal rocks is very varied in amount. Devitrification is universal; in no instance has any trace of remaining glass been identified. The resultant microcrystalline mass varies in texture from a micro- felsite, in which the minerals are scarcely distinguishable to a moderately fine microgranite, in which are local accumulations of coarser grains. Shearing occurs sometimes in the porphyries, quite generally in the ash-rocks. In the Coastal especially, it is usually so much developed as to produce a schist. The last named alteration is accompanied by the production of great amounts of epidote; this mineral occurs less abundantly in the massive flows. Uralitic hornblende is a frequent alteration pro- duct of the diabase, retaining usually the form of the augite which it replaces. In no observed case is the change carried so far, either in the acid or basic rocks, as to produce a strongly schistose or subgneissic structure. It is not intended to assert that such rocks may not occur locally, but only that they are evidently not usual. 204 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPR. 15, SopA-GRANITE. Pl. XVI. and XVII. A high ridge stretching from Hardingville on the Germaine Brook to the great bend in the Hammond River below Upham consists of a red granitic rock called syenite (hornbende-granite) by the Survey officers, but which on microscopic study appears to be an augite-soda-granite. The Germaine Brook and Ham- mond River run at the foot of its steep eastern slope; on the other side lies a broken country, little opened up. The rock was considered by Prof. Bailey as an extremely metamorphosed phase of the breccias and felsites which surround it; and he cites instances of the transition of the one into the other, which the writer has not yet been able to completely follow. * In regard to Prof. Bailey’s conclusion, it must be observed that microscope sections have failed to show any extreme meta- morphism in the Coldbrook or Coastal groups. They have fre- quently a secondary cleavage developed, which often amounts to an imperfect schistosity. But of the entire re-formation of the minerals in the rock so as to make a gneiss, still less a gran- ite, I have seen no instance in the post-Laurentian rocks of this region. Ii the rock is not a subsequent intrusion, the view of Dr. Ells, stated with regard to a number of such areas of crys- talline rocks occurring near the borders of the volcanic areas, seems more acceptable. + He regards them as being basal parts of volcanic flows, their crystalline character being due to slow cooling. Prof. Bailey describes the passage from felsite into “ syenite,” as follows: “With the dark grey petrosilex are irregular beds of pale red and red felsite, which in approaching Titus’ Mill become at the same time more frequent and more crystalline. In some por- tions .. . a distinct but usually highly contorted stratification is discernible, but other portions are quite homogeneous, and by admixture of a dark green mineral resembling hornblende be- come imperfect syenites. . . . It is supposed that these syenitic hills ... are simply the petrosilex and breccia in a more altered form. That they are in great part of fragmentary ori- gin is very evident, and even where apparently most crystalline a rounding of the grains of quartz, and the occurrence of irreg- ular cavities or vesicles suggests that all have been produced by like agencies.” { The microscopic appearance of the ‘“ syenite ” throws consid- * Geol. Sur. Can. Rep., 1877-78, p. 8, DD. + Geol. Sur. Can. Rep., 1877-78, p. 3, D. t Loe. cit. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 205 erable new light on its origin. In thin section (Pl. XVL., fig. 1) it appears as a rather coarse but very even-grained soda- granite, apparently of igneous origin, the quartz often granophy- ric (whence the rounding of its grains of which Dr. Bailey speaks); the dark silicates are augite and brown and green horn- blende, the two latter apparently secondary after augite. The feldspar is partly idiomorphic, partly granophyric or granitic. Towards the edges of the mass the rock becomes fine-grained, and shows in thin section (Pl. XVI., fig. 2) a mass of interlac- ing rods of feldspar with comparatively little quartz, and augite in small irregular granules. The characters cited are sufficient to show that this rock has cooled from fusion. Did it occur in the midst of highly metamorphic rocks, gneisses and crystalline schists, it might well be supposed that its fusion was but an ex- treme phase of metamorphism. But in view of the slightly al- tered character of the rocks surrounding it, it seems almost cer- tain that the fusion was followed by a notable displacement, and the rock is therefore a stranger in its present association and must be classed as igneous. The peripheral phases, as far as noted, accord with this view; we find there a rock approaching a porphyry in structure, instead of a gneiss. How nearly the granite is connected with the felsites around it, it is not now possible to say. Microscopie characters. The rock is an augite-soda-granite, containing at most, perhaps, one-third free quartz, and a vary- ing amount, sometimes quite small, of ferromagnesian silicates. In its central parts it is strongly granophyric (Pl. XVII.); to- wards the edges it loses that feature and finally becomes fine- grained with a rod-like form to the feldspars, and almost no quartz. The quartz calls for no especial comment. It is, as noted, largely intergrown with the feldspar; when not so, it appears to have been the last constituent of the rock to form, never show- ing crystal outlines. The feldspar is partly a twinned feldspar, apparently anor- thoclase, and partly untwinned. Much of it is so altered by kaolinization that its nature cannot be determined; the more altered parts are made almost opaque by the presence of minute red flakes (hematite 7). The untwinned feldspar rarely shows erystal outlines and is often intergrown with quartz. The twinned feldspar shows an exceedingly fine and regular twin- ning with a small extinction angle, and occurs mostly in idio- morphic crystals imbedded in the quartz-orthoclase mass. From the regularity and fineness of its twinning this feldspar is considered to be more probably anorthoclase than a fine grained plagioclase. 206 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPrR. 15, Besides the anorthoclase, a few crystals of the ordinary plagioclase type were observed. Augite occurs in poorly developed crystals or irregular grains, almost colorless and with no apparent pleochroism. It is mostly altered to hornblende, chlorite or epidote. In the strongly granophyric specimens the augite and other ferromag- nesian silicates are in very small amount. Brown hornblende. A pale brown hornblende, with a very high extinction angle, 25° maximum, occurs in moderate amount. It is in part at least secondary after augite, but some of it seems to show its own crystal outlines, and if so, may be considered original. Its pleochroism is: ownish yellow, O—pale reddish brown, pale vellowish brown, a>b>c. Green hornblende. This is in varying quantity, and appears to be in all cases paramorphic after augite and brown horn- blende. It has the usual colors and pleochroism of uralitic horn- blende, though its structure is almost compact. The stages in the alteration of the augite appear to be, 1. Brown hornblende, 2. Green hornblende, sometimes bleached before passing into 3. Chlorite. Epidote occurs as an alteration product, but apparently not of this series; the conditions of its formation must have been different. In some sections no augite or brown hornblende is found, but only an aggregate of green hornblende, epidote and chlorite. Apatite is an abundant accessory, in the usual long prisms, which are rather more abundant in the quartz. Magnetite occurs in small irregular masses and is in part titaniferous. Pyrite is occasionally to be noticed. Zircon appears in every section examined in crystals of square cross section. In the concentrates these are seen to be made up of the unit prism and pyramid, rarely showing their edges in the slightest degree modified. This character of the crystals is much in contrast with the rather abundant zircons of the intru- sive granite-diorites of the Laurentian. The latter have the unit and second-order prism and unit pyramid much modified by de- velopment of several other faces, giving them a rounded outline, while the zircous of the soda-granite are sharp-edged and clean cut. The difference in character may perhaps be due to the con- ditions of solidifying, more probably to the chemical composi- tion of the magma. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 207 In the concentrates a few grains are found of a mineral with ultramarine-blue color,and pleochroism ultramarine to colorless. This is thought to be probably a soda-hornblende, allied to glaucophane. Its refraction and polarization indices are about those of hornblende and it is (7) biaxial; but its properties could not be further determined. ‘ The peripheral phases of the soda-granite are not thoroughly known. The complete gradation from it into the felsite-breccia described by Dr. Bailey as occurring at Titus’ Mill, the writer has not succeeded in finding. At other points the granite was seen to be fine-grained and to have lost its characteristic bright redcolor. It was not atall gneissic, however, nor was it strongly porphyritic, and of further transition between it and the felsites ho trace was seen. Under the microscope (PL. XVI, fig. 2) this fine-grained facies shows a more or less panidiomorphic structure of feldspar crys- tals which exhibit a decided tendency towards the rod-like form. One or two large crystals appear to be porphyritic in the rest of the mass. The feldspar is largely plagioclase, the rest orthociase, no anorthoclase being certainly recognizable in the sections. Augite? appears in minute grains scattered all through the mass; they are too small to show well the characteristic optical properties, and have little or no crystal outline. An analysis was made of the soda-granite from above Titus’ . Mill, spec. 661. This was a fairly average specimen, moder- ately granophyric, with an unusually large amount of dark sili- cates present. The following results were obtained (column I.): ANALYSES OF SODA-GRANITES. I. Titus’ Mill, Upham, N. B. II. Kekequabic Lake, Minn. U.S. Grant. III. Pigeon Point, Minn. W.S. Bayley. die ik: Ill a b SiO, 64.86 64.79 66.84 72.42 TiO, 0.70 OG Sin Bee ae, oon 0.40 Al,O,; 15.02 18.22 13.04 Fe,0, 5.53 5.60 Pied 0.68 FeO 1.01 0.86 0.20 2.47 MnO 0.18 O40P Posh Os 0.09 CaO 2.61 2.63 -3.31 0.66 MgO 1.42 151 0.81 0.58 Na,O 3.92 3.93 5.14 3.44 K,O 2.31 2.35 2.80 4.97 co, SST 2 ay ly ne? mom ese 2 meee gag = 28 LS Ont ae etek fs ae are tr 0.20 Loss on ign. 1.73 1.78 0.46 1-21 99.89 100.05 100.37 208 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aprR. 15, With this analysis are placed for comparison analyses of anorthoclase granites from Kekequabic Lake* (II.) and Pigeon Pointt in Minnesota (III.). The Upham rock agrees fairly well in composition with that from Kekequabic Lake, being some- what lower in alkalies and alumina and higher in iron percent- age. Dr. Grant describes the latter rock as dull pink in color, feldspathic, with abundant augite and comparatively little quartz, and shows that it is an intrusive rock, exhibiting porphyritie facies. It would seem to be less altered than our rock, and con- sequently has a much larger proportion of augite; otherwise the resemblance is quite close. The results of separation with potassio-mereuric iodide solu- tion were as follows: Sp. g. 2.54—2.57 2. I, 2.57—2.62 26. 2.62 - 2.67 41. 2.67—2.70 rp 2.70—2.73 6. 2.73—3.16 10. Sols 8. 100 The part falling between 2.62 and 2.67 was chiefly quartz and impure feldspar. The feldspar between 2.57 and 2.62 was analyzed with the following results: SiO,, 66.62; Al.,O3, + Fe,0,, 21.22; CaO, 0.82; MgO, not det. ; Na,O, 6.73 ; K,0, 2.10: In its outward appearance and in many details of its struc- ture this soda-granite is very like the “red rock” of Pigeon Point, in Minnesota, so fully described by W. 8S. Bayley.{ Dr. Bay ley determined the red rock as an anorthoclase granite with porphyritic phases. Dr. Bayley shows that the red rock is to be considered as a contact product resulting from the complete fusion of red sand- stones by an intruded gabbro. If the view held by Prof. L. W. Bailey as to the origin of the soda-granite be correct, there is a further likeness to the Pigeon Point rock, as the metamorphism which could produce a rock of such type must be supposed pushed to the point of fusion. For reasons already stated, how- ever, the writer is unable to take this view, and would consider it rather as an igneous rock of unknown relations to the felsites. * Minn. Geol. Survey, Ann. Rep. 1892, p. 41. t Amer. Jour. mark (3) XXXVII., 4. See also U.S. G. S. Bull. 109. { Bull. 109, U.S. G.S. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 209 THE KINGSTON GROUP. This group presents a series of volcanic rocks parallel to those of the Coldbrook, but far more altered. The acid mem- bers are strongly sheared, often unrecognizable as volcanic, and with a great development of secondary micas, making a quartz- ose or feldspathic mica-schist. Some of these schists retain their porphyritic crystals with clear cut edges and compara- tively little altered, though the ground mass is all recrystallized. Ash rocks, now changed to flinty felsites, are sometimes still re- eognizable, but no doubt most of them are too much metamor- phosed to be determined. The basic rocks of the series are even more changed. Though mostly less cleaved, they are coarsely crystalline hornblende schists, with no traces of their original structure visible under the microscope. Kemnants of the porphyritic feldspars some- times still appear as white spots scattered through the dark schist, but their original form is lost. These remarks apply to the New River exposures, the only ones examined by the writer. A modification of them might be necessary on study of other areas of Kingston rocks which show certainly a greater variation in the amount of metamor- phism than is seen at New River. COMPARISONS. In their original character and degree of preservation the New Brunswick effusives may best be compared with those of South Mountain. The volcanics of the Boston Basin, as far as the writer has seen them, seem to be more dense and massive, less shattered and epidotized and more crystalline than ours. In field characters there is a considerable resemblance to the volcanic series along the Maine coast, at Eastport and Mount Desert; but I have seen no petrographic descriptions of these. The rocks of the Coldbrook group seem to be much less sheared than almost all of the South Mountain rocks, to which our Coastal volcanics show a closer resemblance in this respect. The Coldbrook felsites are also of finer grain, their recrystalli- zation not haying proceeded quite as far. The characteristic structures of volcanic rocks, as has already been detailed, they possess in great perfection, the only structure of which I have not seen satisfactory examples being chain spherulites. It is worthy of note that all these ‘ancient volcanic rocks,” as Dr. Williams happily termed them, lie unconformably under- TRANSACTIONS N. Y, ACAD. Scr., Vol. XIV., Sig. 14, June 18, 1895. 210 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [apr. 15, neath Paleozoic strata. Whether they are considered as the lowest member of the Palzeozoic series or the uppermost one of the pre-Cambrian rocks would seem to depend chiefly on what may be taken as the base of the Paleozoic. In New Brunswick it is rather more than elsewhere convenient to consider them as at all events pre-Cambrian, and to take the very persistent coarse grey sandstone at the base of the St. John group as the dividing line. This would leave both the volcanic series and the Etcheminian among the pre-Cambrian rocks. Nevertheless their age is probably not greatly different from the so-called Cambrian effusives lying southwest of them. THE DYKES. . In all the rocks referred to the “ Laurentian,” we find a great abundance of dykes. In the later rocks they are few in nnm- ber. In the volcanic series they are, naturally, not easy to re- cognize; a number of supposed sills are known, but of small dykes crossing the bedding of the rocks very few. The Etche- minian contains one certain dyke, and probably others. In the St. John Group one dyke is reported from near the city, but I have not seen specimens of it. Though none have been met in the Devonian slates, a few occur in the Sub-carboniferous.* The vast majority of the dykes in Laurentian rocks, as well as the dyke and sill in the Etcheminian, are ordinary diabase, more or less altered and often porphyritic. With these occur several dykes which can be grouped under Prof. Rosenbusch’s term of Diorite-porphyrite, though they border on camptonite. The Sub-Carboniferous dykes, with one or two occurring in older rocks, are augite-porphyrite. Some dyke rocks appearing to be of other types are known, but are all so altered as to be unrec- ognizable. As arule no general trend is to be distinguished in the direc- tion of the diabase dykes. An exception is seen at Pleasant Point, where the granite is seamed with dykes, most of which are perfectly straight and parallel, with a north-west and, south- east direction, parallel to the great cross-fault of the Short Reach. DIORITE-PORPHYRITE. PI. XIV. Figs. 1 and 2. Under this name may be grouped a number of dykes varying a good deal in character, but all distinguished by a groundmass consisting of sharply idiomorphic hornblendes, lath-shaped feld- * These notes apply merely to the neighborhood of St. John. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 211 spars and some interstitial quartz, with phenocrysts chiefly feld- spar, sometimes hornblende, occasionally quartz. They are holocrystalline, rather fine grained, and’ distinguishable macro- scopically from diabases by their paler gray color, granular tex- ture, and often by the short hornblende rods which stand out on weathered surfaces. The texture is mostly uniform, but in two cases is extremely irregular in different parts of the same dyke. They are singularly like the basic segregations in the granite, which latter they cut in several places, and are perhaps to be connected with it as the last member of the intruded series, injected after the rest had solidified. Under the microscope they show numerous well formed crys- tals of hornblende, varying in size according to the width of the dyke, with prismatic faces always well developed, often also with good terminal faces. The prismatic faces are m, usually }, rarely a. The terminal faces are not safely determinable, but apparently r is present, and also a steep pyramid or clino-dome. In the less altered specimens (293, 294, 603, 608) the hornblende is brown, showing a strong pleochroism : a—brownish-yellow. §—brown. c—greenish-brown. The extinction angle is high, not less than 17°, and the colors are scarcely so deep or so red tinted as those of basaltic horn- blende. It appears therefore to be a brown variety of the com- mon kind. Green hornblende sometimes appears as a secondary rim at the edges of the brown crystals, more commonly asa paramorph after them ; all stages of the change can be seen in different crys- tals, the alteration beginning at the edges or in cracks. In either case the orientation of the two varieties is the same, and their extinction identical. In the more altered dykes (90,225,284 and 336), the horn- blende is entirely green, its pleochroism being a—pale brownish yellow, h—green, c—bluish green. The outlines tend to become less distinct with increasing metamorphism. In spec. 284, from a small dyke, there are, instead of the usual corroded feldspar phenocrysts, abundant long rods of green hornblende, from 0.2 to 0.56 mm. diameter, and several millime- —_ 212 TRANSACTIONS OF THE |aPR. 15, ters in length. They are not noticeably corroded. Strictly speaking, this rock is a camptonite, but its real affinities seem to be with the diorite-porphyrites. Spec. 608 also shows por- phyritic hornblendes, brown like those of the groundmass, along with the feldspar phenocrysts. Feldspar phenocrysts are present in all but one of the sec- tions. They are much corroded and kaolinized and surrounded by a rim of clear feldspar, probably secondary, at least later than the greater part of the groundmass. When not too much altered, they can be seen to be a very basic plagioclase with ex- tinctions up to at least 40°, indicating approximately bytownite. Twinning after the Carlsbad and Albite laws is observed, the latter polysynthetic. The crystals are strongly zonal towards the edges, the clear outer rim becoming rapidly more acid till it is an oligoclase with nearly straight extinction. The zonal out- side and decayed core are not always coterminous, the latter being often more or less zonal. There is no evidence that the clear outer rim formed later than the consolidation of the rock ; the decay of the feldspar within may well be due to its different composition. But it certainly formed after the greater part of the groundmass had crystallized out. The feldspar of the groundmass is composed in part of lath- shaped crystals, with the extinction angle of labradorite, zonal at the edges like the phenocrysts, but not corroded, though often decayed at the centre. The rest of the feldspar occurs as zonal rims to the labradorite rods and as irregular grains packed in among them. It is always fresh, and judging from its extinc- tion angles its composition varies from an acid labradorite to oligoclase or even albite. Quartz occurs as a phenocryst in spec. 336 and shows well de- fined crystal outlines, somewhat corroded, not mnch broken up. It occurs in the groundmass of all the dykes, though never in very large amount, and is then of the same age as the clear feld- spar forming the zonal rims and irregnlar grains, that is, the last constituent to crystalize. Magnetite and pyrite occur in small, well formed erystals. Apatite is rare. The hornblende of the concentrates appears to show transition to an ultramarine blue variety, probably a soda- hornblende. Flow structure is very well seen in some of these dykes, as shown in Pl. XIV., fig. 2. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 215 An analysis of the diorite porphyrite, spec. 603, gave the fol- lowing results : Si O, 48.98 EOF 0.56 ENS Oy 17.76 Fe, O; 2.14 Fe O 6.52 Ca O 8.36 Mg O 2.09 Na, O 6.77 K,0 2.08 Fixed CO, 0.82 Loss on ignition 4.50 100.58 I am not aware that this rock has been reported before from North America. DIABASE. It seems very likely that this group of dykes is connected with the great surface flows underlying the Cambrian slates, and of “ Huronian” age. There is a great variety in their character, the majority being normal diabase, but many having the feld- spar in two or three generations, and some showing porphyritic augites. The normal diabase has a colorless or almost colorless augite, well twinned feldspar rods and magnetite in small. irregular grains. It is usually considerably altered, the augite being either uralitized or chloritized. In about half the dykes green hornblende, uralitic or compact, has entirely replaced the au- gite, still retaining the outward form of the original mineral. Some of the diabases are quite porphyritic, the plagioclase phenocrysts being short and stout, the groundmass containing small twinned rods and sometimes apparently a third genera- tion. These appear to be more feldspathic than the rest. Contact action has not been noticed except on the limestones. These are bleached by even small dykes for about 3 or 4 mm. from the edge; and in the case of a fifteen foot dyke near King’s Mill, Fairville (spec. 63), there is a development within a few millimetres of the edge, of epidote, titanite and pale green hornblende of tremolitic habit— and ¢ very pale green, a color- less. These constituents entirely replace the lime just along the contact. The diabase itself has the usual contact character. A single dyke (7) in the lower Coastal rocks west of the Cold- brook Marsh shows a departure from the ordinary type enough to merit special notice. It is rather coarse-grained, the mag- 214 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 15, netite in unusually large grains with a tendency towards skele- tal forms. The augite is quite strongly colored, and there is a not unimportant amount of free quartz (See Pl. XV., Fig. 2). The microscopic description is as follows : Augite nearly or quite as abundandant as the plagioclase, violet-brown, slightly but distinctly pleochroic, mostly moulding the feldspar, occasionally idiomorphice. Plagioclase in large, rather short lath-shaped crystals, idio- morphic with respect to the augite, water-clear, coarsely twinned. Extinctions are about those of labradorite. Magnetite is in unusually large grains, mostly of the peculiar skeletal forms which are sometimes referred to titaniferous iron ;* idiomorphic with respect to the feldspar and most, if not all of the augite, but with edges and angles frequently rounded. Apatite in long slender needles varying from .05 mm. in di- ameter down to indeterminable minuteness; included in all other constituents, though rarely in the magnetite. Quartz in allotriomorphic grains, moulding the feldspar and augite, forms a not unimportant constituent of the rock. It would seem to be original, judging from the unusual freshness of the rock, the size and uniformity of the quartz-grains, and the presence of apatite needles in them as abundantly as in the feldspar. An analysis of this diabase gave the following results : Si O, 46.61 AEF, 0.55 Al, O, 15.34 Fe, O, 8.40 Fe O 8.14 Mn O 0.39 Ca O : 9.27 MgO 5.27 Na, O 3.04 K,0O 1.41 Loss on ignition 1.41 99.83 The presence of free quartz in so basic a rock is unusual The large size of the magnetite crystals, however, probably in- dicates that the early stages of cooling were slow, giving time for the basic constituents to crystallize out’ more completely than usual, leaving at the end a more acid residue, which was able to slightly corrode the first formed crystais of magnetite, and produced some free quartz on crystallization. The same phenomenon is seen in the diorite-porphyrite. * The analysis, however, fails to show any considerable amount of titanic acid. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 215 A UGITE—PORPHYRITE. The dykes in Sub-carboniferous sandstone at Poverty Hall Point appear to be of this rock. The phenocrysts are chiefly augite, the larger ones being entirely, the smaller ones frequently chloritized. They present the usual short stout crystals charac- teristic of augite, and are quite abundant. Augite occurs also in the groundmass, but is mostly destroyed. JMagnetite is abundant in small crystals. Olivine phenocrysts occur rarely. The plagioclase is confined to the groundmass and is in small lath shaped crystals. A micaceous mineral occurring in small plates in the groundmass is perhaps an altered biotite, and is quite abundant. . With these Carboniferous dykes may be placed from litholog- ical resemblance spec. 148, a dyke in the volcanic series at Lily Lake, known as labradorite-porphyrite. It contains large phen- ocrysts of completely altered feldspar. Spec. 251 is perhaps also related, showing augite and occasional feldspar phenocrysts and a much altered groundmass which contains a great abund- ance of plates of altered biotite (?) in a feldspathic base now apparently recrystallized and granular. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE LAURENTIAN ROCKS. Some further notes may be made as to the Laurentian areas in a few places otside of the district studied last year ; though no general examination was made of them. A more massive gneiss than has yet been noticed occurs be- yond Sutton Station, on the Canadian Pacific Railway; it is strongly feldspathic, banded, and contains a bed of limestone. The intrusive granites occur both east and west of the mapped district. To the southwest are also large masses of granite of a different type, non-porphyritic, much altered, and perhaps older than the Indiantown granite. At Musquash the contact is ex- posed between it and the Devono-Silurian limestone. The gran- ite is here clearly seen to be the older rock. The gabbro (olivine-norite) hill north of Dolin’s Lake presents less variation in feldspar contents than the small Indiantown exposure. Its grain varies greatly, crystals being sometimes 2’ across, sometimes finely granular and almost ophitic (Pl. XV., Fig. 1), as in spec. 474 “This section fails to show olivine; it is made up of colorless. augite, weakly pleochroic hypersthene, biotite, and basic plagioclase, the latter giving a maximum extine- tion of about 36°, and occurring in more or less lath-shaped crystals, which however do not distinctly appear to be older than the bisilicates, and are certainly in part younger. The biotite is later than much of the feldspar. Magnetite and apatite occur 216 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [aPR. 15, seatteringly. This phase of the norite appears to occur as a heavy dyke or intrusive knob in the main mass. The relations of the norite to the surrounding rocks could not be determined. It is cut by three sets of dykes. 1. Eurite and granite-veins, probably connected with the granite. 2. Diabase. 3. Augite-porphyrite, older than the diabase, and very much decayed. OTHER VoLtcAntc Rocks IN NEW BRUNSWICK. The foregoing article deais with but a small part of the vol- canic rocks of New Brunswick. Besides the extension of the Coldbrook and Kingston groups to the northeast and south- west, and other detached areas lying further inland, there is a great body of pre-Cambrian rocks, chiefly volcanic, in the northern part of the Province, forming a considerable part of the broken and unsettled country about the headwaters of the Tobique, Nepisiquit and Northwest Miramichi rivers. In seve- ral of the later formations, also, great quantities of volcanic material occur, notably in the Silurian of Passamaquoddy Bay, at the base of the Devonian around the shores of Baie Chaleur, in the Sub-carboniferous at the Blue Mountains near the To- bique River, around the head of Grand Lake and elsewhere, and in the Triassic at Quaco and Grand Manan Island. No petrographic study of any of these rocks has yet been made, and they afford a fruitful field for future investigation. The great areas of De- vonian granites extending across the centre of the Province from the southwest nearly to the northeast boundary would also well repay study, especially with regard to their well marked contact phenomena. SUMMARY. The Huronian in Southern New Brunswick is in large part made up of surface volcanic rocks. The lower part or Cold- brook group is almost exclusively voleanic; the upper part or Etcheminian is clastic, while the intermediate Coastal contains both volcanic and sedimentary members. The effusive rocks include lavas, breccias and tufts, and with them may be placed a holocrystalline soda-granite which is probably either an in- trusion or a very thick surface flow. The rock types represented may be conveniently divided into acid and basic, the intermediate varieties being little developed. The acid rocks are more abundant. They are chiefly felsite-por- phyry and show all the characteristic structures of surface 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 217 flows. Vesicles, flow-lines and flow-breccia are very common, and the scattered phenocrysts are often broken and displaced. Spherulitic and. perlitic structures, trichites and skeleton crys- tals*are sometimes excellently preserved. The basic rocks are chiefly diabase, and are in part as late as the Etcheminian. Breccias and tuffs are very abundant. The alteration is not ex- cessive except in the tuffs, many of which are now unrecogniz- able. The massive rocks are completely devitrified but other- wise not much changed; schistose cleavage is marked in the more highly metamorphic areas, but is generally absent. The soda-granite is a quartz-anorthoclase rock with augite and hornblende as the dark silicates. It shows a very strong granophyric structure in the central part, but is finer grained and somewhat porphyritic towards the edges. The dyke rocks are all basic and predominantly diabase ; a number belong to the rare type of diorite-porphyrite. The latter is a panidiomorphic rock with feldspar, brown hornblende and subordinate quartz. The age of the dykes is probably pre- Cambrian,* excepting a few of different type from the rest. In concluding, I wish to express my acknowledgments to Prof. J. F. Kemp, for his assistance and advice in carrying out this study. I am also much indebted to my father, Mr. Go Matthew, especially as regards the details of local geology. GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT, Columbia College, April, 1895. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. PLATE XII. Fic. 1. Spherulitie structure in red felsite-porphyry (apobsidian) from the Hammond River below Upham, N. B. This section shows under higher magnification well preserved trichites throughout both the spherulitic. and non- spher ulitic parts of the rock (See. Fig. 1, p 199). Spec. 664. Magnified 37 diameters. Fig. 2. Red felsite-porphyry (dirachy te), showing feldspar in three genera- tions ; large phenocrysts, small rod- like crystals and small grains not well bounded. ‘The glassy material has been changed to micro-felsite. The only other minerals are magnetite and second- ary limonite replacing in part one of the orthoclase phenocrysts. Ree Spec. 575. >< 42 diam. PLATE XIII. Z Fig. 1. Perlitie structure in red felsite-porphyry (apobsidian ) from Hammond River below Upham. The stippled part is microfelsite, which shows a flow-brecciated structure, the horizontal shading repre- * And hence any rocks that they cut would be still earlier. They are very abundant in the intrusive granites near the city, and chiefly on this account the age of the gran- ite was provisionally placed as pre-Cambrian. It seems well to make this point clear, as it has been mis-stated in a recent abstract of the article describing the granites. 218 FIG. Fig. FIG. FIG. Fic. Fia. FIG. FIG. WS) () ww TRANSACTIONS OF THE [APR. 15, sents secondary quartz and feldspar. The perlitic cracks are in fact preserved in a brightly polarizing substance, but this was not easy to represent in the drawing. >< 67 diam. . Skeleton erystals of magnetite in black felsite porphyry (petrosilex) from Hanford Brook. Spec. 570. > 67 diam. PLATE XIV. . Diorite-porphyrite, coarse grained. The hornblende is represented by heavy shading; the feldspar is lightly shaded. An attempt is also made to represent the zonal structure and decayed cores of the phenocrysts. The quartz is unshaded and the magnetite is dead black. Spec. 608. > 37 diam. . Diorite-porphyrite, fine-grained. The shading is the same as in Fig. 1; it shows in addition a well marked flow-structure, and quartz as phenocryst; the quartz in the groundmass is not represented, nor are the feldspar individuals distinguished. >< 30 diam. PLATE XY. . Fine-grained Norite. A phase of the olivine-gabbro at Dolin’s Lake. Biotite is represented by heavy parallel lines, plagioclase by light ones ; augite and hypersthene by irregular cracks, the hypers- thene sometimes showing schillerization with innumerable mi- nute parallel rods of magnetite. Spec. 473. > 77 diam. . Quartz-bearing diabase from west of the Coldbrook Marsh. The feld- spar is shaded with parallel lines, the augite by irregular ones, the magnetite being black and the quartz unshaded. The abundant apatite needles are too small to be shown in the figure. Spec. 304. X< 20 diam. PLATE XVI. Soda-granite, from Titus’ Mill. The feldspar is stippled, the fine twinning of the anorthoclase, being represented where visible by parallel lines. Some attempt is made to show the comparative alteration of the feldspar by the heaviness of the stippling. Horn- ‘ blende is represented by diagonally crossing parallel lines. Quartz is unshaded and magnetite is dead black. Spec. 661. > 18 diam. Soda-granite fine grained and porphyritic. From the Hammond River below Upham. Shading as in the last figure, but augite is represented by irregular lines. Spec. 666. > 37 diam. PLATE XVII. Granophyric structure in soda-granite from near Hardingville. The feldspar is represented by parallel horizontal lines; the quartz is unshaded; the hornblende is represented by diagonally crossing lines, zircon by irregular heavy cracks, and chlorite by arrow points. In the upper left hand quadrant the quartz is mostly in minute trigonal prisms variously shown by different sections. In the upper right hand quadrant the quartz is regular and minute at the centre, but becomes coarse and irregular outside. In the lower half the quartz is seen radiating out from a crystal of feld- spar, becoming coarser and more irregular as it continues its growth. The feldspar between these quartz growths is in part optically continuous with the central crystal. From Spec. 656. < 80 diam. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 219 STATED MEETING. April 22d, 1895. The Academy met with Vice-president Stevenson in the chair, twenty persons present. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The following persons were nominated for resident member- ship: R. A. Anthony, E. N. Dickerson and Henry Holt, and they were referred to the Council in the regular course. Professor Martin moved that a committee be appointed to pre- pare a memorial minute regarding the recent death of Professor J. D. Dana, Honorary Member. The motion was carried and _ Messrs. Martin, Stevenson and Kemp were appointed. The Section of Geology and Mineralogy then organized, and after a few introductory remarks by the Secretary, the follow- ing papers were presented : W. D. Matthew, Sketch of the Igneous intrusions of New Brunswick, Nova Scotia and Newfoundland. T. G. White, Brief Outline of the Igneous Rocks along the Sea-coast of Maine and Massachusetts. J. F. Kemp, Sketch of the Igneous Rocks in the Province of Quebec, and the States of New York, Vermont, New Jersey, Pennsylvania and to the South. The papers were designed to emphasize the igneons phe- nomena, especially of Paleozoic and later date and to show their frequency and importance along the Atlantic States and Provinces. In discussion, Dr. E. O. Hovey reviewed the diabases and aud granites of Connecticut, and the chairman mentioned his discovery of several boulders of feldspar-porphyry in a Che- mung conglomerate of Fayette county, Penn., which indicated the presence of an undiscovered dike in western Pennsylvania. The Academy then adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Secretary. 220 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAY 6, STtaTeD MEETING. April 29th, 1895. The Academy met with President Rees in the chair, twenty persons present. The Secretary presented the following nominations for resi- dent membership: James B. Ford, 507 Fifth Avenue; Chester W. Chapin, 34 West 57th Street; Rev. E. A. Hoffman, D. D., 1 Chelsea Square; C. H. Coster, 27 West 19th Street; Charles H. Senff, Whitestone, N. Y. The nominations were referred to the Council. The Academy then listened to the Sixth Public Lecture of the Course for 1894-95, by Professor J. K. Rees, on Variations of Latitude. Forty persons were present. . J F. Kemp, Recerding Secretary. STaTeD MEETING. May 6th, 1895. President Rees in the chair; 18 members and guests present. The following candidates having been nominated, and approved by the Council, were elected resident members of the Academy: R. A. ANTHONY. Rev. E. A. Horrman, D. D. CuHestER W. CHAPIN. Henry Ho tr. C. H. Coster. HerscHeELi C. PARKER. E. N. DICKERSON. Cuas. H. SENFF. H. DrErorEest EARLE. FrRANcts LYNDE STETSON. JAMES B. Forp. HERBERT T. WADE. The Section of Astronomy and Physics then organized with Professor R. 8. Woodward in the chair. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 221 There being no other business, after the minutes were read and approved, the Section listened to the paper of Dr. M. A. Veeder, of Lyons, N. Y., upon “ Results of Observations of the Aurora and related Conditions.” A very large and valuable amount of data upon the Aurora, sun- spots, magnetic storms and electric storms was set forth, showing very beautifully certain periodic recurrences, as well as certain interesting facts as to local distribution and time distribution, e. g.; Aurora period, 27 days, 6 hours and 35 minutes, same as that of sun-spots and magnetic storms. Aurora and magnetic disturb- ance are simultaneous with the appearance of disturbances on the eastern limit of the sun. More Auroras occur near the equinoxes than the solstices. Thunderstorm activity may replace Auroral activity. Pennsylvania is predisposed in favor of,and Michigan against Aurora. One maximum is at 10 p. m., and a secondary maximum at 2a. m., with a change in the sign of the disturbance at ‘midnight. The author suggested possible explanations of these phenomena. The paper was discussed by Professors Rees, Pupin and Hallock. Professor W. Hallock then told how in 1890 Dr. Hillebrand and himself undoubtedly had argon and helium in the gas given off by cleveite. They negatively identified them as nitrogen, although dissatisfied with the results. Press of official work prevented the desired complete examination of the gas at that time. At ten o’clock the Academy adjourned. Wma. HALtock. Secretary of Seciton. STATED MEETING. May 13th, 1895. The meeting was called to order at 8:15, Professor Britton in the chair. Eighteen persons present. In the absence of Dr. Bashford Dean, Secretary of the Section, 222 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 13, the reading of the minutes of the preceding meeting was omitted, and C. C. Trowbridge was appointed by the Chair to fill the office of Secretary pro tem. The Section of Biology at once organized. There being no business to be transacted, the Section listened to the first paper of the evening, “ The Cervical Plexus of the Cynomorphus A pes,’” by Dr. G. 8. Huntington, which had been deferred from the meet- ing of March 11. Remarks followed by Professors H. F. Osborn and, E. D. Wilson. Professor Britton asked to be excused, and appointed Professor Wilson to act as Chairman. Professor Osborn delivered his paper on ‘ The Relations of the Fauna of the Uinta Basin,” after which the Academy lis- -tened to the following : OBSERVATIONS ON THE YOLK-NUCLEUS IN THE EGGS OF LUMBRICUS. Gary N. CALKINS. In 1845 v. Wittich described a peculiar body lying in the cell plasm of the immature spider-egg (Lycosa, Tegenaria and Thomisus), and to this body Carus in 1850 gave the name of “ Dotterkern,” or yolk-nucleus. In 1864 the origin and appear- ance of the yolk-nucleus was carefully studied by Balbiani, and this led Milne-Edward in 1867 to give it the name of “ Vesicule de Balbiani.” Later observers have reported the presence of a yolk-nucleus in the eggs of many different classes of animals be- sides the spiders. It has been observed in the eggs of myrio- pods, birds, amphibians, fishes, lizards, molluscs, elasmobranchs, mammals, crustacea, echinoderms, bees and other insects, and finally in some of the worms [Trematodes]. The yolk-nucleus appears, therefore, to be a structure of general occurrence in the early stages of odgenesis. Many other names have been given to the yolk-nucleus. In addition to ‘ Vesicule de Balbiani” of Milne-Edward, it has been called “ Nebenkern,” “ archoplasm,” “ accessory nucleus,” and ‘ Dotterkonkrement.” None of these, however, improve upon the original name Dotterkern which, after 45 years, is still in use. A more explanatory name might be given to the “yolk- nucleus,” for it is not a nucleus, but on account of the priority * and of the significance which it has acquired, the term given by Carus is here retained. m 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 223. Nearly all observers agree as to the appearance and location of the yolk-nucleus in the egg. It consists of a heap of gran- ules of greater or less size lying, at some period of odgenesis, near the germinal vesicle, but which may become disseminated throughout the egg. A central corpuscle about which the granules are arranged in concentric rings has been observed in some cases (Siebold (’48), Balbiani (793), Henneguy (’93), but in most forms the yolk-nucleus is described as a mere aggregation of granules. Its origin has received much attention, but is still in doubt, some observers asserting that it arises from the nu- cleus and passes into the cytoplasm, while others maintain that it originates in the cytoplasm, and in some cases may even mi- grate into the nucleus. The object of the present preliminary notice is to describe the origin and changes of the yolk-nucleus as observed in the de- veloping eggs of the earthworm, Lumbricus terrestris. In or- der to bring these observations into relation with those of pre- vious investigators it is necessary to examine more carefully the various contradictory views as to the origin and fate of this interesting body. The works of various observers may be divided into two classes according as the yolk-nucleus is conceived to be of cytoplasmic or nuclear origin. 1. Cytoplasmic origin of the yolk-nucleus. Lubbock (’61) regarded the yolk-nucleus as a mere thickening of the plasm forming the vitellus, and Balbiani (’66) regarded the yolk-nucleus in spiders as arising by budding from the epi- thelial tissue of the ovary. This view, however, he subse- quently changed. Sabatier (’83) asserted, also in the spider, that the yolk-nucleus is formed in the cytoplasm in the neighborhood of the germinal vesicle, that it wanders to the periphery and there disintegrates. Stuhlmann (’86) re- garded it as arising in insects from concretions close to the egg periphery and as not identical with the “ maturation balls,” which originate at the same time from the nucleus. Holl (’90) asserted that in the chick it arises as a mass of granules near the germinal vesicle, to which it may send out prolongations. Monticelli (’92) claimed that in the case of Trematodes there is no connection between germinal vesicle and yolk-nucleus and that the latter arises as a protoplasmic differ- entiation of the cytoplasm. Jordan (793) came to a similar con- elusion in regard to the yolk-nucleus of the newt. 2. Nuclear origin of the yolk-nucleus. The extrusion of nuclear elements has been repeatedly de- scribed and by so many authors that it cannot in all cases. 224 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 13, be regarded as due to faulty preparations, although this ap- pears probable in some instances. Fol (’717) was the first to note the throwing out of nuclear parts in the eggs of as- cidians, observations which he confirmed in ’83 and ’84 on the eggs of other forms. According to his view, the nucleus gives rise to buds each of which contains a portion of the chro- matin network. Balfour (’78) indicated in the eggs of mam- mals and elasmobranchs, a mass of granules which he believed were detached parts of the nucleolus. Shifer (’80) in the fowl’s egg observed that the yolk-nucleus was connected with the ger- minal vesicle by numerous fine striations. Balbiani (783) claimed that in the Geophilidv it originates by direct transposi- tion of parts of the nucleolus of the germinal vesicle. Will (784) claimed that in amphibians the entire nucleolus is cast out into the cytoplasm. Blochmann (’84) asserted that in hymen- optera the germinal vesicle buds, each bud containing some of the chromatin network. Scharff (’88) made a similar observa- tion on fish eggs. Leydig (’88) saw the nucleolus in triton become amoeboid and wander out into the cytoplasm where it finally broke up into granules around the periphery of the yolk. Van Bambeke (’93) asserted that in the eggs of Scorpena the chromatin rods, as such, wander out into the cytoplasm although they were seen to undergo no change while there. Finally Henneguy (93) and Balbiani (795) found that in various eggs the yolk-nucleus originates from the nucleolus. It is evident from the foregoing review that not oniy are there contradictions in regard to the nuclear or cytoplasmic origin of the yolk nucleus, but also that there are various opinions among those claiming nuclear origin. Fol (’84), Blochman (784), Scharff (788), and Van Bambeke (793) asserted that it is a portion or portions of the chromatin network, while Balbiani (’83 and 93), Will (84), Leydig (’88), ard Henneguy (’93) main- tained that it is a portion or the whole of the germinal spot or nucleolus. The question of the yolk-nucleus origin stands, therefore, in rather an unsatisfactory position. The ovary of Lumbricus is small and therefore quite advan- tageous for the study of the yolk-nucleus, it being possible to eet in one section all of the stages of odgenesis, “from the epi- thelial cells at the base of the ovary to the nearly ripe eggs at the tip. The earliest egg cells (o6gonia) have no indication of a yolk- nucleus. They are small and contain large nuclei, the chroma- tin being in various stages preparatory to karyokinesis (fig 1.) In every ovary, not far distant from the base, there is a more or less complete zone composed of cells in the spirem stage of ———E a 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 225 karyokinesis and with occasional spindle figures. Above this zone one never sees the yolk-nucleus, below it the yolk-nucleus can be found in all the stages of its development and disappear- ance. It first appears as a heap of closely aggregated granules at one part of the nucleus and so closely applied to the nuclear Fig. 1. Odgonium in the spirem stage. Fig. 2. Odeyte showing origin of the yolk-nucleus from the chromatin network. Fig. 3. Later stage to show position of the yolk-nucleus, fibrous prolonga- tions, and the beginning of disintegration. Fig. 4. Later stage of disintegration. Fig. 5. Nearly ripe egg, showing yolk plates, and disintegrated chromatin within the germinal vesicle. All camera drawings from sections. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. Sc, Vol. XIV., Sig. 15, June 13, 1895. 226 _ TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 13, membrane that the latter seems broken at this point. In many cases the granules lie partly without (fig. 2). In slightly older eggs the mass of granules—the yolk nucleus—is much enlarged but still lies close to the nucleus. At this stage many fibrous but granular processes can be seen extending out into the cyto- plasm (figs. 2 and 3), while aggregates of the granules begin to break off from the main mass (fig. 3). This marks the disin- tegration of the yolk-nucleus. In older eggs the yolk-nucleus moves away from the nucleus, the disintegration continues, and the egg then contains a great number of smaller granular masses each with several fibre-like prolongations. At this stage the nucleus begins to enlarge and to change into the germinal vesi- cle. Next the disintegrated masses lose their granular structure and become large and homogeneous, forming the yolk plates of the egg (fig. 5). In all of these latter stages the nucleolus lies intact within the germinal vesicle (figs. 4 and 5). The position of the yolk-nucleus on and near the nuclear membrane favors the view that it is of nuclear rather than of cytoplasmic origin; and the lack of a membrane at this portion of the nucleus adds strong evidence in favor of such an origin. A critical examination of the chromatin network inside of the nucleus leaves no doubt that such is the case. The yolk nucleus is in direct connection with the chromatin, not at one point only, as Van Bambeke pictures for Scorpena, but at many points (fig. 2). In some cases one half or more of the yolk-nucleus lies inside of the nuclear membrane, while great strands of chroma- tin stretch from it to the opposite side of the nucleus. In other cases only two such strands will be seen, but in all cases there is direct connection between the granular mass outside and the chromatin mass inside. As the yolk nucleus moves away from the nucleus all connec- tions are broken between it and the chromatin. It appears as an independent body, while the nucleus regains its intact membrane and then begins its metamorphosis into the germinal vesicle. The yolk-nucleus does not again come in contact with the nucleus. It appears, therefore, that in Lumbricus the yolk-nucleus ts not only of nuclear origin, but is derived from the chromatin, the nu- cleolus of the germinal vesicle taking no part in its formation. It does not appear thus far, however, whether the yolk nucleus is indirectly derived from the chromatin as a product of metabolic activity or whether it is directly derived by bodily disintegration of the chromatin. This question cannot be set- tled by examining the position of the yolk-nucleus. It is in direct communication with the chromatin network, it is true 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 227 but a secretion from the chromatin might be similarly placed. In the other cases cited where the yolk-nucleus originates from the chromatin network there seems to be no doubt about its be- ing truechromatin. Fol (’84) Blochmann (’84) and Scharff (’88), for example,asserted that portions of the nucleus containing parts of the chromatin network are budded off and that these parts become the yolk-nuclei. Van Bambeke (’93) claimed that the chromatin threads pass unbroken through pores in the nuclear ° membrane, although he is not satisfied that the eliminated part is a true yolk-nucleus. His figures leave little doubt on the subject, however, for the extra-nuclear chromatin is pictured as breaking up into granules which become ranged around the nu- cleus and in the cytoplasm of the egg ina manner similar to that so often described for a yolk-nucleus. The most satisfactory answer to this question is afforded by the micro-chemical color reactions of the yolk-nucleus and the chromatin. As is well known, chromatin contains a large per- centage of nucleic acid and has a marked affinity for basic stains. Cytoplasm, on the other hand, contains a great percent- age of albumen with little or no nucleic acid and has an equally marked affinity for acid stains. If, therefore, the yolk-nucleus stains the same as does the chromatin, it may be inferred that it is composed of a similar substance. In Van Bambeke’s fig- ures of safranin preparations the mass of granules and the chro- matin are the same color, and as he asserts and pictures the granules as coming directly from the nuclear network one can only conclude that they also are chromatin. The micro-chemical reactions on the egg cells of Lumbricus, as shown by differential staining, reveal two facts: first, the mass of granules around the nuclear membrane stains the same as the chromatin; second, the disintegrated parts of the yolk- nucleus in the older eggs, as shown in figure 5, stain the same as the cytoplasm. These differences can be seen in the same sec- tion, so that the criticism of different treatment cannot be sus- tained. The combination stain of Heidenhain’s hematoxylin and orange makes the chromatin and the yolk-nucleus a blue-black, while the nucleolus of the germinal vesicle and the cytoplasm are orange. The Biondi-Ehrlich mixture stains the young yolk- nucleus a bright green, while in the older eggs the disintegrated yolk-nucleus is stained a bright red. The principal constituents of the Biondi-Ehrlich mixture are methyl green (basic) and acid fuchsin (acid). To remove all doubt in regard to the chemical action of these colors a solution was made containing basic fuchsin and acid green (Lichtgrtin). The result was a reversal 228 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 13, of the colors—the chromatin and yolk-nucleus were stained red and the cytoplasm green. Other differential stains were used and all gave similar results. After Flemming’s triple stain the yolk nucleus and chromatin were purple; the cytoplasm and nucleolus had an orange tint. After borax carmine and Lyons blue the yolk-nucleus and chromatin had the bright red stain of the carmme. - The only conclusion that can be drawn from these experi- ments and from the morphological evidence of the origin of the yolk-nucleus is that this element of the egg cell of Lumbricus originates as chromatin. The micro-chemical reactions, how- ever, show that it does not retain the chemical composition of the chromatin. As the egg grows and as the yolk-nucleus dis- integrates, the several parts gradually lose their affinity for the nuclear stains, and gradually acquire that of the cytoplasm. In some stages the parts of the yolk-nucleus have no definite stain, while in one or two cases some portions of the disinte- grated body were stained with the cytoplasmic colors, while others in the same egg were colored like the nucleus. One other observation remains to be noted. As the eggs de- velop into the germinal vesicle stage, the nucleus gradually be- comes filled with minute particles which stain like the cyto- plasm, while the chromatin is aggregated into rather a dense mass at one part of the germinal vesicle (fig. 5). These parti- cles within the nucleus acquire the cytoplasmic stain at the same stage as the parts of the yolk-nucleus and it is probable that they are of the same substance. To conclude with a few words regarding the fate of the yolk- nucleus. Thompson (’59), Waldeyer (’70) and Legge (’87) thought that it disappeared completely before the egg is ripe. Scifer (80) asserted that it entered into the formation of the folliclecells. Jatta (’82), that it became evenly distributed over the egg. lijimi, that it served as nutritive material (yolk). Korschelt (’89) maintained that it breaks up into small balls, which wander into the germinal vesicle. Jordan (’93) thought that it serves as food substance. Lavdowsky (’94) held that the yolk plates are taken bodily into the nucleus where they form chromatin. In Lumbricus the yolk-nucleus disintegrates, and the parts become homogeneous in appearance, and then en- large to form the great yolk plates. The results of these observations on the yolk-nucleus may finally be thus summarized: The yolk-nucleus is chromatin in the form of a mass of granules; this granular mass disintegrates and the parts form the yolk plates of the egg after undergoing change in their chemical composition. CotumBIA CoLLEGE, May, 1895. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 229 LITERATURE CITED. 1. °64. *Balbiani, E.G. Sur la constitution du germe dans l’ceuf animal avant la fecondation, C. R. Ac. des Sciences, LVIII., 1864. 2. °66. *Balbiani, E.G. Sur la reproduction et l’embryogénie des Pucer- ons, C. R. Ac. d. Sc., 1866. 3. °83. Balbiani, E.G. Sur l’origine des cellules de follicle et du noyau vitellin de l’ceuf chez les Géophiles, Zoo!. Anz., 1883. 4. °93. Balbiani, E.G. Centrosome et ‘‘ Dotterkern.’’ Journ. de V’ Anat. et de la Physiol, 29, 1893. 5. °93. Bambeke, Ch. van. Contributions 4l’histoire de la constitution de Vceuf. II., Elimination d’elements nucléaires dans l’ceuf ovarien de Scorpena scrofa. Bull. d. V Acad. Roy. de Belgique, 1893. 6. °84. *Blochmann, F. Ueber die Metamorphose der Kerne in den Ovar- ieneiern und ueber den Blastoderm bildung bei den Ameisen. Verh. Nat. Med. Vereins Heidelberg III., 1884. 7. °30. Carus, J. V. Ueber die Entwick. der Spinneneies. Zeit. f. Wiss. Zool. II., 1850. 8. °77. Fol, H. Sur la formation des ceufs chez les Ascidiens. Journ. de Microg. I., 1877. 9. °84. Fol, H. Sur’ ceuf et ses envélloppes chez les Twniciers. Recueil. Zool. Suisse. I., 1884. 10. °93. Henneguy. L. F. Le corps vitellin de Balbiani dans l’ceuf des Vértébrés. Jour. del’ Anat. et de la Phys., 29, 1893. 11. °90. *Holl. Ueber die Reifung der Eizelle des Huhns. Sitz. d. K. Acad. d. Wiss. in Wien., XCIX., 1890. 12. °82. Iijima, I. On the Origin and Growth of Eggs and Egg strings in Nephelis with some Observations on the special Asters. @Q. J. Mic. Sc., XXIT., 1882. 13. °$82. *Jatta, G. Sulle forme che assume il nucleo vitellino della Asteria et di aleuni Ragni. Acti Accad. Napoli, LX., 1882. 14. °93. Jordan, E. O. Habits and Development of the Newt. Die- mictylis virescens. Journ. of Morph., 1893. 15. °89. Korschelt. Beitr. z. Morphol. und Physiol. des Zellkerns, 1889. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Anat. u. Ontog. IV., 1891. 16. °94. Lavdowsky. Von der entstehung der Chromatischen und Ach- romatischen Substanzen in den Thierischen und Pflanzlichen Zellen. Anat. Hefte. Merkel & Bonnet’s Anat. und Entwicklungsg. XJII., Heft. Bd. IV. 17. °87. *Legge, F. Seconde contribuzione alla conoszenza dell novo ovarico nel Gallus domesticus. Il. nucleo vitellino. Boll. Acad. Med. Roma. 18. °61. Lubbock, John. Notes on the generative Organs and the forma- tion of the Egg in the Annulosa. Philos. Trans., 1861. NOTE.—References preceded by asterisk (*) are referred to from reviews by Henne- guy (’93) Balbiani (’93) Jordan (’93) Carus (’50) (for vy. Wittich). 230 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [May 138, 19. °67. *Milne-Edwards, H. Rapports sur le progrés récents des sciences zoodlogiques en France, Paris, 1867. 20. °92. Monticelli, F.S. Sul nucleo vitellino dell’ novo dei Trematodi, etc. Bull. d. Soc. dei Natur. in Napoli I., 6, 792. 21. °83. Sabatier, A. Sur le noyau vitellin des Aranéides. C. R. Ac. d. Se. XCVII., 1883. 22. °80. Schiifer. On the structure of the immature ovarian Ovum in the common Fowl] and in the Rabbit. Proc. of the Roy. Soc. 1880, No. 202. 23. °88. Scharff, R. On the Intra-ovarian Egg of some osseous Fishes. Q. J. M.S. XXVIL., 1888. 24. °48. *Siebold. Lehrbuch der Vergleichende Anatomie der Wirbel- losen Thiere. Berlin, 1848. : 25. °86. Stuhlmann, Fr. Die Reifung des Arthropodeneies nach Beobach- tungen an Insekten, Myriapoden und Peripatus. Ber. Nat. Ges. Freiberg i. B. T., 1886. 26. °59. *Thompson, Allen. Article ovum (Zodd’s Cyclopedia V., 1859. ) 27. °40. Waldeyer, W. Eierstock u. Ei. Leipzig, 1870. 28. °S4. Will. Ludw. Ueber die Entstehung des Dotters und der Epithel- zellen bei den Amphibien und Insekten. Zool. Anz. VI., 1884. 29. °45. *Wittich. von. Dissertatis sistens obser. quaed. de Aranearum ex ovo evolutione. Hailis, 1845. 30. °88. Leydig Fr. Beitrage zur Kenntniss des thierischen Eies im unbefruchteten Zustande. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Anat. wu Ontog., III., 1888. The paper was discussed by Professors Osborn and Wilson. The fourth paper followed, entitled ‘““Induced Forms of De- velopment of Ilyannassa,” by H. E. Crampton, and was dis- cussed by Professor Wilson, who had taken part in the investi- gation. The last paper of the evening was read by C. C. Trowbridge, on “Hawk Flights in Connecticut,” illustrated by lantern slides, showing the principal species of the Falconidze found in the flights in Connecticut. The meeting then adjourned at 10:15. C. C. TRowBRIDGE, Secretary pro tem. of the Biological Section. NOTE.—References preceded by asterisk (*) are referred to from reviews by Henne- guy (93) Balbiani (’93) Jordan (’93) Carus (’50) (for v. Wittich). 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 231 THE SIGNIFICANCE OF MUSCULAR VARIATIONS, ILLUSTRATED BY REVERSIONS OF THE ANTI-BRACHIAL FLEXOR GROUP. By Geo. S. HUNTINGTON. Read by Title, Feb. 11, 195. The study of muscular variations, if carried on systematically, embracing observations made on a large number of subjects, cannot fail to reveal certain finer differentions, which, while lost in a mere enumerative record of muscle variations, gain a new and important significance when grouped together and com- pared in an effort to trace the morphological meaning of the variant condition. This becomes most strikingly apparent in the case of certain appendicular muscles, and especially of some muscles of the fore-limb. The extreme modifications which, in vertebrates possessing an anterior extremity, widely different functional requirements have impressed on this portion of the locomotory apparatus, may properly be held responsible for the fact that here variations of the most composite type are to be encountered. ” No.2. Plate XX VII. Especially well marked on left side. 3. 6, Germany, aet. 66. January 11, 1894. Right upper extremity. “3” No. 1. Additional cases. 4. 9, Italy, aet. 30. October 31, 1893. Both upper extremities. A strong fibro-tendinous band arising from the inner part of the capsule of the shoulder passes vertically down to be attached to the septum between the long and short Biceps heads. 5. go, U.S., white, aet. 27. December 31, 1893. Right upper extremity. Slender tendon from inner part of shoulder capsule to outer margin of lesser bicipital head. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 251 Macalister * describes several varieties of additional coracoid heads of the Biceps (catalogue numbers 11-14 incl.). The ac- cessory portion may join the main body of the muscle, or else it may unite with the normal coracoid head, before that portion of the Biceps joins the long head. Additional coracoid origins from the Coraco-acromial ligament and from the insertion tendon of the Pectoralis minor are also mentioned by the same author. 2. CoRACO-EPITROCHLARIS. As in the case of the Gleno-ulnar head certain instances occur in which an additional coracoid head passes to the internal epi- condyle. I have met this arrangement in two forms : a. Coraco-epitrochlear tendon. Cases : 1. $, U.S. white, aet. 47. March, 1894. Plate XXXVII. Right upper extremity. A slender, firm tendon arises from the coracoid process at the inner border of the short bicipital head and superficial to the Coraco-brachialis origin. It passes downward and slightly in- ward obliquely over the brachial artery and the large nerves, receives near the elbow an accession of fibres from the internal intermuscular septum, and is inserted into the internal epicon- dyle. 2. 2, Ireland, aet. 63. November 14, 1894. Right upper extremity : A thin tendinous slip arises from the intermuscular septum betwteen the short head of the Biceps and the Coraco-brachialis, passes downward and inward, over the musculo-cutaneous nerve to the internal epicondyle. The musculo-cutaneous nerve passes entirely below the Cor- aco-brachialis, between this muscle and the short bicipital head, the former receiving its nerve higher up by a separate branch from the outer cord of the brachial plexus. 3. $, U.S. white, aet. 34. February 1, 1894. Left upper extremity : A tendon slip arises from the coracoid process and tendon of origin of the Coraco-brachialis and short bicipital head ; becom- ing free about 2 cm. below the coracoid it passes downward and inward as a distinct tendon to be inserted into the internal epicondyle. 4. 8,U.S. white, aet. 39. December 14, 1893. Left upper extremity : A tendon slip from origin of Coraco-brachialis and short head * Op. cit., p. 80. 252 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [May 13, of Biceps crosses over the brachial vessels and the nerves to the internal epicondyle. The long tendon of the Biceps in this arm is dgunieds BLS. Ireland, aet. 72. January 9th, 1894. Combined with tendinous Gleno-ulnar band in right arm (vide I. 6, Plate XXXVI). b. Coraco-epitrochlear and Gileno-epitrochlear tendon combined. Case : $, U.S., white, aet. 46. November 11, 1893. Plate XXXVIII. Right upper extremity. A coraco-epitrochlear tendon, arising from Coracoid process at point of junction between Coraco-brachialis and short bicipital head, passes down as above described over the brachial vessels and the large nerves, and is joined at about the middle of the arm by a second similar tendon which arises from the outer por- tion of the capsule of the joint, descends beneath Pectoralis major tendon and then crosses obliquely down and in over the short bicipital muscle. The conjoined tendons continue down- ward in the line of the Internal intermuscular Septum and are inserted as a single band into the internal epicondyle. c. M. Coraco-epitrochlearis. Case: $, Germany, aet. 29. January 11, 1894. Plate XXXIX. Left upper extremity. A slender superficial tendon arising from the coracoid process develops a thin fusiform muscle at about the middle of the arm, which passes down to the internal epicondyle, lying upon the brachial vessels and the large nerves. The obvious connection of the Coraco-epitrochlear variations first described with the Coraco-brachialis inferior will be consid- ered in dealing with the relation of the Biceps to that muscle. 3. M. BRACHIO-ULNARIS MEDIALIS. Under this head I have placed the variations which include a third bicipital head, arising from the inner surface of the shaft of the humerus, either from the interval between the Coraco- brachialis and Brachialis anticus, or directly from the latter muscle, or from the insertion of the Coraco-brachialis and con- tinuous with that muscle. It has seemed to me, in examining carefully this frequent vari- ation, that we have to deal here with a Coraco-ulnar head which has lost its girdle attachment and has transferred its origin to the shaft of the humerus, modifying its insertion by joining the remainder of the Biceps muscle. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 253 The relation of this variation to the Brachialis anticus and Coraco-brachialis is obvious and will be referred to below. In the above series I have encountered this third internal head in the following instances : 1. $, England, aet. 73. January 11, 1894. Left upper extremity. Internal bicipital head derived directly from the humerus, ex- ternal to and about 5 cm. above the Coraco-brachialis insertion, between it and the Brachialis anticus, completely free from the latter muscle. The musculo-cutaneous nerve, after piercing the Coraco-bra- chialis, passes between the additional head and the main portion of the Biceps muscle. 2. &, Ireland, aet. 46. January 11, 1894. Third internal bicipital head arising from the outer margin of the Coraco-brachialis insertion, and in close connection with the superior and internal origin of the Brachialis anticus. 3. 3, Ireland, aet. 37. October 17, 1893. Right upper extremity. Third bicipital head arising from inner surface of shaft of hu- merus at the Coraco-brachialis insertion. Separated from the main Biceps muscle by the large muscular branches of the mus- culo-cutaneous nerve, which perforates the Coraco-brachialis. The internal head has further been noted in the following cases : 4. 3, Ireland, aet. 46. January 24, 1894. Right upper extremity. 5. &, Ireland, aet. 62. November 28, 1893. Right upper extremity. 6. ¢, Germany, aet. 28. October 5, 1893. Left upper extremity. Additional head, derived in this instance from the insertion of the Coraco-brachialis, goes mainly into the semilunar fascia. 7. 9, Germany, aet. 84. November 9, 1893. Left upper extremity. 8. 9, U.S., white, aet. 68. November 22, 1893. Right upper extremity. Small third internal head, derived chiefly from the tendon of of the Coraco-brachialis, with which it is continuous. 9. ¢, Germany, aet. 60. December 14, 1893. Right upper extremity. 10. 3g, Bohemia, aet. 30. December 19, 1893. Left upper extremity. : 1]. ¢, Italy, aet. 40. December 14, 1893. Right upper extremity. 254 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAY 13, II. RELATION OF BICEPS TO THE ADJOINING DEEP VENTRO-APPENDIC- ULAR FIBRES OF THE CORACO-BRACHIALIS, AND, III, TO THE DEEP INTRINSIC FLEXOR OF FOREARM, BRACHIALIS ANTICUS. The consideration of the variations, described above as the Humero-uJnar internal head and the Coraco-epitrochlear slips, in- dicate the intimate relation existing between the Biceps and the Brachialis anticus and Coraco-brachialis. Humphry, * in describing the muscles of the Cryptobranch, accentuates the close relation of the Coraco-brachialis longus and Biceps of this animal. He finds that the former muscle divides into two portions, one of which is inserted into the ulnar edge of the humerus; the other, being nearly as large, is partly inserted into the side of the long tendon of the Biceps, while a bundle of its fibres continues over the elbow and is in- serted into the ulna near the joint. Humphry regards this lat- ter portion as the representative of the short or coracoid bicip- ital origin in man. We find in this instance on the one hand the direct union of the Coraco-brachialis with the Biceps, and on the other insertion of part of the muscle into the ulna. Again the Brachialis anticus is in some forms (Pteropus) found to be in direct continuity with the Coraco-humeral, + and in the Scine the Biceps derives two factors from the humerus, which occupy the position of the Brachialis anticus and are so named by Rudinger. Humphry sums the mutual relations of these three muscles up as follows : “They show the Biceps to be an intermediate between the Coraco-humerals and Brachialis anticus, continuous with either or both, and uniting them into one group, extending from the coracoid, along the ulnar and palmar surface a the humerus, to the radius and ulna.” I believe that we may properly regard the variations of the Biceps above referred to in this light. Both the Coraco-epi- trochlear slips and the Internal humeral heads speak for the original unity of a muscular plane extending between coracoid and ulna. The separation of the radius as the rotatory element of the forearm and hand, and the assignment of the corresponding muscular function to the Biceps, have caused the elimination of the ulnar segment of the muscle, leaving the Brachialis anticus as the deep intrinsic flexor connected with the ulna, and reduc- * Op. cit., p. 33. + Humpbry, op. cit., p. 164. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 259d ing the Coraco-brachialis to a deep ventro-appendicular muscle confined in its insertion to the humerus. It is only in the Third Internal humeral head of the Biceps, and in the Coraco-epitrochlear slips, that we still find the evi- dence of the original connection between these muscles, and see the reversion of the Biceps toward its lost ulnar segment. It is only necessary to refer in this connection to the interest- ing account of the structure of the Coraco-brachialis given by Prof. Wood,* and to point out the significance of the occasional Coraco-brachialis longus. Analysis of cases of Quadriceps flexor cubiti and evidences of the ulnar tendency of the Biceps in variations of the insertion. In the above series five examples of a four-headed muscle have been encountered. l. ¢, Ireland, aet. 45. January 9, 1894. Plate XL. Right upper extremity. A third additional head (gleno-ulnar) arises by a flat tendon from the capsule of the shoulder-joint, between the long and coracoid heads. It is separated above from the main muscle by the muscuto-cutaneous nerve, after the latter has perforated the Coraco-brachialis. A fourth additional head (coraco-ulnar) arises from the inner surface of the shaft of fhe humerus, almost directly continuous with the Coraco-brachialis at its insertion, and separated from the Brachialis anticus by a branch to the lat- ter muscle from the musculo-cutaneous nerve. The left upper extremity of the same subject presents the addi- tional internal humeral head from the Coraco-brachial insertion. The case affords an example of the typical composition of the four-headed muscle. The gleno-ulnar head passes to the deep and ulnar surface of the main muscle, which is joined lower down by the coraco-ulnar, the continuity of the latter with the Coraco- brachialis being well marked. The superficial part of the muscle is constituted by the large gleno- and coraco-radial heads. 2. 9, Ireland, aet 40. October 25, 1894. Plate XLI. Both upper extremities present the same ar- rangement. A third anomalous head arises from the glenoid margin and capsule of the shoulder, passes down over the bicipital groove, covering the tendon of the long head, supplied by a branch from the musculo-cutaneous nerve, ‘after the same has perforated the Coraco-brachialis. A fourth additional head arises from the humerus, along the outer margin of the tendinous Coraco-brach- ialis insertion. The main portion of the musculo-cutaneous nerve, after per- * Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, Vol. I., p. 44, 1867. 256 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [May 18, forating the Coraco-brachialis, passes first between the 3d and 4th additional heads, and subsequently turns down to lie be- tween the accessory heads, a short distance above their junction with the tendon of insertion, and the Brachialis anticus. The semilunar fascia is well developed, scattered fibres ex- tending up over the brachial artery as high as the internal epicondyle. This case only differs from the preceding one in the separa- tion of the fourth accessory head from the Coraco-brachialis. 3. g, Germany, aet. 62. November 29, 1894. Plate XLII. Right upper extremity. A combination of an additional gleno-ulnar head with inter- mediate pectoral tendon attachment, and a fourth internal hu- meral head, arising between the Coraco-brachialis and Brachialis anticus. The insertion is peculiar. The radial tendon is formed by the long head (gleno-radial) and by the deep portion of the coracoid and additional internal humeral heads (coraco-radial). The re- maining superficial portion of the regular coracoid and of the internal humeral head (coraco-ulnar) is joined by the entire ad- ditional glenoid muscle (gleno-ulnar) and passes superficially inward into a strong tendinous semilunar fascia which is well separated from the radial tendon. 4. , U. S. white, aet. 63. November 7, 1894. Plate XLIII. Right upper extremity. The gleno-radial and gleno-ulnar heads are well defined at their origin, fusing before meeting the coracoid segment. The 4th head is derived from the outer margin of the regular coracoid head (coraco-radial?), 5 cm. below level of lesser tuberosity, as a slender slip, about 10 cm. long, which joins the inner margin of the glenoid portion, before the latter fuses with the main coracoid muscle. 5. 2, U.S. white, aet. 26. November 28, 1894. Plate XLIV. Left upper extremity. A,third internal humeral head arises from the shaft of the humerus at the Coraco-brachialis insertion and joins the regular coracoid head along its ulnar margin, 2.5 cm. above the level of the elbow. (Coraco-radial and Coraco-ulnar). The fourth head (gleno-ulnar) is derived from the long ten- don, along its outer margin, under cover of the Pectoralis, by a tendon which becomes muscular at the lower border of the pectoral tendon and fuses about the middle of the arm with the external and anterior part of the Brachialis anticus. Macalister * has found a similar slip once. -* Op. cit., p. 83. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 257 The variation is interesting as affording an instance of con- tinuity of the Biceps with the Brachialis anticus, and hence of a direct ulnar destination of some of the bicipital glenoid fibres. Variations of insertion pointing to ulnar attachment of Biceps. 1. g, Assyria, aet. 28. November 15, 1894. Plate XLV. Right upper extremity. A muscular belly, entirely separate from Brachialis anticus, arises from the lower part of the inner margin of the humeral shaft, and passes downwards and outwards, underneath the Bi- ceps, dividing into two portions. The internal division passes to reinforce the semilunar fascia; the external stronger bundle dips into the cubital fossa to the inner side of the radial Biceps tendon, joining it, and giving some fibres to the fascia of the Supinator brevis. The additional muscle in this instance is evi- dently a compound of portions of both Coraco-radial and Coraco- ulnar, whose origin has shifted downwards to the humeral shaft, the proximal portion remaining as the coracoid head of the regular Biceps and the Coraco-brachialis. The compound character of both the external radial tendon of the Biceps and of the semilunar fascia (internal or ulnar tendon ) is well shown by this case. 2. g, Ireland, aet. 57. October 7, 1893. Right upper. Tendon slip from radial biceps insertion into lesser head of Pronator teres. 3. g, Germany, aet. 58. January 23, 1894. Right upper. Tendon slip from radial Biceps tendon into Pronator teres and deep fascia of forearm. Macalister * describes insertions of the Biceps into the coro- noid process, Pronator teres, Coronoid insertion of Brachialis anticus, capsule of elbow and the origin of some of the flexor muscles. While completing this paper a number of additional bicipital variations, bearing out the views expressed relative to the com- position of the muscle, have come under observation. Among them the two following instances illustrate some of the import- ant morphological features of the muscle so well that they are added to this paper. 1. g, Ireland, aet. 67. January 22, 1895. Plate XLVI. Left upper extremity. I, Glenoid Heads. The outer bicipital head (Gleno-radial) is well developed. In: its upper portion the tendon is overlapped by a distinct band, * Op. cit., p. 83. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. S@r., Vol. XIV., Sig. 17, August 29, 1895. 258 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 13, arising from the capsule of the shoulder joint and attached to the deep surface of the Pectoralis major tendon (Capsulo-pec- toral variety of Gleno-ulnar head). About 4 cm. above the elbow joint a slip separates from the inner border and deep sur- face of the main muscle, and, becoming tendinous, passes down- ward and inward to the anterior border of the ulna, just below the coracoid insertion of the Brachialis anticus. (Persistent dis- tal portion ef Gleno-ulnar division). II. Coracoid Heads. A broad muscle, arising with the Coraco-brachialis from the ‘ccoracoid process, divides at the level of the lower Pectoralis margin into: (a) The usual short or coracoid head, which passes down and out and joins the outer head a little above the middle ‘of the arm (Coraco-radial division). (b). An internal muscle, ‘completely free from Coraco-brachialis, which immediately sub- -divides into two equal portions. Of these the posterior and in- ‘ternal muscle descends vertically over the Coraco-brachialis in- sertion, and terminates at the junction of middle and lower one- third of the arm in a strong tendon, which passes down, at first free and subsequently fused with Struther’s ligament, to the in- ternal epicondyle. (Coraco-epitrochlear variety of Gleno-ulnar head. The anterior muscle, lying upon the Brachialis anticus and the internal intermuscular septum, remains completely free from surrounding structures and terminates in a strong tendon which passes over the elbow joint and is inserted into the coronoid process of the ulna, just internal to the Brachialis anticus inser- tion. (Typical Coraco-ulnar head of muscle.) This case is especially important, as it presents not only the “more common proximal vestiges of the obsolete ulnar divisions, but also exhibits perfectly the rare distal or insertion portions, -in their complete form, attached to the ulna. The separation of the Biceps insertion from the ulna and the assignment of the muscle, as a supinator, to the radius, would lead us to expect this disproportion, as regards frequency of oc- currence, between reversions of the complete distal and proxi- mal segments of the lost ulnar division. The distal or inser- tion portion of the ulnar division was the first to disappear at the insertion into the ulna, and consequently reverts in a very much smaller percentage in its complete form than the proxi- mal or origin portion, whose existence has, so to speak, been prolonged by the opportunity of uniting with the radial division. The above instance exhibits these features of the muscle-plan perfectly, and the preparation has been added to the Variation- series of the Morphological Museum of Columbia College. 1895.] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 259 2. The second case, recently observed, which presents points of especial interest in connection with the subject of this paper, exhibits one of the important relations between Biceps and Brachialis anticus, and emphasizes the significance of the semi- lunar fascia, as representing the remains of an ulnar bicipital division which has lost its skeletal attachment, in accordance with the functional specialization of the muscle as the main supinator of the limb. 9, Ireland, aet. 54. March 15, 1895. Plate XLVII. Right upper extremity : This case affords a well-marked example of the original con- nection between Biceps and Brachialis anticus. The origin of the Biceps in this arm is normal,as is the ar- rangement of Coraco-brachialis. A strong muscular bundle separates from Brachialis anticus a short distance below the Coraco brachial insertion. The outer and larger portion of this muscle joins the deep surface of the Biceps and passes with it to the radial insertion. The inner part continues downward and inward, gives off a narrow tendon which passes with the remainder of Brachialis anticus to the coronoid process, and then expands into the semilunar fascia, which is well developed, crossing obliquely over the brachial artery. The additional muscle in this instance is evidently an Internal Brachio-ulnar muscle, which, however, presents not only the usual connection with the radius by means of the bicipital junction, but preserves its original ulnar insertion both by the tendon slip to the coronoid process and by the development of the entire semilunar fascia. The significence of the latter structure, entitling it to be considered as the distal portion of an ulnar bicipital segment which has lost its skeletal attachment, is strongly emphasized by the arrangement of the aberrant muscle in this subject. STATED MEETING. May 20th, 1895. The Academy met with Vice-President Stevenson in the chair ; ten persons present. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The Secretary presented the nomination of Mr. Edward Gould, Dobbs Ferry, for resident membership, and it was referred to the Council. The Secretary read by title the 260 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAY 20, following paper, which was referred to the Publication Com- mittee. T. L. Casey, Coleopterological Notes VI. Prof. D. S. Martin read the following note from Mr. George F. Kunz, on Phosphorescent Diamonds : The luminous properties of gems have been referred to from the earliest times. The phosphorescence of the diamond was treated at some length by Robert Boyle in 1666 and by Du Pay in 1751. Only certain diamonds emit light or phosphoresce on exposure for a time to the rays of the sun, or of electric, cal- cium or other intense light. The various colors of the diamond are evidently due to the presence of hydrocarbons, similar to- those which are artificially made in such endless variety and of all known colors, and which often fluoresce and phosphoresce. After a personal examination of a great number of diamonds, it. appears that only certain ones fluoresce on exposure to the ultra- violet rays of an electric or other strong light, and from the observations made it is very evident that this fluorescence and phosphorescence is a property only of those diamonds that con- tain a certain bluish-white substance, and it is this substance that fluoresces and phosphoresces and not the diamond. This. is, undoubtedly, a hydrocarbon, for, as stated above, this prop- erty of fluorescence and phosphorescence is marked in many hydrocarbons, notably anthracine. I therefore think it would not be inappropriate to give this substance a definite name, and I propose that of Tiffanyite. GEORGE F. Kunz. The following memorial was then presented in -accordance with the resolution of April 22, 1895: The New York Academy of Sciences has learned with pro- found sorrow of the death of Professor James Dwight Dana, of Yale University. For over fifty years Professor Dana has been one of the central figures in American Science, and his loss. leaves a gap that will not soon be filled. Born in 1813, his in- clinations were early manifested for those branches of science 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 261 to which he afterwards devoted his life, and in his early man- hood he began the researches in Geology and Mineralogy that afterwards bore such rich fruit. Geology,and to an even greater degree Mineralogy, were subjects that then especially com- manded the attention of the Lyceum of Natural History, as this Academy was formerly called. The Lyceum early recognized the promise of Professor Dana, and made him a Corresponding Member in 1836, when he was but twenty-three years of age. His third published paper, entitled “A New Mineralogical Nomenclature,” was read before this Society in May, 1836, and was printed in the Annals of that year. Six years later he was elected an Honorary Member in recognition of his System of Mineralogy (1838) and of his four years of labor on the Wilkes Exploring Expedition (1838-42). He became one of the edi- tors of the American Journal of Science in 1846, and for nearly fifty years retained this position. To him in no small degree is to be credited the magazine’s characteristic attitude of just and well-balanced criticism of current work and publications. Our knowledge of the Zodphytes and Crustaceans was vastly in- creased by the published results of his voyages, and his contri- butions to the geology of volcanoes and coral islands were no less important. In 1862 his Manual of Geology appeared and became at once the standard American text-book. It is a source of gratification that he lived to complete its revision, and that the last edition, in vastly improved and augmented form, was brought out by its original author. Of serene and cheerful disposition, Professor Dana aspired to high spiritual as well as intellectual attainments; his personal influence was uniformly thrown on the side of exalted ideals. As teacher and friend he will be mourned by many hundreds of his students. - Be it therefore Resolved, That in the death of Professor James Dwight Dana, American Science has lost one of its most eminent and successful investigators, education a great teacher, and the world a true and just man. 262 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [May 20, Resolved, That this memorial be spread upon the minutes of the Academy and be printed in the Transactions. D. 8S. Martin, J. J. STEVENSON, J. F. Kemp, Committee. Prof. Martin called the attention of the Academy to a recep- tion to be tendered to Prof. Thomas Egleston, by the Mineral- ogical Section of the Brooklyn Institute, May 21st, and invited the members of the Academy to be present. The Geological Section then organized and listened to the following papers, no one of which was intended for publication. J. F. Kemp. The Iron-ore Bodies at Mineville, Essex Co., N. Y., illustrated by mine maps and sections on glass, and by the lantern. : G. vAN InGEN. The Significance of the Recent Studies of Mr. G. F. Matthew, on Cambrian Faunas. The Academy then adjourned. J. F. Kemp, Recording Secretary. TWO NEW CAMBRIAN GRAPTOLITES WITH NOTES ON OTHER SPECIES OF GRAPTOLITIDA OF THAT AGE. By G. F. MatTtuew. ( Read by title, April 8th, 1895. ) In a collection of shale containing Dictyenema flabelliforme made by MY. G. van Ingen, for Columbia College, New York, last summer, were two new graptolites which he left with me for examination. These were studied in connection with collections from the same locality made for me by Messrs. W. D. Matthew and Geoffrey Stead, and some additional points of interest noted in reference to other species. » 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 263 It is not many years since we were accustomed to look upon the Quebec Group as containing the first true graptolites, mean- ing thereby the Rhabdopora, but the discoveries of the last ten or fifteen years make it necessary to modify this conclusion. Not to mention the species represented by obscure or imper- fectly preserved remains of the Lower Cambrian (Olenellus and Paradoxides Zones), there is obviously at a higher horizon in the Cambrian System a fair representation of the Rhabdopora, though not the wealth of forms which meet us at the threshold of the Ordovician System. The graptolites of the Upper Cambrian centre around the form known as Dictyonema flabelliforme Hichwald (=D. socialis Salter), which in its earlier stages was actually a twig-graptolite and only in its later stages acquired the reticulate habit. This widely spread and well known species is of value as marking a definite stage, 7m the Cambrian as understood by English Geolo- gists, but at the summit of this System as limited by those of the continent (Europe). Still though the horizon of Dictyonema flabelliforme is well known, the extent to which these Cambrian Rhabdopores are as- _ sociated with it does not seem to have been clearly ascertained in Europe, for by some authors they are placed a little earlier in time, and by others a little later than the above species. As regards their position in America, however, there is no question, as they occur in intimate association with Dictyonema flabelli- forme,and that at more than one level. This inclusion in the Dictyonema Zone, apparently different from the conditions of occurrence in Europe, may be due to the fact that the species above named has a considerable vertical range on this side of the Atlantic. In Europe, and especially in Scandinavia, this Dic- tyonema has its place above the trilobitic fauna associated with Peltura scarabeoides, technically known as the Upper Olenus Zone, but in the Canadian Cambrian beds we find this Upper Olenus Fauna extending into the Dictyonema Zone, since the trilobites of this fauna occur in lentiles with layers included in shales which contain this Dictyonema. Our practice, however, has been to regard the beds above the horizon to which these trilobites so far as known are limited, to be the true zone of Dictyonema, and corresponding to the beds so designated in Europe; and to include the beds below, in which Leptoplastus, Spherophthalmus and Peltura are found, and which also con- tain Dictyonema, as a lower zone corresponding to the upper part of the Upper Olenus Zone as developed in Wales and Scandinavia. Further remarks upon this subject will be found in a later part of this paper, where the several species of Rhab- dopora are described. 264 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 20, All the graptolites of this early horizon that may be included in the Rhabdopora, appear to be of the family Dichograptidz and are chiefly of the two important sections typified by Bryo- graptus and Clonograptus, the former with a distinct sicula and the latter devoid of this initial part; or with the sicula obscure, absorbed, or merged in the funacle. The succession of the Dichograptide in the Cambrian and Lower Ordovician is a good exemplification of increased con- densation of structure due to selection; for the many branched forms of the former are gradually replaced by the Tetragrapti and these by the Didymograpti of the Upper Arenig. As the branches of these graptolites diverge at a variety of angles in the different species, so a like variation in the attitude of the branches is found in the various species of Bryograptus in the Upper Cambrian rocks. Froma form belonging to this genus we may suppose that Dictyonema flabelliforme arose, for even when this species was flourishing and dominant, we do not find that the reticulating threads that knit the branches together were present on the primary and secondary branches, and even the tertiary branches are sometimes devoid of them. From this acquired habit of linking its branches together, or by the innate vigour of its constitution this species was enabled to overtop and dwarf its fellows, so that while the other Brytograptids are comparatively of puny size, individuals of this Dictyonema have been found eight inches in length,* and with nearly two hundred branches to the hydrosome. While the genus, from which we may suppose that Dictyo- nema sprang, had but a short life, Dictyonema was able to maintain itself in competition with the vigorous Dichograpti of of the Quebec Group and thus contribute a very respectable contingent to the Ordovician Fauna; and if the species referred to it from the Silurian (Upper) were truly of this genus it had 4 wider range than any of the graptolitic genera. Section AT Navy ISLAND. The shore of this island where the fossils were obtained that form the subject of this communication has on its western side black and dark gray shales of the lower half (or more of Div- ision 3 of the St. John Group, exposed between high and low water mark. These ledges are swept clean by the force of the current of the river which passes here, and so furnish available opportunities for collecting the fossils which they contain, when the tide is low. The three lower zones of Division 3 are ex- *The Graptolites described by Heisinger, p. 21. 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 265 posed on this shore, the higher zones being out of view in the channel of the river. Trilobites and Brachiopods are not now easily obtained, but there is no lack of hydrosomes of Dictyo- nema to be had, both above and below the horizon where they are marked on the map. The strike of the beds is about N. 40° - Pa Lo" Dictyonered cS a: ¢.. e \ E., and the dip 80° to the south, the measures here being over turned. On the east and south sides of the island the slate ledges are concealed by Post-pleiocene deposits. I have been somewhat explicit in describing this island, as it is the only place in the St. John Basin where Dictyonema flabel- liforme and its associated graptolites have been found. CLONOGRAPTUS, Hall, 1843. CLONOGRAPTUS PROXIMATUS n. sp. Pl. XLVIII. figs. I, a to d. Hydrosome subsymmetrical on the two sides of a plane at right angles to the funacle, but asymmetrical on the two sides of a plane parallel to that part. One of these sidés, which may be called the patent side, occupies more than a semi-circle: the other, the confert side, spread its branches over about one-third of a circle. Not counting the funacle as a branch, on the patent side the angles between the secondary, tertiary and quaternary 266 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [MAY 20, branches are respectively approximately 90°, 60°-70° and 40°— 50°, but on the confert side 40°-50°, 40° and 30°-40°. On both sides branches are developed to the 5th order (or 6th if the funacle be counted as the primary branch). The funacle is short. The primary branches also are short (and the secondary as well on the patent side of the hydrosome). The ultimate branches are more numerous on the patent side, because on that side they more frequently reach the fifth order of division. The branches are slender, but rather rigid and the hydrotheca are widely spaced, there being about 8 in a space of 10 mm., and they are closely appressed to the branches. Apparently the mouth is at right angles to the body of the theca. Young hydrosomes show first the development of one direct extension of the hydrosome at each end of the funacle and ap- parently a branch on each side at each end, thus seemingly de- parting from the dichotomous order. But a closer examination shows that the apparent ternate branching of the funacle is due to the shortness of the branches: of the first order, which brings those of the second order, especially on the patent side of the hydrosome, in close approximation to the funacle. This interesting species is planly a Clonograptus, though it shows points of comparison with other genera. On the patent side of the hydrosome the shortness of the primary and second- ary branches recalls that of the typical Dichograpti, but from Dichograptus proper it is clearly distinct by the numerous branches in the distal parts of the hydrosome. In the slender branches and the distant cells it is like Clonograptus tenellus, and like the later Azygograptus and its allies. From C. tenellus it is clearly distinct by the short funacle and short primary and secondary branches. Dr. J. C. Moberg has described a graptolite from Hunneburg, Sweden (Bryograptus (2) sarmentosus), which by its abbre- viated primary and secondary branches resembles ours. It is from the same layers as Clonograptus tenellus. Dr. Moberg refers it with doubt to Bryograptus, and mentions that the branching of the large branches is like that of Clonograptus. It can only be thought a relative of our species if the supposed sicula be considered as a primary branch; in which case the mode of branching would be similar. In 1871 Dr. Linnarsson described a graptolite from the uppermost part of the Olenus Zone, which, like our species, was one of the early types of the genus Clonograptus Dichograptus tenellus.* He used for it the generic name Dichograptus, as at *Om nagra forsteningar fran Sveriges och Norges och “‘ Primordialzon”’ 6fversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Férhandlingar, 1871, No. 6, Stockholm. 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 267 ‘that time the term Clonograptus had not been generally applied to the group of graptolites which bear it, otherwise we may sur- mise that Linnarsson would have used it. lLinnarsson’s ex- amples, as he himself, says were imperfect. His diagnosis is: “ Rami tenuissimi, regulariter dichotomi, circiter } mm. late. In 10 mm. 7-8 cellule anguste, elongate, subrect, apertura run- cata, transversa.” In its slender branches and distant hydro- theca it differs from the type of the genus occurring in the Quebec Group,and is small and slender like the St. John Species. Since Linnarsson first described the specics, Dr. J. C. Moberg has added largely to our knowledge of it by describing a num- ber of examples from Hunneberg, found in the collections of the Geological Survey of Sweden.* These are more complete than those described by Linnarsson, and give a better conception of the species and of its generic place. The examples figured by Moberg show the species complete from the sicula to the ex- tremities of the branches, and also show that the species did uot reach the fifth order of branching as did C. proximatus. + The most obvious point of difference, however, is the long funacle and primary and secondary branches, through which a more open form is given to Linnarsson’s species than to C. proximaius. Size of C. proximatus. Diameter of the hydrosome 25 mm., width of the twigs about 4 mm. Horizon and Locality. In the black, carbonaceous shales of Band ¢ of Division 3 of the St. John Group, at Navy Island in St. John Harbor. Scarce. Collected by G. van Ingen. The close association of this and the species described below with D. flabelliforme makes a comparison of the geological horizon of our species with that of C. fenellus of interest. Lin- narsson has stated distinctly that the latter is found together with Spherophthalmus alatus Boeck, and thus belongs to the highest layers [of the alum slate or Olenus Zone]. This refer- ence is called in question by Dr. Moberg, who gives various reasons for claiminig this graptolite as belonging above the Dictyonema Zone. Among other things he says that in all the literature hereto- fore given relative to the geological age of the shale in which Clonograptus tenellus Linrs. is contained at Hunneberg, the age given rests upon the statement left by Linnarsson, who first dis- tinguished that layer. This statement I have given above, and *Om skiffern med Clonograptus sonietiiia Linrs. deme fatna och geologiska alder. Geol. Foren ; Stockholm Férhand1 Bd. 14 Hiift 2, 1892. + Moberg’s description speaks of the fifth order, but this is because he counts the funicle as the first branch. As we have found no theca on the funicle of C. proximatus, we do not regard it as a branch, but continue Hall's use of the term funacle. 268 . TRANSACTIONS OF THE -[may 20, it is the basis of the references of this fossil by Lapworth, Brog- ger and Hermann to the Olenus beds. or to the highest part of the same, and thus older than the Dictyonema beds. Moberg explains that when Linnarsson referred C. tenellus to the upper- most part of the Olenus Zone he had not yet set off the Dictyo- nema bed from that zone, and that the species cannot now any longer be considered as belonging to that zone. He sums up his argument with the following conclusions: (1) No piece of shale with C. tenellus contains any Sphero- phthalmus. (2) Spherophthalmus notwithstanding occurs even here in a layer, which immediately borders on the Dictyograptus shale. (8) At no place except at Hunneberg as any C. tenellus been found in the uppermost part of the Olenus Beds, and this bed is only known from a loose piece. (4) On the contrary graptolites of the type of C. tenellus and those occurring with it, have been found in most places in the layer which lies closest above the Dictyograptus Beds. (5) Dictyograptus flabelleformis shale—when new represen- tatives of the genera Clonograptus and Bryograptus occur, both close above and close beneath (namely at Hunneberg), but not together with the above named species—by its appearance af- fords an intelligible explanation of the gap in the continuous development of the other graptolitic genera. Moberg, however, appears to think that there is some mistake in regarding C. tenellus as in any case older than the Dictyo- nema Zone, for he interested Herr G. von Schmalensee to col- lect material for him bearing on this question, and quotes his account of the geological position of the species at Hunneberg, namely, that the shales there which contain C. tenellus plainly overlie the Dictyograptus shale, and only come in contact with the Olenus shale in places where the Dictyograptus shale has been wedged out. If we depend upon these researches of Herrn Moberg and von Schmalensee, the little graptolite found by Linnarsson belongs properly above the Dictyonema beds. It will therefore be of interest to geologists to know that the genus as represented in Clonograptus proximatus existed at St. John with Dictyonema. BRYOGRAPTUS, Lapworth. BryoGRAPTUS PATENS, Matt. Pl. XLVIIL., figs, 4 a to e. Nat. Hist. Soc. N. B. Bull. x., p. xi. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., vol. x., sec. iv., p. 17, pl. vii., figs. 1 a-d. Primary branches of the hydrosome spreading, at first dicho- 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF* SCIENCES. 269 tomous [at short intervals], then more irregularly branching [in a dichotomous manner]. There are about 10 hydrothecz in the space of a centimetre, and the branches [of the hydrosome ] are about one-half of a millimetre wide [or more]. The cells of the hydrosome are directed forward [and upward], and each terminates in a mucronate point. The primary branches do not appear to be celluliferous, but cell-bearing branches shoot out from the primary.* Size. Width of the hydrosome 15 to 20 millimetres; height, about 10 millimetres. Horizon and locality. Black shales of Div. 3b of the St. John group at Navy Island, St. John Harbor. Found last summer also in the shales of Div. 3c in occasional layers, over which the hydrosomes of this species are freely scattered. There is a considerable variation in the attitude of the branches of this species. The figures in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can. are of the spreading variety from Div. 3b. The one here given is the average form of those in Div. 3c, though some with even more erect branches are to be found. Dr. J.C. Moberg figures a species from Hunneberg in Sweden (B. (2?) Hunnebergensis), whose branches have the attitude of those of B. patens, but it is a much smaller species and less fre- quently branched. A species from the Shineton shales, B. Callavei, described by Prof. Lapworth, bears a close resemblance to this species in the attitude of its branches, but the figure given represents it as bifureating regularly, and presumably in one plane, as there are but two main branches; thus it has not the shrubby growth of Bb. patens, but in its simple branching resembles B (?) Hunne- bergensis of J.C. Moberg. B. Callavei does not agree with our species in the spacing of the thece on the hydrosome; it has 74 cells to the centimetre, while B. patens has about 10 cells. It would appear from this that there is no described species to which B. patens can be referred. BryOGRAPTUS sPINosus, Matt. Pl. XLVIIL., figs. 3 a and 6. Clonograptus spinosus. Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., vol. x., see. iv. p- 97, pl. figs. 3 a and b. A slender species with distant hydrothece set very obliquely to the axis, and having a spine at the outer end of each hydro- theca. The branches of the hydrosome are about three-quarters of a millimetre wide, and there are about 8 hydrothece in the space of 10 millimetres. *The bracketed parts of this paragraph are not in the original description of the species. 270 ; TRANSACTIONS OF THE [May 20, This species is easily distinguished from Dictyonema flabelli- forme, with which it is found, by its larger and more distant hydrothecz [also by the thinner substance of its hydrosome ]. This species, of which only fragments were had at first, was doubtfully referred to Clonograptus; the better material now had shows that it cannot be thus placed, as the mode of branch- ing is that of Bryograptus. The branches are ascending, clus- tered, and extend to the sixth degree of oS Size. Length of the hy drosome 35 + mm.; width, 30 + mm. Horizon and locality. First described trom Div. 3b, now also found in Div. 3c at Navy Island. This species is nearly related to B. Kjerulfi of the Norwegian Cambrian rocks, and has about the same number of thecz on a similar space of the hydrosome. B. Ajerulfi has T-9 according to Lapworth, but Brogger’s figure gives 10 cells in a distance of 10 mm. Lapworth’s figure shows a branching to the third de- gree, Brogger’s to the fourth, but the branching in B. spinosus extends to the sixth and seventh degrees; it is much more bushy. BryoGRAPTuUs LENTUS n. sp. Pl. XLVIII. Figs. 2 a and b. The initial part of the hydrosome is wanting. Branches as- cending, slender, crowded, flexuous; angle of furcation narrow (30° to 40°), except at the final angle where it is about 40° to 50°. Hydrothecz numerous, continuous on all the branches known, free for most of their length, somewhat spinous-pointed, about 7 or 8 in the space of ten millimetres. Extreme width of the branches about 1 mm. The width of the branches of this species is greater than that of the other Rhabdopores that occur with it, but the thickness of its branches is not as great as that of the branches of Dictyo- nema flabelliforme and its thinner substance serves to distin- guish it from that species. It may be known from Bryograptus spinosus by its somewhat broader branches and its larger thece. A group of eight branches of an individual of this species is known,and from the fact that the cells on these branches are all turned in one direction it seems probable that the initial branches were far enough off to indicate a hydrosome of con- siderable size, of which this was a portion of one-half. Size. Hydrosome 40 or more mm. across, and about 50 + mm. long. Horizon and locality. In the black shales of Div. 3c with Clonograptus proximatus, at Navy Island. Scarce. This type collected by G. van Ingen. ee ee 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 271 Although we have not the initial part of the hydrosome of this species, it is referred to Bryograptus on account of the general arrangement of the branches; by comparing it with B. sptinosus the arrangement of the branches is seen to correspond to that of half of those of a hydrosome of that species ; it how- ever is a larger species and has larger thece. BRYOGRAPTUS (7?) RETROFLEXUS (?) Brogger. Die Silurischen Etagen 2 und 3, p. 37. PI. xii., fig. 22. Still another species of graptolite appears to be indicated by some fragments which are not branched,and appear to belong to a species with long branches such as the above. No sicula or primary branches have been recovered, and so the generic refer- ence is doubtful. There are about 10 thecz in the space of 10 millimetres. Horizon and locality. Black shales of Div. 3b, at Navy Island, St. John Harbor, with Dictyonema. Scarce. A feature in Bryograptus which we see prevalent also in later . related types is the orientation of the cells on the branches on each side of the hydrosome toward the central line of the latter. Occasionally a branch from one side of the hydrosome will start off at a wide angle toward the other side; in this case the rule for the branches of this side is reversed, and the cells face to- ward the remainder of the branches of the side from which it sprang. This is obviously due to the attitude of such a branch diverging at a wide angle from the direction of its fellows; this divergence made it necessary that the position of its thecze should be reversed, in order that the mouths of the cells might be turned upward. CALLOGRAPTUS, Hall. Pl. XLVIII. fig. 5. A few obscure examples of a dendroid graptolite were obtained, which appear to be of Hall’s genus above named; the branching is not very well shown, but the lower branches appear to have been rather thick, and light cross-bars appear at intervals higher up, as though the branches were in some degree connected by trans- verse threads after the manner of Dictyonema. No cells were seen. Size. Length of the hydrosome about 12 mm. Width about 10 mm. Horizon and locality. The Dictyonema beds (Div 3e) at Navy Island. Scarce. 272 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [May 20, DicTrYONEMA FLABELLIFORME Hichwald. Pl. XLIX. figs. 1 and 2 Note on this species and its associated fauna. In the material collected last summer a good many examples of a vasiform variety occur. which might pass for var. confertum Linrs., but that the hydrothece are closely set as in var Acadi- cum ; there are 15 or 17 thecz in the space of 10 millimetres. The hydrothece of Dictyonema are about twice as numerous in the same space on the branches, as those of most species of Bryograptus; they are arranged in a double row, alternating ; if we suppose two branches of a Bryograptus joined at the side with the cells alternating, a branch similar to that of a Dictyo- nema would be produced; owing to its double row of cells Dic- tyonema produces a thicker branch than Bryograptus. In one or two examples of this species collected by Mr. G. van Ingen, there appears to be short rootlets developed from the proximal end of the sicula (See Pl. XLIX., figs. 1 and 2). These were adult examples, from the horizon 3c, where this species is most abundant. It might appear from such examples as these, that it would be possible to show the existence of a sedentary variety or stage in this species; still, it does not seem that this condition of the hydrosome is at all frequent, ‘for among scores that have been examined since these were found, none with roots have been detected. Possibly these pro- cesses may have had some other office than that of anchoring the hydrosome to the bottom; so far as they are visible they are too short to afford more than a very feeble foothold at the surface of the soft ooze in which Dictyonema was buried. Although we can recognize three different types of Rhabdo- pores in the Dictyonema beds (including 3) and ¢), their occur- rence is comparatively rare. I suppose with an hundred layers bearing in profusion the skeletons of Dictyonema, one would occur loaded only with the remains of Rhabdopores, though others will be found in which such remains are mixed with and masked by the skeletal parts of Dictyonema. Usually the for- wer are confusedly crowded together on the layers where they they alone occur, and only at rare intervals does a straggler from the crowd appear on the surface of a layer with its parts so displayed that the plan of structure can be made out. So far as numbers are concerned the genus Bryograptus bears off the palm among these Rhabdopores, for it exhibits the greatest profusion of individuals, but occasionally a mass of the little Clonograptus proximatus is found covering the surface of a layer. The remains of B. lentus are scarce, and those of B. ; q ; age 1895. | NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 275 sptnosus are not usually aggregated in such considerable masses on the layers as either B. patens or Clonograptus proximatus. Considering the considerable thickness of beds of black shale without admixture of other sediments through which, in the St. John Group, Dictyonema is distributed, it would appear that conditions favorable to the existence of this species continued in the Acadian region for a long time. This species was not here as in some parts of Europe a solitary Graptolite, but had these small Rhabdopores associated sparingly with it, so far as we have traced it, in all the measures in which it has been found, hence we may consider them a part of the Dictyonema Fauna. Furthermore it appears that the presence of this graptolite fauna was not incompatible with the presence of trilobites. Angelin, years ago, claimed that he had found a trilobite, Acero- corne ecorne, in the Dictyonema beds, but later palzeontolo- gists have thought that this could not have been the case, and have suggested that this species was really from layers with Spherophthalmus alatus below the true Dictyonema beds,* as will be seen by reference to the introductory part of this paper ; both may be right if there was a commingling of the Dicty- onema and the Peltura faunas in Sweden such as occurred in the St. John Basin. To sustain such a view however, a wider range would need to be given to the Dictyonema fauna in nor- thern Europe than has been popularly assigned to it. Among other organisms that have been assigned to the Dic- tyonema beds of Sweden, we notice an Obolella, O. Salterz, Hall.+ Examples of this genus and of Acrotheta have also been found in grey layers enclosed in the Dictyonema shales of St. John. Two other Brachiopods are characteristic of the Dictyonema shales in their normal condition (7. e. black bituminous shales) viz.: Obolus refulgens and Lingulella Nicholsoni (?) so that this graptolite (Dictyonema flabelliforme) had companions that were members of other classes of the Animal Kingdom. THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION OF THE EAST RIVER, AT SEVENTIETH STREET, NEW YORK. By J. F. Kemp. The completion of the new tunnei for the East River Gas Company from the foot of East 70th street, underneath Black- well’s Island to Ravenswood, has brought to light a number of * Angelin seems to intimate that it wasabove rather than below the Dictyonema bed. +Om skifern med Clonograptus tenellus. J.C. Moberg, p. 100. TRANSACTIONS N. Y. ACAD. ScI., Vol. XIV., Sig. 18, Aug. 23, 1895 274 $} EAST CHANNEL i \ —4 NUS 4 \\\\ A ‘ i Wal! TLVTRERTAINY \"}) LONI MIRA B whl BLACKWELLS ISLAND A AVG IMU Sacenel SRT ATT TTT TER TTD TT ITT T LOW WATER WEST CHANNEL MEA TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 20 Ss ~- interesting facts regarding local geol- ogy. By the courtesy of Mr. Charles M. Jacobs, the chief engineer of the work, the writer has had the oppor- tunity to visit the tunnel and collect a series of specimens. The profile of the tunnel published with Mr. Jacobs’ report to the East River Gas Company has furnished the outline of the figure here given, which, so far as the reduced scale admitted, is in true proportions. The tunnel is 2516.4 feet from shaft center to shaft center, and about 10 feet 6 inches in diameter. Its roof is about 106 feet below mean low water. The difficulties in the way of soft ground and the influx of river water, which were overcome, make the enter- prise an exceptionally creditable one to those in charge. The worst of these were met under the west channel of the East River and were caused by weak and rotten seams of rock, and one old crack filled with river mud and sand, that at one time opened up the tunnel to visits from live crabs. In its engineering relations the tun- nel is of special interest because the softest ground was penetrated with the air pressure at 48 pounds, which is the highest yet used in work of this char- acter. It necessitated only 14 hours working shifts with an hour between each of rest outside the lock, and only 45 hours working time for each man daily. The accompanying section il- lustrates the geology. Beginning on the New York side the rock is a thinly laminated mica schist, much contorted, but with a well marked general dip of about 80° west. A few small pegma- tite stringers are met. Under the mi- croscope the rock is seen to consist of biotite, in parallel scales, of quartz, orthoclase, plagioclase, magnetite and 1895. ] NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. 275 a few little zircons. This rock continued for 321 feet from the west shaft, except that it was at times a little harder or softer, and had an oceasional seam that was wet. At this distance the following section was met. 9 ft. soft kaolinized pegmatite, of the consistency of cheese, but with vertical lines of garnets and biotite. 5 in. quartz vein. 6 ft. kaolinized pegmatite. 8 ft. soft green chlorite schist, 7. e., decomposed mica schist. 6 ft. green chlorite scales, with quartz nodules. Total, 29 ft. 3 in. The next 80 feet were firmer but were still of much decom- posed and chloritic mica schist. The following 98 feet were as follows: T ft. white kaolinized pegmatite. 5 ft. soft black mud with lumps of lignite, which with the next seven feet evidently filled a fissure. 2 ft. coarse river sand with abundant pyrites. 5 ft. sand and black mud with lignite and balls of pyrites. 22 ft. white kaolinized pegmatite with lumps of fcetid quartz. 4 ft. do, streaked with chlorite. 11 ft. kaolinized pegmatite. 42 ft. soft green chlorite schist. Total, 98 ft. Samples of this white clay and green chlorite were sent to me when first penetrated because their close superficial resem- blance to the Cretaceous Amboy fire clays and overlying green sands gave rise to the suspicion that a remnant of the Creta- ceous had remained in the bottom of the East River, but a mo- ment’s close examination showed the fallacy of the supposition. It was in this section that the chief difficulties in tunneling were met. The firmer rock to the east came in at an angle of 45°, and after some rather unsound schist passed into the solid rock of Blackwell’s Island, This is a gray gneiss much like that at the north end of Seventh avenue and near 150th street. At one place 150 to 250 feet east of the west shore line of the island it proved to be under great strain, so that from time to time, even six months after the tunnel was opened, it cracked with re- ports like # pistol shot, and at intervals masses fell from the roof. It was also a very hard rock to drill. At 260 feet from 276 TRANSACTIONS OF THE [may 20, the east shore of Blackwell’s Island a soft seam was met, and a lit- tle farther 10-12 feet of dolomite. Beyond the dolomite 50 feet of soft decomposed mica schist were cut, forming the shattered trough of asyncline on whose eastern side were 160 feet of white crystalline dolomite, precisely like tle outcrop at Kingsbridge. The eastern limit of this is charged with phlogopite. It was suc- ceeded by mica schist at first moderately solid. In thin sec- tion it is found to be thickly charged with pyrites, and to the decay and oxidation of this element of weakness is doubtless due much of the decomposition that marks so many bands of the schist. The mica schist soon gave way to another soft seam, 30 feet across, and like those on the New York side con- sisting of kaolinized pegmatite and greasy scales of chlorite— with lumps of quartz. Several minor alternations of rotten and solid seams intervened before firm schist was again encoun- tered. On the Ravenswood shore a massive hornblende gneiss or granite was met entirely different from any of the other rocks. In thin section it shows brown hornblende, quartz, orthoclase and plagioclase. The most interesting feature of this cross-section is the dis- covery of crystalline dolomite so far down the river. We have known of its presence under the Harlem river for many years; in fact, ever since Professor Dana foretold its probable discovery and the tunnel of the new aqueduct above High Bridge demon- strated it. The belt in the east channel opposite Ravenswood is, however, the prolongation of a belt that appears east of Mott Haven, unless faulting has thrown it to the east. It is also im- portant to note the close association of decayed pegmatite and chlorite with the limestone of the east channel, for it and similar associations elsewhere give us ground for believing that the kao- linized soft seams in the west channel indicate the former pres- ence of limestone there. Dr. F. J. H. Merrill at once pointed this fact out when looking over the writer’s specimens and notes. If so it must have been a shallow trough now worn completely away, but its presence would simplify the problem of the devel- opment of our local drainage lines on the east side of Manhattan Island; they would then be uniformly due to the relatively éasy erosion of limestone. There is thus some ground for thinking each river channel a compressed syncline, but from one isolated section like this it would hardly be justifiable to draw too lengthy conclusions about local stratigraphy. There is good reason to think the Ravenswood rock an intrusive hornblende granite or granite-diorite, with which it agrees in mineralogical composi- tion. : INDEX. PAGE, Acid Effusives, New Brunswick. 195 Acrothele Matthewi, var. costata. 128 Acrotreta Gemmia.................... 126 Acrotreta gemmiula..............066 126 Agraulos strenuus, horizon of... 102 Alligator, Breeding habits of...... 62 Anthracite of Pennsylvania, Ori- ETI (1t SabsoatAncon adeonecegaanestns 100 Anthony, R. A., elected resident WEI OIE S ose conoonroseacsenasanace 220 PAUNGHTOCEEUM As ctenjssacelaniesecsesseense 54 Aparchites secunda.................. 136 Arizona Plants, Enumeration of 21 Astor, John Jacob, elected resi- GentemMembers:s--......... 65 Stars, Mean Declination of 56, Observed for Variation of Latitude at Naples and New MON Gisco7. adact vs'doseces esse secs 87 Stentor, Phenomenon in Life- ERISGOT We Olacsaue «svasrerecesoues 49 Stetson, Francis Lynde, elected resident member............... 220 PAGE. Stratford, Prof. Wm, elected resident member............... 68 Subfaunas of Band 6, St. John RRPOMD eecrcace ot osvars mestoecsok: 105 Summer Experiences of Prof. Wiety GR hos. 2 see seoeisetex sens 7 Sunspots, Penumbras of......... rei Sunspots, Pictures of............... 7é Tendencies of Recent Electrical BI CHEATCH GIs ence oh tes 153 Tendon, Capsula-intermediate... 250 Tendon, Capsula-pectoral......... 241 Tendon, Gleno-Epitrochlear....... 247 Thompson, Prof. W. Gilman, elected resident member... 93 Titanotheres, Skull Structure.... 62 Topographical Map of State, Preparations Oliees-sese oe 91 ‘Doxopnenstien 252.05. cstse toe 185 Toxopneustes Fertilization, Phe- MOMENOUEOheese5---5esse 5. secs 99 Treasurer, Report of ............... 88 Trematobolus insignis............ 122 Trilobita of Protolenus Fauna.. 138 Tropical Birds, Habits of......... 66 Tuning Forks, Method of Com- paring “Pitelt (Gf-., ::....73.8 76 Uranium Glass, Experim’ts upon 169 Unrecognized Families of Larve 61 Vacuum Pump, Automatic Mer- GUL nan ncccsiecamionsvesc tes caaates 78 Ventro-appendicular Muscular Sheet, intermediate layer of 233 Ventro-appendicular Muscular Sheet, deep layer of........... 233 Ventro-appendicular muscular Sheet, Superficial layer of. 233 Volcanic Comparisons............. 209 Volborthella tenuis................. Wade, Herbert T., elected resi- dent, member lrt 225.6 «sic 220 Water Bath of Copper............ a Yolk Nucleus, Literature on..229-230 | Foz Foe ~~ ws ata a a or _ arr. | ow a a a ie oe P . Globigerina didyma, n. sp. Mag. 4° PLATE I. FORAMINIFERA. Orbulina cf. universa. Mag. 4°. From Div. 1, b, 2, Hanford Brook. St. Martin’s, N. B. See p. 109. Orbulina (?) ovalis, n. sp. Mag. 2°. Same horizon. See p. 110. Orbulina intermedia, n. sp. Mag. 42. Same horizon. See p. 110. Orbulina ingens, n. sp. Mag. 42. Some horizon. See p. 110. . Globigerina cambrica, n. sp. Mag. 4° 5a. With the initial chambers external —— 5). Initial chambers internal 5e. Initial chambers broken out. All from Div. 1, 0, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 111. i) . Globigerina grandis, n. sp. Mag. ?. Three initial chambers broken off. Same horizon and locality. See p. 111 and see Errata. 7a. Front view showing orifice 7b. Side view. Same horizon. See p. 111. . Globigerina turrita, n. sp. Mag. +2 8a. Section of complete shell? 8b. perhaps the same species, broken. Same horizon and locality. After W. D. Matthew. See p. 111. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Vou. XIV., Pu. I. ‘ a ae eh ‘wa Ni wo . Lingulella martinensis, Matt. . Lingulella ct. granvillensis Walct. PLATE II. Sponeipsa & BRACHIOPODA. . Astrocladia (?) elongata, Matt. Nat. Size. From Div. 1, 6. at Belyea’s Landing, Kings Co., N. B. See p. 113. . Astrocladia (?) elegans, Matt. Nat. Size. Same horizon. . Astrocladia (2) virguloides, Matt. a. Part of a branch, Nat. size, — b. Same enlarged 12 ce. Same further enlarged to show spherules. From Div. 1, 0, 2-4, at Radcliff’s mill stream. See p. 113. . Dichoplectella, sp. Mag. 12. From Div. 1, 0, 2-4, at Radcliff’s stream. see p. 112. Protospongia, sp. Mag. +. From Div. 1, 6, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 112. a. Ventral valve, Nat. size b. Obtuse mould of interior of ventral, showing cardinal area and furrow marking the place of the lateral and central scars. Mag. } C Acute variety, showing the same features. Mag. + d. Interior of a dorsal valve showing low median ridge and place of cardinal muscle behind it. Mag. #. Seep. 113. a. Ventral valve showing for- aminal groove. Mag. ?. From Div. 1, b, Zand 2 b. Dorsal valve, interior of, showing impression of cardinal muscle and low central ridge marking place of central scars, which are well toward front of valve. Mag. 3. From Diy. 1, 6, 3. All from Hanford Brook. See p. 114. . Obolella nitida Ford,—— a. Ventral valve partly exfoliated so as to show the impression of the lateral scars (crescent) Mag. ? b. Dorsal valve, indented where the median ridge exists within the shell. Mag. $. From Diy. 1, b, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 125. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOU. LY., Pi. LE PLATE III. BorsroRDIA PULCHRA. 1. Botsfordia pulchra, Matt. Dorsal valve a. Embryonic shell seen from above. Mag. +?——. Same seen from behind ce. Same seen from the side d. Another embryonic shell with deeper previsceral de- pression, and revolute margin. Mag. 7° e. Same in section fs Larval or nzepionie shell, inner half shaded, with embryonic shell at the umbo. Mag. ? g. Adolescent or neologic shell, inner half shaded (embryonic and larval stages included). Mag. ? h. Adult or ephe- bolic shell showing all the stages and the outline of the visceral cavity, inner half shaded. Mag. ? i. Interior of the dorsal valve showing median and lateral ridges, and muscle scars. Mag. ? —— k. Another interior, showing cardinal muscle, laterals or adjustors, and the central muscles. Mag. ¢. Seep. 115. 2. Botsfordia pulchra, Matt. Ventral valve above. Mag. 42 view, a. Embryonic shell seen from b. Same seen from behind c. Same, side d. Complete larval or neepionic shell, with embryonic shell at the umbo. Mag. ?7——e. Complete adolescent or nealogic shell (em- bryonic and larval stages included). Mag. ? f. Adult or ephebolic shell showing all the stages of growth and the outline of the visceral cavity —— g. View of the hinge in the larval or niepionic stage show- ing a covered pedicle groove and foramen (?). Mag. } —— i. Ventral valve decorticated in part, showing the place of the central muscles k. Interior of a ventral, showing the place of the cardinal, lateral and central muscles, radiating lateral ridges, hinge area, and flattened borders of the valve, ete. Mag. 7 All from Diy. 1, 6, 7-4, Caton’s Island. See p. 115. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Vor, Se0v. Pas ELE. sch — a ROE beat ae s Soy ane PLATE IV. BRACHIOPODA. 1. Obolus pristinus, n. sp. a. Ventral valve showing remains of flange at the cardinal line. Mag. ? b. Same in profile ce. Mould of interior of a ventral (supposed of this species) showing cardinal and lat- eral muscle pits and two lateral radiating grooves, also faint impres- sions of the central muscles, Mag. 7 d. Same seen from behind. e. Mould of interior of a small dorsal valve (supposed of this species ) showing pits for cardinal muscle and a crescent within the lat- eral muscle scars, also prints which appear to be of the central muscles, but are very far back. Mag. ¢. All from 1, 6, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 121. 2. Trematobolus insignis, Matt. Mag. + a. Interior of the ventral valve b. Interior of the dorsal valve c. Dorsal valve seen from he- hind ——d. Inside of beak of ventral valve (with hinge area removed). Notation of the muscles, &c.: p. a. posterior adductors ; a. d. adjustor muscles ; 7. m. lateral muscles ; a. p. anterior depression ; c. p. cardi- nal pits ; ¢. cardinal process ; 0. hinge socket; ¢. dentiform process of the ventral valve; f. foramen. From Div. 1, }, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 122. PEwebye Serve VOL. CI. ACAD. § INGEN; TRANS. PLATE V. BRACHIOPODA. 1. Linnarssonia transversa, Hartt. Dorsal valve. Mag. ? a. Anexam- ple partly exfoliated, showing the forked median furrows, and median ridge ending in a rhombic protuberance, also showing the print of the muscles near the hinge b. Side view of the same ——c. View from behind. . See p. 125. 2. Linnarssonia transversa, Hartt. Ventral valve. Mag. 2 a. Anexam- ple partly exfoliated, showing the apical boss, foramen and pit of the cardinal muscle b. Same, side view ——c. Same seen from behind. All from Hanford Brook. See p. 125. 3. Lingulella (?) inflata, Matt. Mag. + a. Ventral valve in profile. From Div. 1, 6, 7, Hanford Brook. See p. 127. 4. Lingulella (?) inflata, var. ovalis, n. var. Mag. ¢ a. Ventral valve b. Apex enlarged to show mould of boss around the pedicle tube c. longitudinal section of this valve. From Div. 1, b, 1, Hanford Brook. See p. 127. 5. Aecrotreta gemmula, Matt. Mag. 42 a. mould of the ventral valve, showing apical boss, foramen and arched ridges (crescent) around the interior of the valve b. Interior of dorsal valve, showing median septum and two pairs of scars ; the margin of the valve is revolute e. Ventral valve seen from behind, showing the area and the foramen opening under the break d. Side view of the same. From Div. 1, b, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 126. 6. Acrothele Matthewi, Hartt. Mag. ? a. Interior of the dorsal valve showing the mesian ridge, trifid in front where the central muscles were attached ; also showing pits of the cardinal muscles b. The-same in profile. From Div. 1, d. 7. Acrothele Matthewi, Hartt var. prima. Mag. 7 a. Ventral valve show- ing foramen near margin. From Div. 1, }, 3, Hanford Brook. 8. Acrothele Matthewi, var. lata. Mag. ? a. Interior of ventral, anterior and lateral margins revolute ; two pits in front of the foramen, and four minute ones close to the hinge ; foramen more central. From Diy. 1, J, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 128. 9. Acrothele Matthewi, var. costata, n. var. Mag. ¢ Ventral valve show- ing ridges and foramen. From Div. 1, }, 2, and 5, Hanford Brook. See p. 128. . 10. Orthid. Small, indeterminable, dorsal valve. From Div. 1, }, 7, Han- ford Brook. See p. 128. b. Same TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOLO UV. ele Va a ry he re t2 nue a deli ee ae he 4-2 Sanat > ¢ TY Pee , oo ; ' oJ . Hyolithes decipiens, Matt., Mag. ? . Hyolithes gracilior, n. sp. restored, Mag. 7 . Diplotheca hyattiana, Matt., Mag. + PLATE VI. MOLLUSCA. . Orthotheca cf Emmonsi, Ford, Nat. size. Example with extremity decol- lated. Div. 1, b, 2. Hanford Brook. See p. 129. a. Dorsal side ——b. Side view showing part of dorsal and of ventral sides ce. Section near mouth d. Section near apex. From Div. 1, 5, 2, at Hanford Brook. See p. 130. . a. Dorsal surface —— b. Side view showing angle at lip and curved apex. From Div. 1, d, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 130. . Diplotheca acadica, var. crassa Matt., Nat. size. Dorsal aspect shell, flat- tened and somewhat abraded showing the lateral edges of phragmated space beside the body cavity and a few septa near the apex of the shell. From Div. 1, 6, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 130. a. Dorsal aspect; the shell abraded and showing septa near the apex, and diaphragms along the right side of the tube b. Side view, showing the curved proximate end of the tube —— From Diy. 1, }, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 130. . Pelagiella atlantoides, n. gen. Mag. + a. Seen from above —— b. View of the aperture c. Lower side of the shell, showing the um- bilicus. From Div. 1, ), 2 and 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 131. Volborthella tenuis, Schmidt, Mag. 7 a. Distal end showing a septum — }. Smaller specimen showing septa. Both from Div. 1, b, 4, Belyea’s Landing, King’s County, N. B. See p. 132. VOT SV Pir. Vie TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. ans I yy prayer J, CO Nee , te we PLATE VII. OstTRAcODA. 1. Hipponicharion Eos, Matt. Mag. ¢ a. Right (?) valve, seen from above b. Transverse section near the hinge ——e. Longitudinal section of same. From Div. 1, b, 1, Hanford Brook. See p. 132. 2. Hipponicharion cavatum, Matt. Mag. 4 a. Left (?) valve, seen from above —— b. Transverse section near the hinge. From Div. 1, d, J, Hanford Brook. See p. 133. 3. Hipponicharion minus, Matt. Mag. $ —— a. Left (?) valve, seen from above b. Transverse section near the hinge. From Div. 1, }, 3, Hanford Brook. Seep. 133. , 4. Beyrichona papilio, Matt. Mag. ¢ a. Both valves spread out —— 0). Section near the posterior end ——e. Transverse section of vave near the hinge. From Div. 1, b, 4, Hanford Brook. See p. 134. 5. Beyrichona triangula, n. sp. Mag. +} From Div. 1, b, 3, also in 1, b, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 135. 6. Beyrichona tinea, Matt. ¢ a. Left valve, seen from above b. Transverse section near the hinge line e. Longitudinal section. From Div. 1, 6, 4, Hanford Brook. See p. 134. 7. Beyrichona planata, n. sp. Mag. . Right valve. From Div. 1, b, 2, Han- ford Brook. See p. 134. 8. Beyrichona ovata, n. sp. Mag. ¢. Left (?) valve. From Div. 1, }, 2, Han- ford Brook. See p. 135. 9. Beyrichona rotundata, n. sp. Mag. }. Left valve. From Div. 1, }, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 136. 10. Schmidtella cambrica, n. sp. Mag. $. Left (?) valve. From Div. 1, d, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 137. 11. Aparchites secunda, n. sp. Mag. ¢ a. Left valve —— b. The two valves seen from the ventral side. From Div. 1, }, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 136. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Vou. XIV., Pu. VII. th ay aac ae es ie A e tay ay a J at 2 . ‘ * . - 4 ‘ i i < - ° im ma . - n ; ae a ‘Li sf "| 7 .).% Annee : * ‘ ‘ m ‘ . t Jf a) i - ‘ j : - M s- ~~ - - 2 se _ hs * ‘ PLATE VIII. OstracopDA (& PHYLLOPODA ?). . Primitia aurora, Matt. Mag. + —— a. Left valve, side view. —— Db. “horizontal section. —— c. vertical section. From Div. 1, b, 1, Hanford Brook. See p. 136. . Primitia oculata, nu. sp. Mag. $ a. Left valve, side view. b. Two valves from above. From Div. 1, 6, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 136. . Primitia (?) fusiformis, n. sp. Mag. + a. Right (?) valve —— b. Horizontal section. From Div. 1, 0, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 137. . Leperditia (?) minor, n. sp. Mag. $ a. Left valve b vertical section. From Div. 1, b, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 138. . Leperditia (2?) ventricosa, Matt. Nat. size a. Interior of right (?) valve b. Longitudinal section c. Vertical section d. Surface enlarged to show the sculpture. From Div. 1, 6, 1, Hanford Brook. See p. 137. . Leperditia (2) primeva, n. sp. Mag. + a. Left valve section. Div. 1, b, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 138. . Leperditia (2) Steadi, Matt. Nat. Size a. Right (?) valve b. Horizontal section c. Vertical section. From Div. 1, 0, 1, Han- ford Brook. See p. 137. b. Vertical 3. Lepiditta sigillata, Matt. Mag. +. Right valve. From Diy. 1, b, 3, Han- ford Brook. See p. 138. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Vole eV. Pte WELL. t : ie 5: le tes” ' 5 . f J ’ z pty ; he ie 4 ~~ > & ¥ (w) . Ellipsocephalus cf. polymetopus, Linrs. Nat. size . Ellipsocephalus grandis Matt., Mag. ? PLATE EX, “TRIMOBITA. . Protoagraulos priscus, n. gen. et sp., Mag. #7. Middle piece of the head shield. From Div. 1, ), 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 139. a. Middle piece of head shield —— 0}. Same side view ce. Same from the front. From Div. 1, 6, 7, Hanford Brook. See p. 139. a. Middle piece of the head shield —— 0}. A thoracic joint ec. Head in profile. From Diy. 1, b, 2, Hanford Brook. See p. 140. . Ellipsocephalus galeatus, Matt., Mag. ? —— a. Middle piece of the head b. Movable cheek —— ce. Head in profile d. Head with part of thorax ——e. Movable cheek ——/f. A thoracic joint, sectioned. From Div. 1, 0, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 139. . Avalonia acadica, n. sp. Mag. ¢. Head shield. From Div. 1, b, 3, Han- ford Brook. See p. 140. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SGI. MOUs MeV. exe ese ty (@ a LOS STEED NG —$—_$$——__—_4 oO . Miemacea Matthevi, n. sp. Mag. ¢ . Protolenus paradoxoides, Matt. Nat. size, . Protolenus (Bergeronia) articephalus, Matt. Mag. ? PEADE XS VERimonrra. a. Middle piece of the head shield b. Headshield in profile. From Diy. 1, b, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 141. . Micmacea recurva, n. sp. Mag. | a. Middle piece of the head —— b. Movable cheek. From Diy. 1, }, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 142. a. Middle piece of head shield b. Movable cheek —— ce. Segment of thorax. From Div. 1, 6, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 145. . Protolenus bituberculatus, n. sp. Nat. size. Middle piece of head defec- tive, b. A joint of the thorax ce. Same in profile. From Div. 1, 6, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 145. a. Middle piece b. Same in profile. From 1, b, 3, Hanford of the head shield Brook. See p. 147. *RRANS. IN. Y. ACAD. Scr: ViOTi akc Wes. bie oe . ' € ' ' . \ . ‘ Pic Lad Foetus w , 7 ” 7 ~ 2 . Micmacea van Ingeni, nu. sp., Mag. 7 PLATE “XE. “ERROBIPA. a. Middle piece of the head shield b. Samein profile. From 1, b, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 142. Micemacca (?) plana, un. sp., Mag. 2 a. Middle piece of the head shield b. Same in profile. From 1, }, 3, Hanford Brook. See p. 148. Protolenus ( Bergeronia) clegans Matt., Nat. size a. Middle piece of the head shield b. Movable cheek c. Head in profile d, Joint of the thorax ——e. Same in profile. From Diy. 1, }, 2, Han- ford Brook. See p. 147. ““Olenus’’ Zoppii Mgh. Of the Cambrian of Sardinia, supposed to be a derivative from the same stock as Protolenus. Vou, XLV., Pu. XI. Scl. N. Y. ACAD. TRANS. PLATE XII. Fig. 1. Spherulitie structure in red felsite-porphyry (apobsidian) from the Hammond River below Upham, N. B. This section shows under higher magnification well preserved trichites throughout both the spherulitic and non-spherulitic parts of the rock (See Fig. 1, p 199). Spec. 664. Magnified 37 diameters. Fic. 2. Red felsite-porphyry (trachyte), showing feldspar in three genera- tions ; large phenocrysts, small rod-like crystals and small grains not well bounded. The glassy material has been changed to micro-felsite. The only other minerals are magnetite and second- ary limonite replacing in part one of the orthoclase phenocrysts. Spec. 575. > 42 diam. ' Trans. N. Y. ACAD. Scr. Vor; SEY. Pr. XT. EEE phn At PEZEZ SZ tH i Uy hy , ( iH q i Cy Ly / PLATE SG: Fia. 1. Perlitic structure in red felsite-porphyry (apobsidian ) from Hammond River below Upham. The stippled part is microfelsite, which shows a flow-brecciated structure, the horizontal shading repre- sents secondary quartz and feldspar. The perlitic cracks are in fact preserved in a brightly polarizing substance, but this was not easy to represent in the drawing. >< 67 diam. Fia. 2. Skeleton crystals of magnetite in black felsite porphyry (petrosilex) from Hanford Brook. Spec. 570. > 67 diam. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. MOLT EMEN| Pr: CLL: ‘ re ‘ 4 > mole i? / ay ¢ “” P i v2; " c } = Po tae \ - /% Vs co / + ’ . + ‘ Lae . . . $ . . . - - - . ‘ : ‘ . - —~ ’ : : ¢ d ; a] ' " y Pe ee y * PISA XSL: Fic. 1. Diorite-porphyrite, coarse grained. The hornblende is represented by heavy shading; the feldspar is lightly shaded. An attempt is also made to represent the zonal structure and decayed cores of the phenocrysts. The quartz is unshaded and the magnetite is dead black. Spec. 608. >< 37 diam. Fic. 2. Diorite-porphyrite, fine-grained. The shading is the same as in Fig. 1; it shows in addition a well marked flow-structure, and quartz as phenocryst; the quartz in the groundmass is not represented, nor are the feldspar individuals distinguished. > 30 diam. Vou. XIV., Pu. XIV. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. eng tees siterseertet ere PLATE XV. Fic. 1. Fine-grained Norite. A phase of the olivine-gabbro at Dolin’s Lake. Biotite is represented by heavy parallel lines, plagioclase by light ones; augite and hypersthene by irregular cracks, the hypers- thene sometimes showing schillerization with innumerable mi- nute parallel rods of magnetite. Spec. 473. 77 diam. Fic. 2. Quartz-bearing diabase from west of the Goldnroute Marsh. The feld- spar is shaded with parallel lines, the augite by irregular ones, the magnetite being black and the quartz unshaded. The abundant apatite needles are too small to be shown in the figure. Spee. 304. XX 20 diam. Von. XIV., PL. XV. Y. ACAD. SCI. N. TRANS. PLATE XVI. Fic. 1. Soda-granite, from Titus’ Mill. The feldspar is stippled, the fine twinning of the anorthoclase, being represented where visible by parallel lines. Some attempt is made to show the comparative alteration of the feldspar by the heaviness of the stippling. Horn- blende is represented by diagonally crossing parallel lines. Quartz is unshaded and magnetite is dead black. Spec. 661. > 18 diam. Fia. 2. Soda-granite fine grained and porphyritic. From the Hammond River below Upham. Shading as in the last figure, but augite is represented by irregular lines. Spec. 666. XX 37 diam. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOLS chV <5 ebs xe V T- is i ¢ i. a PLATE XVIL. Fia. 1. Granophyric structure in soda-granite from near Hardingville. The feldspar is represented by parallel horizontal lines; the quartz is unshaded; the hornblende is represented by diagonally crossing lines, zircon by irregular heavy cracks, and chlorite by arrow points. In the upper left hand quadrant the quartz is mostly in minute trigonal prisms variously shown by different sections. In the upper right hand quadrant the quartz is regular and minute at the centre, but becomes coarse and irregular outside. In the lower half the quartz is seen radiating out from a crystal of feld- spar, becoming coarser and more irregular as it continues its growth. The feldspar between these quartz growths is in part optically continuous with the central crystal. From Spec. 656. >< 80 diam. Vou. XIV., Pu. XVII. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. PLATE XVIII. Right upper extremity. ?, white, U. S. aet. 62. Gleno-ulnar head ;' var. 1, Capsulo-pectoral tendon. | ‘ Win SE DVGs Meats D- Gig aoe Trans. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. 7 i - . i ‘ ~~ 7 . D@@s i — s ull ms : ‘ i e b * ‘ / . « ¥ . - . ‘ . . ‘ — - *: h . . 4 ’ - *’ . " ’ ‘ - Ms ; ; ‘ , i i SPE ATE, Xe: Right shoulder joint of same subject, opened from behind, head ° morus removed, showing thickening of anterior capsule wall by the sulo-pectoral tendon. i Vom SLV., Pu. XEX. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. GATES REX Right upper extremity. 6, Austria, aet. 65. Gleno-ulnar head ; var. 1, Capsulo-pectoral tendon. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. & ‘+ eas) 2 1 an PLATE XXI. Right upper extremity. ?, Germany, aet. 84. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 1, Capsulo-pectoral tendon. Ot chy.) Pi XeXT. ScI. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. “=F 7 j : ‘ 1 at q ‘ : ; / ' * y ‘ $ . 7 : . y si J _ # é * Pi) - { i A r 7 : ' » ‘ ~ ; } r LP 7h) Lor PLATE XXII. Right upper extremity. é, U.S. white, aet. 24. ; Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2a, Gleno-ulnar muscle. Vom SV.,. Pe. SIT. Trans. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. 1 4 a EG pls pe 5 ' ue nya ae : - in TS? ‘ i, ‘ Va 5 as - - ' ‘ - . vi PICA Sony. Right upper extremity. 3, U.S. white, aet. 50. = Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2a, Gleno-ulnar muscle. Vor. XIV); Pu. XXIM. Trans. N. Y. ACAD. Sct. PLATE XXIV. Right upper extremity. &, U.S. negro, aet. 50. sis Gleno-wlnar head, var. 2a, Gleno-wlnar muscle. WOU. Vs, Pb.. SAT. ACAD. SCI. INS TRANS. ; ~ MET PLATE XXV. Left upper extremity. 9, U. S. white, aet. 23. re Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2a, Gleno-ulnar, muscle. “a al Ae he eee %: Sf 2 SOR NED + Trans. N. Y. ACAD. ScI. VOL. MEV, Pry SXY. et _ 7 ¥ r,s eer é ‘ . ' - * . 1 ! / 7 ; » ; if ' - ‘ ex ; : . . . / i - pve 7y) 7 ————— se PLATE XXVI. Left upper extremity. &, U.S. negro, aet. 50. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2b, Gleno-ulnar muscle. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. WG, SGA, Jar, VO-AVIE ee si > ara ’ Nae ne a = Fu PLATE XXVII. Right upper extremity. 3g, Ireland, aet. 32. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2b, Gleno-ulnar muscle. XXVII. VoL., XIV., PL. N. Y. Acap. Scr. TRANS. PLATE XXVII. ae Right upper extremity. a g, Ireland, aét. 32. ~ Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2b, Gleno-ulnar muscle. Von, 2 0V.g. Pi." Roe V IE: TRANS. IN. \. ACAD: SCI. “PLATE XXVIII. Left upper extremity of preceding subject. 3g, Ireland, aet. 32. are Gleno-ulnar, head, var. 2a, Gleno-ulnar muscle. Von. S1Y.; Ph. XOCVvErr. Trans. N. Y. AcAb. Scr. PLATE XXIX. & Left upper extremity. &, Ireland, aet. 53. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2c, transition forms and variations. MOL, SUV.) Pu. RX, TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. PLATE XXX. Left upper extremity. 6, Ireland, act. 35. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2¢, transition ahing and variations. VOLE.) XchVs Pi XXX. Ye AcAp> Ser: TRANS. N. PLATE XXXI. Right upper extremity. &, Germany, aet. 64. . Gleno-ulnar head, var. 2c, transition forms and variations. Von XtVe cei. XO: TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. —— a eer SP OF TDS De me ec ae an Wey Sees PLATE XXXII. Left upper extremity. &, Germany, aet. 66. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 3, Gleno-epitrochlear tendon. — Vou. XIV:, Pu. XX CIT. iRaws. N. Y. ACAD. Scr. ‘ ce i+ as ia + a eee att PLATE XXXIII. Left upper extremity. 6, Ireland, aet. 42. bes Gleno-ulnar head, var. 3, Gleno-epitrochlear tendon. \ Vou. XIV., Pu. XX XIII. Ai awe ee” COM er et ee “ ty s f ; <7 an © PLATE XXXIV. Right upper extremity. Q, Ireland, aet. 27. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 4, M. Brachio-ulnaris lateralis. ah Mois SVe, Pt RT. SERANS: N. Y. AGAD: SCI. Tha PLATE XXXYV. Right upper extremity. ©, U.S. negro, aet. 24. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 4, M. Brachio-ulnaris lateralis. Vor: SV Pu: XAXV. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. LAL ar PLATE XXXVI. Right upper extremity. ©, Ireland, aet. 72. Gleno-ulnar head, var. 6, combination of tendinous Gleno-ulnar and Cor- aco-epitrochlear. Von. XIV., Ph. 2X XV TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. ScI. i) Tus € = ci e ay ‘ * . . Mir se ‘ - . ’ 4 . ‘ i ‘ ¥ | f aI ‘ 2 S) a ‘ PLATE XXXVII. Right upper extremity. &, U.S. white, aet. 47. Coraco-ulnar head, var. 2a, Coraco-epitrochlear tendon. Vor. oX1V., Pe, SX VEL TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. = _ 4 is je] = 4 any Right upper extremity. . 0-Ep1tro Coraco-ulnar head, var. 2b, Coraco-epitrochlear and Glen g, U.S. white, aet. 46. dons combined. WOL, ATY.5\ Pr.) XXX VIL. CAO Pee Seer , PLATE XXXIxX. Left upper extremity. 3g, Germany, aet. 29. ‘ Coraco-ulnar head, var. 2c, M. Coraco-epitrochlearis. \ i i } 1 Vou. XIV., Pu. XX XIX. a iti. ' "I ity. exor fl driceps Ri sht upper extre - Qua M Vom, MEV, Pu: KE. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Right upper extremity. é, Ireland, aet. 40. M. Quadriceps flexor cubiti. , VOLe SLV., Ph, ocbe 4 Trans. N. Y. AcApD. Scr. eh Se % i Hy ~~ om ia < ( a AL “onl: ’ ‘ 7 s r 7 1 oh Dan ‘i ' . = a f lel > J 1 4 . ’ ¢ ' . PLATE XLII. Right upper extremity. &, Germany, aet. 62. M. Quadriceps flexor cubiti. Vor.) X#V., Pus SUE Trans. N. Y. ACAD. Sct. it fi ' a ‘ i , 7 2 " a) ma Ca We 7 ; i at u \ans - A ate is , " Pa Ae? \ * . 1 ~ a . ’ , * sf \ + . id >. : A . aa i PLATE XLIII. Right upper extremity. é, U.S. white, aet. 63. M. Quadriceps flexor cubiti. Vout. XIV., Pu. XLII. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. ScI. A i ; ‘ i : . (oy Pe ——_ a = * - = iy a ,% f ae % . . ‘ a Me mM) 4 ne! ‘ ? ' * a ' . “f gots ’ ' . . ¥ . . i . ° ' 1 . / > . . * i fia ; _ : PRATER xuny: Left upper extremity. ¢, U.S. white, aet. 26.- M. Quadriceps flexor cubiti. Trans. N. Y. AcAp. SctI. Vou. XIV., PL - KLIV. PLATE, XLV. Right upper extremity. | 6, Assyria, aet. 28. = M. Brachialis accessorius, jointyey insertion of Biceps. PLATE XIVI. Left upper extremity. S$, Ireland, aet. 67. Gleno-uluar and Coraco-ulnar muscles, complete form, with distal por- tions persistent. VOL: ehVe, EE. LVI. PLATE XLVILI. Right upper extremity. ©, Ireland, aet. 54. Connection of Biceps and Brachialis anticus, with complete derivation of semilunar fascia from the latter muscle. ANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Wor MEVePIN REVEL FIG. FIG. Fie. FIa. Fig. we) EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLVIII. Clonograptus proximatus n. sp.——a. Hydrosome, mag. {——b. Upper branch on the patent side, mag. ¢ to show the cells. ——e. Young hydrosome, mag. 7? showing secondary branches——d. Young hydrosome, mag. 7 showing tertiary and quarternary branches. From. Div. 3c, Navy Id. See p. 265. Bryograptus lentus n. sp. a. hydrosome (part) mag. } b. Branch enlarged to show cells. Mag. ?. From Div. 3c, Navy Id. See p. 270. Bryograptus spinosus Matt.—a. hydrosome, mag. 7——b. Branch enlarged to show cells. Mag. ¢. From Div. 3c, Navy Id. See p. 269. Bryograptus patens Matt.——a. hydrosome, mag. }? b. Branch enlarged to show cells. Mag. 4——c. Young hydrosome, mag. {, showing quarternary branches. From Div. 3e, Navy Id. See p. 268. Callograptus sp. Mag. 2. From Div. 3c, Navy Id. See p. 271. Vou. XIV., Pt. XLVIII. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. Sct. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLIX. Fie. 1. Dictyonema flabelliforme Eichw. Hydrosome. Nat. size. Show- ing the root-like extension of the proximate end of the hydrosome. Fic. 2. A larger example of the same variety. Both from Div. 3c, Navy Island, St. John Harbor. N. B.—These figures were traced by Mr. Gilbert van Ingen from a photo- graph. TRANS. N. Y. ACAD. SCI. Vou. XIV., Pu. XLIX. Oh ie ly it et Shea Pepe ny. | v) ‘ty f et Ore ae ee aL A sh ee : i 4 ’ = NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES CATALOGUE OF EXHIBITS March 13th, 1895 PAY, Ot Onna (MSE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECOND ANNUAL RECEPTION nd Exhibit of Recent Progress in Science, in the Galleries of The American Fine Arts Society 215 WEST 57TH STREET March 13th, 1895 The Rnickerbocker Press, Hew Work New. York ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. FOUNDED IN 1817 ORGANIZATION. The Academy is fourth in point of age among the American scientific societies. It was organized in 1817 as the Lyceum of Natural History, and the present title was adopted in 1876. The _ constitution and organization are designed to make the Academy broadly representative of Science. The meetings and publica- tions of the Academy are therefore open to all departments of scientific research. The former Presidents have been: Dr. Samuel L. Mitchill, 1817-1823. Professor John Torrey, 1824-1826; 1836. Major Joseph Delafield, 1827-1837; 1839-1865. Professor Charles A. Joy, 1866-1867. Professor John S. Newberry, 1868-1892. Professor O. P. Hubbard, 1892-1893. Dr. H. Carrington Bolton, 1893-1894. MEMBERSHIP. Honorary Members are limited to fifty in number, and are elected from the representative scientific men of the world. Corresponding Members are also chosen from distinguished men in different parts of the world who engage in the prosecution of 4 POPULAR LECTURES. The Academy is largely aided in its scientific work by its general membership, and the course of illustrated popular lectures arranged for each winter is specially for the benefit of the general Members and of the public. The subjects of the lectures are chosen from different branches of science, and are designed to present in a popular manner the latest results of research. Each Member receives two Course tickets, and additional tickets can be procured. During the present year, 1894-5, the lectures are being delivered in the large hall of the New York Academy of Medicine. Persons desiring to join the Academy or support its scientific work by subscription should address, THE SECRETARY, New York Academy of Sciences, COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW YORK CITY. OFPBIGERS OF TEE ACADEMY, 1895-6. President, Ji Ke Rees: First Vice-President, Second Vice-President, H. F. Osborn. J. J. Stevenson. Corresponding Secretary, D. S. Martin. Recording Secretary, J. F. Kemp. Treasurer, C. F. Cox. Librarian, Arthur Hollick. COUNCILLORS. oe. ellen, N. L. Britton, Bashford Dean, William Hallock, William Stratford, R. S. Woodward. CURATORS. H. G. Dyar, L. Ha Laudy, G. F. Kunz, Heinrich Ries, W. D. Schoonmaker. FINANCE COMMITTEE. Henry Dudley, f; ti.Hinton, Cornelius Van Brunt. OFFICERS OF THE SECTIONS, 1894-5. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS. Prof. J. K. Rees, Chairman. Prof. W. Hallock, Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. Prof. R. P. Whitfield, Chazrman. Prof. J. F. Kemp, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. Prof. N. L. Britton, Chairman. Dr. Bashford Dean, Secretary. COMMITTEE OF ARRANGEMENTS. William Hallock, Charles F. Cox, Bashford Dean, Frederic S. Lee, John K. Rees, James F. Kemp, N. L. Britton. HONORARY COMMITTEE OF MEMBERS. Seth Low, Abram S. Hewett, Morris K. Jesup, Rutherfurd Stuyvesant, William E. Dodge, Samuel Sloan, J. Pierpont Morgan, Charles P. Daly, W. C. Schermerhorn, George J. Gould. ZOOLOGY BIOLOGY Pee ANATOMY TOLOGY Vanderbilt Gallery MINERALOGY BOTANY GEOLOGY PHOTOGRAPHY PHOTOGRAPH PHYSIOLOGY West Middle East Gallery PSYCHOLOGY at GY ELECTRICITY ASTRONOMY South MECHANICS Gallery PHYSICS CHEMISTRY At vil, Seah hy veel OMA TELS Rian Wea Lae iw) De at Ny ts ira Dares SDP Ded pels nD ee ae Ware raltAly hat DEPARTMENT OF PHY SIES:. In charge of Prof. Alfred M. Mayer. 1. DIVIDED CIRCLE, and mechanism giving the angle of refrac- tion for any angle of incidence. 2. DIVIDED CIRCLE, and mechanism giving the angle of refrac- tion for any angle of incidence, and showing the directions of the incident and refracted rays. 3. A series of CHLADNI FIGURES preserved in sand by Prof. Mayer’s process. Illustrating the vibrations of plates, and the errors of older figures, and the coincidence between the present figures and Lord Rayleigh’s theoretical deductions. 4. POLARISCOPE with special lenses, giving very large field for work on crystals. Nos. I to 4 are exhibited by Prof. A. M. Mayer. 5. ABBE REFRACTOMETER for determining the index of refrac- tion and dispersion of liquids at various temperatures. 6. KOHLRANSCH TOTALREFLECTOMETER for determining the index of refraction of substances by totalreflection. 7. LARGE SPECTROSCOPE for high dispersion and large field, used in recent color investigations of R. Gordon and W. Hallock. 8. READING TELESCOPE by Julius Grunow, with a focusing mechanism by separating the elements of the objective. Nos. 5 to 8 are exhibited by the Department of Physics of Columbia College. g. SIMPLEX SPECTROSCOPE, for simpler spectroscopic work, Exhibited by H. Cushman. 10. FIVE-ARC POTENTIOMETER, for comparison of electro-motive forces very accurately. Exhibited by H. Cushman. 7 8 11. HAND-COLORED LANTERN SLIDE of the solar spectrum. Ex- hibited by C. C. Trowbridge. 12. Set of LANTERN SLIDES illustrating some physical phenom- ena. Exhibited by C. C. Trowbridge. 13. AIR PUMP with stopcocks automatically worked as valves. Exhibited by Prof. O. N. Rood. 14. AIR PUMP with stopcock worked by hand asavalve. Ex- hibited by Prof. O. N. Rood. 15. APPARATUS for measuring resistances up to ten million million ohms. Exhibited by H. C. Parker. 16. APPARATUS for measuring resistances as lowas one millionth of anohm. Exhibited by H. C. Parker. 17. APPARATUS for analysis of sound by resonance, used in inves- tigating the use of the mouth and nose cavities in articulating and singing; with photographs of voices. Exhibited by Dr. Floyd S. Muckey and Dr. W. Hallock. 18. APPARATUS for comparing the rate of vibration of two tuning- forks by the photography of manometric flames; with nega- tives. Exhibited by Prof. W. Hallock. 19. IMPROVED KEY for certain electrical work. Exhibited by H. Cushman. 20. SEGER’S PYRAMIDS. Test pieces of different mixtures of feld- spar, clay, limestone, and quartz. Each of these test pieces has a different melting-point, thus forming a series which can be used in a furnace to record the temperature. 21. SIEMENS’S WATER PYROMETER. A copper vessel protected by felt, and containing a definite amount of water whose initial temperature is recorded by a thermometer. Into this water is plunged a copper or platinum cylinder of given weight and of the same temperature as the furnace into which it was previ- ously placed. From the rise of temperature of the water, the temperature of the furnace is calculated. 22. HOBSON’S PYROMETER consists of a copper tube with wooden handle at one side, having a thermometer at the outer end and 9 an opening for the admission of cold air. By regulating the size of this opening, sufficient cold air lowers the temperature of the heated blast so that it can be read by means of the ordi- nary mercurial thermometer. By knowing the amount of di- lution by cold air, the temperature of the heated blast can be approximated. 23. MESURE AND NOUEL’S OPTICAL PYROMETER. This pyrome- ter is based upon the refractive power of quartz for rays of light of different intensities. The angle of rotation is measured by two Nicols prisms, and serves as a measure of temperature. 24. LE CHATELIER AND CORNU’S PHOTOMETRIC PYROMETER consists of a photometer so arranged to compare the intensity of the luminous rays of light projected from a standard lamp flame with the rays of light issuing from the furnace or other heated object. The degree of adjustment of the aperture through which the furnace rays pass in order to equalize the intensities of the rays of light serves to measure the tempera- ture. 25. LE CHATELIER’S THERMO-ELECTRIC PYROMETER consists of two wires, forming the thermo couple, which produces the elec- tric current when introduced into a furnace or flame, the gal- vanometer, which measures the current produced ; and the wires connecting both. The intensity of the current produced is re- sultant upon the temperature of the thermo couple in the fur- nace, and thus serves to measure it. Nos. 20 to 25 are exhibited by J. Struthers. 26. HELIOSTAT. A modification of the Foucault form; made by the Geneva Optical Co. Exhibited by Dr. William Stratford. 27. MICROSCOPE STAGE. For photomicrography and measuring objects. Exhibited by Dr. William Stratford. 28. RULING MACHINE. Invented by Dr. Irvin Sickels. Rules on metal or glass, micrometers or gratings, I to 24,000 lines to the inch. Exhibited by Dr. William Stratford. 29. PANORAMA mounting of Rowland’s photographs of the grat- ing solar spectrum. Exhibited by W. Hallock. IG DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICITY. In charge of Prof. F. B. Crocker. 30. Two MACHINES for producing alternating currents of various frequencies, for multiplex telegraphy and other purposes. 31. ELECTROMETER for measuring low-voltage alternating cur- rents. 32. MULTICELLULAR ELECTROSTATIC VOLTMETER. 33. SPEED INDICATOR operating by sound resonance. 34. AIR-CONDENSERS. 35. UNIPOLAR Dynamo. A new type now being developed. Nos. 30-35 exhibited by Prof. M. I. Pupin. 36. MODEL showing construction of latest type of armature for dynamos and motors. 37. COMMUTATORS OF ELECTRIC Motors, showing peculiar effect of wear. 38. STANDARD INTERNATIONAL OHM recently legalized in the United States and other countries. 39. WATT METER for measuring the power of alternating and direct currents. 40. ELECTRO-DYNAMOMETERS for measuring alternating and direct currents. Nos. 36-40 exhibited by Prof. F. B. Crocker. 41. THE MANUFACTURE and application of disinfectants pro- duced by electrolysis of salt water. Exhibited by A. E. Woolf. 42. CALCIUM CARBIDE, made in electric furnace and used to pro- duce acetylene gas for illumination. Exhibited by E. N. Dickerson. 43. APPARATUS for determining permeability of iron and steel. Exhibited by Max Osterberg. eo II DEPARTMENT OF ASTRONOMY. In charge of Mr. Charles A. Post. 44. PHOTOGRAPHS OF STELLAR SPECTRA. Showing spectrum between F. and D.—that portion most easily observed by the eye. These plates are important as an evidence that pho- tography is superior to the eye, even on its own ground. Ex- hibited by Prof. James E. Keeler, Allegheny Observatory. 44a. GLASS POSITIVES of Comets and of the Milky Way, made with 6-inch Willard Portrait lens of 31 inches focus. Exhibited by Prof. E. E. Barnard, of the Lick Observatory. 446. PHOTOGRAPHS OF DRAWINGS OF Mars. By Percival Lowell, Lowell Observatory. 45. PHOTOGRAPHS OF LIGHTNING. Exhibited by Samuel W. Bridgham, M.E., President New York Camera Club. 46. PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SUN DURING TRANSIT OF MERCURY, November 10, 1895. Showing an approximate method of de- termining the heliographic latitude and longitude of a point on the sun’s disc. Exhibited by Charles A. Post, Strandhome Observatory. 47. IMPROVED FORM OF SMALL TELESPECTROSCOPE. By John A. Brashear. Exhibited by Charles A. Post. There are exhibited by the Columbia College Observatory, J. K. Rees, Director, the following: 48. MEASURING (MICROMETER) MACHINE FOR ASTRONOMICAL PHOTOGRAPHS. By Repsold & Sons, of Hamburg. 49. REFLECTING CIRCLE, with stand and new form of Artificial Horizon. By Wanschaff, of Berlin. 50. SEVERAL PHOTOGRAPHS, made by the astronomers of the Lick Observatory, of the Moon, Sun’s Corona, and Comets. 51. A LARGE POSITION MICROMETER of new design, by Saeg- muller, of Washington. 52. A NEW EIGHT-INCH ASTRONOMICAL THEODOLITE, by Saeg- muller. 35. A SMALL FouR-INCH THEODOLITE, by Saegmuller. 12 54. A NEw INSTRUMENT to determine time, longitude, and lati- tude, by Saegmuller. 55. ENGINEERS’ TRANSIT, with “ solar,’ num, by Saegmuller. > made of silver alumi- DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICS. In charge of Prof. R. S. Woodward. 56. Model of INTERNATIONAL PROTOTYPE METRES. 57. Model of INTERNATIONAL PROTOTYPE KILOGRAMMES. These Prototype Metres and Kilogrammes have been adopted as standards of length and mass, respectively, by nearly allnations. They were adopted as the official standards of the United States April 5, 1893. 58. AUTOMATIC MERCURY VACUUM PUMP. Designed by Pro- fessor Pupin. 59. Models of FORCING AND LIFTING PUMPS. 60. Model of BRAMAH’S HYDROSTATIC PRESS. 61. Two forms of GYROSCOPES. 62. HYPOCYCLOIDAL LINK. 63. PARALLEL LINK MOTION MACHINE. 64. Aggregation of different kinds of GEARING. 65. ELLIPTICAL GEARING. 66. IRREGULAR GEARING. 67. FERGUSON’S PARADOX. 68. “ MULTIPLE GEARING.” DEPARTMENT OF EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. In charge of Dr. Livingston Ferrand. 69. SPECIAL APPARATUS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF THE AFTER-IMAGE THRESHOLD. Designed by Mr. S. I. Franz, Columbia College. This apparatus is used to give stimuli of light, (a) of different intensities, (b) of different areas, and (c) of different lengths of exposure, to the eye of an observer. 13 70. GRAVITY CHRONOMETER. Used for measuring, by means of a falling screen, very small times of exposure of an object to the eye. 71. TACHISTOSCOPE. Designed by Dr. Harold Griffing, Columbia College. Constructed on the principle of the above-mentioned chronometer. The object of this instrument is to expose letters for a tenth of asecond. Is being used in a special in- vestigation of the accuracy of perception at different ages. 72. HARMONIUM. In which the intervals are not equal, but in which they stand in the relation to each other required by theory. 73. KYMOGRAPH. With electric motor attachment, of a very high rate of speed, with fixed drum and movable carriage. DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY. In charge of Dr. John G. Curtis. 74. MODELS of the brain and other organs illustrating the use of - inexpensive materials for purposes of physiological teaching. Exhibited by Prof. W. Gilman Thompson, M.D., of the Medi- cal Department of the University of the City of New York. 75. KUHNE’S SCHEMATIC EYE and accessories. 76. VON HELMHOLTZ’S working model of the ossicles of the human ear. 77. APPARATUS to illustrate a well-known optical delusion. 78. APPARATUS for the study of the contraction of muscle, as follows: Ludwig’s drum myograph. Basel stand. Moist chamber and muscle-forceps. Tigerstedt’s muscle-lever. du Bois Reymond’s induction coil. du Bois Reymond’s friction-key. du Bois Reymond’s mercurial key. Pfeil’s chronograph (2 specimens). 14 Electric tuning-fork of one hundred complete vibrations in one second. Morse key. Numbers 75 to 78, inclusive, exhibited by the Department of Physiology of Columbia College at the College of Physicians and Surgeons, New York. DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY. In charge of Dr. Carlton C. Curtis. 79. STUDIES IN THE GENUS RANUNCULUS. Prof. N. L. Britton. Exhibit of some of the rare and little known species, with an undescribed form from Virginia. 80. STUDIES IN AMERICAN BRYOLOGY. By Elizabeth G. Britton. 1) A hybrid moss. The normal sporophyte and the hybrid occurring on the same plant of Aphanorhegma serrata. Exhibits: The specimens collected by Drummond, the slides under the microscope, and drawings made from these slides. 2) Physcomitrella patens, its systematic position. Exhibits: Specimens, slides, and drawings are shown to prove that it has been wrongly placed among the cleisto- carpous mosses, and that its natural alliance is with the Funariacez, to which it is closely related through its gametophyte. 81. STUDIES IN THE FLORA OF BOLIVIA. Prof. Henry H. Rusby, Exhibit of undescribed species from the Eastern Cordillera. 82. STUDIES OF THE NORTH AMERICAN LEGUMINOS&. Anna Murray Vail. Exhibit of undescribed and little known species. 82a. STUDIES OF THE NORTH AMERICAN SAXI FRAGACEA. Dr. Wm. E. Wheelock. Exhibit of little known species. 83. STUDY OF THE EAST AMERICAN SPECIES OF SANICULA. Eugene P. Bicknell. Exhibit of specimens and drawings illus- trating the four recognized species, two of which are un- described. 15 84. STUDY OF THE FLORA OF CENTRAL FLORIDA. George V. Nash. Exhibit of species new to science. 85. STUDIES IN THE BOTANY OF THE SOUTHEASTERN STATES. John K. Small. Exhibit of species new to science. 86. STUDY OF THE LICHENS OF NORTHEASTERN NORTH AMERICA. Dr. Albert Schneider. Exhibit of microscopic preparations and drawings illustrating some of the more inter- esting genera. 87. STUDY OF STIPULES. A. A. Tyler. Exhibit of numerous species bearing these organs, with sketches showing their attachment. 88. NEW JAPANESE CHARACE%. Dr. Timothy F. Allen. Ex- hibit of new and interesting species, with microscopic prepa- rations of fruit and oospores. 89. TREATMENT OF DELICATE TISSUES. Dr. Carlton C. Curtis. 1) A simple dehydrating apparatus. 2) A convenient mould for imbedding. 3) An easily constructed settling tube. 4) Trichomic development of Primuda. g0. FORMATION OF POLLEN GRAINS. Dr. M. Rubino. 1) Mother cell preparatory to division. 2) Tetramerous stage of the mother cell. 91. STRUCTURE OF POLLEN GRAINS. Dr. Smith Ely Jelliffe. 92. CUTICULARIZATION OF THE EPIDERMAL SYSTEM. A. E. Anderson. 1) Superficial cutinization in Ageve. 2) Circular cutinization in Adzes. Employing a modifica- tion of Gram’s method. 3) Formation of Stomata in Sedum, microscopic prepara- tions and plates illustrating mechanism and structure. 93. ALEURONE GRAINS. C. W. Ogden, Jr. ° 1) Modification of grains in Paonia. 2) Component factors of grains in Bertholletza. 94. VALLISNERIA SPIRALIS: Anatomy and Developmental History of Fruit, Seed, and Embryo. Effie A. Southworth. 16 95. ARACHIS HYPOGHA: Anatomy and Physiology of the Gynophore. Anna S. Pettit. 96. STUDY OF THE VARIOUS SECRETORY ORGANS OF PLANTS OF THE FAMILY LEGUMINOS#. Bertha M. Dow. 97. COMPARATIVE STUDY OF THE PERIDEUM: The develop- ment in different species indicating the degree of relationship. Alexander Taylor. 99. MANNER OF GROWTH OF POROUS DUCTS OF THE GENUS Rosa. Agnes Pearson. DEPARTMENT OF AN Al Om ve In charge of Prof. Geo. S. Huntington. The series exhibited illustrates the development and the com- parative morphology of the ileo-colic junction, cecum and vermi- form appendix, and the arrangement of the investing peritoneum. The peritoneal relations of the adult human czecum and appendix present a number of variations, which are important factors in determining the position and arrangement of the structures. The peritoneal folds connecting the terminal ileum with the czecum and appendix are usually fused with each other and with adjacent serous surfaces in the adult human subject and in the anthropoid apes in such a manner as to render their correct inter- pretation a difficult matter, which can only be properly elucidated by reference to the development of the parts, and by comparison with the similar structures in lower forms. The details and re- sults of a research based in part on the preparations exhibited are given in a publication entitled ‘“‘ Studies in the Development of the Alimentary Canal. I. Caecum and Vermiform Appendix.” New York, 1894. Report of Embryologist, Society of the New York Lying-in-Hospital. 100. I. ILEO-COLIC JUNCTION IN FISHES, AMPHIBIA, AND REPTILES. In Fishes there is rarely a separation between the small and large intestine. The entire canal is short, provided in some forms (Sharks) with a spiral valve for the purpose of 17 retarding the movement of contents. The Sturgeon (Aci- penser Sturio) presents a differentiation between large and small intestine, marked by a valve resembling the pylorus. In Amphibia the alimentary canal is simple, without caecum, and usually short. Among Reptiles only the Land-turtles, some Ophidia, and some Saurians, like Lacerta, Iguana, Polychros, Draco, Chameleo, Seps, Scincus, possess a czecum. Nos. I-13. & WwW NS oon awn 10 aie 12 13 fol. Salmo fontinalis, Brook Trout. Alimentary Tract. Rana catesbiana, Bull Frog. Alimentary Tract. Boa constrictor, Black Boa. Intestine. Boa constrictor, Black Boa. Intestine opened, showing spi- ral valve in interior. Chrysemys picta, Mud Turtle. Alimentary Tract. Alligator mississippiensis, Alligator. Alimentary Tract. Alligator mississippiensis, Alligator. Alimentary Tract. Alligator mississippiensis, Alligator. Alimentary Tract. Alligator mississippiensis, Alligator. Ileo-colon. Iguana tuberculata, Iguana. Ileo-colon. Iguana tuberculata, Iguana. [Ileo-colon. Iguana tuberculata, Iguana. Ileo-colon. Iguana tuberculata, Iguana. Ileo-colon. II. ILEO-COLIC JUNCTION IN BIRDS. In Birds the length of the intestine varies very much. It is short in species living on fruits and insects, long in those feeding on seeds, plants, and fish. Peculiar to Birds are the double ceca which are usually found. In the Passer- ine Birds, living on seeds and insects, the cecal pouches are commonly short and rudimentary, as they are also in some of the piscivorous divers, Alca, Larus, and Pelargus. They are very long in the Ostrich, in Rhea, Apteryx, and the Lamellirostra, who feed chiefly on plants. Some car- nivorous birds, as Corvus, Strix, etc., have fairly long ceca, although as a rule carnivorous forms have short pouches, whereas they are long in herbivorous birds. In some (Ostrich) the czeca contain a spiral valve. In place of the usual double pouch a single czcum is at 18 times found, as in Cicinia and Ardea. In some forms the small intestine presents also a cecal appendage, the re- mains of the vitelline duct (Urinator). This condition is also at times observed in man, constituting the so-called Diverticulum of Meckel. (Nos. 14-21). 14 | Casuarius casuarius, Cassowary. Ileo-colon and cecal pouches. 15 | Casuarius casuarius, Cassowary. lIleo-colon and cecal pouches. 16 | Dromaius nove-hollandie, Emu. TIleo-colon and cecal pouches. 17 | Bubo virginianus, Great-horned Owl. Ileo-colon and cecal pouches. 18 | Bubo virginianus, Great-horned Owl. Ileo-colon and cecal pouches. 19 | Urinator lumme, Red-shouldered Loon. Ileo-colon and czecal pouches. | 20 | Urinator lumme. Red-shouldered Loon. Small intestine with normal cecal pouch, the remains of vitelline duct. 21 | Human, adult. Small intestine presents a Meckel’s diver- ticulum, the remains of the vitelline duct, normally obliterated completely in Mammals. 102. III. ILEO-COLIC JUNCTION, CHCUM AND VERMIFORM AP- PENDIX IN MAMMALS. The mammalian alimentary tract usually presents a cecum in some form. Exceptions to this rule: The orders Insectivora and Chiroptera, in which the absence of a cecum is characteristic. (No. 93.) There are also isolated instances of the lack of this structure in other orders, notably in several Cetaceans, Physeter macrocephalus, Delphinus delphis, Monodon monoceros, Phoceena communis. (No. 49.) Further in some carnivorous Marsupials (Dasyurus), in the single instance of Myoxus among Rodents, in certain Edentates, Tardigrada, and Manidz, and in the carnivorous group of the Arctoidea. Nos. 28-32, 35, 36, 74-87. = ee ae 19 DIDELPHIA. Marsupatia. Czcum large in the Didelphidez, Opossums (Nos. 22-25), and Macropodidez, Kangaroos (Nos. 26, 27). Absent in Dasyuride. Provided with a vermiform appendix in the Wombat, Phascolomys ursinus. 22 | Didelphis virginiana, Opossum. Ileo-caeecum. 23 | Didelphis virginiana, Opossum. Ileo-cecum. 24 | Didelphis virginiana, Opossum. Ileo-cazecum. 25 | Didelphis sp.P Banana Opossum. Ileo-czecum. 26 | Halmaturus derbyanus, Rock Kangaroo. Ileo-czecum. 27 | Halmaturus derbyanus, Rock Kangaroo. Ileo-czecum. MONODELPHIA. Edentata. A. Phytophaga, or Vegetable Feeders. Tardigrada, Czecum absent. "2g | Cholcepus didactylus, Two-toed Sloth. Ileo-colon. 28a| Choloepus didactylus, Two-toed Sloth. Ileo-colon. B. Entomophaga, or Insect Feeders. I. Mutica. 28- | Myrmecophaga didactyla, Two-toed Ant-Eater. Two cecal pouches. 29 | Myrmecophaga jubata, Great Ant-Eater. Ileo-colon; cecum absent. Myrmecophaga jubata, Great Ant-Eater. Ileo-colon; cecum absent. 31 | Myrmecophaga jubata, Great Ant-Eater. Ileo-colon; cecum absent. 30 2. Squamata. 32 | Manis longicauda, Long-tailed Pangolin. Ileo-colon; caecum absent. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 20 3. Loricata. Dasypodide, Armadillos. Dasypus. Lateral colic ceca (Nos. 33, 34). Tolypeutes. No colic ceca. Xenurus. No colic ceca. Chlamydophorus. Lateral colic ceca. Tatusia. No colic ceca (Nos. 35, 36). Dasypus sexcinctus, 6-banded Armadillo. Dasypus sexcinctus, 6-banded Armadillo. Tatusia novemcincta, 9-banded Armadillo. Tatusia novemcincta, 9-banded Armadillo. NON DECIDUATA. Ungulata. Intestine very generally provided with a large czecum. Perissodactyla. I. Equide, Horses. Czcum very large. 2. Rhinocerotidez, Rhinoceros. Czecum very large. 3. Tapiride, Tapirs. Czecum large, with rudimentary ap- pendix; colon looped. Tapirus americanus, Tapir. Ileo-czecum. Tapirus americanus, Tapir. Ileo-caecum. Tapirus americanus, Tapir. Ileo-caecum. Artiodactyla. A. Non-Ruminantia. 1. Suide, Hogs. Czcum present (Nos. 40, 41). 2. Hippopotamide, Hippopotamus. Czecum absent. Sus scrofa, Foetal Pig. Ileo-caecum in situ. Dicotyles torquatus, Collared Peccary. Ileo-caecum. B. Ruminantia. Czecum large; colon spirally coiled. Auchenia glama, Llama. Ileo-caecum and colon. Bos indicus, Zebu, neonat. Ileo-cazcum and colon. 432| Bos indicus, Zebu, neonat. Ileo-cazcum and colon. ee 21 436| Bos indicus, Zebu, neonat. Ileo-czecum and colon. 44 | Capra hircus, var. angorensis, Angora Goat. Ileo-caecum and colon. 45 | Boselaphus tragocamelus, Nilghai. Ileo-czecum and colon. 46 | Capra cegagrus, Bezoar Goat. Ileo-czcum and colon. Sirenta. Czecum short, bifid. 47 | Manatus americanus, Manatee. Ileo-czecum. 48 | Manatus americanus, Manatee. Ileo-czeecum. Cetacea. Czcum absent in several. Physeter, Delphinus, Monodon, Phoczna. 49 | Phocena communis, Common Porpoise. No demarcation between large and small intestine. DECIDUATA. A. Zonaria. Fyracoidea. Hyrax; Intestine presents three ceca, one in the ordinary position, and two others much lower down on the colon—oppo- site one another, terminating by pointed ends. Proboscidea. Czcum very large. 50 | Elephas indicus, Indian Elephant. Ileo-cecum, anterior surface. 51 | Elephas indicus, Indian Elephant. lIleo-cecum, lateral surface. 52 | Elephas indicus, Indian Elephant. Ileo-cecum, posterior surface. Carnivora. A. Pinnipedia, Czcum small. 53 | Phoca vitulina, Harbor Seal. Ileo-czecum. 54 | Phoca vitulina, Harbor Seal. Ileo-czcum. 22 55 | Phoca vitulina, Harbor Seal. Ileo-czecum. 56 | Phoca vitulina, Harbor Seal. Ileo-czecum. 57 | Otaria gillespiei, Gillespie’s Sea Lion. Ileo-ceecum. B. Fissipedia, The Cynoidea, including dogs, jackals, foxes, and wolves, form a well marked central group, with highly developed convoluted czca, placed laterally to the intestinal lumen (Nos. 58-63). From this type depart on the one hand the Az/urozdea, includ- ing civets and cats, with cecum uniformly present, but short and markedly pointed, suggesting the degeneration of a formerly more developed structure (Nos. 64-73), while on the other the Arctozdea, including bears, weasles, and raccoons, constitute a group bound together by many common fundamental peculiarities of structure, among which is the complete absence of a cecal appendage to the intestinal tract (Nos. 74-87). Among the Azluroidea, Hyena occupies an isolated position in reference to the cawcum, possessing a well-marked pouch, with blunt extremity, resembling the structure in Didelphis (No. 73). CYNOIDEA. 58 | Canis familiaris, Dog. Ileo-czecum. 59 | Canis familiaris, Dog. Ileo-czecum. 60 | Canis familiaris, Dog, foetal. Ileo-czecum in situ. 61 | Vulpes fulvus, Gray Fox. Ileo-czecum. 62 | Vulpes fulvus, Gray Fox. Ileo-czecum. 63 | Vulpes fulvus, Gray Fox. Ileo-cecum. AILUROIDEA. 64 | Felis domesticus, Common Cat. Ileo-czecum. 6s | Felis domesticus, Common Cat. Ileo-czcum. 66 | Felis domesticus, Common Cat. Ileo-czecum. 67 | Felis borealis, Canada Lynx. Ileo-czecum. 68 | Felis concolor, Puma. Ileo-czcum. 69 | Herpestes griseus, Ichneumon. Ileo-czecum. 70 | Herpestes sp. ? Ileo-czecum. 71 | Paradoxurus typus, Paradoxure. Ileo-cecum. 72 | Paradoxurus trivirgatus, 3-striped Paradoxure. Ileo-czecum. 73 | Hyena striata, Striped Hyzna. Ileo-czecum. 74 vis 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 go gi 92 93 23 ARCTOIDEA. Ursus americanus, Black Bear. Ileo-colon. Ursus americanus, Black Bear. Ileo-colon. Ursus arctos, Brown Bear. Ileo-colon. Ursus maritimus, Polar Bear. Ileo-colon. Ursus maritimus, Polar Bear. Ileo-colon. Procyon lotor, Racoon. Ileo-colon. Procyon lotor, Racoon. Ileo-colon. Nasua rufa, Coati. Ileo-colon. Nasua rufa, Coati. Ileo-colon. Taxidea americana, Badger. Ileo-colon. Cercoleptes caudivolvulus, Kinkajou. Ileo-colon. Bassaris astuta, Racoon-fox. Ileo-colon. Bassaris astuta, Racoon-fox. Ileo-colon. Bassaris astuta, Racoon-fox. Ileo-colon. B. Discoidea. Rodentia. With the exception of one group, the Doormice, Myoxine, all Rodents have a large cecum, presenting in some forms (Lepus) an appendage. Nos. 88-92. Hystrix cristata, European Porcupine. Ileo-czecum. Erethizon dorsatus, Canada Porcupine. Ileo-caecum. Dasyprocta aguti, Agouti. Ileo-cecum. Sciurus hudsonicus, Red Squirrel. Ileo-caecum. Arvicola pennsylvanicus, Meadow Mouse. Ileo-caecum. Insectivora. Czecum absent. Chetroptera. Czecum absent. Pteropus medius, Fruit Bat. Ileo-colon. Primates. Czcum present. Vermiform appendix in Nycticebus, Go- rilla, Chimpanzee, Orang, Gibbou, and Man. 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 IoI 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 IIo leet 112 113 114 II5 116 117 118 24 Simtade. 1. Arctopithecini—Marmosets. Czcum long, curved, uncinate, and somewhat diminished at distal end. Midas ursulus, Negro Tamarin. Ileo-czecum. Midas geoffroyi, Geoffroy’s Marmoset. Ileo-czecum. Hapale jacchus, Common Marmoset. Ileo-czecum. Hapale cedipus, Marmoset. Ileo-caecum. Harpale sp.? Marmoset.? Ileo-czecum. 2. Platyrrhini—New- World Monkeys. Caecum long, curved, somewhat pointed at distal extremity. Ateles geoffroyi, Black-handed Spider Monkey. Ileo-caecum. Ateles ater, Black-faced Coaita. Ileo-czcum. Ateles ater, Black-faced Coaita. Ileo-czecum. Ateles sp.? Ileo-czecum. Ateles sp.? Ileo-czecum. Pithecia satanas, Black Saki Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Pithecia satanas, Black Saki Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Mycetes fuscus, Brown Howler Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Nyctipithecus commersonii, Vitce Monkey. Ileo-caecum. Cebide. Czcum lateral to lumen of intestine, as in Cynoidea, at times presenting a tendency to convolution. Cebus leucophzus, Cebus Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus monachus, Cebus Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus capucinus, Capuchin Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus capucinus, Capuchin Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus capucinus, Capuchin Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus capucinus, Capuchin Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus niger, Black Cebus Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus hypoleucus, White-throated Sapajou. Ileo-cazecum. Cebus hypoleucus, White-throated Sapajou. Ileo-czecum. Cebus apella, Apella Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Cebus leucocephalus, White-headed Cebus. Ileo-cazecum. 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 1351 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 25 Cebus flavescens, Pale Cebus. Ileo-czcum. Cebus sp.? Ileo-czecum. Cebus sp.? Ileo-czecum. 3. Catarrhini.—Old World Monkeys. a. Cynomorpha, Czcum usually large, short, blunt-pointed. Macacus rhesus, Rhesus Monkey. Ileo-czcum. Macacus pileatus, Capped Macaque. Ileo-caecum. Macacus pileatus, Capped Macaque. Ileo-czecum. Macacus pileatus, Capped Macaque. Ileo-caecum. Macacus nemestrinus, Bruh Monkey. [Ileo-czecum. Macacus ochreatus, Ashy-black Macaque. Ileo-czecum. Macacus cynomolgus, Kra Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Macacus cynomolgus, Kra Monkey. Ileo-czecum. Mycacus sinicus, Bonnet Macaque. Ileo-czcum. Cynocephalus hamadryas, Arabian Baboon. Ileo-ceecum. Cynocephalus hamadryas, Arabian Baboon. Ileo-czecum. Cynocephalus sphinx, Papion. Ileo-caecum. Cynocephalus sphinx, Papion. Ileo-caecum. Cynocephalus sphinx, Papion. Ileo-czecum. Cynocephalus babouin, Yellow Baboon. Ileo-czecum. Cynocephalus porcarius, Chacma Baboon. Ileo-czcum. Cynocephalus porcarius, Chacma Baboon. Ileo-ceecum. Cynocephalus porcarius, Chacma Baboon. Ileo-caeecum. Cercopithecus callitrichus, Green Monkey. Ileo-cecum. Cercopithecus pogonias, Bearded Monkey. Ileo-czecum. b. Anthropomorpha, __ Czcum large, provided with a vermiform appendix. Simia satyrus, Orang. Ileo-caeecum. Simia satyrus, Orang. Ileo-caecum. Simia satyrus, Orang. ITleo-czecum. Troglodytes niger, Chimpanzee. Ileo-caecum. Troglodytes niger, Chimpanzee. Ileo-czecum. Troglodytes niger, Chimpanzee. Ileo-cazecum. Troglodytes niger, Chimpanzee. Ileo-czecum. 26 Anthropide. Human foetal cecum and appendix. Nos. 149-162. Human infantile cecum and appendix. Nos. 163-167. Human juvenile cecum and appendix. Nos. 168-170. Human adult czecum and appendix. Nos. 171-193. Human adult cecum, absence of appendix. No. 194. DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY. In charge of Prof. J. A. Allen. Modern Taxidermy. Illustrated by Specimens from the American Museum of Natural History. It is only within the last few years that taxidermy, at least in America, could rightly claim rank as an art. Its recent great improvement in methods and results is largely due to the estab- lishment of departments of taxidermy in our leading museums, enabling the artist-taxidermist to give full scope to his abilities. The specimens shown illustrate the former and present grades of work. 103. The CHIMPANZEE “CHICO” (Anthropopithecus troglodytes), mounted by Mr. J. Rowley, Jr., January, 1895, at the American Museum of Natural History. This example beautifully illus- trates the possibilities of the newer taxidermy. 104. Another CHIMPANZEE, showing the better grade of com- mercial work of ten years ago. To be compared with the preceding. 105. TURKEY (Meleagris gallopavo), showing the modelling of the head and wattles by recent methods. 106. Another TURKEY, illustrating average museum work of ten years ago. 27 107. PIGEONS, to show treatment of wattles by the newer methods. 108. YOUNG FOXES. Recent work. New Species and Subspecies of American Mammals. From Amert- can Museum of Natural History. 109. ARIZONA JACK RABBIT (Lepus allenz, Mearns), the largest and most beautiful Hare known. From Fairbank, Arizona. 110. DESERT KANGAROO RAT (Difodomys desertt, Stephens). III. KANGAROO RAT (Dipodomys spectabilis, Merriam). From Cochise County, Arizona. 112. TEXAS POCKET MOUSE (fPerognathus merriami, Allen). From Brownsville, Texas. 113. TRINIDAD POCKET MOUSE (Heteromy sanomalus). From the island of Trinidad. 114. ROUND-TAILED MUSKRAT (WVeofiber alleni, True). A con- necting link between the common Meadow Mice and the Muskrat. 115. Vectomys palmipes, Allen and Chapman. A _ web-footed WATER RAT, from the island of Trinidad. 116. Two species of PLANTAIN MICE (Oryzomys velutinus, Allen and Chapman, and O. érevicauda, Allen and Chapman). From the island of Trinidad. 117. BLACK-BACKED MOUSE (Evotomys fuscodorsalis, Allen). From New Brunswick. Mammals from the Black Hills Region, South Dakota, showing Influence of Environment. From American Museum of Natural History. 118. WOOD RATS from the wooded Black Hills and from the adjoining plains to the eastward (Veotoma grangeri, Allen, and NV. rupicola, Allen). II9. GROUND SQUIRRELS, from the wooded Black Hills and the adjoining plains to the eastward ( Tamias quadrivittatus bore- alts, Allen, and 7. minimus). 28 120. WHITE-FOOTED MICE, from the Black Hills (Sztomys amert- canus arcticus) and the adjoining plains to the eastward (S. a. nebracensts.) 121. Specimens of the VARYING HARE (Lepus americanus ), show- ing seasonal change of color by moulting. (See Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vi., 1894, pp. 107-128.) Miscellaneous. From American Museum of Natural FAitstory. 122. MURINE OPOSSUM (Didelphys murina) and young, from the island of Trinidad. Among the smaller species of Opossum are some in which the female has the external abdominal pouch but slightly developed, while in others it is entirely wanting. The young, however, as in the fully pouched species, are born at a very early stage, and are at once trans- ferred to the nipples of the parent, to which they remain attached until fully developed. 123. A series of MOTMOTS (Momotus ceruleiceps ), showing stages in the mutilation of the tails. The Motmots, of which some eighteen species are found in tropical America, are remarkable among birds for their habit of trimming their central tail- feathers. 124. A mounted specimen of the QUEZAL OR PARADISE TROGON (Pharomacrourus paradiseus), showing the effect of continued exposure to the light. 125. A SKIN of the same species, which has been preserved in a cabinet. 126. Specimens of the eastern and western HIGH-HOLES OR FLICKERS (Calaptes auratus and C. cafer). Showing typical examples of both species and hybrids between the two. Where the boundaries of the ranges occupied by these two species adjoin, they apparently hybridize. (See Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Fizst., vol. iv., 1892, pp. 21-44.) 127. Specimens of the SAME SPECIES illustrating the variations in the marking of a single feather. (See Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. FTist., vol. iii., 1891, pp. 311-313.) 29 128. EGGS, and a series of EMBRYOS of the LOGGERHEAD TURTLE ( Thalassochelys cavetta), showing stages of growth for every five days during the period of development in the egg. The Loggerhead Turtle of our South Atlantic coast reaches a weight of five hundred pounds. Its eggs are laid during the summer on the sea beach in a hole dug by the Turtle. Some one hundred and fifty eggs are deposited. They hatch at the end of the sixtieth day, and the young Turtles at once make their way to the sea. The specimens shown were collected by Mrs. F. E. B. Latham, at Micco, Florida. Insects. From American Museum of Natural History. 129. A collection of ORTHOPTERA found within fifty miles of New York City. (See Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. vi., 1894, Pp. 249-316.) 130. TWO MOUNTED HUDSONIAN GODWIT (Limosa hemastica). Adult and young. [Illustrating discovery of the voluntary opening of the extremity of the bill. C. C. Trowbridge (De- partment of Physics, Columbia College.) Exhibit of Brain and Spinal Cord Cells Stained by the Golgi Chrome-Silver Methods. O. S. Strong (Biological Department, Columbia College). 131. CORTEX OF HUMAN CEREBELLUM. A section of the human cerebellum, showing: (1) the outer or molecular layer; (2) the row of Purkinje cells, with the coarser of their protoplasmic processes extending towards the periphery; (3) the granular layer ; and (4) the innermost layer of fibres. This preparation, made by Dr. Piersol and kindly loaned by Dr. Van Gieson, is stained with carminate of soda and shows about all the details that can be shown without the aid of the Golgi preparations. 132a. PURKINJE CELLS OF THE ADULT HUMAN CEREBELLUM. Preparation showing the protoplasmic processes filling the outer or molecular layer of a sulcus of the adult human cerebellum. 1320. NEUROGLIA OR “SPIDER” CELLS OF INNER LAYERS OF HUMAN CEREBELLUM. The heavy black branching processes 30 shown here and in other preparations are capillaries which are also impregnated. Adult human brain. By Strong’s “ forma- lin-bichromate modification.” 133. PURKINJE CELL OF THE ADULT HUMAN CEREBELLUM. Highly magnified portion of the protoplasmic processes of a Purkinje cell, showing their fine granular lateral processes. Prepared by Strong’s “formalin-bichromate modification” of the Golgi method. 134. BASKET NETWORK OF NERVE FIBRES AROUND PURKINJE CELLS—HUMAN CEREBELLUM. The so-called “baskets” in the cerebellum. Fibres running in the molecular layer parallel to the surface send processes at right angles inwards, whose terminations cluster around the bodies of the Purkinje cells, forming the “baskets.” Prepared by means of Strong’s “ for- malin-bichromate modification.” 135a. BASKET NETWORK AROUND PURKINJE CELLS. Individual “basket” fibres, showing the right-angled processes above mentioned. 1355. NEUROGLIA CELLS IN ADULT HUMAN CEREBELLUM. The neuroglia elements in the molecular layer of the adult human cerebellum. They are the parallel vertical fibres, and are pro- cesses of cells whose bodies occupy the same layer as that in which are the bodies of the Purkinje cells. In No. 132 we had only the protoplasmic processes of the Purkinje cells appearing in the molecular layer, while here in one place only or princi- pally the basket fibres and in another place only the glia elements appear. Yet all co-exist side by side in the same cerebellar layer. Formalin-bichromate modification. 136. PYRAMID NERVE CELLS IN CEREBRAL CORTEX OF AN EIGHT-MONTHS’ HUMAN EMBRYO; showing principal pro- toplasmic process proceeding towards the periphery of the brain, accessory protoplasmic processes, and the axis cylinder process proceeding in the opposite direction from the principal protoplasmic process. Prepared by the “rapid Golgi method.” 137. PYRAMID CELLS. Vertical section through the cerebral cortex (anterior calcarine) of an eight-months’ human embryo. Rapid Golgi. 3I 138. PYRAMID CELLS IN THE CEREBRUM OF TADPOLE. Pre- pared by the “ rapid Golgi method.” 139. SPINAL GANGLION NERVE CELLS OF A CHICK, seventh day of incubation. They are seen to be in the primitive bipolar condition, each with one process entering the spinal cord (on the right), and the other proceeding in the opposite direction towards the periphery. Prepared by the “ rapid Golgi method.” 140. SPINAL CORD FIBRES OF A CHICK. Horizontal section through the same cord, showing the bifurcation of the posterior root fibres as they enter the cord. They appear like very wide Y’s. By the “rapid Golgi method.” 141. SPINAL CORD CELLS OF A CHICK. Transverse section through the same cord, showing some of the ependyma cells. lining the central canal and sending long processes through the cord to its periphery. Also showing their cilia projecting into the central canal. By the “rapid Golgi method.” 142. SPINAL CORD CELLS OF AN EMBRYO PIG. Prepared by means of the “ mixed Golgi method.” 143. CORPUS DENTATUM, section through the. Showing the arrangement of its nerve cells and fibres. Eight-months’ human embryo. Rapid Golgi. 144. AXIS-CYLINDERS. Showing their varicosities. Cerebellum of an eight-months’ human embryo. Rapid Golgi. 145. NERVE CELLS IN THE OPTIC THALAMUS. Ejight-months’ human embryo. Rapid Golgi. The preparations are accompanied by explanatory photo- graphs or drawings. The photographs (some of which are kindly loaned by Dr. M. Allen Starr) were taken by Dr. Edward Leaming, who will also show transparencies of the same. Exhibition of Embryological Specimens. By Bashford Dean (Biological Department, Columbia College). 146. EMBRYONIC DEVELOPMENT OF THE GAR-PIKE (Lefidosteus osseus). A series of specimens of embryonic and larval stages obtained at Black Lake, St. Lawrence Co., N. Y. 32 This ganoid is a surviving representative of a race of pale- ozoic fishes, from which all living fishes (except the sharks and lung fishes) are descended. There are reasons on the side of paleontology for believing that this ganoidean group is derived from the line of the ancient sharks ; it is now of especial interest that the study of the earlier stages of the gar-pike which this valuable, and in fact unique material represents, tends to confirm this view. The eggs were fertilized artificially. 147. ADULT GAR-PIKE. 148. Zeigler models illustrating the EARLY DEVELOPMENT OF SHARKS, illustrated by three models. By Dr. William Stratford (College of the City of New York). 149. EGG-CASE OF THE PORT JACKSON SHARK, Cestracion galea- tus. From Southern Australia. 150. YOUNG OF THE DUCK-BILL, Oruithorhynchus platypus. From Queensland. By Henry E. Crampton (Biological Department, Columbia College). I51. EMBRYONIC DEVELOPMENT OF SNAILS (Physa and Limnea), showing that the right or left spiral coils of the shell are pre- determined by the first stages of cell division of the embryo. The adult shell of Pxysa is spirally wound to the ft. The adult shell of Lzmnea, on the other hand, is spirally wound to the right. It is interesting to observe that these pecul- iarities of the adult shells are foreshadowed in the earliest cleavage stages of the embryo. In P#ysa, for example, the first group of micromeres are budded off to the /ft; in Limnea, to the right. 152. EIGHT-CELL STAGE OF PHySA, showing the budding off to the /eft of the first group of micromeres. 153. EIGHT-CELL STAGE OF LIMNA, showing the budding off of the first group of micromeres to the right. 33 154. TWELVE-CELL STAGE OF PHyYSA, showing the budding off of the second group of micromeres to the right. 155. TWELVE-CELL STAGE OF LIMN4A, showing the budding off of second group of micromeres to the /eft. (N. B. The 1st and 2d groups of micromeres are always given off alternately to right or left, or vice versa.) Exhibit of Cytological Preparations. 156-160. CHROMATIN AND ARCHOPLASM DURING FERTILIZA- TION, or union of the male and female hereditary elements, in eggs of the sea-urchin. Four stages: Magnified 1000 diameters. Stained by “ iron hematoxylin method.” By Edm. B. Wilson (Biological Department, Columbia College). This exhibit shows that the dynamic cell-dividing Archoplasm substance is entirely derived from the male cell or spermatzoén. 156a@. EGG OF SEA-URCHIN BEFORE FERTILIZATION. Section of ovarian egg of sea-urchin (Toxopneustes) showing the nucleus or germinal vesicle (the large clear vesicle) and the nucleolus or germinal spot (the round black body within the vesicle). With accompanying photograph magnified 1000 diameters, 156d. FERTILIZATION OF SEA-URCHIN EGG. Egg of Toxo- pneustes, more highly magnified, showing the process of fertilization. The sperm nucleus (which has penetrated into the egg from the outside) appears as a small, black, conical body. Beside it is the star-shaped sperm-aster or archoplasm. The egg nucleus now appears as a small rounded vesicle. With accompanying photograph magnified 1000 diameters. 156c. EGG OF SEA URCHIN PREPARING TO DIVIDE INTO TWO CELLS. Egg of Toxopneustes preparing for first division or cleavage, showing the “amphiaster,” each half of which will pass into one of the daughter-cells. With photograph 1000 diameters. 156d. CELL DIVISION OR SEGMENTATION INTO 16 CELLS. Segmenting of egg of Toxopneustes (16 cell-stage) in section showing the cleavage-amphiasters. With photograph 1000 diameters. 34 161. A series of PHOTOGRAPHS (each enlarged 1000 diameters) of sections of other stages in the fertilization of same eggs. Pre- pared by Dr. Edward Leaming. 162. A series of LANTERN SLIDES from the same _ negatives. (Dr. Leaming.) 163-168. CHROMATIN OR HEREDITARY SUBSTANCE. Mode of equal distribution to all the cells of the body. From the lobster. Iron hematoxylin stain. By A. L. Kean (Biological Department, Columbia College). Demonstration of five successive stages in the process of in- direct division (karyokinesis), as seen in developing sperma- tic cells of the lobster. 163. RESTING STAGE. A resting cell showing the quiescent nucleus. The chromatin (stained black) is in unequal masses and distributed throughout the nucleus. The nuclear membrane is distinct. 164. SKEIN STAGE. The first phase of activity of the cell prepara- tory to division. The nucleus shows the formation of minute threads connecting the chromatin elements. This is the so- called “ skein stage.” 165. CHROMOSOME (CHROMATIN RODS) AND CENTROSOMES. A cell nucleus in full karyokinesis. The chromatin has become arranged into regular bodies (chromosomes) in a central spindle plate (equatorial plate). Fine fibres run outwards from the chromosomes and are focussed in centrosomes at the two foles of the spindles. The cell is now ready for division. The chromosomes will divide first and pass towards the spindle poles. 166. DIVISION OF CHROMOSOMES (CHROMATIN RODS)—SPINDLE STAGE. A cell showing the first stage of division. The chro- mosomes have divided and appear as two parallel bands in the centre of the spindle (see below 12). 167. DIVISION—MIDDLE STAGE. A cell showing the later stages of division. The spindle fibres are disappearing and the cell itself is beginning to divide. 168. DIVISION—FINAL STAGE. The final stage in cell division is 35 shown in the same field as above (No. 10). Two daughter-cells are seen lying side by side. The line of division is still per- ceptible. Gary N. Calkins (Biological Department, Columbia College). 169. DEMONSTRATION OF BUTSCHLI’S ARTIFICIAL PROTOPLASM. For some years Professor Butschli, of Heidelberg, has been studying the structure of living protoplasm. This he describes as a “‘Schaumplasma,” or froth protoplasm, and compares it to certain structures in soap-suds, oil emulsions, etc. Upon experi- ment he found that he could make an emulsion which, under high magnification, closely resembles in structure and in motion living protoplasm. This mixture consists of olive oil and potassium carbonate. Under proper conditions of temperature the emulsion shows streaming motion almost identical with the motion of Amoeba protoplasm. 170. A CILIATE INFUSORIAN (STYLONYCHIA) DURING NUCLEAR DIVISION. The preparation shows the interchange of micro- nuclei. This phenomenon was first observed by Stein for Sty- _ lonychia in 1861. Stylonychia has two micronuclei in different parts of the cell body, and when these divide the halves exchange places and thus the daughter-cells possess portions of each of the original micronuclei. Two of these halves are seen passing each other. 171. A FLAGELLATE INFUSORIAN WITH A DISTRIBUTED NU- CLEUS. This organism was formerly considered a _ non- nucleated form and was supposed to belong to the group called Monera by Haeckel. A similar distributed nucleus is found in many bacteria. 172. SUPPOSED YOLK FORMATION IN THE DEVELOPING EGG OF THE EARTHWORM (Lumoricus terrestris). This shows that the chromatic elements of the nucleus are the source of yolk sub- stance inthe egg. The large black mass (the yolk nucleus) out- side the nuclear membrane is derived from the chromatin. Minute fibres may be seen passing outwards from the yolk nu- cleus into the cell. These fibres break up into granules and become distributed throughout the cell, where they enlarge and form yolk substance. 36 DEPARTMENT OF PALZ ONTOLOGY. In charge of Prof. Henry Fairfield Osborn. Exhibit by J. J. Stevenson (University of the City of New York, Department of Geology). 173. EURYPTERUS. 174. By Gilbert van Ingen and W. D. Matthew (Department of Geology, Columbia College). The Middle Cambrian fossils exhibited are from Div. Ic and Id. The fauna isa trilobite fauna, with the genera: Paradoxides, Agnostus, Mucrodiscus, Conocoryphe, Ptychoparia. There are also Brachiopods: Protorthis, Acrothele, Lingulella, Linnarssonia ; Gastropods: Paleacmea,; Pteropods: Hyolithes,; Cystid plates: Locystites ; Sponge spicules: Protospongia. These fossils are from the lowest rocks of the geological scale and represent the earliest forms of life, which have been found in a fossil state, upon the earth. II]. LOWER AND MIDDLE CAMBRIAN FOSSILS, from St. John, N. B. The section of St. John basin is as here: Stages | Age Fauna d | Ordovician True Graptolites Div = HOE | ‘ : ¢ Rooted Graptolites—Dictyonema 0 | Upper Cambrian a Div yy IL. No fauna | Cue: | Middle Cambrian G Paradoxides Div. aRar Ie éb | Lower Cambrian Protolenus a | 37 The Lower Cambrian fossils exhibited are specimens of a trilobite, Protolenus from Div. I 4, the lowest faunal zone of the St. John series. A considerable fauna was collected from this zone. It is now being studied by Mr. G. F. Matthew and will form the subject of a future communica- tion to the Academy. III. GRAPTOLITES OF THE GENUS DICTYONEMA, from the Upper Cambrian of St. John, N. B. Ductyonema, a funnel- shaped graptolite colony attached to the ocean bottom by a stem and roots. The smaller of the two large slabs holds three perfect specimens. The beds of papyraceous shale of Div. III c. Navy Island, St. John Harbor, are replete with these organisms. A future communication to the Academy by Mr. G. F. Matthew will contain new information regarding these and associated fossils. (See Exhibit II.) Exhibited by T. G. White (Department of Geology, Columbia College). IV. ORDOVICIAN FOSSILS, from the shores of Lake Champlain. Suite of specimens from the Ordovician series of the Lake Champlain valley. Exhibited by Theodore G. White, Ph.B. The preliminary paper on the field-work in two townships, Essex and Willsboro, was read before the Academy last May, and published in the Proceedings, vol. xiii., pp. 214-231. The study is now being continued to embrace the stratigraphy and fossils of the Ordovician rocks throughout the Champlain val- ley and their extension into Canada. The Terranes here repre- sented are: Utica: Trilobites and Graptolites. TRENTON: An abundant representation of Brachiopods, Trilobites, Gasteropods, Cephalopods, Lamelli- branchs, Corals, Crinoids, and plant remains. CHAZY: Several distinct sets of beds. Several large Gas- teropods (Maclurea) and Cephalopods; also Brachio- pods and Hydroid-Corals (Solenopora). CALCIFEROUS: Ophileta uniangulata and plant remains. 38 - By Arthur Hollick (Department of Geology, Columbia College). 175. New Species of CRETACEOUS (Dakota Group) LEAVES, from the West. Two of the species (Lirzophyllum populoides Lesq. and Lzrzodendron alatum Newb.) have wing-like appen- dages to the petioles, first described in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Nov., 1894, which apparently represent the beginnings of what we now know as stipular appendages to the leaves. 176. New Species of CRETACEOUS (Laramie Group) LEAVES, mostly from Colorado, now being studied for description in connection with a forthcoming Bulletin of the U. S. Geol. Survey. 177. Specimens of CRETACEOUS LEAVES AND MOLLUSCS from Martha’s Vineyard, part collected personally, the remainder, recently sent for identification from the U. S. Geol. Survey. These latter represent the best portion of the material collected by Mr. David White, described in Am. Fourn. Sct., xxxix. (1890), 93-101, which first demonstrated conclusively the ex- istence of cretaceous strata at Gay Head. By Department of Vertebrate Paleontology, American Mu- seum of Natural History. Exhibit arranged by Henry F. Osborn, Curator, and J. L. Wortman, in charge of field expeditions. This department was established in 1891, and explorations have since been actively carried on inthe Rocky Mountain region, principally in New Mexico, Utah, Wyoming, and Dakota, result- ing in the discovery of a large number of rare types. 178. EVOLUTION OF THE HORNS OF THE TITANOTHERES. This represents four stages in the evolution of the horns in animals of a remarkable group which lived in North America during the Eocene and lower Miocene periods. Specimen @ shows the skull of Palwosyops, a middle Eocene ancestral form with- out horns; 4, skull of Telmatotherium validum, shows the very first suggestions of the appearance of a horn at the point indi- cated by the white arrow; c,skull of Telmatotherium cornutum (upper Eocene), shows the incipient horn clearly marked, also indicated by white arrow; d, skull of 77tanotherium coloradense (lower Miocene), shows short but well developed horns; and g, : | 39 skull of Zittanothertum bucco, exhibits the horns in their ex- treme forms of development, taking up the whole anterior por tion of the skull. 179. THE ANCESTRAL FOUR-TOED HORSE AND THE MODERN Horse. Placed side by side are skeletons of the diminutive Hyracotherium venticolum, or four-toed horse, 34 hands high, and the skeleton of a recent horse, Eguus caballus, 154 hands, be- longing to the modern trotting breed. The interval in time which separates these types is roughly estimated at two mil- lion years. The former skeletonis unique; it comes from near the base of the Eocene, and was found by Dr. Wortman, in 1883. It belongs to the famous Cope Collection which has been recently acquired by the American Museum of Natural History. This is publicly exhibited for the first time. 180. EVOLUTION OF THE SKULL OF THE HORSE. This series of skulls, probably the most complete which has ever been brought together, shows the changes which have transformed the di- minutive skull of Hyracothertum venticolum, or four-toed horse, into that of the living horse. 181. EVOLUTION OF THE FOOT OF THE HORSE. This series of feet _ is parallel to that of the skulls, and shows the changes through which the feet have passed from Hyracotherium venticolum to Equus caballus. These changes, which are fully explained upon the labels, consist mainly in the enlargement of the median toe and the reduction and disappearance of the lateral toes. 182. SKULLS OF AMERICAN FOSSIL RHINOCEROSES. The first remains of the Rhinoceroses in America were announced by Leidy in 1859. Since then the explorations of Cope have brought to light two new forms, and the expeditions of the American Museum have procured three new forms, representing probably the complete series of Lower Miocene Rhinoceroses. They are observed to increase gradually in size, in the compli- cation of the grinding teeth, and in the loss of the canine and lateral pair of incisors. The last member of the series is an ancestor of the two-horned Rhinoceroses which appear in the Middle Miocene. a. Aceratherium trigonodum. This is the 40 smallest and oldest type which has thus far been discovered. It exhibits a canine tooth. 06. Aceratherium mite. This isa slightly larger type, in which the canine has disappeared. c. Aceratherium occidentale. This is a considerably larger type, in which the lateral incisors are becoming reduced. Probably has four toes. ad. Aceratheritum tridactylum. ‘This is a form repre- sented by a complete skeleton in the Museum. Has only three toes. ¢. Aceratherium platycephalum. This is a flat-headed Rhinoceros of very large size, and remotely related to the other forms. /. Diceratherium dakotense. This is apparently an ancestor of the line of Diceratherium or Rhinoceroses with horns placed side by side. 183. RESTORATION OF THE SKELETON OF AGRIOCHOERUS. This is a very remarkable animal, the characters of which have only just been made known by the explorations of the American Museum and of Princeton College. The skull and dentition is like that of a herbivore, but the toes are clawed somewhat as in the carnivores. The restoration was under the direction of J. L. Wortman. DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY. In charge of Prof. J. J. Stevenson. 184. Collection of ORES AND COUNTRY ROCKS, from the Sudbury Nickel Mines, Ontario. Collected (1894) and exhibited by J. F. Kemp and T. G. White. The ore bodies at Sudbury con- sist of nickeliferous pyrrhotite and of chalcopyrite, in dark dio- rites of Huronian age. They are on the outer portions of the intrusions of igneous rock and near the walls, which are granite, quartzite, etc. The ores are roasted and smelted to mattes and afterwards refined. The raw ores, the roasted ores, and the mattes are all illustrated. The district is now the chief source of nickel. (Twenty specimens.) 185. Collection of ORES AND COUNTRY ROCK AND PHOTOGRAPHS, from the Gap Nickel Mine in Lancaster Co., Pa. Collected 4I (1894) and exhibited by J. F. Kemp. The geology and min- eralogy are practically the same as at Sudbury, Ont. The Gap Mine began to produce nickel about 1862, and for twenty years was the principal nickel mine of the world. (Ten specimens.) 186. Collection of ORES, COUNTRY ROCK, AND PHOTOGRAPHS, from the Mesabi Iron Range, of Minnesota. Collected (1894) and exhibited by J. F. Kemp and T. G. White. The Mesabi ores have almost revolutionized iron mining on Lake Superior. Enormous bodies of soft but rich ore lie under a cap of gravel and in cherts and quartzites. The photographs exhibit the methods of mining with steam shovels. (Twenty-five specimens.) 187. Collection of PRE-CAMBRIAN VOLCANIC ROCKS, from various points on the Atlantic seaboard, including St. John, N.B., Mt. Desert and Mt. Kineo, Me., Marblehead and Quincy, Mass., the South Mountain, Pa., and Southwest Virginia. Collected and exhibited by W. D. Matthew, T. G. White, and J. F. Kemp. It is now known that just before the opening of the Cambrian period, volcanic action was widespread along the Atlantic sea- board. The old acidic lavas, tuffs, etc., have been usually called felsites, but they have been found to possess, in greater or less perfection, all the characteristic structures of recent lavas. The New Brunswick and Mt. Desert collections are to be described before the Academy. (Thirty specimens.) 188. SLABS OF FOSSILIFEROUS SHALE, SHOWING THE EFFECTS OF LATERAL COMPRESSION. Upper Devonian, Ithaca, N. Y. Collected and exhibited by Gilbert van Ingen. The slabs are marked with north and south lines. The force which distorted the fossils was applied in an approximately north and south direction, which is perpendicular to the axes of the anticlinal and synclinal folds that cross the lake region of Central New York. The evidence suggests that the distortion of the fossils and the formation of the folds were produced by the same force acting at the same time. Exhibited by Gilbert van Ingen. 42 189. Specimens of the GRANITE INTRUSION at Harrison, West- chester Co., N. Y. Collected and exhibited by Heinrich Ries. A great intrusion of granite has penetrated the mica schists and has had a gneissoid structure induced in it by dynamic meta- morphism. (Described before the Academy Feb. 18, 1895.) 190. Series of TOPOGRAPHICAL MAPS of portions of New York State so far as yet issued by the State Engineer, in co-operation with the U. S. Geological Survey. Exhibited by J. F. Kemp. 191. Specimens of GABBRO AND RELATED ROCKS, from an outly- ing area of the Cortland series, near Croton Falls, on the Har- lem R. R., N. Y. Collected and exhibited by Heinrich Ries, To be described before the Academy in the spring of 1895. The eastern limits of the igneous area, best developed in the town of Cortland, near Peekskill, have never been well worked out. This discovery provesthem to extend in outliers over into the Harlem valley. 192. Specimens of PRE-CAMBRIAN ROCKS, from Blue Wing, Gran- ville Co., North Carolina, showing the copper ore and associ- ated rocks of that region. Collected and exhibited by J. J. Stevenson. (Twenty-seven specimens.) These slates are termed Huronian by Prof. W. C. Kerr, and lie between two areas of Laurentian. Within Granville and Person counties they show many veins carrying ores of cop- per, but the concentration is rarely sufficient to make mining profitable. The ores are chalcocite, bornite, chrysocolla, and occasionally malachite and azurite. 193. Specimens of LAvAs from the Sandwich Islands. Collected by C. H. Hitchcock and exhibited by J. J. Stevenson. (Fourteen specimens.) 194. A series showing the occurrence of REDONDITE and its asso- ciated rocks. Collected by C. H. Hitchcock and exhibited by J. J. Stevenson. (Ten specimens.) Redonda is a volcanic island belonging to the Leeward group, 43 and is but one mile long by one fourth of a mile wide. It was covered with guano, which has been removed. A phosphatic mineral, Redondite, has been discovered in the rocks, filling crevices and encrusting fragments. Some of the “ bunches”’ measure forty feet in each direction. The origin is somewhat uncertain, but the material may have been derived from the leaching of the guano. The lava is of Quaterary age and volcanic activity is still shown in several of the Leeward islands. DEPARTMENT OF MINERALOGY. In charge of L. P. Gratacap. 195. Suite of PYROXENES from New York State. These minerals are found in the igneous rocks and in the contact zones be- tween these rocks and the limestones into which they have been intruded. The types shown are Augites from Warwick, Mine- ville, Keene, Diana, and Monroe; Diopsides from Russell, De Kalk, Tilly Foster, Pt. Henry, Pitcairn, Cascadeville, and Sing Sing. To be described in vol. xiv., Trans. NV. Y. Ac. Sct. 196. ARTIFICIAL ZINC OXIDE, massive and crystals. This forms on roof of furnaces used in manufacture of zinc oxide. The smaller crystals show good faces. Described in Amer. Four. Scz., Sept., 1894. 197. TOURMALINE from Tilly Foster iron mines, Putnam Co., N.Y. 198. APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING SECTIONS OF ANY DESIRED ORIENTATION. By means of this apparatus it is possible to obtain on first trial a section showing the interference figure. 199. Group of SLAG-CRYSTALS from iron furnaces at Cornwall, Pa. Nos. 195-199 exhibited by Heinrich Ries. 200. ROSOLITE. A new ornamental stone composed of Rose Garnet (Grossularite), Vesuvianite (yellow), and Wollastonite (white), Silicates of Aluminaand Lime. It occurs in a volcanic region, and has been produced by the metamorphosis of sedi- mentary rocks. Its industrial use is at once apparent. Found at Xalostoc, Mexico, which is the only deposit in the world. 44 201. PHOTOGRAPHS of Rosolite Quarry, Xalostoc, Mexico. 202. GADOLINITE (basic ortho silicate of yttrium, beryllium, and iron). The largest crystal of this rare mineral ever found. Dimensions, II in.x 6 in. Weight, 184 lbs. Found at Bar- ringer Hill, Llano Co., Texas. 203. YTTRIALITE (silicate of yttrium and thorium). Barringer Hill, Llano Co., Texas. 204. THOROGUMMITE (a hydrous silico-uranate of thorium). Bar- ringer Hill, Llano Co., Texas. 205. NIVENITE (a hydrated uranium-thorium-yttrium-lead uran- ate). Barringer Hill, Llano Co., Texas. Note.—From the three last named minerals thoria is ex- tracted, the principal element in the manufacture of the Welsbach lamp. Nos. 200-205 exhibited by William Niven. 206. QUARTZ CRYSTAL showing the tetartohedral form of the pyramid of the second order, the trigonal pyramid. Crystal Peak, Colorado. 207. QUARTZ CRYSTAL. Example of fine etching. Lincoln Co., North Carolina. 208. QUARTZ CRYSTAL. Amethystine, highly modified. From a new locality in Lincoln Co., North Carolina. 209. QUARTZ CRYSTAL. Of cubic aspect; the plus rhombohedron predominating and the minus rhombohedron and the prism being greatly reduced. San Miguel Co., New Mexico. 210. RHODOCHROASITE AND RHODOCHROSITE GEM. Clima, Colorado. 211. MICROCLINE. A group of nine basal twins. Crystal Peak, Colorado. Nos. 206-211 exhibited by Lazard Cohn. 212. OPAL. Two examples of opal infiltrations in a jasperoid iron- stone. Baricoo, New Zealand. These opal films occur ina concretionary ferruginous sandstone or jasper, and have been formed by the deposition of opal silica through the crevices of the enclosing ironstone. 45 213. OPAL. A curious example from the same locality (Baricoo, New Zealand), in which the reticulating cracks in the ironstone are filled in with opal. 214. RUTILATED QUARTZ (Sagenite). The crystals of rutile (clove-brown) penetrating transparent quartz are unusually dense. The quartz is awater-worn boulder. Madagascar. 215. RUTILATED QUARTZ (Sagenite). In this example the rutile crystals are cinnamon-colored. Madagascar. 216. DIAMOND CRYSTAL. Elongated hexoctahedron; brilliant yellow. From near King’s Mt., North Carolina. Weight, 3 karat. 217. DIAMOND CRYSTAL. Curved and elongated hexoctahedron ; greenish-yellow. From the glacial drift at Waukesha, Wiscon- sin. Weight, 1524 karat. The largest American diamond known. 218. DIAMOND CRYSTAL. Hexoctahedron; white. From glacial drift at Oregon, Dane Co., Wisconsin. Weight, 3? karat. 219. Model of DIAMOND CRYSTAL. Original found, in 1894, at Drogiac, Michigan, in glacial drift. Weight, 103 karat. Note.—These three diamonds were unmistakably found in glacial drift deposits, and hence were evidently derived from some deposits, veins, or pockets situated in the north. 220. EMERALD. Stony Point, Alexander Co., North Carolina. This remarkable crystal is one of the largest emerald crystals in the world. (See Gems of North America). Nos. 212-220 are exhibited by George F. Kunz. ~ 221. A series of BABYLONIAN AND ASSYRIAN CYLINDERS, SEALS, etc., illustrating mineralogical material used for these purposes in 4000 to 300 B.C. From the collection of Tiffany & Co. and that of the Rev. W. Hayes Ward. 222. Set of one hundred and seventy sections illustrating the OP- TICAL PROPERTIES OF MINERALS and their usual appearance in rocks. This set has been prepared for use in the new under- graduate course in Optical Mineralogy. 223. HAND SECTION CUTTER, for cutting small crystals at definite angles. 46 Rare or New Species. 224. KALLILITE, Ni Bi S, from Siegen, Prussia. 225. VESZELYITE, from Banat, Hungary. Phospho-arsenate of copper and zinc. 226. SELLARTE, Mg F,. Gebroulaz, Savoy. 227. VOLTAITE, an iron sulphate from Schméllnitz, Hungary. 228. GLAUCOPHANE, Syra, Greece. Original locality. 229. NICKEL ALUMINA SILICATE. Buncombe Co., N. C. Specimens from New Localities. 230. VARISCITE, Al Po, +2H,O, from Utah County, Utah, in nodules. 231. TETRADYMITE, Bi,Te,, from Helena, Montana. 232. BISMUTHMITE, Bi,S,, from Jefferson Co., Montana. 233. HEMATITE CRYSTALS. Zacatecas, Mexico. 234. MENACCANITE CRYSTAL. North Garden, Virginia. 235. CUPRITE RHOMBIC DODECAHEDRON, from Anaconda Mine. 236. MONAZITE CRYSTAL, from South Lyme, Conn. 237. ATACAMITE CRYSTALS, from Globe Mines, Arizona. 238. MassiIcoT, PbO, from near Tombstone, Arizona. 239. MINIUM, Pb,O,, from Tombstone, Arizona. 240. BROCHANTITE, from Zacatecas, Mexico. 241. ALLANITE, large specimen, Mineville, N. Y. Other Specimens. 242. Casts of CAVITIES in Quartz of Upper Montclair, N. J. The original mineral is unknown. 243. CHALCOPYRITE in tabular crystals, possibly pseudomorphic after Marcasite, from Bruce Mine, Lake Huron. 244. SERPENTINE “Cubic Pseudomorph, after an unknown mineral.”’ 47 245. AZURITE CRYSTALS. Bisbee, Arizona. 246. FERRIFEROUS CUPRITE. Bisbee, Arizona. 247. PHANTOM QUARTZ. Japan. 248. ZINCITE PYRAMID 3, from Franklin, N. J. 249. TOURMALINE TWIN, from Franklin, N. J. 250. VESUVIANITE CRYSTALS embedded in Garnet, from Pied- mont. Exhibit of W. D. Matthews. 251. CARBORUNDUM SUITE consisting of (a2) Carborundum as it comes from the furnace, blue variety. (4) Same, green variety. (c) Amorphous variety, formed at lower temperature. (d) Graphite, a by-product. (¢) Grinding wheel of Carborundum. (7) Whetstone of Carborundum. Nos. 222-251 exhibited by Mineralogical Department, School of Mines, Columbia College, through Alfred J. Moses. 252. LARGE PHANTOM CALCITE. Joplin, Mo. 253. PHANTOM CALCITES, from Burnet, Texas. 254. QUARTZ GROUP, from Butte, Mont. 255. FOSSIL SPECULAR IRON ORE, from Cherry Valley, Mo. 256. CLUSTER OF SPHALERITE CRYSTALS, with implanted crystals of Chalcopyrite. Joplin, Mo. 257. ONE LARGE HANKSITE. Borax Lake, Cal. Nos. 252-257 exhibited by Frank L. Nason: 258. GROUP OF HALITE CRYSTALS. Borax Lake, Cal. 259. THENARDITE CRYSTALS. Borax Lake, Cal. Nos. 258, 259 exhibited by Department of Geology, Ameri- can Museum Natural History. 260. NATIVE LEAD. Langban, Sweden. 261. SULPHUR. Cianciana, Sicily. 262. MALYBDENITE. Aldfield township, Pontiac Co., Quebec, Canada. 48 A suite illustrating crystallization and occurrence. 263. CALOMEL. Avala, Servia. Crystallized. 264. PYRITE. Miners’ Delight Mine, Tooele Co., Utah. Cubes in Kaolin. 265. CUPRITE. Copper Queen Mine, Bisbee, Arizona. The finest specimen found in America. 266. MARTITE. Twin Peaks, Millard Co., Utah. 267. DIASPORE. Chester, Mass. Crystallized.- 268. QUARTZ. Hot Springs, Ark. A suite selected from the famous Lawrence Collection; showing phantoms formed by included minerals, penetrations, rare forms, etc. 269. RHODONITE var. PAISBERGITE. Paigsberg, Sweden. 270. SPODUMENE. Huntington, Mass. Large crystal. 271. BERYL var. EMERALD. Crab Tree, Mt. Mitchell Co., N.C. A new locality. 272. EPIDOTE, gray. Huntington, Mass. 273. TOURMALINE, brown. Hamburg, N. J. 274. TOPAZ, in gaugue. Juab Co., Utah. A recent find. 275. LEADHILLITE. Beercellar Mine, Granby, Mo. Recently obtained at this localty by Dr. Foote. 276. CALCITE. Granby, Mo. Amethystine with Marcasite “ phantom.” 277. CALCITE var. MEXICAN ONYX. Pueblo, Mexico. Brec- ciated. 278. SMITHSONITE. Kelly, N. M. New locality. 279. BASTASITE on TYSONITE. Manitou Springs, Col. 280. PHOSGENITE. Monte Poni, Sardinia. 281. REMINGTONTE. Santa Rosalia Mines, Boleo, Mexican California. 282. AZONITE on WAD. Copper Queen Mine, Bisbee, Arizona. 283. CASWELLTE. Franklin, N. J. 49 284. COLEMANITE. Borax Lake, San Bernardino Co., Cal. Rare new species from the Santa Rosalia Mines, Boleo, Mexican California. 285. BOLEITE, BOUGLISITE, CUMENGEITE, and SPHAROCO- BALTITE. A full suite illustrating varied habits of crystal- lization and associated minerals. Nos. 260-285 exhibited by Dr. A. E. Foote, Philadelphia, Pa. DEPARTMENT OF BACTERIOLOGY. In charge of Dr. T. M. Cheesman. (Bacterial Laboratory, Department of Pathology, College of Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia College.) Some of the characters of the bacteria, illustrated by their growth on nutrient gelatin (a), nutrient agar (b), nutrient broth {c), and on potato (d). Specimens preserved in formalin. 286. BACILLUS SUBTILIS (hay bacillus) a b ¢ d 287. " MESENTERICUS VULGATUS) a b c d (potato bacillus). 288. VIBRIO PROTEUS a b c 289. MICROCOCCUS FRIERE a3) Bigg re d (once claimed as the cause of yellow fever). 290. BACILLUS PRODIGIOSUS a b c d (This bacillus was the cause of the so-called miracle of the ‘‘ bloody host,” from its growth upon the wafer or altar-bread after its exposure in the church, during the consecration of the host.) 291. : MINIACEUS a b c d (found in water). 292. a MAGENTA a b c d (found in water). 293. 204. 295. 206. 207. 208. 299. 300. 301. 302. 303. 304. 305. 306. 307. 50 BACILLUS RUBRUM—PLYMOUTH— a b c d (found in water). 4 FLUORESCENS LIQUEFACIENS a b Cc d (very abundant in many waters). « FLUORESCENS a b Cc d (abundant in water). MICROCOCCUS AGILIS a b Cc (found in water, one of the few motile cocci). SARCINA AURANTICA a b c d (abundant in the air). x LUTEA x b c d (abundant in the air). SPIRILLUM RUBRUM a b c STAPHYLOCOCCUS PYOGENES AUREUS a b c d (pyogenic). rs EPIDERMIDIS ALBUS a b c d (abundant in the skin, sometimes pyogenic). STREPTOCOCCUS PYOGENES a b c (pyogenic). ACTINOMYCES a b c (cause of the disease known as actinomycosis, or “‘ lumpy jaw ” in cattle). BACILLUS PYOCYANEUS @ a b c d (cause of the occasional green color of pus). ts TUBERCULOSIS glycerin agar culture. (cause of tuberculosis in man and animals) a ANTHRACIS a b c d (cause of a disease variously known, according to the method of infection, etc., as anthrax, malignant pustule, wool-sorter’s disease, and splenic fever. This was the first bacterium that was proven to have a causative relation to disease in man or animals). “ MALLEI (morve) a b c d (cause of glanders in man and animals). SI 308. BACILLUS TETANI b —grows only in an atmosphere deprived of oxygen ; chemical absorption of the oxygen by pyrogallol, Buchner’s method (cause of tetanus or “lock-jaw’’). 300. ze CEDEMATIS MALIGNI a—grows only in an atmosphere deprived of oxygen; mechanical exclusion of air by a layer of oil (cause of malignant cedema). 310. 6s DIPHTHERL® a b c (cause of diphtheria). 311. DIPHTHERIA TOXIN, resulting from the growth of the B. diphtheriz in broth. Used to inoculate horses and other ani- mals to induce artificial immunity. 312. DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIN; serum from the blood of a horse, rendered highly immune by repeated inoculations with the diph- theria toxins. Used hypodermically in the treatment of diph- theria as a curative agent, and also as a protective agent to those who have been exposed to infection. 313. DIFFERENTIAL CULTURES OF TWO BACILLI, one patho- genic, the other not pathogenic under normal conditions, which are frequently associated and which in many respects resemble one another so closely that they may be confounded. Bacillus typhosus Bacterium coli commune (cause of typhoid fever) (abundant in the large intestine) Gelatin inconstant differences Agar do do Broth usually no pellicle formed. usually pellicle is formed Lactose—litmus agar turnsblue,ornochangeincolor change in color, turns red Fermentation test no gas formed gas is formed Potato spreading, invisible growth abundant yellow growth Milk not coagulated is coagulated Nitrates not reduced are reduced Indol not formed is formed 314. CHART, showing the determinations used for identification of bacteria. All the preparations in this department are exhibited by Dr. T. M. Cheesman. 52 DEPARTMENT OF PHOTOGRAPHY. In charge of Dr. Edward Leaming. 315. a2) LARGE PHOTOMICROGRAPHIC APPARATUS of Messrs. Carl Zeiss of Jena with appurtenances. 6) FRAMES containing some recent results in photographic process work, from European firms. From Chemical Museum, School of Mines, Columbia College. 316. a) VERTICAL PHOTOMICROGRAPHIC APPARATUS of E. Leitz, Wetzlar. 6) PROJECTION APPARATUS, after Edinger, as arranged for photography by E. Leitz, Wetzlar. From Wm. Kraft, New York. 317. STEREO-PHOTOCHROMOSCOPE—“ An instrument which, with almost equal simplicity, does for color what the phonograph does for sound.” Frederic E. Ives, Philadelphia. 318. KINETOSCOPE, after Edison. From Wallace & Alexander, New York. 319. a) DOUBLE LANTERN, with dissolving keys, pressure gauge, and automatic pressure regulator. 6) DOUBLE HIGH-PRESSURE DISSOLVING KEY. c) ELECTRIC ARC PROJECTING LAMP AND LANTERN, with variable resistance coil and frame. Stand for the same. From Chas. Beseler, New York. 320. LANTERNS AND APPARATUS, exhibited by Messrs. J. B. Colt & Co. a) LANTERNS WITH OIL LIGHT. 6) TRIPLE OXY-HYDROGEN STEREOPTICON. ¢c) ELECTRIC DOUBLE STEREOPTICON. dad) ELECTRIC LANTERN AND MICROSCOPE, for Photo- micrography. e) HIGH-PRESSURE DISSOLVING KEY. 321. a) HAND PRESS, in operation, showing method of printing photogravure plates. 6) FRAMES, containing photogravures, photogelatines, plain and in colors. From Photogravure Co., New York. 53 322. REPRODUCTIONS from paintings and engravings, and photo- graphs from life, printed in carbon on porcelain, Japanese tissue paper, Whatman’s drawing paper, and other surfaces. From James L. Breese, The Carbon Studio, New York. a) ARTOTYPE (gelatine) reproductions in monochrome and colors, of paintings, book bindings, rugs, and ancient books and documents. 6) FAC-SIMILE DAGUERROTYPE of the first photograph ever taken of the living human face. The original daguerro- type was taken about 1840 by Dr. Draper in New York, the subject being the Doctor’s sister; it is now in the possession of Herschelin England. This frame also con- tains a gelatine print copy of the original daguerrotype, and a recent photograph, silver print, of the same lady. The daguerrotype and gelatine print were made when the original was on exhibition at the Columbian Expo- sition. From Edw. Bierstadt, New York. 323. EXAMPLES OF HALFTONE WORK, plain and in colors and in halftone photo-lithography. From Photochrome Co., New York. 324. A special adaptation of an ordinary TELESCOPE LENS FOR PHOTOGRAPHY, with a diagram showing the relative positions of the flint and crown glasses for either visual or photographic work. Exhibited by Henry S. Curtis. 325. A series of PHOTOGRAPHS illustrating the tele-photic effects obtained with the above lens, compared with pictures of the same scenes taken with an ordinary photographic lens of about five inches focus. Exhibited by Henry S. Curtis. 326. Impressions of ANTIQUE GEMS AND SEALS in a special wax compounded by Prof. O. N. Rood; together with enlarged photographs of the same by Prof. W. Hallock. 327.2) LANTERN SLIDES, showing recent results in cytopho- tography, from preparations by Prof. Edmund Wilson, Ph.D., Dep. Biol. Col. Coll. % 1000 diameters, and reduced. 54 6) LANTERN SLIDES, showing recent results in the pho- tomicrography of the central nervous system, from prepa- rations after methods of Golgi, Cajal, Strong, and others, by O.S. Strong, Biol. Lab. Col. Coll. X 195 diameters, and reduced. c) LANTERN SLIDES, showing recent results in photomicrog- raphy of Bacteria, from preparations by T. M. Chees- man, M.D., Bacteriological Lab. Coll. Phys. and Sur. 1000 diameters. From Photographic Lab. Dept. Path., Coll. Phys. and Sur. Col. Coll., New York. 328. LANTERN SLIDES of flowers, colored by hand. From C. Van Brunt. 329. A TRIPLE LANTERN IN OPERATION, showing the projection in three primary colors of lantern slides so combined as to produce the effect on the screen of a picture in natural colors. R. D. Gray, New York. 330. DEVICE to facilitate focusing with the fine adjustment of the microscope in photomicrography. From F. D. Skeel, M.D., New York. 331. PANORAMIC CAMERA. From Scovill & Adams, New York. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIBNCES. | The Meetings of the Academy are held in Hamilton Hall, Columbia College, 49th Street and Madison Avenue, on Monday evening of each week, beginning at 8 o’clock, from October to June, and are open to the public. On the evenings devoted to the Public Lecture Course, admission is by tickets, which are free, on previous application. = _ % OFFICERS OF THE AO 1895—1896. President: J. K. REES. ist Vice-President: 2a Vice-President: HENRY F. OSBORN. J. J. STEVENSON. Corresponding Secretary: Recording Secretary: D. S. MARTIN. JAMES F. KEMP. Treasurer: Librarian: CHARLES F. COX. ARTHUR HOLLICK. Councilors: J. A. ALLEN, N. L. BRITTON, BASHFORD DEAN, WILLIAM HALLOCK, WILLIAM STRATFORD, R. 8S. WOODWARD. Curators: : % H. G. DYAR, G. F. KUNZ, L. H. LAUDY, HEINRICH RIES, W. D. SCHOONMAKER. Finance Committee: HENRY DUDLEY, J. H. HINTON, CORNELIUS VAN BRUNT. PRICE OF THE TRANSACTIONS. To residents of the City of New York, not members of the Academy, $5.00 per annum. To non-residents, $3.00 per annum. To corresponding members, $1.00 per annum. ‘To resident and honorary members, they are free. sao 100 aoe .: